FM 3-04.

140(FM 1-140)

HELICOPTER GUNNERY

JULY 2003
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution authorized to DOD and DOD contractors only
to protect technical or operational data information. Other requests must be referred to
Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, and Simulation, United States Army Aviation
Center, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000.

DESTRUCTION: Follow the procedures in AR 380-5, Chapter 6, Section V.

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

 *FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140)

Field Manual HEADQUARTERS

No. 3-04.140 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, DC, 14 July 2003

Helicopter Gunnery

Contents
Page

PREFACE .................................................................................................................. vi
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1-1
Training Strategy ......................................................................................................1-1
Gunnery Standards ..................................................................................................1-2
Gunnery Tables ........................................................................................................1-2
Readiness Reporting................................................................................................1-3
Master Gunner Program ..........................................................................................1-5
Weapons Training Standards...................................................................................1-5
Chapter 2 HELICOPTER GUNNERY TRAINING STRATEGY ................................................2-0
Section I – Training Assessment and Planning ..................................................2-0
The Commander’s Assessment ...............................................................................2-0
Planning the Training................................................................................................2-2
Effective Assessment and Training ..........................................................................2-2

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution authorized to DOD and DOD contractors only to protect technical or
operational data information. This determination was made on 29 March 2002. Other requests must be referred
to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, and Simulation, United States Army Aviation Center, Fort Rucker,
Alabama 36362-5000.

Destruction Notice: Follow the procedures in AR 380-5, Chapter 6, Section V.

*This publication supersedes FM 1-140, 29 March 1996.

i
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) _____________________________________________________________________

Page

Section II – Pregunnery Training ..........................................................................2-3

Subject Areas and Techniques ...............................................................................2-3
Table V ....................................................................................................................2-6
Section III – Helicopter Gunnery Range Training................................................2-6
Qualification Gates ...................................................................................................2-6
Individual Gates........................................................................................................2-7
Crew Simulator/Ground Training Gates Simulator/Ground Training Gates.............2-9
Crew Live-Fire Gates ...............................................................................................2-9
Engagement Scoring System.................................................................................2-13
Scoring Criteria.......................................................................................................2-13
Engagement Scoring ..............................................................................................2-14
Scoring Moving Engagements ...............................................................................2-14
Scoring Hellfire Engagements With the VRS and AVTR .......................................2-16
Remote Hellfire Engagement Scoring ....................................................................2-17
Section IV – Posttraining Assessment...............................................................2-17
After-Action Review ................................................................................................2-17
Required Documents..............................................................................................2-18
Range Score Sheet ................................................................................................2-18
Chapter 3 RANGES FOR HELICOPTER GUNNERY TRAINING ...........................................3-1
Section I – Range Requirements ..........................................................................3-1
Range Considerations..............................................................................................3-1
Realistic Training ......................................................................................................3-2
Operational Requirements .......................................................................................3-3
Range Scheduling ....................................................................................................3-3
Section II – Personnel Responsibilities and Duties............................................3-8
Officer in Charge ......................................................................................................3-8
Range Safety Officer ................................................................................................3-9
Master Gunner..........................................................................................................3-9
Laser Range Safety Officer or NCO.......................................................................3-10
Radio Operators .....................................................................................................3-10
Class-III/-V OIC or NCOIC .....................................................................................3-10
Section III – Helicopter Gunnery Range Safety .................................................3-11
Ground Safety ........................................................................................................3-11
Firing Safety ...........................................................................................................3-12
Aircraft Emergency Plan.........................................................................................3-15
Section IV – Range Layout ..................................................................................3-15
Considerations........................................................................................................3-15

ii
_______________________________________________________________________ Helicopter Gunnery

Multipurpose Range Complex ................................................................................3-15

Aerial Weapons Scoring System............................................................................3-15
Attack Helicopter Gunnery Range..........................................................................3-17
Section V – Successful Training.........................................................................3-19
Brief Key Personnel................................................................................................3-19
Start on Time ..........................................................................................................3-19
Keep a Log .............................................................................................................3-19
Change Guards ......................................................................................................3-19
Police Continuously ................................................................................................3-19
Brief Visitors ...........................................................................................................3-20
Plan Aircraft Evacuation .........................................................................................3-20
Chapter 4 BALLISTICS ............................................................................................................4-1
Interior Ballistics .......................................................................................................4-1
Exterior Ballistics .....................................................................................................4-2
Aerial Ballistics .........................................................................................................4-3
Terminal Ballistics.....................................................................................................4-9
Dispersion...............................................................................................................4-12
Apache-Specific Ballistic Considerations ...............................................................4-13
Chapter 5 MUNITIONS FOR HELICOPTER WEAPON SYSTEMS.........................................5-1
Section I – Linked Ammunition.............................................................................5-1
Types of 7.62-Millimeter Ammunition for the M60/M60D/M240 Machine Gun ........5-1
Types of .50-Caliber Ammunition for the OH-58D Kiowa Warrior............................5-3
Types of 30-Millimeter Ammunition for the AH-64 M230 Cannon............................5-6
Section II – Rockets................................................................................................5-8
2.75-Inch Rockets.....................................................................................................5-8
Rocket Warheads (Tactical and Training)..............................................................5-10
Fuzes ......................................................................................................................5-14
Section III – Missiles.............................................................................................5-19
Missile Configurations ............................................................................................5-19
Semiactive Laser Hellfire Missile Performance Capabilities ..................................5-23
Semiactive Laser Hellfire Missile Performance Detractors ....................................5-35
Radar Frequency Hellfire Missile Characteristics and Performance .....................5-40
Air-to-Air Stinger .....................................................................................................5-56
Chapter 6 CREW WARFIGHTING
Section I – Fratricide Prevention ..........................................................................6-0
Situational Awareness Detractors ............................................................................6-0
Contributing Factors .................................................................................................6-1
Effects of Fratricide...................................................................................................6-2

iii
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) _____________________________________________________________________

Fratricide Prevention Measures ...............................................................................6-3

Section II – Target Acquisition..............................................................................6-6
Acquisition Defined...................................................................................................6-6
Target-Acquisition Process ......................................................................................6-7
Crew Search.............................................................................................................6-7
Aerial Search Techniques ........................................................................................6-7
Techniques for Crew Search....................................................................................6-9
Target Detection .....................................................................................................6-10
Target-Detection Challenges..................................................................................6-11
Target Location.......................................................................................................6-11
Target Classification ...............................................................................................6-12
Confirmation ...........................................................................................................6-13
Section III – Range Determination ......................................................................6-13
Methods of Range Determination...........................................................................6-13
Aircraft Mil Values...................................................................................................6-17
Laser-off Operations...............................................................................................6-23
Section IV – Crew Communication.....................................................................6-23
Standardizing Crew Communication......................................................................6-23
Fire Commands ......................................................................................................6-25
Lines of Communications .......................................................................................6-26
Phraseology............................................................................................................6-27
Remote Hellfire Missile Firing.................................................................................6-30
Remote Call for Fire ...............................................................................................6-30
Call-for-Fire Description .........................................................................................6-30
Section V – Checks on Training..........................................................................6-35
Precombat Checks .................................................................................................6-35
Before-Mission Receipt Checks .............................................................................6-35
Upon-Mission Receipt Checks ...............................................................................6-35
Preparing for the Mission .......................................................................................6-36
Final Checks...........................................................................................................6-36
Crew Checks ..........................................................................................................6-37
Run-up Checks.......................................................................................................6-37
Communications Check .........................................................................................6-37
Practicing................................................................................................................6-38
Chapter 7 ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUES ...............................................................................7-1
Section I – Modes and Types of Fire ....................................................................7-1
Types of Fire.............................................................................................................7-1
Modes of Fire............................................................................................................7-1

iv
_______________________________________________________________________ Helicopter Gunnery

Section II – Terminology and Information on Weapons .....................................7-2

Effective Range ........................................................................................................7-2
2-75-Inch Rockets ....................................................................................................7-2
Boresighting and Dynamic Harmonization ...............................................................7-5
Section III – Crew Techniques...............................................................................7-6
Firing Techniques .....................................................................................................7-6
Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Modes of Fire ...................................7-8
Section IV – Air Combat Weaponeering.............................................................7-11
Weapon Systems Engagement Ranges ................................................................7-11
Target-Engagement Factors ..................................................................................7-13
Appendix A HELICOPTER DOOR GUNNERY .......................................................................... A-1
Appendix B HELICOPTER GUNNERY TABLES....................................................................... B-1
Appendix C ENGAGEMENT TIME POINT CALCULATION SHEETS ...................................... C-1
Appendix D EXAMPLE OF A DIGITAL GUNNERY PROGRAM ............................................... D-0
Appendix E RISK MANAGEMENT............................................................................................. E-0
GLOSSARY ................................................................................................ Glossary-1
BIBLIOGRAPHY ....................................................................................Bibliography-1
INDEX................................................................................................................Index-1

v
 Preface
This manual describes the helicopter gunnery training and qualification portion
of Army aviation’s Aircrew Training Program. It provides tactics, techniques, and
procedures for crews, teams, platoons, companies, and battalions to engage and
efficiently destroy the enemy in combat.
This manual is written for commanders, staffs, aircrews, and instructors. Use it
for coordinating, planning, and executing helicopter gunnery training. Through
the Aircrew Training Program, this field manual links the training and
qualifications of helicopter weapons systems to the doctrinal employment of
Army aviation. In addition, this manual outlines a standardized, progressive
program that trains weapon system proficiency through the conduct of helicopter
gunnery tables.
Trainers for attack battalions and cavalry squadrons should keep the excerpt
below, taken from the Center for Army Lessons Learned website at
http://call.army.mil, in mind during the planning, organizing, and executing all
training, not just training that focuses on gunnery. These observations are
somewhat timeless; that is, they could have been observed 10 years ago or one
perhaps could see the same things happen next week:
• Do not let these trends continue unchecked in the unit.
• Make the unit more combat ready.
• Focus on helicopter gunnery throughout the year not just during the
scheduled time at the range.
The figure shows trends noted at the National Training Center regarding
boresighting and gunnery skills. The observation is that attack helicopter
battalions and cavalry squadrons (air cavalry troops continue to display eroding
helicopter gunnery skills during both force-on-force (MILES/AGES) and live-fire
operations.

1. During recent rotations, crews employing the Hellfire point target weapon system have
probability-of-hit statistics of less than 60 percent. This Ph is based on actual gun-camera
footage of the missile engagements. Some causes are—
• Improper out-front boresight procedures (AH-64 only).
• Inadequate knowledge of system performance.
• Improper engagement techniques.
2. Area weapons systems (30-millimeter/50-caliber and 2.75-inch rockets) are less
accurate because adjustments when crews are firing more than one volley are made
improperly or not at all.
3. Crews seldom have standard cockpit procedures for employment of the chosen weapon
system. This results in poor switchboard dexterity, slow engagement times, and poor crew
coordination.

Discussion on Boresighting and Gunnery Skills

vi
 Helicopter Gunnery

4. Unit difficulties with the following tasks indicate a lack of home-station gunnery training.
Inadequate system knowledge—
• Not able to recognize and overcome laser detractors (such as backscatter, overspill,
and spot jitter).
• Not able to select appropriate tracking techniques to ensure high Ph.
• Not able to properly operate user-system interface (for example, CDU).
• Not able to troubleshoot or overcome weapon system malfunctions.
• Lack of detailed engagement area development and direct-fire planning (causing
multiple crews to engage the same target simultaneously).
• Lack of standard cockpit operating procedures.
• No consideration of the effects of the environment.

TECHNIQUES AND PROCEDURES:

1. FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) prescribes a “continual” gunnery training program. To attain and
sustain good gunnery skills, attack and cavalry units need to train continuously, not once a
year.
2. To make gunnery training a priority, the battalion leadership—from platoon leaders to
battalion commander—must become directly involved.
3. Use combat mission simulator periods to train tactical gunnery with close attention to
standardized procedures and phraseology. These CMS periods should be monitored by
platoon leaders, company commanders, and even battalion commanders. Conduct formal
debriefs after each CMS period to ensure that crew members understand what they did
right and what they did wrong. For OH-58D units, conduct hot cockpit drills in the absence
of a CMS; adhere to the standards mentioned above.
4. All units should incorporate gunnery training into each flight that launches. Weapon
system initializations, out-front boresights, practice gunnery engagements, and laser spot
tracking training are considerations for crew and lead/wing training flights. Commanders
and instructor pilots should take the opportunity after these flights to critique the crew’s
performance by viewing the gun camera tape with the crew.
5. Standardize gunnery evaluations according to this manual. Tables V through VIII must
receive objective evaluation.
6. Conduct home-station gunnery training. One method, according to this manual, is
provided below.

Training Strategy
• Conduct commander's assessment.
• Train continually (not just during an intensified program).
• Use CMS, TADS selected task trainer, and hot cockpit drills (commander and
platoon-leader involvement).
• Run up SOPs and gunnery training scenarios.

Crew Gates
• Conduct crew simulator/ground training gates (Helicopter Gunnery Skills Test and
conduct-of-fire training).
• Conduct crew live-fire gates.

Discussion on Boresighting and Gunnery Skills (Concluded)

vii
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140)

Ammunition resources in this manual reflect authorizations contained in DA

Pamphlet 350-38.

The provisions of this publication are the subject of the following international
agreement: STANAG 3117 (Edition Seven).

The use of trade names in this manual is for clarity only and does not constitute
endorsement by the Department of Defense.

The proponent of this publication is Headquarters, TRADOC. Send comments

and recommendations on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications
and Blank Forms) to Commander, U.S. Army Aviation Center, ATTN:
ATZQ-TDS-SG, Fort Rucker, AL 36362-5000.

This publication has been reviewed for operations security considerations.

Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns or pronouns do not

refer exclusively to men.

viii
 Chapter 1

Introduction
There is only one tactical principle which is not subject to change. It is
to use the means at hand to inflict the maximum amount of wounds,
death, and destruction on the enemy in the minimum amount of time.
General George S. Patton

We as an army must prepare ourselves and our units to deploy, fight, and
win in combat at any intensity level, anywhere, anytime. Therefore,
training is the priority. Unit training must focus on the wartime mission.
Units must carefully plan, aggressively execute, and thoroughly assess
their helicopter gunnery training program.

TRAINING STRATEGY
1-1. The helicopter gunnery program begins with individual qualification on
aircraft weapon systems and progresses through crew qualification to unit
collective training. The unit training strategy must build on the skills
learned by individual crew members during the aircraft qualification course.
It must include and balance individual, gunnery, tactical, and maintenance
training for both aviators and support personnel. The unit gunnery program
must be progressive and continuous. The training should integrate new
personnel while maintaining qualified crews. This manual provides
commanders with the information and guidance to develop and incorporate
gunnery training into the Aircrew Training Program while meeting the
standards in DA Pamphlet 350-38, Chapter 7. This program is focused on
building warfighting units that can engage and destroy the enemy.
1-2. Helicopter gunnery range training is a training event in which
individuals, crews, teams, platoons, and companies show proficiency and
validate the operational readiness of unit helicopter weapon systems. Crew
qualification on Table VIII is the cornerstone of this gunnery program. Table
VIII qualification is a live-fire event and an annual requirement. Once crews
qualify, units can begin work on the advanced tables. These advanced tables
focus on collective training and are the culmination of an effective gunnery
training program.
1-3. The mission-essential task list and mission training plan of the unit
enable the commander to focus helicopter gunnery training on the unit’s
primary mission. Therefore, the commander can exercise command, control,
and communication functions while conducting gunnery. Commanders can
use training devices, like the MILES/AGES, to enhance the collective
training program so that the unit can train as it fights. Commanders tailor
the advanced tables (Tables IX through XII) to meet the particular mission
and training requirements of the unit.

1-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

GUNNERY STANDARDS
1-4. The goal of Army training is a combat-ready force that can deploy on
short notice, fight, and win. To achieve this goal, commanders must have a
common set of weapons and weapon systems qualification standards. They
also must have an objective way to judge those standards. Army aviation’s
gunnery program standards are discussed below.
1-5. The Aerial Weapon Scoring System or USAAVNC-approved objective
scoring method is the standard for objective scoring of cannon, machine gun,
and rocket fires with no subjective upgrades. Requests for USAAVNC
approval for alternate scoring methods are sent to Commander, USAAVNC,
ATTN: ATZQ-TDS-GT, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000.
1-6. A target hit (or 10 percent of rounds for OH-58D) within the effective
range of the system is the standard for cannon and machine-gun
engagements. A target hit also is the standard for Hellfire, TOW, and Stinger
missile engagements. If the scoring system malfunctions, the master gunner
may score the task by an alternate scoring methodology.
1-7. Target neutralization is the standard for rocket engagements. Because
rockets are most effective when fired in mass, the rocket training strategy is
to train crews for neutralization engagements.
1-8. Target neutralization is an engagement that causes 10-percent
casualties/destruction of materiel in the target-effect area. It should be a
deliberate engagement in which the crew fires an initial engagement (pair or
single, depending on the type of airframe and armament configuration) to
determine rocket impact relative to the target, determine required
adjustments, apply adjustments, and fire again. Once the target or target
area has been bracketed, then a fire for effect can be accomplished. Target
composition and mass will determine the number of rockets required to
service the target or target area to achieve neutralization.
1-9. Because of the limited quantities of training munitions available, crews
will only be able to train and demonstrate proficiency in adjustment of
rockets onto a target. The fire-for-effect portion of the engagement will not
normally be possible.

GUNNERY TABLES
1-10. The gunnery tables in this manual provide the framework for the unit
to execute its gunnery program. They are designed to train and evaluate the
crew’s ability to engage targets with the helicopter’s weapon systems at
short, medium, and long ranges. These gunnery tables are progressive; they
are designed to be fired in order. Commanders may modify the engagement
sequences, conditions, and target arrays within the tables to meet mission
training requirements or to fit resource constraints such as range layout,
ammunition availability, or similar restrictions to training. However,
modified tables must be no less demanding than those in this manual.
Because modifications to tables are temporary, commanders must work with
installation or regional range authorities to upgrade and improve helicopter
gunnery ranges so that the unit can fire the tables that this manual
describes.

1-2
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 1

BASIC TABLES
1-11. Tables I and II are used for initial weapons qualification. Fire them
according to USAAVNC or NGB AH-64A Apache, AH-64D Lonbgbow Apache,
and OH-58D Kiowa Warrior programs of instruction.
1-12. Tables III and IV are used for prequalification training and the
commander’s evaluation of newly assigned crew members. Units may use
these tables to evaluate unit trainers or to conduct refresher training for
qualified aviators. Tables III and IV are individual tables evaluated by a unit
instructor pilot.

INTERMEDIATE TABLES
1-13. Table V is the commander’s pregunnery range assessment of unit
helicopter gunnery readiness. This table allows evaluation of the crew’s
knowledge and gunnery skills before the crew progresses to live-fire gunnery.
Table V is a gate to live-fire training; crews must complete this table before
attempting live-fire gunnery.
1-14. Table VI is the calibration and verification table. This table includes
ammunition for units to calibrate and test fire weapon systems before
qualification range training. An aircraft must meet the Table VI standards
before it can be used for qualification on Tables VII and VIII. Table VII is a
training table. Table VIII is a crew qualification table; it is a gate to the
advanced tables.

ADVANCED TABLES
1-15. Tables IX through XII are the advanced tables. These tables orient on
tactical scenarios and multihelicopter employment. They allow the
commander to focus the unit on collective live-fire training. The unit MTP
and METL will dictate tactical scenarios, task organization, and weapons
mix.

READINESS REPORTING
UNIT STATUS REPORT
1-16. DA Form 2715-R (Unit Status Report) is an assessment of a unit’s
combat readiness. The commander assesses training for the USR by
developing a training level, or T-level. The primary purpose of the T-level is
to show the unit’s current ability to perform its assigned wartime missions.
The standard for measuring the unit’s training status is its METL.
1-17. The commander decides the unit’s training level by evaluating how
well the unit accomplishes mission-essential tasks. He considers all available
data in making the determination. The training level determines how much
time is needed to train the unit to do its mission-essential tasks.
1-18. Many factors affect the unit’s T-level. AR 220-1 states that proficiency
is measured in terms of the unit’s demonstrated ability to do its
mission-essential tasks. The unit also must perform enabling tasks not
specified in the METL but necessary for performing mission-essential tasks.
An example of an enabling task is crew gunnery. Proficiency is judged on

1-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

performance of tasks to standard. Therefore, gunnery proficiency is judged on

the performance of gunnery tasks to standards in this manual, which has a
direct effect on the unit USR. AR 220-1 also states that the availability of
aviation training resources—such as flying hours, training ammunition,
simulation devices, and fuel—must be considered in the T-level.
1-19. Reporting of T-ratings will adhere to the following requirements:
• T1—85 percent and above of assigned aviators qualified on Table VIII.
• T2—75 to 84 percent of assigned aviators qualified on Table VIII.
• T3—65 to 74 percent of assigned aviators qualified on Table VIII.

HELICOPTER GUNNERY REPORTING

1-20. The commander’s guide mandates the consideration of gunnery
performance when determining the readiness levels of aviators. This
objective assessment is derived from Table 7-1, TC 1-210. It is recorded on
the USR in Block 18, TRAINDAT SET.
1-21. However, proper reporting of helicopter gunnery problems and
successes on the unit status report is also important. The Army’s leadership
must receive an accurate assessment of unit gunnery. This assessment will
aid in preserving and improving helicopter live-fire gunnery. AR 220-1,
paragraph 1-6d, contains additional information.
1-22. Maintenance of aircraft weapon systems is a critically important
component of any helicopter gunnery training program. A shortage of
maintainers will affect any training program involving aircraft.

UNIT ACTIONS
1-23. The unit commander will consider the unit’s helicopter gunnery
qualification rate when determining the overall T-level. DA Pamphlet 350-38
specifies crew gunnery qualification requirements for helicopter crews/units.
1-24. Section B, TRAINDAT SET, is the place to record concerns about
training resources. Problems that can be noted may include the following:
• Improper ammunition was received for gunnery training/qualification;
that is, insufficient quantities (according to DA Pamphlet 350-38
requirements) or one type issued in lieu of another type—M274 model
rockets instead of M267 or MK 40 rocket motors instead of MK 66.
• There was not enough range time received for qualification on Tables
VI through VIII and the advanced tables.
• The AWSS was unavailable for Table VII/VIII scoring.
• The home-station range was unsuitable for helicopter gunnery
qualification.
• A shortage of soldiers in critical MOSs (armament, POL handlers, and
aircraft electricians) exists.
• The resource constraints experienced by the unit, which should be
explained in Section D, TRRAT GENTEXT, and can include helicopter
gunnery issues.

1-4
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 1

MASTER GUNNER PROGRAM

1-25. The battalion or squadron S3 and master gunner manage, develop, and
implement the unit helicopter gunnery program. The master gunner is the
commander’s primary representative for helicopter gunnery. His primary
duty is to help maintain the continuity and focus of the commander’s
helicopter gunnery training program.
1-26. The commander will designate a master gunner. The master gunner
should be an instructor pilot who is qualified and experienced in the primary
attack aircraft of the unit and a graduate of the USAAVNC master gunner
course.
1-27. The master gunner’s responsibilities include the following:
• Assist the commander and S3 in developing and implementing the unit
helicopter gunnery training program.
• Assist the S3 in forecasting and allocating helicopter ammunition.
• Monitor training device usage such as simulator and TSTT (if
applicable) gunnery training and scheduling.
• Develop realistic target arrays in coordination with local range-control
officials.
• Serve as the primary scorer/evaluator on unit live-fire ranges.
• Work with the armament officer to ensure the readiness of the unit’s
helicopter armament.
• Serve as a member of the unit standardization committee.

WEAPONS TRAINING STANDARDS

1-28. DA Pamphlet 350-38 (usually referred to as STRAC) shows the
quantities and types of ammunition required for weapons proficiency
training and qualification. Ammunition authorizations prescribed are the
maximum amounts authorized for each airframe. These authorizations are
based on the unit’s component (Active or Reserve—USAR and NG).
(Ammunition requirements are based on suggested strategies; these do not
automatically translate into authorizations.)
1-29. Unit commanders will make every effort to conduct live-fire gunnery
training with the authorized ammunition. Turned-back or turned-in
ammunition does not strengthen the helicopter gunnery training program.
1-30. Ammunition authorizations by STRAC are made on an annual basis.
Tables VI through VIII, Table X, and Table XII are designed to be fired
annually using live ammunition (inclusive of Tables III and IV for the
OH-58D).

1-5
 Chapter 2

Helicopter Gunnery Training Strategy

This chapter is a framework for developing a helicopter gunnery training
program in four phases. To make helicopter crews and units work
together as a team, the commander must execute a well-planned,
realistic, and consistent training program. This chapter describes a
strategy structured for training that progresses from basic through
intermediate and advanced gunnery tables to combined-arms exercises,
focusing on the warfighting skills of individuals, crews, and units.

SECTION I – TRAINING ASSESSMENT AND PLANNING

SECTION I – COLD-WEATHER OPERATIONS

THE COMMANDER’S ASSESSMENT

2-1. The unit commander’s training assessment and planning are essential
for unit-level gunnery training programs. The commander will continue to
assess and plan throughout the gunnery training cycle. Commanders may
repeat phases on different levels of training throughout the training year to
sustain the helicopter gunnery training program. They may compress the
phases into an intensified gunnery training program when necessary; for
example, to meet mobilization requirements. The goal of this training is to
maximize combat-ready crews. The commander determines the unit’s current
proficiency level in helicopter gunnery by—
• Analyzing the experience level of the helicopter crews in the unit; for
example, how much experience do the crews have in the aircraft and
how many crews does the unit have?
• Analyzing the results of previous helicopter gunnery ranges; for
example, any trends noted during the last qualification range (such as
low rocket qualification rates and excessive engagement times).
• Analyzing the total training level of the unit and its personnel
assignment stability; this analysis includes the number of RL1
aviators, nonrated crew members, maintenance personnel, and other
essential personnel.
• Conducting diagnostic testing to determine the current proficiency of
the unit; these tests may include a diagnostic HGST, a no-notice Table
III and IV for randomly selected crews, or past results of the unit
no-notice program.
• Determining the maintenance status of aircraft weapon systems; this
determination may include regularly performing Table VI.

2-0
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

2-2. By using the standards in this FM, the commander’s guide, and DA
Pamphlet 350-38, the commander will decide what training is necessary to
meet required training standards. The commander will chart the course to
his desired training end state by—
• Comparing results of the analysis of the unit’s current level of
proficiency with the required training standard.
• Placing the unit, or individuals, into the appropriate level of the
training program.
2-3. The amount of time available for training crews and units to standard
will vary. The commander determines how much time is available to achieve
the required training standards by—
• Examining the unit’s mission requirements and other obligations from
the unit training calendars.
• Deciding whether a sustaining program or an intensified program is
required; the primary difference between a sustaining program and an
intensified program is the time required for implementation.
Note: For planning purposes, an average attack helicopter battalion requires
a gunnery period of two weeks on the range to complete the live-fire
helicopter gunnery tables.
2-4. The commander determines which resources are required to conduct
training by—
• Referring to the logistic and administrative requirements in this
document.
• Reviewing the unit’s previous training experiences, as documented in
the required detailed after-action review.
2-5. The commander determines what resources are available to conduct
training by—
• Inventorying unit personnel and equipment.
• Determining what assistance is available from supporting units and
higher headquarters.
• Examining training facilities.
• Determining the number of flight hours and ammunition available for
basic, intermediate, and advanced gunnery tables.
• Determining the availability of the AWSS.
2-6. The commander reconciles all considerations. For example, differences
between resources required and resources available will affect both the times
required to conduct the training and the unit’s ability to meet the required
standards. The commander should adjust differences to meet the goal of
producing the maximum number of combat-ready crews.

PLANNING THE TRAINING

2-7. In the assessment process, the commander begins outlining his
helicopter gunnery training program. To construct a detailed plan for
implementing the program, the commander may follow these steps:

2-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

• Develop a unit program of instruction for pregunnery training; use the

S3 and master gunner.
• Plan the conduct of academic training.
• Plan the conduct of hands-on training, based on the commander’s
assessment.
• Plan the conduct of nonaircrew training (such as FARP and armament
personnel)
• Plan the conduct of Table V; emphasize the importance of assessment
before the gunnery range.
• Plan the conduct of the intermediate table live fire.
• Plan the conduct of advanced table training.

EFFECTIVE ASSESSMENT AND TRAINING

2-8. An effective program for unit-level helicopter gunnery is the result of
good assessment and planning. To ensure successful training, use the
following principles.

SET STANDARDS
2-9. Set and enforce tough, but achievable, standards. Tough standards will
generate tough training. Crews must know when they do well. Insist on
repetition to achieve a high level of proficiency in required tasks.

START EARLY
2-10. All aspects of the training program must be thoroughly coordinated.
Forecast and request resources and maintenance assistance long before they
are needed.

BE THOROUGH
2-11. Avoid wasting resources and training opportunities. Give leaders at all
levels the guidance and assets needed to train. Focus the unit on
accomplishing the commander’s desired end state.

BE FLEXIBLE
2-12. Be prepared to adjust the training program to the changing needs of
the unit. Once assessment, training, and planning stop, the training program
stagnates and loses its effectiveness.

TRAIN CONTINUALLY
2-13. Train at every opportunity, not just during an intensified program to
get ready for helicopter gunnery qualification tables. Intensified programs
should be used only to bring a unit up to a desired proficiency level. Once
accomplished, train continually to maintain that level.

SECTION II – PREGUNNERY TRAINING

2-14. Pregunnery training prepares members of the unit to perform all tasks
required for the actual live-fire gunnery tables. To ensure that unit members

2-2
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

reach desired levels of proficiency at the time that they are required, units
must carefully integrate pregunnery training into the overall training
program. Some areas that should be part of pregunnery training and
suggestions for their implementation are discussed below. The commander
may discover other subjects requiring special attention during training
assessment and planning.

SUBJECT AREAS AND TECHNIQUES

FLIGHT PROFICIENCY
2-15. Normally conducted at the company, platoon, and crew levels, flight
proficiency training is critical for gunnery training. The battalion or
squadron standardization officer must advise the commander on the unit’s
level of proficiency.

MAP READING, NAVIGATION, AND TERRAIN ANALYSIS

2-16. Navigating and proper terrain-flight techniques are critical to mission
accomplishment and aircrew survival. In the classroom, the instructor may
use slides of terrain and terrain boards or sand tables to link map reading to
terrain analysis and utilization. Terrain walks and ground-vehicle navigation
courses are techniques for training crews. Competitive navigation exercises
increase awareness and interest in navigation. The training program should
include—
• Basic map reading and operational graphics.
• Map reconnaissance.
• Terrain utilization.
• Low-altitude navigation, including Doppler and GPS navigation.
• AMPS operation and utilization.

2-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

ARMAMENT
2-17. Knowledge and skill in operating and working with helicopter
armament systems are important factors in gunnery performance. Pilots
should participate regularly in armament maintenance operations. To
establish and maintain proficiency, aircrews must conduct armament
preflight and operational checks during every flight, to include boresighting.
Armament training should include—
• Operation of armament controls.
• Preflight inspection of armament subsystems.
• Operational checks of armament subsystems.
• Aircrew-level maintenance of armament subsystems.
• Correction of armament subsystem malfunctions.
• Loading and unloading armament subsystems.
• Clearing armament subsystems.
• Capabilities and limitations of armament subsystems.

AMMUNITION
2-18. Ammunition training goes hand in hand with armament training.
Conduct practical exercises in garrison using dummy ammunition. Conduct
concurrent training exercises on ranges and simulation exercises in the
classroom. This training should include—
• Identification and inspection of ammunition.
• Care and handling of ammunition.
• Target effects of ammunition, including selection of ammunition for
various targets.
• Ballistic characteristics of ammunition.
• Selection of ammunition for various targets.
CREW DUTIES
2-19. The crew-duties training program must include all pilot skills required
to attack and destroy a target. Chapter 6 and the ATM contain standard
phraseology. Crew-duties training include—
• Principles of helicopter gunnery.
• Target handover procedures.
• Unit fire commands.
• Crew fire commands.
• Fire-distribution and target-attack techniques.
2-20. Training exercises should include as much audiovisual simulation as
possible. Record target handovers and fire commands on audiotape. Target
attacks can be recorded on audiotape and videotape. They can also be
simulated on terrain boards. Cockpit drills can be dry run on the ground
using a portable tape recorder to present a realistic scenario. Complete and
train dry-fire crew and team or company scenarios regularly.

2-4
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

TARGET ACQUISITION AND IDENTIFICATION

2-21. The ability to acquire and identify battlefield targets is one of the most
difficult and most often neglected skill areas of helicopter gunnery training.
The unit’s first step in the target acquisition and identification training
process should be classroom instruction—with slides and photographs of
vehicles in various types of terrain. The unit’s target acquisition and
identification training program prepares crews to acquire targets and
minimizes the possibility of fratricide. Units may use the six-step technique
in the vehicle identification in Chapter 6 to train crews to systematically
identify targets. Units should include the Recognition of Combat Vehicles
(ROC-V) Program in their target acquisition and identification training. For
information on this program, call commercial 703-704-1473/1718 (DSN
654-1473/1718). The unit training program must include—
• Observation techniques.
• Target acquisition.
• Target identification.
• Threat capabilities and limitations.

MISSION PLANNING
2-22. Every pilot must be able to plan and conduct a complete mission.
Mission planning training teaches the pilot to receive and assimilate all of
the information that he will need to conduct a mission and relate the results
of that mission to other pilots and ground personnel. This training must
include—
• Operations and intelligence briefings.
• Mission planning and rehearsals.
• Mission debriefing.
2-23. Aircrews require more than basic classroom instruction. Aircrews also
require extensive practice. This extensive practice is integrated with other
areas of training such as target acquisition and land navigation courses.
Every training exercise presents an opportunity for briefing, planning, and
debriefing.

RANGE OPERATION AND SAFETY

2-24. The complexity of a realistically run helicopter gunnery range requires
that every participating crew member understands the operational and
safety procedures required. Training must include—
• Range safety.
• Administrative procedures.
• Conduct of helicopter gunnery tables.
2-25. Terrain boards and models should be used to simulate the layout of the
range and to train pilots in range operations before beginning range firing. A
visit to the range—or videotapes of the range recorded by the unit—will aid
in range orientation and identify operational and safety issues.

2-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE V
2-26. Pregunnery training prepares aircrews for range training. Table V
tests their proficiency level to ensure that they are ready to advance to range
training. Table V is the commander’s assessment tool to ensure that crews
are ready for live-fire gunnery tables.

SECTION III – HELICOPTER GUNNERY RANGE TRAINING

QUALIFICATION GATES
2-27. A helicopter gunnery gate is a task or tasks grouped in a training event
that a soldier or unit must perform to standard before progressing to more
complex tasks or events. Gates allow commanders to evaluate the
effectiveness of training and assess whether the unit is ready for training
that is more complex. Table 2-1 lists the gunnery gates.

2-6
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

Table 2-1. Helicopter Gunnery Training Gates

GATE# INDIVIDUAL CREW UNIT TABLES REMARKS

APPROVED POI FOR AQC OR
1 X I, II
INITIAL QUALIFICATION.

2 X III/IV COMMANDER’S EVAL, UNIT.

HGST/G-COFT/C-COFT,
3 X V
ANNUAL REQUIREMENT.
AIRCRAFT MUST BE CERTIFIED
4 X VI
ON TABLE BEFORE USE ON
(see Note 1)
INTERMEDIATE TABLES. TABLE
VI IS THE FIRST LIVE-FIRE
EVENT FOR AH-64 UNITS.
CREW MUST QUALIFY TO
5 X VIII
PROGRESS TO ADVANCED
TABLES.
PLATOONS MUST PASS TABLE
6 X X
X BEFORE TABLE XII.

1. Table VI is not a mandatory gate for each crew. In addition, Table VI improves system familiarity
by providing the crew an opportunity to fire without the burden of a time parameter. It is a
mandatory gate for all aircraft requiring calibration/verification. All crews should fire Table VI in the
same aircraft in which they will fire Tables VII, VIII, X, and XII.
2. Appendix A contains specific requirements for door gunners.

INDIVIDUAL GATES
GATE 1: TABLES I AND II
2-28. Tables I and II are conducted during the aircraft qualification course.
They are individual gunnery tables and represent individual gunnery
qualification for the aviator.

GATE 2: TABLES III AND IV

2-29. Tables III and IV are conducted with RL progression by the unit
commander. These tables evaluate a crew member’s proficiency in the duties
associated with each crew position. These tables give the commander the
means and flexibility to assign crews effectively.

AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT TRAINER

2-30. Before proceeding to Table V, the aviator will be integrated into the
ASET program if assigned to the pilot’s crew station. The intent is for the
crew to complete and pass ASET testing before proceeding to the advanced
table gunnery.

2-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TADS SELECTED TASK TRAINER

2-31. Complete TSTT testing if assigned to the front-seat crew station
(AH-64A units).

Note: This device has not been updated to current aircraft configuration;
therefore, care should be used in selecting tasks that correspond to those
performed in the aircraft.
2-32. The exercise is based on a 100-point system, with 70 points the
minimum for passing. Exercises for testing are found in the TSTT “ATAC
Situations” menu. Conduct the test as follows.

Advanced Switchology
2-33. Use the advanced switchology (no LDNS) quiz (20 percent).

Hover Situations
2-34. Select hover situations from the menu. Four similar variations are
available in the software. Any of the variations are acceptable for testing (20
percent).

Fly-to Situations
2-35. Select the built-in fly-to exercise. Four similar variations are available
in the software. Any of the variations are acceptable for testing (20 percent).

Multiple Targets, Rapid Fire

2-36. This test has two exercises: the close formation exercise and the spread
formation exercise. The two exercises are worth 10 points each. These
exercises are located under the multiple target menus (20 percent).

Multiple Targets, Ripple Fire

2-37. Use the built-in ripple-fire target engagement exercise found in the
ATAC Situations “More Situations” menu. Three similar variations are
available in the software. Any of the variations are acceptable for testing (20
percent).

G-COFT/C-COFT
2-38. The simulation-based G-COFT/C-COFT is the standard, objectively
scored training event for AH-64 crews. The master gunner will implement
and, if necessary, design the G-COFT/C-COFT. The G-COFT/C-COFT will
evaluate the crew’s ability to engage targets and work as a team. This
training is critical to assess the attack helicopter crew’s skills before it
progresses to live-fire tables.

2-8
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

CREW SIMULATOR/GROUND TRAINING GATES SIMULATOR/

GROUND TRAINING GATES
GATE 3: TABLE V
2-39. Table V allows the commander to assess his unit’s gunnery readiness
before starting the live-fire gunnery tables. To complete Table V, crews will,
at a minimum—
• Score 70 percent on the helicopter-gunnery skills test; the skills test is
a written examination with at least 50 gunnery-specific questions.
Crews must complete the test no earlier than 180 days before going to
the range to conduct live fire.
• Complete crew conduct of fire training in a compatible simulator.

G-COFT/C-COFT
2-40. The simulation-based G-COFT/C-COFT is the standard, objectively
scored training event for AH-64 crews. The master gunner will implement
and, if necessary, design the G-COFT/C-COFT. The G-COFT/C-COFT will
evaluate the crew’s ability to engage targets and work as a team. This
training is critical to assess the attack helicopter crew’s skills before it
progresses to live-fire tables. The G-COFT/C-COFT setup will include—
• A variety of engagements for all weapons systems that closely
resemble Tables VII and VIII engagements.
• Appropriate tactical scenarios/events for both day and night tables.
• Multiple, progressively more difficult training levels.
Note: The G-COFT/C-COFT is part of Table V. It will not replace live-fire
gunnery training.
2-41. Some units may not have access to a compatible simulator. For those
units, the master gunner may, with the concurrence of the
battalion/squadron commander, develop a C-COFT type of exercise for use in
the aircraft. The intent is to evaluate the crew’s skills in a progressive
manner. When crews satisfactorily meet all requirements for the individual
and crew simulator/ground training gates, they will progress to live-fire
tables.
2-42. The commander may make Table V more rigorous. He should
determine the level of detail required to assess aircrew readiness.

CREW LIVE-FIRE GATES

2-43. Table VI is the aircraft live-fire calibration and verification table. All
aircraft requiring calibration/harmonization/verification must complete Table
VI before progressing to subsequent live-fire tables. All crews do not have to
fire Table VI. However, crews should fire Table VI in the aircraft that they
will use for the crew qualification. Table VII is the crew live-fire training
table. Table VIII is the crew qualification table. Commanders must decide
whether crews can progress to the next table based on their demonstrated
performance. Commanders retain the ability to deny further live-fire training
to crews that fail to meet training standards.

2-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

LIVE-FIRE RULES
2-44. If a crew fails to qualify on Table VIII because of failed tasks, the
commander may allow the crew to reshoot the tasks that were failed if
ammunition is available. If crews have to reshoot tasks on Table VIII to
qualify, their table is called a Q2, or qualification on second attempt. If a
crew’s table is scored a Q2, then the maximum rating that it can achieve is
qualified. If a crew does not qualify after the second pass, the commander
must decide whether to commit resources to allow the crew to try for a Q3.
2-45. Although the tables are progressive, Table VIII Day may be fired after
Table VII Day without firing Table VII Night. In addition, Table VIII Night
may be fired directly after Table VII Night.
2-46. If crew members are assigned to an aircraft type that has a night
qualification requirement, they must pass both the day and night portions of
Table VIII for qualification. For validation, the crew must pass both the day
and night portions of Table VII.

TARGET RANGE AND ENGAGEMENT TIME

2-47. The live-fire tables represent more than a chance to expend
ammunition. They represent a training standard. The range to targets and
engagement times have been revised for this manual.
2-48. The engagement ranges in the tables were developed as a function of
the effective range of the weapon and the limitations of training ammunition.
Sensing the impacts of training ammunition can be difficult.
2-49. The engagement time standards were developed to ensure that crews
could place fires on targets quickly and accurately. The time standards are
based on target acquisition time, munition time of flight, and time to adjust
rounds on target.

GATE 4: TABLE VI
2-50. Table VI is the first live-fire table. This table allows the crew to
determine if the helicopter weapon systems are working properly. The intent
of Table VI is to certify the helicopter weapon systems. It will be fired under
the supervision of the unit armament or maintenance officer. If the aircraft
weapons do not function to standard, the aircraft will not be used for
qualification. Table VI will be accomplished to standard for all aircraft before
using them to fire Table VII/Table VIII. As stated in Table 2-1, Note 1, this
table is not a mandatory gate for each crew. However, each crew should fire
Table VI in the same aircraft in which it will fire Table VII/Table VIII. This
table allows crews to fire live munitions without the fear of failing because of
time constraints. Table VI may be the first live-fire training for unit crews in
a year. Table VI allows crews to become reacquainted with firing live
munitions before progressing to Table VII.

TABLE VII
2-51. Live fire of Table VII is required before progressing to Table VIII.
However, crews can validate on Table VII and progress to advanced tables.
Validation is the process of ensuring that the gunnery crew can still meet the

2-10
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

Table VIII standard, thus “validating” the results of the crew’s last Table
VIII.
2-52. With the concurrence of the commander, crew members may validate
on Table VII if—
• Each individual crew member was qualified on Table VIII during the
preceding 12 months.
• Each individual crew member occupies the same crew station as the
previous gunnery in which he qualified; dual-seat designated aviators
may validate in either crew station.
• The crew is Q1 on the validation table.
2-53. The minimum standard for validation is qualification on 8 out of 12
engagements. A qualified engagement is an engagement in which target
effect is achieved with a minimum score of 70 points. If the crew meets the
standard, it can, at the discretion of the commander, progress to advanced
tables without firing Table VIII. In effect, the Table VII performance becomes
the crew’s Table VIII qualification.
2-54. The commander will evaluate crews that fail to meet the standard on
Table VII before they progress to Table VIII. If required, crews will receive
additional training in deficient areas before progression.
2-55. STRAC provides ammunition for Table VII as a live-fire table. Using
the simulator does not satisfy the requirement for progression to Table VIII.

GATE 5: TABLE VIII

2-56. This table is an annual requirement and the cornerstone of the unit
gunnery training program. Annual is once every 12 months, based on the last
date of crew qualification. Table VIII is valid only if it is conducted live fire.
2-57. For crews that do not validate on Table VII, live firing this table is a
requirement. This table determines crew qualification. Scoring standards are
the same as for Table VII. A crew cannot progress to advanced table gunnery
without qualifying on Table VIII.
2-58. Successful qualification will be annotated on DA Form 759 (Individual
Flight Record and Flight Certificate—Army). Appropriate entries will also be
made in the crew member’s individual aircrew training folder according to
the commander’s guide.
2-59. Because of limited range time, weather, and other factors, units cannot
always complete the required tables during a single gunnery range training
period. Because of these factors, a crew’s Table VII (validation) or Table VIII
might be interrupted. However, a crew must complete all tasks of Table VII
(validation) or Table VIII within 180 days of starting the table. Failure to
complete all tasks within 180 days will require the crew to start the table
over and complete all Table VIII tasks at the next available opportunity.

ADVANCED TABLES
2-60. The advanced level of gunnery training consists of four tables: Tables
IX, X, XI, and XII. The company/troop/battalion/squadron commander uses

2-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

these tables to train and assess his unit’s collective gunnery skills. These
tables emphasize the elements of command and control, situational
awareness, tactical placement/movement within the battle area,
communicative flow of tactical information, target acquisition, engagement
priorities, and fire distribution and discipline of fires. Tables X and XII
contain training ammunition requirements to conduct live fire by platoons
and company/troops and will be fired if enough ammunition is available after
the conduct of intermediate tables. These are not qualification tables but
collective training tables. The table scenarios should be based on the unit’s
METL and the tasks, conditions, and standards found in the unit’s MTP.
2-61. Table IX is a dry-fire training table for a team/section/platoon. This
table is oriented on the basic fighting elements of a company/troop. The
commander uses this table to train his unit in the coordination skills needed
for multiple aircraft to engage targets. Unlike Table VIII, which trains a crew
to effectively place steel on target, Table IX allows the commander to train
multiple aircraft operations, placing primary emphasis on fire distribution
and control measures.

GATE 6: TABLE X
2-62. This table is the live-fire version of Table IX. The training emphasis is
on the coordination among multiple aircraft for joint target engagements.
This table provides the framework for conducting team/section or platoon
gunnery training. Thorough and accurate coordination between elements, as
well as accurate delivery of fires, will determine the unit’s success on this
table.
2-63. Tables XI and XII are company/troop training tables and are the
culmination of an effective gunnery training program. These tables provide
examples of training tasks that the company/troop commander may use to
evaluate his unit’s proficiency in collective training tasks. The commander’s
ultimate gunnery training goal is to train his unit to fight in the
combined-arms environment. Table XI is a dry-fire training table, designed to
exercise the company-/troop-level command and control. The primary
training emphasis is placed on the unit’s fire distribution, target engagement
priorities, and control measures. Table XII is the live-fire culmination of the
company/troop’s gunnery training program. This table emphasizes the same
areas as Table XI but under live-fire, tactical conditions. Evaluation of unit
command and control is the primary objective of this table. However, Table
XII is also an opportunity for the commander to evaluate the unit
maintenance and rearm/refuel capability during multihelicopter operations.
2-64. Combined arms live-fire exercises are not advanced tables. FM 7-
10(FM 25-101) defines CALFEXs as “high-cost, resource-intensive exercises
in which player units move or maneuver and employ organic and supporting
weapons systems using full-service ammunition with attendant integration
of all combat, CS, and CSS functions.” In addition, CALFEXs are not
advanced tables but live-fire exercises. DA Pamphlet 350-38 does not provide
resources for CALFEXs.

2-12
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

ENGAGEMENT SCORING SYSTEM

2-65. The engagement scoring system provides aviation units with a
standardized, objective system to evaluate gunnery proficiency.

MISSILE SCORING

Hellfire Missile
2-66. Score engagements using the Apache’s onboard video recorder
subsystem or the Kiowa Warrior’s airborne videotape recorder. Missile
engagements may also be scored with DA-approved objective scoring
systems, if available.

Air-to-Air Stinger
2-67. Live missiles are not provided. Captive flight-trainer engagements will
be scored.

CANNON, MACHINE-GUN, AND ROCKET SCORING

2-68. The standard for scoring cannon, machine-gun, and rocket
engagements is the Aerial Weapons Scoring System or USAAVNC-approved
objective scoring methodology.

TARGET HANDOVERS
2-69. All target handovers will be transmitted from the range tower or a
similar fixed-base for Tables VII and VIII. Units should develop a
standardized methodology to provide standardized handovers for all crews.

TARGET HITS
2-70. When a crew is firing on a multipurpose range complex, target hits will
be recorded on the RETS range computers along with the AWSS.

SCORING CRITERIA
2-71. Using the appropriate gunnery tables, aviation units will objectively
evaluate their crews. The following are commonly used terms relating to the
scoring process.

TARGET EFFECT
2-72. Target effect means that the target is hit or the required number of
rounds impact in the target effect area. For missile (Hellfire and Stinger) and
cannon engagements, the target must be hit to achieve target effect. For
machine-gun (.50-caliber, M60D, and M240) engagements, the target must be
hit or 10 percent of rounds must land in the target effect area.

ENGAGEMENT TIME
2-73. Engagement time is the total time required for the engagement. The
two basic target types are controlled presentation targets and fixed,
uncontrolled targets. Start and stop times are defined as follows.

2-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Start
2-74. Controlled Presentation (Pop-ups). Engagement time starts when
the target is in the full upright position and the target handover is complete;
that is, the crew acknowledges the transmission.
2-75. Uncontrolled Presentation (Fixed). Engagement time starts when
the firing crew accepts the target handover.

Stop
2-76. For all ranges, the stop time is when target effect is achieved or the
crew calls “mission complete.” “Mission complete” is when the last rounds
fired impact in the TEA or target effect is achieved; for example, the target
falls.

ENGAGEMENT SCORING
2-77. Each engagement is graded on a qualified-unqualified standard. In a
qualified engagement, the target-effect standard is achieved and a minimum
of 70 points attained as expressed in the time tables (no target effect equals
no points!). If an engagement time equates to less than 70 points, those
points are awarded but it is a nonqualified engagement.
2-78. Crew duties and time-of-flight figures are integrated into the
engagement time tables. The criteria for each table are in the table annex.
For example, the rocket tables for the AH-64 are built for pairs of rockets, not
for rockets fired singly.
2-79. The minimum table qualification requires the crew to qualify on 8 out
of the 12 engagements in the table. In addition, a crew must achieve at least
one qualified engagement per evaluated weapon system to receive a GO on
the table. For example, an AH-64 crew must qualify on 8 of 12 engagements,
with a minimum of one qualified engagement for each evaluated weapon
system (cannon, rockets, and Hellfire missile).
2-80. Upon successful completion of qualification tables, crews will be rated
by the following standards (IATF entry of rating is not required):
• Distinguished—90 percent of possible points.
• Superior—80 percent of possible points.
• Qualified—qualified (achieved at least 70 points) on 8 out of 12
engagements.

SCORING MOVING ENGAGEMENTS

2-81. Moving engagements are engagements in which the helicopter is
deliberately moving between designated start-fire and stop-fire points while
firing at targets.
2-82. Running-fire engagements are engagements in which the helicopter is
deliberately moving forward between designated start-fire and stop-fire
points while firing at targets.
2-83. Placing accurate fires on a target is more difficult when the aircraft is
at a hover than when moving or running, particularly with rockets. During

2-14
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

training, the crew needs adequate maneuver space to fire and observe the
impacts.
2-84. The master gunner must accurately and objectively score the moving
engagement. The objective is to design the target array so that the crew has
the maximum time to observe munition impacts on the target. Figure 2-1
shows a range layout.

Figure 2-1. Range Layout for a Moving Engagement

2-85. There are various considerations in the design of the moving

engagement.
2-86. Master gunners can start the engagement time at the start-fire line
and stop the engagement time at the stop-fire line.
2-87. The range to target decreases as the helicopter flies toward the target.
When an aircraft is traveling at 30 knots, it will cover about 1 kilometer in
one minute.
2-88. Select a start-fire line and stop-fire line that will keep the aircraft
firing within the range fan and in an engagement time window. Refer to
Figure 2-1. If the start-fire line is 4,000 meters from the target and the stop-
fire line is 3,000 meters from the target, the engagement can be scored using
the 3,001- to 4,000-meter engagement time scoring table.
2-89. The amount of maneuver room available will dictate the speed of the
aircraft during the engagement.

2-15
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

2-90. If the aircraft cannot complete all shots between the start-fire and
stop-fire line, time each pass separately. Time will start at the start-fire line
and stop at the stop-fire line. Add the engagement times for each pass
together to get the total engagement time.

SCORING HELLFIRE ENGAGEMENTS WITH THE VRS AND AVTR

2-91. The VRS of the Apache and the AVTR of the Kiowa Warrior are the
current standard for scoring Hellfire missile engagements. Whether using
live or training missiles, the tape recorded by the VRS or AVTR provides
feedback on switchology, crew coordination, and employment techniques.
Videotape is a useful resource for crew training, but is not an approved
method for scoring cannon and rocket engagements. The master gunner
should maintain a library of videotapes containing both good and bad Hellfire
engagement techniques. This library is an excellent way to preserve
continuity in the gunnery program. It also useful for reinforcing gunnery
instruction and combat readiness.
2-92. Target hit is the standard for Hellfire missile engagements. The score
for the engagement is derived from the engagement time scoring tables.
Review of the crew’s tape of the engagement is the method for determining
target effect and confirming engagement time. For autonomous Hellfire
engagements, engagement time starts as in the paragraph on scoring criteria
and ends with the simulated missile impacting the target. As a technique,
crews may announce “splash” to the tower over the radio to stop engagement
time.
2-93. When a crew finishes its gunnery table, the master gunner or his
representative will view the tape and determine target effect. At a minimum,
the tape must reflect that the—
• Target is within range of the Hellfire missile (adjusted for selected
delivery mode).
• Aircraft is within constraints to launch a missile.
• Line of sight and laser energy are on the target for the required time
for the engagement.
• Crew enters proper grid for remote engagements (target report or
proper range and azimuth to target).
• Missile and LRF/D are on same code for autonomous designation.
2-94. The master gunner can also determine proficiency of the Apache crew
from reviewing the VRS tape. The master gunner can evaluate target
tracking technique, crew coordination, and proper designation technique.
This scoring technique will also be used with the OH-58D.

2-16
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

REMOTE HELLFIRE ENGAGEMENT SCORING

2-95. Remote Hellfire engagements are scored in the same way as for an
autonomous Hellfire engagement. The standards for engagement time start
and stop are as follows:
• Start engagement—target handover complete (transmission
acknowledged by the shooting crew or when crew begins data entry).
• Stop engagement—crew announces “Shot, over.”
Note: Some method of laser control must be exercised by the firing crew; that
is, no “Laser on” call, no points.
2-96. The Hellfire remote engagement has the following evaluation
standards:
• The evaluated crew will fire the training missile.
• The target handover will be sent from the range tower or similar fixed
base.
• The target handover will use the FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) standard
format including an eight-digit grid coordinate of the target.
• The master gunner will determine proper crew procedures from review
of the VRS tape.

SECTION IV – POSTTRAINING ASSESSMENT

AFTER-ACTION REVIEW
2-97. After the live-fire gunnery exercise is complete, a comprehensive
after-action review will be completed. The after-action review should focus on
all facets of the gunnery program leading up to, and including, the live-fire
exercise. The AAR process will produce a written document outlining the
issues encountered in the conduct of the unit gunnery program. This
process—
• Allows the commander to assess unit strengths and weaknesses in
helicopter gunnery training and evaluation, as well as the unit
standardization program.
• Allows the unit to design the next gunnery training program based on
demonstrated unit proficiency.
• Provides continuity during personnel turnover and allows the entire
unit to capture the good and the bad of the program.
• Provides the unit with objective gunnery data that may serve as the
basis for changes or modifications to this manual.

2-17
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

REQUIRED DOCUMENTS
2-98. Besides the written AAR, each unit will keep the following documents
and training records for reference:
• Range SOP and duty logs.
• Individual crew score sheets for each crew.
• AWSS and RETS printouts of all engagements.
• A memorandum containing the names of the crews that fired on the
range, their scores, and whether they were Q2, Q3, or unqualified; the
memorandum will include the tail number of the aircraft that they
used for firing.
• A line entry must be made on the DA 7122-R (Crew Member Training
Record) showing the gunnery qualification date and the crew station
from which the crew member qualified.
• A memorandum containing an in-depth assessment of the unit
helicopter gunnery training program. It also will provide data for the
unit to negotiate for increased resources; it should contain the
following information:
ƒ The names, ranks, and positions of the key unit personnel
serving as range staff; for example, name and rank of the
officer in charge.
ƒ Specific problems, if any, with the scoring system; cite
examples.
ƒ Lot numbers of the ammunition fired and any problems
encountered with the ammunition.
ƒ A roll up of engagements by table with range to target for
each task, total number of rounds fired, and total number of
bullet hits and total number of rockets scored in the TEA by
task.

RANGE SCORE SHEET

2-99. Figure 2-2 is a suggested format for a blank score sheet. The score
sheet allows the master gunner to use a standardized score sheet for scoring
the tables. Figure 2-3 shows an example of a completed score sheet used
during range training.
2-100. This score sheet is not mandatory. However, if units develop their own
score sheet, it will contain the same information as the example score sheet.

2-18
 _________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 2

RANGE SCORE SHEET

PILOT CPG/CPO
AIRCRAFT NUMBER UNIT

TABLE: DAY NIGHT DATE

TEMPERATURE: VISIBILITY: CEILING: CONDITIONS:
START TIME END TIME Circle One Q1 Q2 Q3
Range Weapons Crew Engagement Crew
Engagement Weapon Flight to Effect Weapons Time Engagement Crew Qualify?
and Task Mode Target Standard Effect Standard Time Score Y/N
(meters) (minutes) (minutes)

TABLE TOTALS:
QUALIFIED ENGAGEMENTS: TOTAL SCORE:
QUALIFIED TABLE YES NO
SCORER
REMARKS

Figure 2-2. Suggested Format for a Blank Score Sheet

2-19
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

RANGE SCORE SHEET

PILOT Kaufman CPG/CPO Fisher

AIRCRAFT NUMBER 383 UNIT B Troop

TABLE: VIII DAY NIGHT DATE 18 Apr 02

TEMPERATURE: +15 VISIBILITY: 4 CEILING: 100 CONDITIONS: Overcast
START TIME 1245 END TIME 1335 Circle One Q1 Q2 Q3

Range Weapons Crew Engagement Crew

Engagement Weapon Flight to Effect Weapons Time Engagement Crew Qualify?
and Task Mode Target Standard Effect Standard Time Score Y/N
(meters) (seconds) (seconds)
1/1 HF Hover 2,100 Hit Hit 27 20 95 Y
2/2 HF Hover 1,900 Hit Hit 22 21 75 Y
3/3 HF Hover 4,500 Hit Hit 40 31 90 Y
4/4 30mm Hover 700 Hit Hit 60 42 88 Y
5/5 MPSM Hover 3,300 1/4 0/4 69 54 0 N
6/15 HF Hover 1,500 Hit Hit 22 19 85 Y
7/16 HF Hover 6,000 Hit Hit 70 60 80 Y
8/19 HF Hover 4,500 Hit Hit 40 43 50 N
9/3 30mm Hover 900 Hit Hit 60 40 90 Y
10/6 30mm Moving 1,500 Hit Miss 60 84 0 N
11/12 PD Hover 4,000 3/8 4/8 93 79 85 Y
12/13 PD Run 4,100 3/8 5/8 111 105 75 Y

TABLE TOTALS:
QUALIFIED ENGAGEMENTS: 9/12 TOTAL SCORE: 813
QUALIFIED TABLE YES NO
SCORER : CW3 Sanger
REMARKS: Engagement 2 – Late acquiring. Engagement 5 – Engaged wrong target.
Engagement 8 – Poor acquisition technique, 30 seconds to acquire. Engagement 10 – Too
much time acquiring. Missed target.

Figure 2-3. Example of a Completed Score Sheet

2-20
 Chapter 3

Ranges for Helicopter Gunnery Training

A complete helicopter gunnery training program includes range firing.
The program uses training areas or dry-fire ranges to run tactical courses.
Tactical training should be integrated with gunnery training, when
possible, for a more realistic training environment. This chapter
highlights procedures, duties, and responsibilities for establishing and
operating helicopter gunnery ranges (see AR 385-63). It also includes
administrative and logistic requirements that support range firing.

SECTION I – RANGE REQUIREMENTS

RANGE CONSIDERATIONS
3-1. Proper preparation is essential to conduct helicopter gunnery tables.
This preparation includes everything from the normal preparations for field
training (such as mess and individual equipment) to the basics (such as
aircraft, weapons, range facilities, and ammunition).
3-2. Resources required for gunnery training—such as ammunition and
range time—are expensive and, therefore, limited. Commanders must use
these resources fully during every exercise.
3-3. Each unit should develop a range-firing SOP or annex to the local range
SOP. Range safety should be included in the unit safety SOP.
3-4. Effective range administration and operation are crucial to any firing
exercise. Planning should continue throughout the training year. However,
once the range training date is set, the S3 will examine the commander’s
objectives. He works closely with the master gunner and staff to identify all
requirements. The S3 gives particular attention to external requirements.
3-5. To maximize training, the unit should dry fire a table on the assigned
range before live fire begins. Dry-fire training is most effective when
conducted shortly before and during live-fire gunnery. Control measures
peculiar to the range can be identified by dry firing an abbreviated crew table
and by becoming familiar with the training scenario. Dry-fire training
improves crews’ concentration on the gunnery tasks during live qualification
firing. It also reduces their concerns about positioning, range orientation, and
range fans. A thorough dry-fire practice also helps the crews to acquire
targets. The master gunner should conduct several dry runs in an aircraft to
fine-tune the evaluation strategy and ensure that targets are in place before
live firing begins.

3-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

3-6. Do not use the actual Table VII and VIII target arrays for dry firing. If
crews know exactly where targets are located, their proficiency in target
acquisition cannot be evaluated.

REALISTIC TRAINING
3-7. Realism is the most important factor in gunnery training. Realistic
gunnery training can be accomplished by training tough, realistic target
acquisition and engagement situations.
3-8. Scenarios may be incorporated in all gunnery tables. Each scenario
should be tailored to the table. For example, Tables III and IV may require
only a general threat situation and the assignment of individual aircraft
firing positions. Advanced tables may be executed by using a detailed
battalion-level OPORD and tactical scenario. Company-level OPORDs may
be developed to incorporate all aspects of tactical operations at the company
level. The incorporation of tactical scenarios into all gunnery events also
increases the value of training. This training should include crews sending
spot reports and battle-damage assessments after each task.
3-9. Administrative control measures should be kept to the minimum
required for safety. Tactical measures should be substituted for
administrative measures, where appropriate. For example, a lateral
boundary of a range facility could be briefed as a lateral divisional boundary
that may not be crossed. The barrier to flight still exists, but some
artificiality has been removed. The only necessary administrative control
measures may be the verification of the position of the firing aircraft and the
orientation of weapons before firing.
3-10. With the training tables in this FM, the master gunner can design the
target array and scenario for the course. The target handover and briefed
threat situation provide the information required for crews to conduct a
realistic attack.
3-11. Firing tables fulfill minimum training requirements; safety regulations
fulfill minimum safety requirements.
3-12. NOE hover-fire routes can be established around the impact area.
These routes may also be used as a target identification range. A target array
based on the unit’s MTP can assist the crew in target identification and
detection. Friendly vehicles may be integrated into the target area during
advanced table training so that realistic vehicle identification is part of
fratricide-prevention training.
3-13. Targets to be engaged from the various firing points should vary in
range and type. These targets facilitate training the crew in weapon and
ammunition characteristics and ballistics. Silhouettes should be constructed
to full size. Targets must have a thermal signature when they are engaged
during night-firing exercises by attack helicopters with thermal sights/target
acquisition systems and devices. Hard targets should be artificially heated.
Plywood silhouettes mounted on target lifters should have the standard
Army thermal signature devices.

3-2
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

3-14. Target handovers should provide the crew with target type and cuing
information. Crews should determine the appropriate weapon based on
target type and engagement range. Providing crews with table engagement
data sheets does not develop the decision-making ability that they will need
in combat.

OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
3-15. Some operational requirements require advance planning:
• Training objectives. What is the desired training end state for the unit
crews?
• Ammunition ordered and ammunition available. This ammunition
includes rockets and cannon ammunition and return-fire simulators
such as ATWESS and Hoffman charges.
• Combined arms integration. Integration of field artillery, armor, and
CAS should be considered for advanced table training.
• Threat. Incorporation of TRTG or ASET-IV equipment for advanced
tables should be considered.
• Detailed manpower. Tasked labor-force requirements internal and
external to the unit must be identified.
• Briefings. Prerange briefings on range administration, ammunition
handling, and range safety are needed.
• Aerial weapons scoring system. Is the system available during
scheduled range density? Has the range been surveyed for AWSS
installation?

RANGE SCHEDULING
3-16. Most installations hold a G3 range conference annually to schedule
range time. Representatives from all units using the range facilities will
attend and compete for range time. Based on the long-range calendar that
the units use (division, corps, or National Guard Training Center), the G3
personnel in charge of the conference provide information such as when units
will be deployed and in the field. These conferences schedule range time for
the installation range. Unit representatives at these conferences can meet
range schedulers from the different units using the range. Maintaining a
point of contact in the range scheduler’s office may be important if a
short-notice range requirement occurs and the unit must trade with the
occupying unit.
3-17. When scheduling a range, take into account the amount of time needed
to conduct the required training. Table 3-1 shows an example time sequence
for a range density. This example has dead time built into it. The unit,
therefore, may be able to make up time as the range progresses. Units should
try to schedule extra days for maintenance and weather makeups. Fourteen
days is the minimum to run a gunnery density that includes advanced table
training, not including AWSS setup time. This example is based on a
24-helicopter AH-64 battalion.

3-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

3-18. Although the example shown in Table 3-1 may be condensed to save
range time, a schedule that is too condensed will greatly reduce the training
value of rounds expended.

Table 3-1. Example of Time Sequence for a Range Density

DAY TABLE COMPANY REMARKS

1, 2 AWSS Setup
3 VI A Company A Co. completes Table VI,
B Co. starts Table VI
4 VI B Company B Co. completes Table VI,
C Co. starts Table VI
5 VI C Company C Co. completes Table VI, Table VI
complete

6 VI Makeup Table VI makeup,

VII DAY A Company A Co. ready for Table VII

7 VII DAY B Company B Co. first up,

VII NIGHT A Company A Co. completes Table VII
8 VII DAY C Company C Co. first up,
VII NIGHT B Company B Co. completes Table VII

9 VIII DAY A Company A Co. first up,

VII NIGHT C Company C Co. finishes Table VII

10 VIII DAY B Company B Co. first up,

VIII NIGHT A Company A Co. completes Table VIII

11 VIII DAY C Company C Co. first up,

VIII NIGHT B Company B Co. completes Table VIII
12 X (2X) A Company A Company completes Table X,
VIII NIGHT C Company C Co. completes Table VIII
13 X (2X) B Company B Co. completes Table X in A.M.,
XII A Company A Co. completes Table XII in P.M.
14 X (2X) C Company C Co. completes Table X in A.M.,
XII B Company B Co. completes Table XII in P.M.
15 XII C Company C Co. completes Table XII in A.M.
Makeup/WX
16
AWSS Teardown and Range Turn-in

Note: Actual range time requirements will probably increase especially with
the advent of the 12-engagement Tables VII and VIII.

3-4
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

MANEUVER AREA
3-19. A maneuver area is required to conduct dry-fire crew and team or
company tables. Its purpose is twofold. Without tying up valuable range
space, it allows the firing elements to practice tactics, techniques, and
procedures, short of actual live firing, required for gunnery training. Many
impact areas will not accommodate firing lanes and surface danger zones
large enough for large-scale advanced table training. Companies waiting for
their turn to fire on the range can conduct dry-fire training tables away from
the range complex.

FACILITIES REQUIREMENTS

Preplanning
3-20. A list of range facility requirements includes all of the permanent and
semipermanent fixtures required in the range areas. To avoid last-minute
problems, consider facilities requirements early, at least six months before
the projected training. Give primary attention to the following:
• Alternate emergency airstrips.
• Rearm points.
• Ammunition holding and storage areas.
• Control towers.
• Target arrays.
• Boresight and harmonization pads and targets.
• Emergency safing areas for weapons.
• Jettison areas.
• Maintenance areas.
• Refuel points.
Construction
3-21. Engineers may construct some facilities, and some may be prepared or
improved by the unit. For example, engineers may be able to install concrete
rearm pads for helicopter units. In addition, range control may install target
arrays tailored specifically for helicopter gunnery.

EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

Preparation
3-22. Consider equipment requirements during the planning and preparation
stage:
• Number of firing aircraft.
• Number of crews to qualify.
• Adequate numbers of working video recorders for firing aircraft.
• Adequate numbers of serviceable videotape cassettes for aircraft.
• Serviceable video players and monitors for scoring/review.
• Command-and-control radio nets.

3-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

• Range-control communication nets.

• Crash-rescue equipment.
• Medical-evacuation resources.
Adaptation
3-23. Units may expand this list. Depending on the installation, available
fixed facilities will vary. Some equipment must come from outside unit
resources. Plan early to avoid problems.

PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS

Initial Requirements
3-24. Filling personnel requirements is as important as filling facility and
equipment requirements. Units must integrate the gunnery training
program with the rest of the unit training calendar to ensure a coordinated
effort. The following are the main personnel required to conduct the live-fire
range, which will require additional preparation:
• Range officer in charge.
• Range safety officer.
• Laser range safety officer.
• Master gunner, chief of scoring.
• III/V platoon personnel.
• AVUM company and attached maintenance personnel.
3-25. These preparations are in addition to normal unit functions. For
example, the III/V platoon and the AVUM company conduct operations
similar to those found on live-fire ranges during field exercises. However, the
fast tempo of the live-fire range may require more command, control, and
communications functions than these elements normally employ.

Training
3-26. The positions listed above are important to the unit’s ability to perform
the range mission. These personnel may require specialized training before
the range. This training may include a rehearsal of the conduct of the tables
at the range. In addition, all unit personnel will brief their personnel in
detail on their specific responsibilities.

LOGISTIC REQUIREMENTS
3-27. Long-range forecasting and budgeting are required to ensure the
availability of logistical support during the desired training period.
Specifically, POL, ammunition, and armament repair parts require long-term
planning and preparation. Units will pay special attention to budgeting for
Class IX Air.

3-6
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

RANGE OPERATION
3-28. Effective range administration and operation are crucial to any firing
exercise. To conduct effective gunnery ranges, the unit must make a
coordinated effort to organize and operate a gunnery range efficiently.

Range Administration
3-29. Begin organizing a helicopter gunnery range by identifying an officer in
charge. The commander will appoint the OIC. The OIC must be a
knowledgeable, responsible officer who can implement safety and training
guidance during the operation of the range. The OIC must be familiar with
the local range SOP and safety requirements. A range control agency governs
most ranges. Units may obtain appropriate range limitations and directives
from the controlling agency.

Range Logistics
3-30. An effective range requires a great deal of support. Most logistical
support functions should be coordinated through the S4 in coordination with
the Class III/V platoon leader. These functions must include—
• Medical support.
• Mess support.
• Ammunition.
• Maintenance.
• Transportation for personnel around the range facility.
Range Communications
3-31. At least three radio nets are required to operate a helicopter gunnery
range: one net for range operation, one for air traffic control, and a
range-control net. VHF and UHF radio nets should be used in controlling and
evaluating the firing exercise. Units can use landlines effectively at the
ammunition points, maintenance points, and other facilities on the range.
The S3 section, along with communications personnel, is responsible for
communications on the range.

Range Organization
3-32. The final step in preparing a range for firing is to organize the assets
already mentioned. All resources should be placed so that each functions
smoothly.

Note: A unit cannot afford to have time on the range with no aircraft firing.
The unit must have good communication with the rearming area and the
assembly area. Rehearse the flow of aircraft before aircraft arrive at the
range.

3-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

SECTION II – PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES

OFFICER IN CHARGE
3-33. A range will not be operated without an OIC. The OIC is responsible
for all range operations. He supervises range personnel and enforces range
safety. Officers in charge should come from the firing unit’s chain of
command and operate according to AR 385-63. Most major range complexes
dictate OIC responsibilities and operate under strict SOPs.

Note: The OIC is not the unit commander. He is the commander’s

representative. Units may appoint an alternate OIC to relieve the OIC
during rest periods. Having an alternate available is especially important
during heavy day and night firing schedules.
3-34. Before live-fire operations, the OIC—
• Obtains a range briefing from the installation range officer as required
by local range regulations.
• Obtains clearance to fire from range headquarters and records the time
and the name of the person giving the clearance.
• Ensures that medical support required by the range SOP is present,
the range flag is up, and the range sweep is completed.
• Verifies that required personnel and equipment are present.
• Verifies ammunition loading by type and amount with the FARP.
• Checks communications and makes sure that backup communications
are available for live fire.
• Should be prepared to quickly control fires and have a plan to evacuate
aircraft, if fires spread; during the dry season, danger of grass and
brush fires exists. The range OIC must coordinate the fire-fighting
effort if required.
3-35. During live-fire operations, the OIC—
• Enforces table standards.
• Maintains positive communications with ground elements and
helicopters on the range.
• Supervises flight operations and safety procedures.
• Observes all range activities to ensure safety and efficiency.
• Observes and spot checks ground operations.
• Maintains a duty log.

3-8
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

3-36. After live-fire operations cease, the OIC—

• Closes the range with headquarters.
• Verifies that the range is closed and completes reports as required.
• Removes the flag, secures the buildings and tower, and polices all
operating areas.
• Releases tasked labor details to supervisors when firing is completed,
the last helicopter has departed the range, and work is complete.

RANGE SAFETY OFFICER

3-37. The RSO ensures safe operation of the range and assists the OIC. He is
familiar with the range SOP and the aircraft and armament emergency plan.
He is also aware of proper storing, handling, and loading of ammunition and
fuel and knows the duties of all range personnel. AR 385-63 contains RSO
prerequisites. The RSO—
• Observes range operation and reports unsafe conditions to the OIC.
• Conducts the safety portion of the range briefing for all range
personnel including aircrews, Class III/V personnel, and maintenance
personnel, as specified in the unit lesson plan.
• Inspects the firing line and parking and ammunition-loading areas.
• Ensures that vehicles, equipment, and aircraft are properly positioned
for safety.
• Provides input on the vehicle parking area and the organization and
operation of the refuel/rearm areas.
• Observes safety procedures during firing and ground operations.
• Inspects crash and rescue equipment and reports any deficiencies in
equipment or personnel training.
• Ensures that a preaccident plan is in effect and all affected personnel
are aware of it; ensures that range control has a copy of the
preaccident plan.
• Observes safety procedures of POL and armament personnel; checks
for any deficiencies in equipment or personnel.
• Maintains watch for foreign objects in the parking area or FARP.
• Ensures that knowledgeable EOD personnel are available.
• Ensures that a diagram is displayed at the central control point
showing the location of all range facilities, range-fan information and
flight routes, minimum altitudes, other impact areas, low-level hazards
to flight, and possible caution areas.

MASTER GUNNER
3-38. The master gunner is familiar with the unit range SOP, aircraft and
armament emergency procedures, and the local accident reporting
procedures. He ensures that assigned helicopter weapon systems are
operated using the prescribed procedures and applicable safety precautions.
He is familiar with the azimuth, range, and sector azimuth limits of the

3-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

range. He knows the standards. He is the commander’s primary scorer for

the gunnery tables. The master gunner—
• Observes the operation of the range and reports unsafe conditions to
the OIC or RSO; captures observations on range operation for the
after-action review.
• Ensures, along with the OIC, that helicopters fire the approved
scenario within range limits.
• Conducts the range according to FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) standards.
• Coordinates an evaluation cell to score gunnery tables; completes
required reports and produces required documents.

LASER RANGE SAFETY OFFICER OR NCO

3-39. For all laser range operations, unit commanders must designate, train,
and certify LRSOs or LRSNCOs. The LRSO or LRSNCO will—
• Be familiar with Chapter 19 and Appendix B, AR 385-63, and the FM
and TM applicable to the laser devices used.
• Brief unit personnel who work with laser devices on laser-related
hazards, safety devices, and malfunction procedures.
• Know the range fans, including elevations, firing position, and targets
used.
• Ensure that protective eyewear is used when required.
• Ensure compliance with unit and range SOPs regarding laser
operations and training.
• Maintain continuous communications with personnel on the range;
stop lasing immediately if communications are lost.

RADIO OPERATORS
3-40. The radio operators ensure that radios during range operations are
working properly. Radio operators must be familiar with the range SOP and
aircraft and armament emergency plan.

CLASS-III/-V OIC OR NCOIC

3-41. Early in the planning process, the Class-III/-V OIC or NCOIC
coordinates resource requirements. He ensures that adequate fuel and
ammunition are available for training.
3-42. In addition, the Class-III/-V OIC or NCOIC conducts classes in
coordination with the master gunner to educate the unit air and ground
crews on identifying and properly loading ammunition. Units can hold these
classes both before and during range operations.
3-43. The Class-III/-V platoon establishes the FARP. It coordinates the
drawing, transportation, storage, and dispersal of ammunition and explosive
devices on the range. The platoon leader ensures that each aircraft receives
the prescribed load of ammunition. The platoon leader also develops a plan
for disposal of nonfunctional ammunition and ensures that unit
aircraft/weapons do not use restricted or suspended lots of ammunition in

3-10
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

training. The Class III/V platoon leader or platoon sergeant reviews and
enforces the following safety precautions:
• Personnel must approach and depart the vicinity of the helicopter from
the side and only after visual approval from the pilot in the helicopter.
• The last person to leave the vicinity of the helicopter gives an
“all-clear” signal to the pilot.
• Personnel remain clear of loaded weapon danger areas at all times.
• The weapon system is secured before anyone enters or leaves the
helicopter or as directed by the pilot.
• Personnel remain clear of weapon system areas during boresighting.
• Aircrews check weapon systems only when the master arm
switch/button is in the SAFE position/condition as directed in the
appropriate TM.
• Smoking is not allowed within 50 feet of ammunition or the helicopter.
• Personnel use available protective devices such as hearing protectors.
• Loose equipment near the arming pads is secure before helicopter
takeoff or landing.
• Units police and turn in ammunition casings and dunnage.
• Units close out Class-III/-V accounts and clear the FARP as required.
Note: FM 3-04.112(FM 1-112) and FM 3-04.114(FM 1-114) cover FARP
operations.

This section implements STANAG 3117.

SECTION III – HELICOPTER GUNNERY RANGE SAFETY

GROUND SAFETY
3-44. Ground-support personnel must be constantly aware of the dangers
involved in live-fire training. The training of support personnel in
ammunition care and handling is a continuous process at the unit level. All
ammunition storage, handling, and basic safety procedures will follow
guidelines in ARs 385-62, 385-63, and 385-64; local regulations/the range
SOP; Appendix E of this manual; and the unit SOP. Chapter 5 describes
ammunition characteristics. Units will train their ground personnel in the
procedures for working near operating helicopters. Ammunition loading
areas may be separate from refueling areas. In addition, units will train/drill
their support personnel on emergency situations related to their duties. The
rules for ground safety are as follows:
• Personnel must avoid main and tail rotors, turret weapon systems, and
wing store fore and aft blast areas during aircraft operation.
• Personnel will approach the helicopter from the 90-degree side position
only after receiving visual approval from the aircrew.
• Crews will not move their helicopter until an armorer moves out of the
main rotor arc at the 90-degree side position and signals “all clear.”

3-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

• Before departing the arming or dearming area for the home station,
support personnel will remove all ammunition from the helicopter; the
pilot-in-command will check the aircraft to ensure that it is safe and
cleared of all ammunition.
• Ground crews must ground the helicopter before performing any
maintenance and before the aircrew enters or exits the helicopter.
• All personnel working on or near the helicopter will have their sleeves
rolled down.
• All personnel will use eye and hearing protection.
• During night operations, ground personnel will carry a flashlight or
similar lighted device when working near the helicopter.
• To maintain communications between the aircrew and armorers
servicing the armament subsystems, personnel should use the
intercom system and practice common hand signals; Figure 3-1 shows
ground hand signals.

FIRING SAFETY
3-45. ARs 385-62 and 385-63 contain range safety requirements for firing
helicopter weapon systems. Safety requirements for firing are as follows:
• Leaders will inspect individual weapons.
• The OIC or his representative will give clearance before arming
weapons.
• Weapons are pointed downrange and within range-fan limits.
• Ground personnel are not in front of the weapons or in the back-blast
area.
• No other aircraft are within the surface danger area.
• Crews will not fire weapons closer than the minimum safe slant range.
• Units will consider and control laser range finders and designators as
weapons.
3-46. The rules for firing safety are as follows:
• During range operations, armament subsystems will be pointed
downrange or away from populated areas, whenever possible.
• Armament subsystems are considered safe for range traffic pattern
operations under safe or standby conditions (see the note below).
• Crews may place armament subsystems in the ARM position/condition
if the helicopter is pointed downrange at the firing point and no other
aircraft are in the surface danger zone. (Laterally parked helicopters
may be cleared for formation firing and team training.)
• The PC is responsible for operating and positioning the arming switch.
Note: Refer to the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual for aircraft
weapons safing techniques. Even if the master arm switch is in the safe
position, the weapon may still be functional and dangerous to ground crews.

3-12
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

Figure 3-1. Ground Hand Signals

3-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 3-1. Ground Hand Signals (Concluded)

3-14
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

AIRCRAFT EMERGENCY PLAN

3-47. The aircraft emergency plan prescribes the procedures to be followed if
an aircraft emergency (accident, incident, or inadvertent firing) occurs during
range firing. The aircraft emergency plan should provide for immediate
accident notification to the OIC and RSO. The range OIC will ensure that
mishaps are reported according to local policies.

SECTION IV – RANGE LAYOUT

CONSIDERATIONS
3-48. Construct firing lanes so that targets are clear of obstructions and
clearly visible to aircrews. To facilitate boresighting and response to
emergency situations, the first 500 meters of a firing lane should be clear and
relatively flat.
3-49. The start-fire line must be clearly marked and visible from the air. For
control purposes, the start-fire line should be visible from the range tower or
control point. Landing pads on the firing line should be clearly marked for
both day and night landings. In addition, range limits must be clearly visible
to aircrews and controllers.
3-50. TC 25-8 contains specifications for suitable helicopter gunnery range
targets. By referring to the gunnery tables, the proper target silhouettes for
each engagement can be manufactured and placed on the range. Do not settle
for targets that are not full scale. Reduced-scale targets degrade target
acquisition by the aircrew.

MULTIPURPOSE RANGE COMPLEX

3-51. Multipurpose ranges are fully automated and instrumented with
state-of-the-art targets and controlling devices. MPRCs are primarily
designed for armored and mechanized infantry, but they can accommodate
helicopter gunnery. Commanders should plan their gunnery programs to
integrate helicopter gunnery into combined-arms training. TC 25-8 contains
more information on training in a multipurpose range complex.
3-52. The MPRC consists of an area of about 1,000 meters by 4,500 meters. It
employs remote target systems and stationary and moving targets.
3-53. Helicopters are restricted to specific firing points, altitudes, and
ranges.
3-54. If aircrews use live-fire, nondud-producing ammunition, and
MILES/AGES laser engagements, the MPRC can support training as
outlined in AR 350-1 and FM 7-0(FM 25-100).

AERIAL WEAPONS SCORING SYSTEM

3-55. The Aerial Weapon Scoring System is an assemblage of
computer-controlled sensors that can accurately score cannon, machine-gun,
and rocket engagements. With the integration of the Laser Aim Scoring

3-15
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

System, the system also can “score” autonomous or remote laser designators
used with the Hellfire training missile. The AWSS is mobile and can be
transported in trailer-size enclosures to installations or training areas
approved for AWSS operations. Contractors operate and maintain the AWSS
administered by the logistics directorate of STRICOM.
3-56. Units request AWSS support through MACOMs or the National Guard
Bureau. FORSCOM, USARPAC, and USAR units will request the AWSS
through the FORSCOM aviation office. National Guard units will request the
AWSS through their aviation liaison office at FORSCOM. Units in
USAREUR schedule the AWSS through the 7th Army Training Command.
The AWSS is not compatible with high-explosive service ammunition; units
may use only training munitions with the system.
3-57. AWSS support personnel must conduct a range survey to determine
sensor locations with respect to targets/target effect areas before AWSS
operations begin. Normally, the contractor will survey a range only once
unless new targets are installed or moved.
3-58. The AWSS consists of a ballistic scoring subsystem (used with cannon
and machine gun), rocket scoring subsystem (used with point-detonating and
MPSM rockets), laser-designator scoring (used with the Hellfire training
missile), and computer control subsystem.

BALLISTIC SCORING SUBSYSTEM

3-59. The BSS consists of Doppler radar sensors located in front of the target.
These sensors count 7.62-millimeter, 20-millimeter, 30-millimeter, and
.50-caliber hits and transmit hit information, via radio data link, to the
control subsystem.

DETONATION SCORING SUBSYSTEM

3-60. The DSS consists of acoustical sensors located at surveyed points with
respect to the rocket TEA. The sensors detect detonations of training rockets
and rocket submunitions and locate their points of impact in the target effect
area. The system then transmits this information to the computer control
subsystem for processing and tabulation.

LASER AIM SCORING SYSTEM

3-61. The LASS is the result of an engineering change proposal applied to
the AWSS to “score” the tactical laser designator when used with the captive
Hellfire training missile. It detects the location and intensity of laser energy
striking a surface of a target. Within this operation, it also measures (times)
the duration of energy on the target and detects laser underspill/overspill.
The USAREUR AWSS has an operational LASS; the two CONUS-based
AWSSs are undergoing LASS retrofit.

Note: Units will use the LASS target for missile engagements/laser
verification only because it will not work properly if its associated target has
30-millimeter/rocket holes in it.

3-16
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

COMPUTER SCORING SUBSYSTEM

3-62. The CSS consists of processor units and monitors located in an
environmental enclosure (usually a trailer) near the range-control tower. The
scoring system receives information from the ballistics and rocket scoring
subsystems via a communications data link, processes that information,
displays the results visually, and provides hard copy for the master
gunner/commander.
3-63. The AWSS has some unique system characteristics and associated
scoring limitations. The battalion or squadron master gunner should arrange
for the AWSS site manager to brief the aircraft crews before any firing begins
especially if the unit has never used the AWSS or if most of the crews are not
familiar with the AWSS.
3-64. Units will complete the AWSS scheduling process through their
MACOM. USAAVNC will only approve an alternate scoring method (ASM)
for a specific range when the AWSS is not available to the firing unit.
USAAVNC and the installation/unit will maintain a copy of the ASM request
and approval. Any ASM must, at a minimum, meet the following criteria:
• Provide scoring coverage of the entire TEA for rocket engagements or
target/target array for cannon/machine-gun engagements.
• Be continuously observable, if a visual/audio-visual method is used.
• Be recordable in video or on paper.
3-65. Contact the USAAVNC Directorate of Training, Doctrine, and
Simulation (DOTDS), Gunnery Branch, Gunnery and Applied Tactics
Division, at DSN 558-2755/2691 or commercial (334) 255-2755/2691 to
initiate a request for an ASM.

ATTACK HELICOPTER GUNNERY RANGE

3-66. The AHGR allows an attack helicopter battalion or cavalry squadron to
conduct company-level helicopter gunnery operations. While this range
complex does not exist, it is being reviewed for possible future construction.
Figure 3-2 shows an example of an attack helicopter gunnery range.

3-17
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 3-2. Attack Helicopter Gunnery Range

3-67. The proposed maneuver and firing box for the AHGR is 3,000 meters
wide by 2,000 meters long. The adjacent target area is 3,000 meters wide by
10,000 meters long. A firing area of this size allows an entire attack company
or air cavalry troop to navigate, maneuver, and conduct live-fire training.
The AHGR allows crews to shoot current munitions at maximum ranges. The
AHGR allows units to deploy to the training area and be objectively
evaluated on helicopter gunnery proficiency on the fully instrumented
AHGR.

3-18
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

SECTION V – SUCCESSFUL TRAINING

BRIEF KEY PERSONNEL

3-68. Before moving to the training site, the S3 and master gunner should
brief key personnel on the setup of the site. They should also brief on how to
react to problems that may occur during setup.

START ON TIME
3-69. The training site should be ready and the communications set up early
so that crews can begin firing on time. Plan operations for no interruptions of
training for maintenance on the range until a prearranged time or normal
shutdown time. Sufficient targets must be available to complete all scheduled
training before the scheduled break. Short breaks to replace damaged targets
are unavoidable. Try to minimize downtime. Range control must have plenty
of backup targets ready for use.

KEEP A LOG
3-70. The OIC will maintain an accurate log or staff journal. A log will help
keep the OIC better informed of dry- and live-firing times and other
important events. The log should contain at least the following entries:
• When the unit occupied the range.
• When (at what time) range control gives permission for live fire.
• The name of the person at range control granting permission to fire.
• When the range was in a cease-fire status and the reason for cease-fire.
• When the unit opens/reopens the range.
• Locations and times of stray impacts.
• Crew identification and table-fired start and stop times (the OIC must
keep track of which crews have fired).
• Reason for incomplete tables such as maintenance, unexploded
ordnance, and weather.
• When the unit cleared and departed the range.
• Shift changes.
• VIPs or senior officers visiting the range.

CHANGE GUARDS
3-71. Prepare a plan to check and change guards frequently. Units will brief
each guard on his job and its importance. Ensure that the guard understands
the instructions.

3-19
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

POLICE CONTINUOUSLY
3-72. Keep the range area clean at all times. Police the range area
continuously to avoid lengthy cleanup during range turn-in. This policing will
also aid in FOD prevention.

BRIEF VISITORS
3-73. Senior officers may arrive on the range unannounced. Have a plan for
briefing visitors on the range operation. Designate a briefing officer or NCO.
3-74. Build a professional, concise range briefing book. It should contain the
following information:
• Names, ranks, and telephone numbers (to include the number of
portable telephones and pagers) of the unit chain of command and
important range personnel.
• Training objectives for the range.
• Schedule for range training.
• A short memo outlining the objectives and standards for the training.
• MOI for the range.
• Diagrams of the firing points.
• A copy of this FM.
3-75. Ensure that the briefing officer or NCO knows which actions to take
with the visitor.

PLAN AIRCRAFT EVACUATION

3-76. The AVUM commander must have a plan to evacuate disabled or
damaged aircraft from the range and the rearm/refuel area. A precautionary
landing on the range or in the FARP can stop firing for a long time unless a
plan is in place to remove the aircraft.

3-20
 Chapter 4

Ballistics
Ballistics is the science of the motion of projectiles and the conditions that
influence their motion. The four types of ballistics influencing projectiles
fired from helicopters are interior, exterior, aerial, and terminal. Each
type produces dispersion, which is the degree that projectiles vary in
range and deflection about a target.

INTERIOR BALLISTICS
4-1. Interior ballistics deals with characteristics that affect projectile motion
inside the barrel or rocket tube. It also includes effects of propellant charges
and rocket-motor combustion. These characteristics affect the accuracy of all
aerial-fired weapons. Aircrews cannot compensate for these characteristics
when firing free-flight projectiles. The information below covers the
characteristics of interior ballistics.

BARREL WEAR
4-2. Gaseous action, propellant residue, and projectile motion wear away the
inner surface of the barrel or cause deposits to build up. These conditions
result in lower muzzle velocity or a decrease in accuracy or both.

PROPELLANT CHARGES
4-3. Production variances can cause differences in muzzle velocity and
projectile trajectory. Temperature and moisture in the storage environment
can also affect the way that propellants burn.

PROJECTILE WEIGHT
4-4. The weight of projectiles of the same caliber may vary. The variance is
most noticeable in linked-ball projectiles. These variations do not greatly
influence trajectory.

LAUNCHER TUBE ALIGNMENT

4-5. The internal or end bulkhead of the rocket launcher aligns individual
rocket launcher tubes. However, the precise alignment of each tube may
vary. Because of variances in alignment, the launcher boresight also varies
from tube to tube. Proper boresighting of the launcher should include
checking the boresight of several tubes and selecting the one that best
represents the alignment of the entire launcher.

THRUST MISALIGNMENT
4-6. A perfectly thrust-aligned free-flight rocket does not exist. Real
free-flight rockets have an inherent thrust misalignment, which is the

4-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

greatest cause of error in free flight. Spinning the rocket during motor burn
reduces the effect of thrust misalignment.
4-7. Firing rockets at a forward airspeed above ETL provides a favorable
relative wind, which helps to counteract thrust misalignment. When a rocket
is fired from a hovering helicopter, the favorable relative wind is replaced by
an unfavorable and turbulent wind caused by rotor down wash. This
unfavorable relative wind results in a maximum thrust misalignment and a
larger dispersion of rockets.
4-8. Rockets spin to counteract thrust misalignment. Rockets with MK 66
motors exhibit less dispersion in the target effect area than those with MK 40
motors according to data provided by Rock Island Arsenal, Illinois.

EXTERIOR BALLISTICS
4-9. Exterior ballistics deals with characteristics that influence the motion of
the projectile as it moves along its trajectory. The trajectory is the flight path
of the projectile as it flies from the muzzle of the weapon to the point of
impact. Aerial-fired weapons have all of the exterior ballistic characteristics
associated with ground-fired weapons. They also have other characteristics
unique to helicopters. The information below covers the characteristics of
exterior ballistics.

AIR RESISTANCE
4-10. Friction between the air and the projectile causes air resistance, or
drag. Drag is proportional to the cross-section area of the projectile and its
velocity. The bigger and faster a projectile is, the more drag it produces.

GRAVITY
4-11. The loss of altitude of the projectile because of gravity directly relates
to range. As range increases, the amount of gravity drop increases. This drop
is proportional to time of flight (distance) and inversely proportional to the
velocity of the projectile. Crew members who fire weapons without FCC
solutions must correct for gravity drop. Table 4-1 shows gravity drop for
different projectiles.

YAW
4-12. Yaw is the angle between the centerline of the projectile and the
trajectory. Yaw causes the trajectory of the projectile to change and drag to
increase. The direction of the yaw constantly changes in a spinning projectile.
Yaw maximizes near the muzzle and gradually subsides as the projectile
stabilizes.

PROJECTILE DRIFT
4-13. When viewed from the rear, most projectiles spin in a clockwise
direction. Spinning projectiles act like a gyroscope and exhibit gyroscopic
precession. This effect causes the projectile to move to the right; this is the
horizontal plane gyroscopic effect. As the range to target increases, projectile
drift increases.

4-2
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

Table 4-1. Gravity Drop

APPROXIMATE MUZZLE APPROXIMATE

VELOCITY RANGE GRAVITY DROP
PROJECTILE (FEET PER SECOND) (METERS) (MILS)

7.62 2,800 1,000 7

millimeter

.50 caliber 2,900 1,000/1,500 9/18

30 millimeter 2,640 1,000/2,000 15/60

4-14. To compensate for this effect in aircraft without FCC solutions, the
gunner increases any correction—such as elevation, depression, or
deflection—to hit the target. To compensate for projectile drift, the gunner
establishes combat-sight settings or adjusts rounds toward the target. This
compensation is known as using “burst on target.” Figure 4-1 shows projectile
drift.

WIND DRIFT
4-15. The effect of wind on a projectile in flight is wind drift. The amount of
drift depends on the time of flight of the projectile and the wind speed acting
on the cross-sectional area of the projectile. Time of flight depends on the
range to the target and the average velocity of the projectile. When firing into
a crosswind, the gunner must aim upwind so that the wind drifts the
projectile back to the target. Firing into the wind or downwind requires no
compensation in azimuth but will require range adjustment.

AERIAL BALLISTICS
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
4-16. Characteristics of aerial-fired weapons depend on whether the
projectiles are spin stabilized or fin stabilized and whether they are fired
from the fixed mode or the flexible mode. The information below covers some
characteristics of aerial-fired weapons.

Rotor Down-Wash Error

4-17. Rotor down wash acts on the projectile as it leaves the barrel or
launcher. This down wash causes the trajectory of the projectile to change. A
noticeable change in trajectory normally occurs when the helicopter is
operating below effective translational lift.

4-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 4-1. Projectile Drift

4-18. Although rotor down wash influences the accuracy of all weapon
systems, it most affects the rockets. Maximum error is induced by rotor down
wash when the weapon system is fired from an aircraft hovering IGE, as
Figure 4-2 shows. Air flows downward through the rotor system and causes
the rocket to pitch up as it leaves the launcher.
4-19. When the rocket passes beyond the rotor disk, air flows upward and
causes the rocket to wobble. This air flow causes both lateral (azimuth) and
linear (range) errors.
4-20. When the aircraft is hovering OGE (Figure 4-2), the relative wind
strikes the rocket only from above after it leaves the launcher. This condition
decreases the lateral error. However, the velocity of the rotor down wash
increases because of the additional power required to maintain OGE hover,
which may increase linear dispersion.
4-21. High-density altitudes and heavily loaded aircraft further increase
linear dispersion. During IGE and OGE hovering flight, the true airspeed
vector of the helicopter affects the position of rotor down wash and the speed
of the down wash at the rocket launchers. For example, holding a position
over the ground during a right crosswind results in a true airspeed vector to
the right and a shift of the down wash to the left. This shift affects the left
rocket for a longer time during launch than it does the right rocket. The left
rocket also will pitch up to a higher quadrant elevation and go farther than
the right rocket. Detailed system testing has not shown that differences of
QE are required for right versus left launchers during hover fire.

4-4
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

IN-GROUND EFFECT OUT-OF-GROUND EFFECT

1. INDUCED FLOW VECTOR IS SHORTER. 1. INDUCED FLOW VECTOR IS LONGER.

2. ROTOR WASH HITS ROCKET TWICE: 2. ROTOR WASH HITS ROCKET ONLY
FIRST FROM THE TOP, THEN FROM THE ONCE.
BOTTOM.

LESS ACCURATE MORE ACCURATE

Figure 4-2. Rotor Down-Wash Error

4-22. To prevent a divergence of trajectories, the aircraft can drift with the
wind if the terrain allows. Drifting with the wind allows the aircraft to
remain stable and provides a more consistent rotor down wash for both
launchers.

Angular Rate Error

4-23. The motion of the helicopter as the projectile leaves the weapon causes
angular rate error. It affects most weapon systems. The exceptions are
Hellfire and Stinger missiles. For example, a pilot using the running-fire
delivery technique to engage a target with rockets at 5,000 meters may have
to pitch the nose of the helicopter up to place the reticle on the target. When
the weapon is fired, the movement of the helicopter imparts an upward
motion to the rocket. The amount of error induced depends on the range to
the target, the rate of motion, and the airspeed of the helicopter when the
weapon is fired. Angular rate error occurs when an aircrew fires rockets from
a hover using the pitch-up delivery technique. Anytime a pitch-down motion
is required to achieve the desired sight picture, the effect of angular rate
error causes the projectile to land short of the target.

SPIN-STABILIZED PROJECTILES
4-24. Certain ballistic characteristics are peculiar to spin-stabilized
projectiles fired from weapons with rifled barrels. These weapons include the
.50-caliber and 7.62-millimeter machine guns and the 30-millimeter cannon.
When fired in the fixed mode (straight ahead of the helicopter), the
projectiles generally have the same ballistic characteristics as ground-fired
weapons. However, relative wind changes; the velocity of the helicopter then
increases or decreases the velocity of the projectile. Information below covers

4-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

the ballistic characteristics influencing spin-stabilized projectiles fired from

positions other than a stabilized hover.

Trajectory Shift
4-25. When the boreline axis of the weapon differs from the flight path of the
helicopter, the movement of the helicopter changes the trajectory of the
projectile. For off-axis shots within +90 degrees of the heading of the
helicopter, trajectory shift causes the round to hit left or right of the target.
To correct for trajectory shift, the gunner leads the target. To lead the target,
the gunner places fire on the near side of the target as the helicopter
approaches. The amount of lead depends on helicopter airspeed, angle of
deflection, projectile velocity, and target range. Figure 4-3 shows trajectory
shift. Table 4-2 shows some examples of how to compensate for trajectory
shift.

Figure 4-3. Trajectory Shift

4-6
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

Table 4-2. Typical Lead Angles for a 60-Degree Deflection Shot at 1,000 Meters

APPROXIMATE MUZZLE HELICOPTER

VELOCITY VELOCITY LEAD ANGLE
PROJECTILE (FEET PER SECOND) (KNOTS) (MILS)

7.62 millimeter 2,800 100 51

.50 caliber 2,900 100 49

30 millimeter 2,640 100 64

Port-Starboard Effect
4-26. Trajectory shift and projectile drift combine to constitute the
port-starboard effect. When targets are on the left, the effects of drift and
shift compound each other; both cause the round to move right. To hit the
target, the gunner must correct for both ballistic effects by firing to the left of
the target. When targets are on the right, the effect of projectile drift (round
moves right) tends to cancel the effect of trajectory shift (round moves left).
Therefore, when targets are on the right, firing requires less compensation.
The range and airspeed at which a gunner engages a target determine which
effect is greater. For example, at ranges of less than 1,000 meters, trajectory
shift is greater. The gunner must fire to the right of the target. At ranges
beyond 1,000 meters, the effect of projectile drift is greater and tends to
cancel the effect of trajectory shift.

Projectile Jump (Vertical Plane Gyroscopic Effect)

4-27. When a crew fires a weapon from a helicopter in flight and the muzzle
of the weapon is pointing in any direction other than into the relative wind of
the helicopter, the projectile will experience projectile jump (Figure 4-4).
Projectile jump begins when the projectile experiences an initial yaw as it
leaves the muzzle. The yaw is in the same direction as the direction of
rotation of the projectile. The jump occurs because of the precession (change
in axis of rotation) induced by crosswind.
4-28. The amount that a projectile jumps is proportional to its initial yaw.
Firing to the right produces a downward jump; firing to the left produces an
upward jump. To compensate, the gunner must aim slightly above a target on
the right of the helicopter and slightly below a target on the left. The amount
of compensation required increases as helicopter speed and angular
deflection of the weapon increase. Compensation for projectile jump is not
required when the gunner fires from a hover.

4-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

FIRING TO THE LEFT FIRING TO THE RIGHT

BULLET
ROTATES Relative
CLOCKWISE Wind

BECAUSE OF PHASE
LAG, THE RESULTANT BULLET
BULLET
FORCE TAKES EFFECT JUMPS
JUMPS
90 DEGREES LATER IN DOWN
UP
THE DIRECTION OF
ROTATION

Figure 4-4. Projectile Jump

FIN-STABILIZED PROJECTILES
4-29. The ballistic characteristics affecting fin-stabilized projectiles are
important. They include the following characteristics.

Propellant Force
4-30. A bullet reaches its maximum velocity at or near the muzzle of the
weapon. However, a rocket continues to accelerate until motor burnout
occurs. As the rocket reaches its greatest velocity, the kinetic energy in the
rocket tends to overcome other forces and causes the rocket to travel in a
flatter trajectory.

Center of Gravity
4-31. Unlike a bullet, the CG of a rocket is in front of the center of pressure.
As the rocket propellant burns, the CG moves farther forward. The fins of the
rocket cause the center of pressure to follow the CG.

Relative Wind Effect

4-32. When a pilot flies a helicopter out of trim—either horizontally or
vertically or both—the change in the crosswind component deflects the rocket
as it leaves the launcher. Because the rocket is accelerating as it leaves the
launcher, the force acting upon the fins causes the nose to turn into the wind.
4-33. A horizontal out-of-trim condition results when a pilot tries to align the
sight on the target during a crosswind by cross controlling, or slipping, the
helicopter. For example, a pilot flies at 100 knots and maintains 10 degrees
out of trim with a quartering crosswind component of 10 knots. This
condition causes the rocket to turn into the relative wind after leaving the

4-8
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

tube. As the velocity of the rocket increases and the motor burns out, the
crosswind component decreases. After the motor burns out, the rocket drifts
with the air mass (real wind). If the pilot is unable to align the helicopter into
the wind, he must correct the gunsight upwind. While firing from a hover or
during slow flight, the pilot must make a downwind correction because the
rocket will turn into the wind.
4-34. A vertical out-of-trim condition results from an improper power setting.
This condition creates a vertical relative wind on the rocket during launch,
causing the rocket to turn into the wind. If the pilot fires the rocket while
applying power (as in a climb), the relative wind will be from above. The
relative wind will cause the rocket to hit beyond the aiming point. To
maintain a vertical trim condition, the pilot must maintain a constant power
setting that will produce the desired airspeed and altitude.

TERMINAL BALLISTICS
4-35. Terminal ballistics describes the characteristics and effects of the
projectiles at the target. Projectile functioning—including blast, heat, and
fragmentation—is influenced as described below.

IMPACT AND REMOTE-SET PENETRATION FUZES

4-36. Impact and remote-penetration set fuzes are employed on
high-explosive rocket warheads. The type of target engaged and its protective
cover determine the best fuze for the engagement. The M423 fuze is an
impact point-detonating fuze set on impact (used on the PD4 and 6PD
rockets). The M433 fuze provides remote-set selectable penetration setting
via the aerial rocket control panel or multipurpose display with RC4 and 6RC
rockets. Engage targets on open terrain with a super-quick fuze that causes
the warhead to detonate upon contact. Engage targets with overhead
protection, such as fortified positions or heavy vegetation, with either a delay
or forest-penetration fuze. Figure 4-5 shows that these fuzes detonate the
warhead after it penetrates the protective cover.

4-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 4-5. M433 Multioption Fuze/2.75-Inch High-Explosive Warhead

FIXED TIME AND REMOTE-SET/VARIABLE TIME FUZES

4-37. Timed fuzes produce airbursts. They are most effective against targets
with no overhead protection. Smoke (SK4) and illumination (IL4 and 6IL)
warheads incorporate a timed fuze, which depends on motor burnout or fixed
time delay. The range for this type of fuze is fixed. Remote range/variable
time set fuzes (M439 fuze) are in use for multipurpose submunition (6MP),
smoke (6SK), illumination, and flechette (6FL) warheads. The fuze set time is
variable as a function of target range for this type of fuze and can be set by
the crew in the OH-58D (Kiowa). The AH-64 Apache fire-control system
automatically sets the fuze for the appropriate fuze time of function,
depending on the warhead selected and range.

Timed Fuzes
4-38. The M446 fuze provides a fixed nominal 4.5-second delay. This fuze is
employed in the SK4 smoke rocket. The M442 fuze provides a fixed nominal
9-second delay fuze, which is employed in the M257 flare/illumination
warhead for both IL4 and 6IL rockets.

Remote-Set Fuzes
4-39. The M439 fuze provides for remote-set capability of from a 0- to
26-second delay, which is computed based on the ballistic solution. Typically,
the fire-control system will compute the fuze-set time, based on the range to
the target, and apply the correct range and height offset, based on the
warhead type. The 6MP (MPSM), 6SK (M264 smoke), and the 6FL (M255A1
flechette) use the M439 remote-set fuze.

WALL-IN-SPACE CONCEPT
4-40. Multipurpose submunition warheads provide a large increase in target
effectiveness over standard unitary warheads. The MPSM warhead helps to
eliminate range-to-target errors because of variations in launcher/helicopter

4-10
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

pitch angles during launch. The M439 fuze is remotely set from the aircraft
with range (time) to the target data.
4-41. Once fired, the initial forward motion of the rocket begins fuze time. At
the computer-determined time (a point slightly before and above the target
area), the M439 fuze initiates the expulsion charge. The submunitions eject,
and each ram air decelerator inflates. Inflation of the RAD separates the
submunitions, starts the arming sequence, and causes each submunition to
enter a near-vertical descent into the target area. Figure 4-6 shows the
wall-in-space concept.

Figure 4-6. Wall-In-Space Concept

SURFACE CONDITIONS
4-42. The surface of the target area—such as sand, rocks, or vegetation—
affects the lethality of the projectile. If super-quick fuzes are used against
targets covered by heavy foliage, they will function high in the tree canopy
but will be ineffective at ground level. However, the same fuze would be
effective against a target area with a sandy surface. To get maximum
effectiveness from the warhead, use the proper fuze for the surface condition.

WARHEADS
4-43. The type of target to be engaged determines which warhead to use. A
variety of warheads is available. The factors of METT-T help determine the
proper mix of warheads for the particular mission.

ANGLE OF IMPACT
4-44. The altitude from which the projectile is fired and the range to the
target determine the angle of impact and fragmentation pattern. Weapons
fired with a high angle of impact produce fragmentation patterns that are

4-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

close together. A projectile fired from NOE altitudes at the midrange of the
weapon forms an elongated pattern, with the projectile impacting at shallow
angles. As the range increases, the impact angle of the projectile increases.
The length of the fragmentation pattern decreases, while the width
increases. Figure 4-7 shows the angle of impact.

5,500 meters

Shallow Steep
DISPERSION

Figure 4-7. Angle of Impact

DISPERSION
4-45. If several projectiles are fired from the same weapon with the same
settings in elevation and deflection, their points of impact will be scattered
about the mean point of impact of the group of rounds. The degree of scatter
(range and azimuth) of these rounds is called dispersion. The mean point of
impact with respect to the target center, or intended aiming point, is an
indication of the accuracy of the weapon. Both dispersion and accuracy
determine whether a particular weapon can hit an intended target. Firing
rockets at short ranges can result in increased linear (range) dispersion and
normally decreases range accuracy. Firing rockets at longer ranges will
decrease linear (range) dispersion but will increase angular (cross-range)
dispersion. The errors inherent in firing projectiles cause dispersion. The
factors discussed in the ballistics paragraphs influence these errors, in part.
In addition, the vibrations/inaccuracies in the mount and condition of the
sighting systems may also influence these errors.

VIBRATIONS
4-46. Because mounts for weapons are fixed to the helicopter, vibrations in
the helicopter transmit through the mounts. These vibrations affect azimuth
and elevation.

SIGHTS
4-47. The condition of the sights and the accuracy of their alignment with the
bore axes of the weapons cause a displacement of the dispersion pattern of
the projectiles.

4-12
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

BORESIGHT
4-48. Proper boresighting of aircraft weapons is critical to accurate fires.
Improper boresighting is a factor in dispersion differences between like
aircraft.

APACHE-SPECIFIC BALLISTIC CONSIDERATIONS

4-49. The AH-64 Apache fire-control system automatically compensates for
various aspects of ballistics. The following is a brief summary of what it does
and how it does this in the fire-control computer or weapons processor with
the differences between the AH-64A and AH-64D identified. The AH-64
Apache 30-millimeter AWS and the 2.75-inch rocket system operate in two
modes: normal and fixed. Normal mode is the recommended mode of
operation because the gun turret is positioned and rocket pylons articulate
based on the commands computed by the fire-control/ballistic solution. In
fixed mode, the gun turret is positioned to 0-degrees azimuth and +6-degrees
elevation. Fire-control and ballistic correctors are computed and used to
position the fixed-mode reticle.

INTERIOR BALLISTICS

Barrel Wear
4-50. AH-64 pilots should be aware that gun duty cycle (heating and
associated expansion of the barrel material) will also affect muzzle velocity.
The pilot must follow the firing duty cycle guidelines presented in the
operator’s manual (dash 10) to both preserve safety and to retain proper gun
accuracy. The AH-64 computes ballistic offsets based on a nominal muzzle
velocity of 805 meters per second at 70°F for M788/M789 ammunition. The
muzzle velocity variable used in the ballistics calculations is further adjusted
based on the difference between 70°F and the actual ambient temperature
data received from the aircraft air-data system. However, no muzzle velocity
or temperature sensor is fitted on the AH-64 cannon. Variations between
computed and actual muzzle velocity can, therefore, adversely affect
accuracy, most notably at longer engagement ranges.

Propellant Charges
4-51. AH-64 pilots should recognize that propellant-burn variation, as a
function of ambient temperature, also significantly contributes to muzzle
velocity variations. It is addressed in the AH-64 ballistics algorithms via the
muzzle-velocity temperature compensation. Propellant charge variations, as
well as variations in ambient temperature, will manifest as increased
dispersion at longer engagement ranges.

4-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Launcher Tube Alignment

4-52. The AH-64D aircraft employs pylon interface units in each pylon
assembly and aligns each pylon for launch based on its independent error
sources as measured with the CBHK. A further consideration associated with
alignment accuracy is related to the M261 launcher. Specifically, the
launcher deflects appreciably when the rocket motors initially ignite and the
launcher holdback mechanism is not yet overcome. This phenomenon is most
pronounced when rockets are launched from peripheral tubes of the launcher
(outer ring).

EXTERIOR BALLISTICS

Air Resistance
4-53. The AH-64 ballistics calculations factor air-density ratio, based on data
received from the aircraft air data system, in the gun and rocket
time-of-flight calculations, which ultimately affect the aiming point
adjustment (ballistic correction). Projectile time of flight increases in denser
air masses. The opposite is true in thin air. Any increase in the munition
time of flight equates to a larger ballistic correction because of the effects of
gravitational “drop” (see the following paragraph).

Gravity
4-54. AH-64 pilots should note that the 30-millimeter velocity is highest at
barrel exit and decays rapidly as a function of range. The MK 66 rocket
achieves maximum velocity at about 500 meters from the launch aircraft.
Like the 30-millimeter projectile, its velocity decays rapidly thereafter.
Because gravity is a fixed value of 9.806 meters per second squared,
projectile time of flight is directly proportional to gravitational drop and
dictates use of progressively larger ballistic compensation as a function of
time to target. AH-64 pilots should note that the AH-64 ballistics
algorithms—and associated rocket and gun coefficients—automatically
address gravitational drop as a function of time of flight.

Yaw
4-55. Yaw instability cannot be quantified or compensated for completely;
however, spin stabilization minimizes yaw error. In the case of the AH-64 30
millimeter, spin stabilization is implemented via barrel rifling, which
imparts spin rate on the projectile while traveling down the barrel. Yaw error
is largest at muzzle exit because of tip-off, not lack of spin stabilization. Yaw
error is also introduced at longer ranges when the spin stabilization is
compromised because of decaying projectile velocity and angle of attack—the
round begins to corkscrew and eventually tumbles because of increased drag.
This phenomenon is most apparent at ranges beyond 3 kilometers. In the
case of rockets, the MK 66 motor flutes impart a high spin rate of more than
30 revolutions per second during the boost phase of motor burn (about one
second). Thereafter, the folding fins reverse the roll rate and sustain the spin
stabilization for the remainder of the munition free-flight profile. However,
not unlike 30-millimeter projectiles, tip-off error is also a major cause of yaw
instability in rockets.

4-14
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

Projectile Drift
4-56. The amount of projectile drift is proportional to the spin rate of the
projectile, which varies throughout the flight profile. AH-64 pilots should
note that the Apache ballistics algorithms compensate for this phenomenon.
The aircrew does not have to make adjustments.

Wind Drift
4-57. AH-64 pilots should recognize that wind-drift compensation is
performed automatically by the weapons processor or the fire-control
computer. In addition, AH-64 pilots should understand the following
important wind compensation considerations.
4-58. Munition Sensitivity. Rockets turn into the wind vector during the
motor-boost phase and drift with the air mass during the motor-coast phase.
The 30-millimeter rounds drift with the airmass throughout their free-flight
trajectory. The amount of projectile drift attributed to wind effects is directly
proportional to munition time of flight (which accounts for air-density ratio),
wind vector (angle), and wind magnitude.
4-59. Wind Compensation Characteristics. The fire-control computer or
the weapons processor translates longitudinal and lateral wind data received
from the aircraft air data system to the predicted LOS (where the target will
be at termination of munition-free flight). Because the air mass
characteristics are measured locally, the AH-64 ballistics algorithms apply
wind sensitivity adjustment to the aiming point as if the munition flew
directly to the target and the measured winds are constant from the aircraft
to target. However, as a function of increased range, gravitational effects
dictate that the munition be aimed well above the target to achieve intercept.
If the wind characteristics at these altitudes or target ranges do not reflect
that measured locally by the aircraft air-data system, appreciable error may
result. To illustrate, consider a 30-millimeter gun engagement at 150 feet
AGL with a slant range of 3 kilometers. In standard atmospheric conditions,
ballistics will apply a 9.06-degree elevation correction above the LOS to
achieve target intercept. In essence, the projectiles will achieve a peak
altitude of more than 1,000-feet AGL. Surface winds at 1,000-feet AGL can
differ dramatically from those at 150 feet, especially in an unstable air mass.
A similar condition exists with MPSM (6MP) and illumination (6IL) rockets
wherein the submunition payloads are deployed between 600 and 1,900 feet
above the target and exhibit high wind-drift sensitivity because of their slow
descent rate. The potential for large wind variations exists under certain
conditions.

AERIAL BALLISTICS (AH-64 APACHE-SPECIFIC BALLISTICS)

Rotor Down-Wash Error

4-60. Rockets are most sensitive to down-wash effects as compared to
30-millimeter projectiles. In essence, HIGE launch yields greater dispersion
because the aircraft cannot apply appropriate down-wash compensation.
Rockets pitch up in hover, whether HIGE or HOGE applies, because rockets
turn into the relative wind source during boost. The rotor down-wash
magnitude of the AH-64D varies greatly as a function of aircraft gross

4-15
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

weight. At 18,000 pounds, the down-wash magnitude is nominally 21 meters

per second, or 40 knots in stabilized hover. This wind source imparts a
significant angular error (pitch axis), depending on exposure time. At about
33 knots forward airspeed (indicated), the rotor disk is pitched forward so
that the influence vector is moved just aft of the rocket launcher front
bulkhead, thus reducing down wash to zero. During the transition to
rearward flight, down-wash magnitude initially increases because the rotor
disk is pitched aft and the rockets spend more time in the influence vector.
However, as rearward airspeed increases, the influence vector is translated
from an orthogonal component to a longitudinal component because the rotor
is tipped progressively more aft, thus reducing down-wash sensitivity. The
AH-64D ballistics algorithms automatically compute rotor down-wash
compensation for rockets based on aircraft gross weight, air density ratio,
and longitudinal true airspeed. However, this compensation assumes rocket
launch is initiated at HOGE altitudes. The AH-64A ballistic algorithms
similarly compensate for rotor down wash with the down-wash influence
diminishing as forward air speed increases; however, the down-wash value
does not vary depending on gross vehicle weight. The fire-control computer
on the AH-64A cannot compute changes in gross vehicle weight as the
aircraft expends fuel and munitions during a mission. The nominal value for
down wash when the aircraft is at a hover is 20 meters per second. As with
the AH-64D, the down-wash influence is reduced to zero with forward
airspeed of 30 knots. Down-wash compensation is not applied for the gun
because of the position of the muzzle with regard to the rotor disk and the
short exposure time of the 30-millimeter projectiles.

Angular Rate Error

4-61. The phenomenon is effectively negligible for 30-millimeter projectiles.
Angular rate error can affect rocket accuracy if rates are appreciable. The
articulating pylons address angular rates in the pitch axis up to 10 degrees
per second.

Lead Angle Compensation/Trajectory Shift

4-62. AH-64 pilots should recognize that compensation for this error is
accomplished automatically by the AH-64 ballistics algorithms when the
TADS or FCR (AH-64D only) serves as the selected sight. If TADS is the
selected sight, the AH-64D weapons processor employs a seven-state Kalman
filter-based target state estimator that determines actual target velocities
with respect to the TADS LOS. Likewise, if TADS is the selected sight on the
AH-64A, the fire-control computer employs a five-state target state estimator
that determines actual target velocities with respect to the TADS LOS. The
target state estimator uses aircraft linear velocity and body rate data from
the EGI, TADS LOS position from the TEU, TADS pitch and yaw rate inputs
from the TADS turret, and laser range data from the TEU to arrive at a
proper lead angle. (The AH-64D employs a laser range validator algorithm to
preprocess the laser-range data before use in the target state estimator.) In
essence, the target state estimator differentiates aircraft induced rates from
true target rates. Once true target rates are derived, the lead predictor
computes the appropriate lead angle based on computed time of flight of the
projectile from the ballistic algorithms. If the FCR is the selected sight, the

4-16
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

FCR provides target-velocity data as a function of scan-to-scan correlation. If

the FCR NTS target-velocity data are valid, the lead predictor is also called
and the appropriate lead angle is derived. In addition to computation of lead
angle, rate compensation is automatically applied to the pointing command
to address servo delays and transport delay latency associated with increased
target, ownship, or collateral rates. When the IHADSS is the selected sight
system, no lead-angle compensation is computed or added to the gun turret
or rocket pylon position command. With the IHADSS as the selected sight,
the target state estimator is not employed; therefore, target states (velocities)
are not known to compute the lead angle over the projectile time of flight.
However, the fire-control system will correct for projectile gravity drop and
drift based on the target range and LOS input into the ballistics to compute
the ballistic correctors and aircraft-unique correctors when deriving gun
turret-pointing commands. These correctors include the boresight, turret
bending, body bending, and rate compensation.

Projectile Jump
4-63. Projectile jump correction is indeed required in hover if a relative wind
exists. AH-64 pilots should recognize that compensation for aeroballistic drop
is accomplished automatically by first deriving the munition angle of attack
with respect to the wind vector and then applying the appropriate jump
correction to the aiming algorithm.

TERMINAL BALLISTICS (AH-64 APACHE-SPECIFIC BALLISTICS) REMOTE-SET OR

VARIABLE TIME FUZES
4-64. Fixed time-base fuzes detonate and release their payloads at a fixed
time after rocket launch. Fixed time-base fuzes are employed in the SK4 with
a 4.5-second time-of-function delay. The IL4, 6IL, and IL7 (CRV-7)
illumination rockets are employed with an associated function time of 9.0
seconds after motor burnout. Optimum release range is established as 3.5
kilometers for the 6IL and about 4.0 kilometers for the IL7 (because of
increased motor velocity). Airburst fuzes (M439) permit the host aircraft to
establish a variable time of function from 0.95 to 25.575 seconds. The
ballistic algorithms define the optimum fuze time-of-function value based on
conventional ballistics compensation, use of a prescribed range and height
offset associated with the payload, and submunition free-flight
characteristics. M439 fuzes are employed in the following rockets:
• MP7—CRV-7 motor, multipurpose submunition warhead (AH-64D
only).
• SK—CRV-7 motor, smoke warhead (AH-64D only).
• 6MP—MK 66 motor, multipurpose submunition warhead.
• 6SK—MK 66 motor, smoke warhead.
• 6FL—MK 66 motor, flechette warhead.

DISPERSION
4-65. AH-64 pilots should note that the nominal 30-millimeter
round-to-round dispersion is about 3 milliradians in a given burst using a
stationary target. The nominal MK 66 rocket unitary munition dispersion

4-17
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

exceeds 10 milliradians when fired from the aircraft. Turret bending is the
single largest contributor to perceived dispersion associated with the AH-64
30-millimeter cannon. Specifically, the airframe and gun-turret experience
flexure in response to sustained recoil. The AH-64 ballistics algorithms must,
therefore, employ a turret-bending compensation table to normalize this
adverse effect. The table, developed using multiple AH-64 aircraft, defines
the average “bending” trend at various azimuth and elevation-pointing
angles. No compensation is required for the first round in a burst because
recoil effects do not yet apply. The aiming point is adjusted for one-half of the
bending table value for the second round in a burst. Full table values are
applied thereafter until gunfire is terminated. Faulty recoil adapters are
another major source of round-to-round dispersion or aiming point biases. If
the recoil dampers (either or both) are incorrectly serviced or dysfunctional
altogether, a significant variation can exist in first, compared to subsequent,
round placement. Finally, excessive turret backlash and component wear also
contribute to dispersion and aiming point variations. The AH-64 aircraft
employs a gun dynamic harmonization algorithm that permits aircrews to
rapidly compensate for the error sources so that that most of the burst will be
placed on target.

MODES OF OPERATION
4-66. The AH-64 Apache attack helicopter employs two modes of operation
for the 30-millimeter AWS and 2.75-inch rocket systems: normal mode and
fixed mode. Normal mode is the recommended mode to use for engaging
targets. In either mode, the Apache fire-control system automatically
compensates for various aspects of ballistics, target and ownship movement,
lead compensation, atmospheric effects, and aircraft-unique corrections to
derive the azimuth and elevation pointing angles for the AWS turret and the
pylon command/steering cues for the rocket system. Aircraft corrections
include—
• Boresight.
• Parallax.
• Fuselage bending.
• Turret bending.
• Data latency.
• Rate compensation.
Normal Mode
4-67. When normal mode is selected, the AWS gun turret will be commanded
to slew to desired azimuth and elevation positions based on the computed
fire-control/ballistics solution. Likewise, when the rocket system is the
selected weapon, the pylons will articulate within the +4- to –15-degree
elevation limits with steering cues/rocket reticle provided to the crew for
azimuth alignment and elevation adjustment when the desired quadrant
elevation angle is beyond the limits of the pylon. When normal mode is
selected, the crew can make various sight/range source selections. Depending
on the selection made, there are benefits and limitations when the crew uses
the AWS or the rocket system. The paragraphs below address the sight/range

4-18
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

selections available, starting with the recommended acquisition/range source

to achieve the most accurate weapon solution through the other acquisition
sight and range sources with the limitations/degradations.
• Sight selection: TADS (IAT recommended over manual track).
• Range selection: Laser range, continuous (second detent).
4-68. The preferred engagement sight/range selection when the crew uses
the 30-millimeter AWS or 2.75-inch rocket weapon system is with the TADS
as the selected sight with IAT and the continuous laser range, normal mode
operation. The system will automatically compute target states, ballistic
correctors (projectile drop, drift, and TOF), based on the atmospheric
conditions, lead-angle compensation, rate compensation, and aircraft-unique
corrections. These corrections include boresight, turret bending, parallax
error, and body bending. Upon initial engagement/target tracking, the
target-state estimator will nominally take three seconds for the algorithms to
settle to provide an accurate target-state output for ballistic computation and
lead-angle compensation to accurately compute the gun-turret or
pylon-position commands. The TADS/laser range-finder combination provides
the most accurate solution because the target states (such as velocity) are
accurately estimated for use in the prediction algorithm that computes the
correct lead-angle command based on target movements over the computed
projectile time of flight to the target. To demonstrate the importance of the
target state estimation and prediction algorithm, assume that a target is
moving 10 meters per second at a range of 2,000 meters. The nominal time of
flight for a 30-millimeter round is 5.7 seconds to a range of 2,000 meters.
Therefore, the target would have moved—10 meters per second multiplied by
5.7 seconds equals 57 meters—about 1.6 degrees (27.9 milliradians). During
normal mode of operation, the fire-control system will automatically adjust
and correct for target and ownship motion, ballistic gravity drop, and drift
compensation as a function of ambient atmospheric conditions, ownship
correctors, rate compensation, and data latencies when the system computes
and outputs the turret and pylon position and rate commands.
• Sight selection: FCR (AH-64D only).
• Range selection: FCR range.
4-69. On the Longbow Apache when the FCR is the selected sight, the FCR
will send to the weapons processor (WP) next-to-shoot target NED
coordinates and target velocities computed by the FCR. With the target
velocities from the FCR, the weapons processor target-prediction algorithm
will be employed with the ballistic computation to compute the lead angle
similar to when the TADS/laser range is the selected sight/range source. The
design of the FCR is to detect and classify targets to provide target handover
data to an AGM-114L Hellfire missile. There are some inherent inaccuracies
in the FCR range, target-velocity estimation (FCR target velocity data
provided as a function of scan-to-scan correlation), and bearing when used for
30-millimeter AWS and rocket engagements.
• Sight selection: IHADSS.
• Range selection: Multiple (default, auto, navigation, manual, FCR, and
laser).

4-19
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

4-70. When the IHADSS is the selected sight for 30-millimeter AWS or
2.75-inch rocket engagements, the weapon-pointing performance will be
degraded because of the inherent inaccuracies of the IHADSS line-of-sight
pointing angles and not having a continuous target range source or accurate
target range, which is essential to compute an accurate fire-control solution.
With the IHADSS as the selected sight, the fire-control system software does
not execute the target-state estimator algorithm to produce estimated target
velocities; therefore, no lead-angle compensation is computed by the
prediction algorithms. This is critical if the ownship or target is moving. The
IHADSS allows the crew to rapidly engage a target using the IHADSS sight
because the gun-turret or rocket-pylon articulation/steering cues are a
function of the IHADSS LOS and target range selected/inputted with ballistic
correctors and aircraft-unique compensation computed to derive the
gun-turret and rocket-pylon drive commands.

Fixed Mode
4-71. Fixed mode is a selectable mode by the crew for the AWS gun. In this
mode, the AWS turret will be placed in a fixed position of 0-degree azimuth
and +6 degrees elevation. When fixed mode is selected, the same fire-control
algorithms are executed as in the normal mode of operation with the
differences being that a fixed-mode reticle will be displayed and positioned to
provide steering cues to the pilot based on the fire-control system output.
During this mode, the pilot has to maintain the reticle on the target. Not
maintaining the fixed-mode reticle on the target will degrade weapon
performance. The degradation is due to not having the aircraft properly
positioned to achieve the correct weapon pointing angle to accurately engage
the target.
4-72. Normal mode is the recommended mode of operation for the AWS and
rocket to reduce the pilot/CPG work load and error induced by having to
maintain the fixed-mode reticle on the target during an engagement with the
ownship or target maneuvering. Normal mode allows independent pointing of
the sight (LOS) and WAS turret without the pilot’s having to maintain the
fixed-mode reticle on the target, therefore increasing accuracy performance.

4-20
 Chapter 5

Munitions for Helicopter Weapon Systems

This chapter covers training munitions that are available through the
logistical system. A particular theater of operations may not have combat
or service munitions. The theater command or, in some cases, a specific
geographical area may require different types of munitions/different
packaging configurations. Some Department of Defense ammunition
codes are listed with the munitions that are described. Additional
identification codes may be necessary to distinguish the type of
munitions, series, warhead and fuze combinations, grouping sequence,
packaging, package quantity, and availability. Any munitions that cannot
be positively identified will not be loaded onto an aircraft, into a weapon,
or into the feed system. All munitions must be identified at the
ammunition supply or transfer point before receipt and distribution to the
unit.

SECTION I – LINKED AMMUNITION

TYPES OF 7.62-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION FOR THE M60/M60D/M240

MACHINE GUN
CHARACTERISTICS OF 7.62-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION
5-1. The 7.62-millimeter ammunition is percussion primed; chamber
pressure is 50,000 pounds per square inch for both the ball and the tracer.
Projectile weight varies from 142 grains (.32 ounce) for the tracer to 150
grains (.34 ounce) for the ball. Muzzle velocity averages 2,750 feet per second.
Figure 5-1 shows all 7.62-millimeter service and training ammunition
described below.

Ball (M80 or M59)

5-2. The M80 or M59 ball is used against personnel and unarmored targets.

Tracer (M62)
5-3. The M62 tracer permits observation of the trajectory of the projectile to
the point of tracer burnout or to the point of impact. It is also used for
incendiary effect and signaling. Tracer burnout occurs at about 900 to 950
meters.

Armor Piercing (M61)

5-4. The M61 armor-piercing projectile is used against light armor, concrete
shelters, and similar bullet-resistant targets. It is not intended for use in a
training environment.

5-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Frangible Ball (M160)

5-5. The M160 frangible ball can be used during initial training on the M60
machine gun. It can be fired on indoor ranges if the range is ventilated to
prevent buildup of toxic “bullet dust.”

Blank (M82)
5-6. The M82 blank is used for training exercises in weapons equipped with
blank firing adapters.

Dummy (M172)
5-7. The M172 dummy is used for weapon-loading practice and for testing
the weapon mechanism.

Figure 5-1. Types of 7.62-Millimeter Munitions

5-2
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

DODACS FOR 7.62-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION

5-8. The list below gives DODACs of linked ammunition for the M60 and
M60D machine guns. TM 43-0001-27 lists only one type of metallic link
(M13) for all 7.62-millimeter linked ammunition.
• 1305-A143—M80 ball, 100 per linked belt.
• 1305-A146—M62 tracer, 100 per linked belt.
• 1305-A131—M80 ball and M62 tracer (four-to-one mix), 100 per linked
belt.
• 1305-A147—M160 ball, frangible, 100 per linked belt.
• 1305-A159—M172 dummy, 100 per linked belt.
• 1305-A111—M82 blank, 100 per linked belt.

TYPES OF .50-CALIBER AMMUNITION FOR THE OH-58D KIOWA

WARRIOR
CHARACTERISTICS OF .50-CALIBER AMMUNITION
5-9. The .50-caliber ammunition is percussion primed; chamber pressure is
52,000 pounds per square inch for the tracer and 59,000 pounds per square
inch for armor-piercing ammunition. Projectile weight varies from 619 grains
(1.36 ounces) for the AP to 662 grains (1.45 ounces) for the ball. Muzzle
velocities vary from 2,700 feet per second for the M1 tracer to 3,400 feet per
second for the M23 incendiary. Neither armor-piercing nor incendiary
ammunition is intended for training environment use. Table 5-1 shows the
approximate time of flight and approximate ballistic drop with the M33 ball.
Figure 5-2 shows .50-caliber service and training ammunition described
below. Table 5-2 shows the hull and turret thickness of selected vehicles.

Table 5-1. M33 Projectile Ballistic Data (Approximate Values)

RANGE TO TARGET TIME OF FLIGHT BALLISTIC DROP

(METERS) (SECONDS) (MILS)

1,000 1.5 9

1,500 2.7 18

2,000 4.3 33

Ball (M2 and M33)

5-10. The M2 ball and the M33 ball are used against personnel and
unarmored targets. Muzzle velocity of the M33 is about 2,910 feet per second;
the muzzle velocity of the M2 is 2,810 feet per second.

5-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Tracer (M1, M10, and M17)

5-11. The M1, M10, and M17 tracers permit visible observation of the
in-flight path or trajectory to the point of impact. The M1 is limited to
training use in CONUS. The M10 exhibits a trace from about 100 meters
from the muzzle to about 1,600 meters from the muzzle.

Armor Piercing (M2)

5-12. M2 armor-piercing ammunition is used against lightly armored or
unarmored targets, concrete shelters, and similar bullet-resistant targets.

Incendiary (M1 and M23)

5-13. Impact with a hardened or armored target will cause incendiary
composition to burst into flame and ignite flammable material. The
incendiary charge of the M1 is 34 grains; the incendiary charge of the M23 is
90 grains.

Armor-Piercing Incendiary (M8)

5-14. M8 armor-piercing incendiary ammunition combines the function of the
AP and incendiary bullet. The incendiary charge of the M8 is 15 grains.

Armor-Piercing Incendiary Tracer (M20)

5-15. The M20 combines the functions of the AP and the incendiary and adds
a tracer element. The incendiary charge is 27 grains.

Dummy (M2)
5-16. The M2 dummy is used to practice loading. It is also used to test the
ammunition of the weapon-feed system and mechanical function.

Blank (M1 and M1A1)

5-17. The M1 and M1A1 blanks simulate firing in training exercises. The
M1A1 is used with the M2 machine gun and the M19 blank firing adapter.

Target Practice Ball (M858) and Plastic Tracer (M860)

5-18. The M858 ball and tracer are intended for scaled range training with
the M2 machine gun. The maximum range of this ammunition is 700 meters.
The tracer round provides trace from 20 to 150 meters. This target-practice
ball and tracer round is constructed of molded, high-density polyethylene
plastic.

5-4
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-2. Types of .50-Caliber Munitions

DODACS FOR .50-CALIBER AMMUNITION FOR THE M2 MACHINE GUN

5-19. DODACs for linked .50-caliber ammunition for the M2 machine gun
are as follows (some may be discontinued/there may be a newer series of
ammunition packaging applications):
• 1305-A555—M33 ball, 100 per linked belt.
• 1305-A572—M17 tracer, 100 per linked belt.
• 1305-A557—M33 ball/M17 tracer (four-to-one mix), 100 per linked belt.
• 1305-A576—M8 API/M20API-T (four-to-one mix), 100 per linked belt.
• 1305-A543—M20 AP-I-T, 100/linked belt.
• 1305-A598—M1A1 blank, 100/linked belt.
• 1305-A602—M858 TP/M860 TP-T (four-to-one mix), 100 per linked
belt.
Note: Only M2/M9 closed-loop links are used with the M2 machine gun.

5-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-2. Hull and Turret Thickness of Selected Vehicles

VEHICLE THICKNESS OF HULL THICKNESS OF TURRET

BTR-70 .40 inch 10 millimeters .28 inch 7 millimeters

BRDM-2 .56 inch 14 millimeters .28 inch 7 millimeters

BMP .76 inch 19 millimeters .92 inch 23 millimeters

BMD .60 inch 15 millimeters 1.0 inch 25 millimeters

ZSU 23-4 .37 inch 9 millimeters .35 inch 9 millimeters

TYPES OF 30-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION FOR THE AH-64 M230

CANNON
5-20. The 30-millimeter ammunition for the M230 cannon is electrically
primed; chamber pressure has been measured at 40,600 to 44,950 pounds per
square inch. Muzzle velocity is 2,640 feet per second for both the TP and
HEDP. Table 5-3 shows the approximate times of flight and approximate
ballistic drop for the 30-millimeter projectile. The information below covers
types of 30-millimenter munitions available. Figure 5-3 shows these types of
ammunition.

TARGET-PRACTICE M788 PROJECTILE

5-21. The M788 TP is an inert projectile without a fuze. It is used for
gunnery training instead of service ammunition. Its three-piece assembly
consists of a steel body with a cavity, a rotating band, and an aluminum nose.
The cartridge case is aluminum. This round serves no other purpose than
target impact or penetration.

HIGH-EXPLOSIVE, DUAL-PURPOSE M789 PROJECTILE

5-22. The M789 HEDP is an antimateriel and antipersonnel round. The
projectile body is steel. It is loaded with a 340-grain (.76-ounce) explosive
charge and a spin-compensated, shaped-charge liner that has a PD (M759)
fuze. The cartridge case is aluminum. The fuze arms while the projectile is in
flight and initiates the projectile’s explosive filler upon impact. The
shaped-charge liner collapses with detonation that creates an armor-piercing
jet. Fragmentation of the projectile body also occurs that can produce
antipersonnel effects within a 4-meter radius. Estimated penetration
performance was interpolated from a graph contained in a gun-system
effectiveness report. This report reflected penetration of more than 2 inches
(50 millimeters) RHA at 2,500 meters.

5-6
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

DUMMY (M848)
5-23. The M848 dummy is used for function checks of the weapon
mechanism. It also is used to test linking and delinking operations. It is an
inert cartridge with an anodized aluminum case and a modified TP projectile.
A threaded steel bolt on the M848 replaces the primer and the propellant to
maintain the same weight as the TP round.

Table 5-3. Approximate Time of Flight and Approximate Ballistic Drop for 30-Millimeter
Ammunition (M789 Fired From Hover)

RANGE TO TARGET TIME OF FLIGHT BALLISTIC DROP

(METERS) (SECONDS) (MILS)
1,000 2 15
1,500 3.7 32
2,000 5.8 60
2,500 8.6 100
3,000 12.2 160

Figure 5-3. Types of 30-Millimeter Munitions

5-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

DODACS FOR 30-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION FOR THE M230 CANNON

5-24. The following are the DODACs for linked 30-millimeter ammunition
for the M230 cannon:
• 1305-B120—M788 TP, 72 rounds linked.
• 1305-B118—M788 TP, 11-round carton pack.
• 1305-B130—M789 HEDP, 72 rounds linked.
• 1305-B129—M789 HEDP, 11-round carton pack.
• 1305-B134—M848 dummy, 72 rounds linked.
• 1305-B133—M848 dummy, 11-round carton pack.

SECTION II – ROCKETS

2.75-INCH ROCKETS
5-25. Hydra 70 is the name associated with the family of 2.75-inch
(70-millimeter) rockets. Hydra 70 refers to the Mark 66 rocket motor with
any warhead/fuze combination. The MK 66 rocket motor provides a common
2.75-inch rocket for helicopters and high-performance aircraft. The MK 66
Mod 1 can be inadvertently ignited by electromagnetic radiation, especially
by radio frequencies found aboard Navy ships. Both the Mod 2 and Mod 3
have hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance filters. The Mod 1 and
Mod 3 are the standard motor for the Army. The Mod 4 is the standard motor
for all services. Mod 4 motors are similar in appearance to Mod 3 motors.
Figure 5-4 shows MK 66 rocket motors. Table 5-4 shows rocket-motor
comparison data extracted from TM 43-0001-30.
5-26. M260 and M261 launchers are required to fire the MK 66 rocket. They
have reduced system weight and provide remote-set fuze interface
capabilities. The M158A1 and M200 launchers are not compatible with the
MK 66 rocket motor.

5-8
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-4. MK 66 Rocket Motors

Table 5-4. Rocket-Motor Data

CHARACTERISTIC MK 66
Length without warhead 41.7 inches

Weight before firing 13.6 pounds

Motor burn time (77°F) 1.05-1.1 seconds

Average thrust 1,300–1,370 pounds

Average spin rate 9-10 RPS

Motor burn out 1,280 feet (397 meters)

Velocity at motor burnout 2,425 FPS

Maximum range at QE 42 degrees 8,700 meters

(MPSM warhead ground launch)

5-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

ROCKET WARHEADS (TACTICAL AND TRAINING)

M151 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE WARHEAD
5-27. The M151 HE is an antipersonnel, antimateriel warhead. It is
traditionally referred to as the 10 pounder. The bursting radius is 10 meters;
however, high-velocity fragments can produce a lethality radius of more than
50 meters. The nose section is constructed of malleable cast iron that is
threaded to receive the fuze. The base section is constructed of steel or cast
iron and is threaded so that it can be attached to the rocket motor. The base
section and the nose section are welded (brazed) together. Total weight of the
loaded, unfuzed warhead is 8.7 pounds, of which 2.3 pounds are composition
B4. The M151 can be used with M423, M429, and M433 fuzes. The body of
the warhead is olive drab with a yellow band and yellow or black markings.

M274 SMOKE SIGNATURE (TRAINING) ROCKET

5-28. This training rocket provides a ballistic match for the M151 HE
warhead. The casing is a modified WTU-1/B with vent holes or blowout plugs.
A modified M423 fuze mechanism is integral to the warhead. A cylindrical
cartridge assembly is in the forward section of the casing; it contains about 2
ounces of potassium perchlorate and aluminum powder that provide a “flash,
bang, and smoke” signature. The M274 weighs 9.3 pounds. The body of the
warhead is blue with a brown band and white markings.

M261 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE MULTIPURPOSE SUBMUNITION

5-29. The MPSM warhead provides improved lethality against light armor,
wheeled vehicles, materiel, and personnel. It has a plastic nose-cone
assembly, an aluminum warhead case, an integral fuze, an expulsion charge,
and nine M73 submunitions. The primary warhead fuze, M439, is remotely
set with the ARCS, MFD, or RMS to provide range settings (time of flight)
from 500 meters to about 7,000 meters. The body of the warhead is olive drab
with a yellow band and yellow markings.
5-30. Initial forward motion of the rocket begins the fuze timing. The
expulsion charge is initiated at a point before and above the target, about 150
meters, depending on the launch angle. The submunitions are separated by
ejection; arming occurs when the ram air decelerator deploys. The RAD
virtually stops forward velocity and stabilizes the descent of the
submunition. An M230 omnidirectional fuze with an M55 detonator is used
on each submunition and functions, regardless of the impact angle.
5-31. Each submunition has a steel body that has a 3.2-ounce shaped charge
of composition B4 for armor penetration. The submunition is internally
scored to optimize fragments against personnel and materiel. Upon
detonation, the shaped charge penetrates in line with its axis and the
submunition body explodes into high-velocity fragments (about 195 at 10
grains each, up to 5,000 feet per second) to defeat soft targets. The fuzed
weight of the M261 is 13.6 pounds.

5-10
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Approximate Target-Area Coverage

5-32. Figure 5-5 shows the approximate target-area coverage of one M261
warhead. At shorter ranges, the RAD takes longer to overcome momentum,
increasing dispersion. As range increases, the rocket loses momentum,
increasing the effectiveness of the RAD. This increased effectiveness reduces
submunition drift and ground dispersion. Trees, rocks, and other natural or
man-made structures within the target area may cause the submunition to
detonate or land in a dispersion pattern other than the one shown in Figure
5-5.

Probability-of-Impact Angle
5-33. Aerodynamic forces affecting submunitions during vertical descent may
prevent them from landing upright (0 degrees off center). A submunition will
land 5 degrees off center 66 percent of the time; a submunition will land 30
degrees off center 33 percent of the time.

MPSM Lethality Potential

5-34. Each M73 HE submunition has a shaped charge that can penetrate
more than 4 inches of armor. A submunition that lands 5 degrees off center
has a 90-percent probability of producing casualties against prone, exposed
personnel, within a 20-meter radius. A submunition landing 30 degrees off
center has a 90 percent probability of producing casualties within a 5-meter
radius.

Figure 5-5. Approximate Target Coverage of One M261 Warhead

5-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

M267 MPSM SMOKE SIGNATURE (TRAINING) WARHEAD

5-35. The M267 MPSM training warhead operationally, physically, and
ballistically matches the M261. Three M75 practice submunitions and six
inert submunition load simulators take the place of the nine HE
submunitions in the M261 warhead. Each practice submunition contains
about 1 ounce of pyrotechnic powder. An M231 fuze with an M55 detonator is
used with practice submunitions. The body of the warhead is blue with a
brown band and white markings.

M257 ILLUMINATION WARHEAD

5-36. The M257 illumination warhead provides one-million candlepower for
100 seconds or more. It can illuminate an area of more than 1 square
kilometer at optimum height. A deployed main parachute descent is about 15
feet per second. An M442 integral fuze provides a standoff range of about
3,000 meters with the MK 40 motor and about 3,500 meters with the MK 66
motor. The M257 weighs 10.8 pounds, of which 5.4 pounds are magnesium
sodium nitrate. The body of the warhead is olive drab with white markings.

M229 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE WARHEAD

5-37. The M229 HE warhead, an elongated version of the M151, is commonly
called the 17 pounder. The M229 filler consists of 4.8 pounds of composition
B4; it has the same fuzes as the M151. Its unfuzed weight is 16.4 pounds.
The body of the warhead is olive drab with yellow markings.

M156 WHITE-PHOSPHOROUS (SMOKE) WARHEAD

5-38. The M156 is primarily used for target marking and incendiary
purposes. It ballistically matches the M151; it is of similar construction.
Filler for the M156 is 2.2 pounds of white phosphorous with a .12-pound
bursting charge of composition B. The fuzed warhead weighs about 9.7
pounds. The M156 uses M423 and M429 fuzes. The M156 is no longer in
production; it may still be in the inventory, however. The body of the
warhead is light green with a yellow band and red markings.

M264 RED-PHOSPHOROUS (SMOKE) WARHEAD

5-39. The M264 smoke-screen warhead contains 72 red-phosphorous wedges
that are air-burst ejected over the intended target area. These wedges
immediately begin producing a nontoxic, high-density, rapidly spreading, yet
persistent smoke screen. The smoke generated by the 72 red-phosphorous
wedges blocks the entire visual spectrum as well as much of the infrared
spectrum. The smoke generated by 14 M264 rockets will obscure a 300- to
400-meter front, in less than 60 seconds for five minutes, in support of
ground forces. The warhead weighs 8.5 pounds, of which about 5.2 pounds
are red-phosphorous wedges. The warhead uses an M439 remote-set
electromechanical fuze that allows engagements between 1,000 and 6,000
meters. The body of the warhead is light green with a brown band and black
markings.

5-12
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

M247 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE WARHEAD

5-40. The M247 is no longer in production; however, some of these warheads
may still be in war-reserve stocks. With a shape charge for an antiarmor
capability, the M247 employs a cone-shaped charge like that of the M72
LAW. The point-initiated detonating fuze (M438) is an integral part of the
warhead. The M247 weighs 8.8 pounds, of which 2.0 pounds are composition
B. The body of the warhead is black with yellow markings.

M255A1 FLECHETTE WARHEAD

5-41. The M255A1 flechette warhead contains 1,179 60-grain hardened steel
flechettes. It is used with the M439 fuze. It has possible air-to-air as well as
air-to-ground application. Figure 5-6 shows all current production warheads.
The body of the warhead is olive drab with a band of white diamonds and
white markings.

M278 IR ILLUMINATION WARHEAD

5-42. This warhead was designed for battlefield target illumination using
night-vision goggles. The flare warhead is assembled to the MK 66 rocket
motor in the field. The flare and rocket can be launched from either
fixed-wing or rotary-wing aircraft. The M278 provides an average near-IR
light output of 222 watts/steradian and less than 1,000 candlepower of visible
light. The IR flare will provide IR light for three minutes. Time to candle
ignition from launch is 13.5 seconds. The body of the warhead is black with
white markings.

Figure 5-6. Types of 70-Millimeter Warheads in Production

5-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

FUZES
M423 POINT-DETONATING FUZE
5-43. The M423 PD is an oblique, sensitive, point-detonating, super-quick
fuze used as a common component with the M151. The safety and arming
device forward of the booster housing (explosive charge) contains an
unbalanced rotor. Upon acceleration of the rocket at firing, a weight setback
occurs in the unbalanced rotor assembly that houses the primer and
detonator. This setback places the fuze into an armed condition when the
rocket has traveled about 52 to 110 meters from the launcher.

M433 RESISTANCE-CAPACITANCE FUZE

5-44. The M433 RC is a nose-mounted, multioption, time-delay fuze with
selectable functioning modes. A super-quick setting is used for open terrain;
a forest-penetration mode permits a selectable time-delay range (10 to 45
meters in 5-meter increments) set for the height of the forest canopy. After
first contact with the forest canopy, a delay timer is activated to provide
warhead functioning. The bunker- or building-penetration mode provides up
to 10 feet of penetration before detonation. A point-mounted probe switch
that is initiated by target contact activates the target-penetration RC timer.
An umbilical assembly is positioned on the nose of the fuze for interface
through the launcher and RMS or ARCS and the aircraft. When the trigger is
pulled, aircraft voltage is supplied to the fuze and the time delay is initiated
as selected by the pilot.

M439 RESISTANCE-CAPACITANCE FUZE

5-45. The M439 RC is a base-mounted, electronic-variable, time-delay fuze
with an RC delay circuit. Designed for cargo and flechette warheads, the
M439 allows the pilot to remotely set the fuze for airburst functioning at the
desired range from 500 to 7,200 meters. The RMS, ARCS, or MFD charges a
fuze capacitor through an umbilical assembly. The fuze has no internal
battery; the aircraft, through the remote-set fuze subsystem, supplies the
required voltage. When the rocket is fired and normal acceleration occurs,
the fuze is armed and timing starts. If the fuze is set but the rocket motor
fails to fire, the rocket should not be loaded into another tube and fired.
When the fuze is set a second time, the function time will increase for shorter
ranges and decrease for longer ranges. The fuze will maintain range input for
10 days. It should not be used for accurate range measurement until 10 days
have elapsed. The detonator is initiated electrically, depending on
the range setting (time of flight), and ignites the expelling charge. Figure 5-7
shows production fuzes.

M422/M446 FUZES
5-46. The M442 and M446 fuzes are base-mounted, airburst, motor-burnout
delayed fuzes. They are integral fuzes used with the M257/M278 illumination
and M259 white-phosphorus smoke rockets, respectively.

5-14
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-7. Types of 70-Millimeter Fuzes in Production

DODICS FOR ROCKETS

5-47. Table 5-5 lists the older DODICs for rockets (complete round with MK
66 motors) that are in the inventory. Table 5-6 lists the newer DODICs for all
available warhead/motor combinations. Also, note that the users are
indicated.

5-15
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-5. DODIC/NSN Cross Reference for Selected Hydra-70 2.75-Inch Rockets (Older NSNs)

DODIC NSN CONFIGURATION QUANTITY

H154 1340-01-371-8611 M278/M442/MK 66 Mod 2 3
H165 1340-01-269-1447 M261/M439/MK 66 Mod 3 4
H181 1340-01-249-7721 M257/M442/MK 66 Mod 1 3
H182 1340-01-249-7720 M257/M442/MK 66 Mod 2 3
H183 1340-01-268-7175 M257/M442/MK 66 Mod 3 3
H184 1340-01-289-4719 M264/M439/MK 66 Mod 3 4
H462 1340-01-309-5799 M255/M439/MK 66 Mod 3 4
H463 1340-01-108-8849 M267/M439/MK 66 Mod 1 4
H464 1340-01-108-8850 M261/M439/MK 66 Mod 1 4
H582 1340-01-269-9122 M151/M433/MK 66 Mod 3 4
H583 1340-01-269-9123 M151/M423/MK 66 Mod 3 4
H642 1340-01-309-8300 M229/M423/MK 66 Mod 2 4
H973 1340-01-238-2068 M274/ N/A /MK 66 Mod 2 4
H972 1340-01-238-2067 M274/ N/A /MK 66 Mod 1 4
H974 1340-01-268-7174 M267/M439/MK 66 Mod 3 4
H975 1340-01-269-1446 M274/ N/A /MK 66 Mod 3 4
H163 1340-01-108-8851 M151/M423/MK 66 Mod 1 4
H164 1340-01-110-2672 M151/M433/MK 66 Mod 1 4

5-16
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Table 5-6. DODIC/NSN Cross Reference for All Hydra-70 2.75-Inch Rockets—Newer NSNs

DODIC NSN CONFIGURATION PACK QTY USER PALLET PACK

H583 1340-01-379-6277 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 3 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA12 1340-01-446-7680 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
H583 1340-01-269-9123 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 3 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
HA12 1340-01-448-8889 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
H975 1340-01-379-7118 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Mod 3 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA13 1340-01-446-4094 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
H975 1340-01-269-1446 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Mod 3 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
HA13 1340-01-449-1240 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Mod 4 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
H165 1340-01-379-7814 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 3 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA14 1340-01-446-4095 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
H165 1340-01-269-1447 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 3 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
HA14 1340-01-448-8891 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 4 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
H974 1340-01-379-7889 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 3 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA17 1340-01-448-7506 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
H974 1340-01-268-7174 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 3 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
HA17 1340-01-448-7507 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 4 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
H183 1340-01-268-7175 M257 ILL Flare/M442 Mod 3 Wood 3 Army 45 per pallet
HA18 1340-01-448-8890 M257 ILL Flare/M442 Mod 4 Wood 3 Army 45 per pallet
H184 1340-01-286-4719 M264 RP Smoke/M439 Mod 3 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA15 1340-01-446-4097 M264 RP Smoke/M439 Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
H154 1340-01-371-8611 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 2 Wood 3 SOF 45 per pallet
HA10 1340-01-446-2905 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 4 Wood 3 SOF 45 per pallet
H163 1340-01-108-8851 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 1 Wood 4 SOF 60 per pallet
H583 1340-01-269-9123 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 3 Wood 4 SOF 60 per pallet
H642 1340-01-309-8300 M229 HE/M423 PD Mod 2 Wood 4 SOF 60 per pallet
HA09 1340-01-446-2902 M229 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 Wood 4 SOF 60 per pallet
H462 1340-01-309-5799 M255A1 Flechette/M439 Mod 2 Wood 4 SOF 60 per pallet
HA11 1340-01-446-2901 M255A1 Flechette/M439 Mod 4 Wood 4 SOF 60 per pallet

5-17
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-6. DODIC Cross Reference for All Hydra-70 2.75-Inch Rockets—Newer Items
(Concluded)

DODIC NSN CONFIGURATION PACK QTY USER PALLET PACK

H663 1340-01-014-5421 WTU-1/B Wood 4 Navy 192 per pallet
H812 1340-01-338-6482 M257 ILL Flare/M442 Metal 4 Navy 80 per pallet
HA06 1340-01-412-9346 M278 IR Flare/M442 Metal 4 Navy 80 per pallet
HA03 1340-01-416-1878 Mod 2 Metal 4 Navy 80 per pallet
HA07 1340-01-424-5819 Mod 4 Metal 4 Navy 80 per pallet
H812 1340-01-456-0978 M257 ILL Flare/M442 Wood 6 Air Force 90 per pallet
H872 1340-01-309-5799 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Wood -- Air Force 120 per pallet
HA06 1340-01-443-3583 M278 IR Flare/M442 Wood 6 Air Force 90 per pallet
J147 1340-01-154-1679 Mod 2 Wood 6 Air Force 90 per pallet
HA07 1340-01-446-4096 Mod 4 Wood 6 Air Force 90 per pallet
HA12 1340-01-446-7680 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA12 1340-01-448-8889 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
HA13 1340-01-446-4094 M274 Sig Prac Smoke Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA13 1340-01-449-1240 M274 Sig Prac Smoke Mod 4 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
HA14 1340-01-446-4095 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA14 1340-01-448-8891 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 4 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
HA17 1340-01-448-7506 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA17 1340-01-448-7507 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 4 Wood 4 Army 60 per pallet
HA18 1340-01-448-8890 M257 ILL Flare/M442 Mod 4 Wood 3 Army 45 per pallet
HA15 1340-01-446-4097 M264 RP Smoke/M439 Mod 4 Fastpack 48 Army 48 per pallet
HA09 1340-01-446-2902 M229 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 Wood 4 SOF 60 per pallet
HA10 1340-01-446-2905 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 4 Wood 3 SOF 45 per pallet
HA11 1340-01-446-2901 M255A1 Flechette/M439 Mod 4 Wood 4 SOF 60 per pallet
HA03 1340-01-416-1878 Mod 4 Metal 4 Navy 60 per pallet
HA06 1340-01-412-9346 M278 IR Flare/M442 Metal 4 Navy 60 per pallet
HA07 1340-01-424-5819 Mod 4 Metal 4 Navy 60 per pallet
HA06 1340-01-443-3583 M278 IR Flare/M442 Wood 6 Air Force 90 per pallet
HA07 1340-01-446-4096 Mod 4 Wood 6 Air Force 90 per pallet

5-18
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

SECTION III – MISSILES

MISSILE CONFIGURATIONS
5-48. The Hellfire surface-attack guided missile is available in three
configurations: dummy, training, and tactical. The two basic tactical missile
types are semiactive laser and radar frequency. AGM-114A through C and F
missiles are SAL 1; the AGM-114K missile is designated SAL 2. All Hellfire
missiles are 7 inches in diameter and have a wingspan of 12.9 inches. The
missile, depending on the model, weighs from 100 to 108 pounds with an
overall length of from 64 to 71 inches. The following are the color codes and
data markings for the Hellfire missile:
• The basic color of missile is black.
• Data markings are olive drab.
• Markings on the aft end are four brown 3-inch squares, 90 degrees
apart (brown means solid propellant).
• Markings on the end of the warhead are four yellow 3-inch squares, 90
degrees apart (yellow means HE).
• The basic color of the container is olive drab.

DUMMY MISSILES
5-49. The M34 dummy missile has the same physical characteristics as the
tactical missile. It is used to train armament personnel in loading and
unloading and to simulate aircraft missile loads for training flights.

TRAINING MISSILES
5-50. The M36 training missile is used for captive flight training. It cannot
be launched. It has an operational laser seeker that can search for and lock
on laser energy. The M36 has the same physical characteristics as the
tactical missile; however, it contains no explosives. It requires the same
handling as a live tactical missile.
Note: If a training missile is on a launcher rail, live missiles cannot be
launched.

TACTICAL MISSILES
5-51. The AGM-114A tactical missile, DODIC number PA79 and NSN
1410-01-126-4662, is the originally designed Hellfire missile. It is no longer
in production. AGM-114As in the inventory are released for live-fire training
when AGM-114Cs replace them.
5-52. The AGM-114B, DODIC number PC91 and NSN 1410-01-146-9668, is
primarily designed for Navy use. It can be fired from Army aircraft, however.
This missile has an additional electronic arm/safety device, required for
shipboard use.
5-53. The AGM-114C missile, DODIC number PD68 and NSN
1410-01-192-0293, has an improved semiactive laser seeker with an
improved low-visibility capability. The AGM-114C has a low-smoke motor

5-19
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

and a lower trajectory than the 114A. Army missiles should be marked with
either the A or C designation, just behind the seeker.
5-54. The AGM-114F missile, DODIC number PV29 and NSN
1410-01-332-2471, features two warheads—a seeker and an autopilot, similar
to the C-model missile. The 114F can defeat vehicles equipped with reactive
armor.
5-55. The AGM-114K missile, DODIC number PV30 and NSN
1410-01-381-0715, features dual warheads for defeating reactive armor,
electro-optical countermeasure hardening, a semiactive laser seeker, and a
programmable autopilot for trajectory shaping. The AGM-114K missile can
operate with either pulsed-repetition frequency (PRF) or pulsed interval
modulation (PIM) laser codes for those aircraft equipped with dual-code
capability.
5-56. PIM is a laser-coding scheme (Table 5-7) that was developed as an
alternate to the triservice and NATO standard PRF code to provide enhanced
protection against specific active electro-optical countermeasure (EOCM)
threats. An active EOCM is a CM device such as a laser that emits pulses to
counter a laser-guided seeker. Pulse interval modulation is only available on
the D-Model Longbow Apache aircraft, with use of the AGM 114-K model
missile (Hellfire II). For maximum effectiveness, the PIM coding schemes
must be judiciously used with the cockpit CCM on/off switch, as described in
paragraph 5-60 and Table 5-8. The use of PIM with the CCM ON/OFF switch
will greatly enhance the Hellfire II missile’s effectiveness in an active
countermeasure threat environment. In a benign environment, in which
active CMs are known not to be present, the use of standard PRF codes
should be maintained. In addition, in a battlefield environment containing
smoke/vehicular dust, the PRF code mode provides better immunity to
smoke, if no active EOCMs are present.
5-57. Unlike the PRF codes, which are composed of a periodic pulse train,
with every interpulse period in the pulse train exactly equal, the PIM codes
consist of a pseudorandom pulse train; the interpulse periods in the pulse
train (that is, channel) are entirely random. The PIM channels are
pseudorandom, instead of purely random, because the pulse train will repeat
itself after a certain amount of time. In the case of the Hellfire II PIM
channels, they will repeat after about 512 laser pulse intervals have passed.
At the average laser pulse rate of 16 pulses per second in Band II, this
corresponds to a repeat time of about 32 seconds. This PIM length was
purposely chosen so that the code would not repeat itself during the
maximum LOBL Hellfire II flight range. This random nature of the PIM
channel thus makes it unlikely that threat forces using countermeasures
would be able to predict the code that the missile is operating on during the
flight. Thus, crews should use PIM to make it difficult for enemy forces to use
countermeasures.
5-58. The AGM-114K missile uniquely uses the first digit 4 for the PIM
codes. The table below shows the usage of all the first digit numbers in the
octal switch setting.

5-20
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Table 5-7. Laser Codes

Laser Code Code Description Laser Code Code Description

1XXX TRISERVICE PRF 5XXX FOR COPPERHEAD
2XXX AIR FORCE PIM 6XXX PIM OR BACK-UP
AGM-114K PIM, USE
3XXX NATO PIM 7XXX 5, 6, 7, 8
4XXX AGM-114K PIM 8XXX

5-59. To implement all 512 channels, that is, codes 4111 through 888 of a
specific PIM series, four classified keywords must be loaded into the aircraft
from the AMPS via the DTC. Once the aircraft recognizes that one or more of
these keywords is on the DTC, the aircraft computer downloads the keywords
to the Laser Electronic Unit (LEU) and the M299 launcher. The software
algorithms for generating the specific desired PIM channel—for example,
code 4288—reside in the LEU and on the M299. Therefore, compatibility is
ensured between the PIM codes activated on the TADS\PNVS and the code
downloaded to the missile from the launcher. It is noted that the launcher
only downloads one selected PIM channel, for example, 4288, to the missile,
and one only. The whole family of PIM channels only resides on the launcher
and in the LEU. The PIM data resides in volatile memory on the aircraft;
thus, it is necessary to reload the PIM keywords into the aircraft via AMPS
onto the data transfer cartridge before every mission.
5-60. The AH-64D Apache aircraft cockpit has a toggle switch on the panel
marked CCM with a switch that can be toggled ON/OFF. This is the switch to
be used with the missile and is not to be confused with the toggle switch for
the LRF, which can be toggled between FIRST/LAST. Crews must ensure
that the missile CCM switch is in the proper position while using either the
PRF or the PIM codes. The proper position depends on the type of CM threats
that exist in the target area or whether battlefield obscurants are present or
whether battlefield conditions are benign; that is, no CM and no smoke.
Table 5-8 shows the proper CCM switch position for both PRF and PIM codes
and for specific battlefield environments and CM threats.

Table 5-8. Missile CCM Switch Position (On/Off)

CODE BENIGN SMOKE ACTIVE EOCM SMOKE AND MISSILES FAIL

(NO SMOKE, ACTIVE EOCM TO HIT TARGETS
NO EOCM) FOR ALL
PREVIOUS
SETTINGS
PRF OFF OFF ON ON
PIM OFF OFF OFF OFF
PIM ON

5-21
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5-61. The AGM-114L missile, DODIC number PU55 and NSN

1410-01-399-7459, uses an active radar frequency signal to detect and track
targets. It emits RF energy and homes in on the reflected RF energy. The
AGM-114L is an active (emitting) missile. It is inertially guided and radar
assisted.
5-62. The AGM-114M missile, DODIC number WF15 and NSN
1410-01-464-9031, has an HE fragmentary warhead. It is designed for Naval
use. This Hellfire model flies the same profile as the AGM-114K. Its weight
roughly equals that of the AGM-114F. The U.S. Navy is the only branch that
has this model in its inventory.
5-63. For antiarmor roles, the AGM-114 missile has a conical shaped-charge
warhead with a copper liner cone that forms the jet that provides armor
penetration. This high-explosive, antitank warhead is effective against
various types of armor including appliqué and reactive. Actual penetration
performance is classified. It can also be employed against concrete bunkers
and similar fortifications. The AGM-114F, 114K, and 114L use the same
shaped-charge warhead as the 114C. In addition, they contain a small
warhead, mounted forward of the main warhead, to enhance performance
against reactive armor.
5-64. A single-stage, single-thrust, solid-propellant motor propels tactical
missiles. When thrust exceeds 500 to 600 pounds, the missile leaves the rail.
Based on a 10G-acceleration parameter, arming occurs between 150 to 300
meters after launch. Thrust duration is about two to three seconds.
Maximum velocity of the missile is 950 miles per hour (475 meters per
second, or Mach 1.4). Figure 5-9 shows the Hellfire missile models with the
exception of the AGM-114M.

5-22
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

SAL 1

SAL 1

SAL 2

Figure 5-8. Hellfire Missile Models

SEMIACTIVE LASER HELLFIRE MISSILE PERFORMANCE

CAPABILITIES
MAXIMUM STANDOFF RANGE
5-65. Maximum standoff range is a function of missile performance, launch
platform altitude versus target altitude, visibility, and cloud cover. Figures
5-9 and 5-10 show the effects of cloud ceilings on maximum standoff ranges
and the launch envelope for all lock-on before launch shots. Figures 5-11 and
5-12 show the effects of cloud ceilings on maximum standoff ranges and the
launch envelope for lock-on after launch (LOAL-Direct). Figures 5-13 through
5-16 show the effects of cloud ceilings and the launch envelopes for LOAL-LO
and LOAL-HI.

Autonomous
5-66. The launching aircraft should designate the target when the aircraft
can fire from a position close enough to the target to ensure accurate
designation without extensive exposure of the launching aircraft to the
enemy threat. On a clear day, the capability of the designator to maintain the
total laser spot on the target limits target designation. Table 5-9 shows
approximate time of flight in seconds for the Hellfire. Table 5-10 shows SAL
Hellfire laser-designation times.

5-23
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-9. Hellfire Approximate Time of Flight—in Seconds)

Range (km) TEMPERATURE =- TEMPERATURE = TEMPERATURE =

25°F 70°F 125°F
(-32°C) (21°C) (52°C)
1 3 3 3
2 7 7 6
3 11 10 10
4 16 14 13
5 20 19 17
6 27 24 22
7 35 29 27
8 44 36 33

Table 5-10. SAL Hellfire Designation Times

Approx. Time of Flight From Steady on-Target Time

Range Laser Delay After
Launch Separation at 70°F Before Impact
(km) Separation* (Seconds)
(21°C)* Seconds (Seconds)
2 7 ** 6
3 10 2-3 6
4 14 3-6 6
5 19 4-8 6
6 24 4-11 6
7 29 4-13 7
8*** 36 4-16 8
*All times are from missile separation. Add an additional second for time from trigger pull.
**Delay times of less than two seconds (three seconds from trigger pull) may allow the missile seeker
to lock onto backscatter near the aircraft!
***LOAL-LO and LOAL-HI only.

5-67. Under some atmospheric conditions and aircraft-to-target positions, the

Hellfire motor exhaust may obscure the target when the missile flies through
the TADS FOV. Using image auto track can cause the TADS to break lock
and disrupt the missile flight. Rotating the aircraft just before launch—at
least three to five degrees in the direction of the missile to be fired—prevents
the missile from flying through the TADS FOV. If TADS break lock should
occur, continue to manually track the target until accurate TADS IAT is
reestablished. For a high Ph, the maximum effective autonomous engagement
range is limited by the ability of the TADS to accurately maintain the laser
spot on the target and the ability of the seeker to lock onto the reflected laser
energy (Table 5-11).

5-24
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Table 5-11. SAL Hellfire Maximum Autonomous Designation Range for High Probability of Hit

SIGHT TRACK MODE MAXIMUM AUTONOMOUS

DESIGNATION RANGE (KM)

Day TV Autotrack 6.0

Day TV Manual 4.0

FLIR Autotrack 3.5

FLIR Manual 3.0

DVO Manual 3.0

Remote
5-68. Remote designation allows the launch aircraft to stand off at greater
distances from the target. This standoff range can be out to the maximum
missile effective-engagement range. Remote designation also allows the
launch aircraft to be masked from the target using the LOAL-LO or LOAL-
HI launch mode (Figures 5-13 through 5-16). Remote designation also allows
a single aircraft to provide the weapons for several designators. Remote
designators may include another aircraft, a ground or vehicle laser-locator
designator, or one of the various designators of other services or foreign
allies. Remote designators must be within their maximum designation range
from the target, as determined by their laser-beam divergence and aiming
errors (jitter and boresight). Range to target can vary from one type of
designator to another.

5-25
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-9. Minimum Cloud Ceiling—LOBL

5-26
________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

LOBL remote maximum

range = 7 km

LOBL autonomous
maximum range = 6 km
(DTV IAT)

Figure 5-10. Launch Envelope—LOBL

Figure 5-11. Minimum Clou d Ceilings—LOAL-DIR

5-27
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) _____________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-12. Launch Envelope—LOAL-DIR

5-28
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-13. Minimum Cloud Ceilings—LOAL-LO

Figure 5-14. Launch Envelope—LOAL-LO

5-29
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-15. Minimum Cloud Ceiling (C-Model and Later Missiles)—LOAL-HI

Figure 5-16. Launch Envelope—LOAL-HI

5-30
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

REMOTE DESIGNATOR LOCATION OFFSET

5-69. When the remote designator is located in an offset position in azimuth
from the launch aircraft, the laser spot should be on a section of the target
that is visible to the missile (Figure 5-17). The remote designator should not
be displaced more than +60 degrees in azimuth from the launch aircraft to
the target line.

Figure 5-17. Maximum Designator Offset Angle for SAL Hellfire

REMOTE DESIGNATOR SAFETY ZONE

5-70. The crew of the designating aircraft should ensure that it is not inside
the +30 degrees designator avoidance area (Figure 5-17). If the designating
aircraft is unable to remain/designate outside of the avoidance area, crews
must accurately compute and use a laser delay time. The difference between
missile time of flight from the launching platform’s position and missile time
of flight from the designator’s position is the shortest laser delay time that
can be used. The warning following this paragraph explains the guidelines to
follow. See also Figure 5-18.

5-31
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

WARNING
When the designating aircraft cannot remain
outside the +30-degree safety fan—because of such
conditions as constricting terrain—the designator
must use a computed laser delay time. This laser
delay time is the result of subtracting the missile
time of flight (launching aircraft) from the missile
time of flight (designating aircraft); for example—

If the time of flight for a missile from the launching

aircraft equals 23 seconds and the time of flight for
a missile from the designating aircraft equals 17
seconds, then the delay time that must be used
equals 6 seconds—23 seconds minus 17 seconds.
The designator/designating aircraft must not delay
less than 6 seconds, in this example. A lesser laser
delay time could cause a remotely fired missile to
impact the designator. Units must use careful
engagement area planning in these cases.

MINIMUM ENGAGEMENT RANGE

5-71. Because of the trajectory shaping and seeker scan pattern of the SAL
Hellfire missile during LOAL mode, the minimum engagement ranges need
to be increased as the launch altitude increases above the target altitude. As
launch altitude increases, the ability of the missile to see the target at
shorter ranges decreases. The minimum LOAL engagement ranges shown in
Table 5-12 are for launch altitudes of less than 50 feet above target altitude.
Increase these minimum ranges by 0.5 kilometer for altitudes of from 50 to
400 feet and by 1.0 kilometer for altitudes 401 to 800 feet above the target.
Minimum LOBL target engagement ranges are shown in Table 5-13. Table
5-14 shows maximum missile altitude.

5-32
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

About 2,800
meters

Degrees offset
Example:
Range in km GTL = 360 degrees at 5,000 meters.
LTL/OTL = 330 degrees.
Determine azimuth difference, in this case, 30
degrees. Enter chart at GTL range, then follow
30-degree line up to LTL degree offset to
determine minimum designator range, in this
case, about 2,800 meters. If the designator is
outside 2,800 meters, it is outside the +30-
degree safety fan.

INSTRUCTIONS
1. Obtain the gun-target line (GTL) (launch aircraft/platform) heading and range to the target.
2. Determine the azimuth difference in degrees between the GTL and laser target line
(LTL)/observer target line (OTL) (designating aircraft/platform).
3. Enter the graph on the left side at the GTL range, follow the heavy line to the azimuth difference
degree line (as determined in step 2 above), and interpolate the minimum LTL/OTL range using
the arced range lines.
4. Designating platform LTL/OTL range must exceed the minimum interpolated range to ensure that
30-degree safety parameters are met. See the warning on page 5-32 if the designating aircraft
cannot remain outside the +30-degree safety fan.

Figure 5-18. Hellfire Remote-Engagement Safety Fan Chart

5-33
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-12. Minimum LOAL Target-Engagement Range

MINIMUM LOAL ENGAGEMENT RANGE

AZIMUTH (KM)
MISSILE TARGET LAUNCH ALTITUDE < 50' ABOVE TARGET ALTITUDE
OFFSET
(degrees) LOAL-DIR LOAL-LO LOAL-HI

AGM-114A 0° 2.0 2.0 3.5

7.5° 2.5 3.0 4.5

AGM-114C 0° 1.9 2.0 3.5

7.5° 2.0 3.0 4.5

AGM-114F 0° 2.0 2.5 3.5

7.5° 2.5 3.5 4.5

AGM-114K 0° 1.5 2.0 3.5

7.5° 1.7 2.5 3.5

50'-400'—increase minimum range by 0.5 km.

401'-800'—increase minimum range by 1.0 km.

Table 5-13. Minimum LOBL Target Engagement Range

MINIMUM RANGE (KM) MINIMUM RANGE (KM)

MISSILE 0° Target Offset in Azimuth 20° Target Offset in Azimuth

AGM-114A 0.8 1.2

AGM-114C 0.8 1.2

AGM-114F 1.4 1.5

AGM-114K 0.5 0.7

Table 5-14. Maximum Missile Altitude

MODE LOBL LOAL-DIR LOAL-LO LOAL-HI

TARGET RANGE (KM) 3 5 7 7 8 8

LASER DELAY (SEC) 0 0 0 4 12 4 15 4 15

MISSILE TYPE MAXIMUM MISSILE ALTITUDE INCLUDING
RANDOM TRAJECTORY (FEET)
AGM-114A 400 1,000 1,700 1,700 1,000 1,900 1,400 2,300 2,200

AGM-114C 400 1,000 1,700 800 400 1,400 800 1,600 1,300
AGM-114F * * * 800 400 * * * *
AGM-114K 300 500 600 400 400 800 800 1,400 1,400

*F model flies slightly lower than the C-model missile in this mode.

5-34
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

SEMIACTIVE LASER HELLFIRE MISSILE PERFORMANCE

DETRACTORS
5-72. Figure 5-19 shows possible laser detractors.

Figure 5-19. Possible Laser Detractors

BACKSCATTER
5-73. Backscatter applies to a portion of the laser beam’s energy reflected off
atmospheric particles in the laser’s path back towards the designator while
the remainder of the laser’s energy penetrates toward the target. Backscatter
occurs even in clear weather; thus, the operator must rely upon the LOBL
constraints box to know if the seeker is tracking backscatter. Obscurants—
such as fog, haze, rain, snow, smoke, and dust—in the laser-to-target line of
sight can also cause backscatter. If a target return is not detected, then the
seeker may track the backscatter return. If the seeker is tracking
backscatter, the seeker LOS and the TADS LOS will differ by more than 2
degrees and the LOBL constraints box will be dashed, indicating an out-of-
constraints condition.
5-74. If an obscurant is between the designator and the target, the seeker
can lock on the reflected laser energy from the obscurant and “walk up” the
laser beam toward the aircraft. When the seeker LOS is 2 degrees from the
designator LOS and the seeker is locked on the autonomous laser spot, the

5-35
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

symbology will indicate an out-of-constraints condition. Anytime that the

constraints box indicates an out-of-constraints condition, the crew member
must correct the condition before launch. Figure 5-20 is a typical backscatter
out-of-constraints indication for a missile on the right side of the aircraft
tracking backscatter in front of the TADS.
Note: This symbology is correct in this case only if the aircraft is pointing
directly at the target.
5-75. Backscatter is best controlled by maintaining the true target in the
instantaneous field of view of the seeker. The seeker generally does not track
backscatter after track has been established on the true target. Backscatter
tracking is more likely to occur with autonomous lasing than with remote
lasing because of the proximity of the seeker to the laser beam on the launch
aircraft. Backscatter affects LOBL autonomous launches. It can also affect
LOAL autonomous launches if the designation commences too early (less
than a two-second delay from launch/less than three seconds from trigger
pull) before the missile has time to climb above and away from the laser
beam.

-20 +20

Figure 5-20. Typical Backscatter Out-of-Constraints Indication

5-36
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

BACKSCATTER AVOIDANCE TECHNIQUES

5-76. To eliminate a backscatter lock on, lasing the target should be
discontinued for a short time and the target redesignated. If a backscatter
problem still exists, it may be necessary to discontinue lasing, move to
another position, and redesignate the target.
5-77. If the launching aircraft is designating the target and autonomous
operation is properly set up, one seeker will be slaved to the designator LOS,
such as pointed at the target when the designator is tracking the target. This
condition will generally result in proper seeker lock onto the target. However,
under some conditions that fail to produce a detectable target return, the
seeker will lock onto the laser backscatter close to the aircraft. Generally,
poor target reflectivity, collocated obscurants, or excessive designation causes
backscatter ranges. If backscatter lock on occurs, the seeker LOS will diverge
from the designator LOS by two or more degrees, the LOBL constraints
symbology will indicate an out-of-constraints condition, and the missile
should not be launched.
Note: (dash-45 software only) If primary channel track is achieved and the
symbology indicates an out-of-constraints condition, the missile cannot be
launched by pulling the trigger to the first detent but can be launched by
pulling the trigger to the second detent. The missile should not be launched
by pulling the trigger to the second detent when an out-of-constraints
condition is indicated because the probability of hitting the target is low. If
the LOBL constraints box is intermittently switching “in and out” of
constraints, then a marginal target condition exists and the missile should
not be launched in the LOBL mode.
5-78. To eliminate a backscatter lock on, stop lasing the target. Switch to
LOAL-Direct, and use a minimum of two seconds of delay from missile
separation (about three seconds after trigger pull).
5-79. If time permits, the crew can improve the target return by reducing
engagement range, improving aim point, or employing offset designation onto
the higher reflective terrain near the target. Lasing must cease before the
reengagement of any target to allow the seeker to unlock from the backscatter.
5-80. The seeker may possibly switch to tracking backscatter during the first
second after missile separation in the LOBL autonomous mode if the target
return is lost before the missile has climbed above the laser beam. This
condition can be created by image auto track break lock because of motor
smoke in the TADS LOS. As Figure 5-21 shows, the aircraft should be
rotated 3 to 5 degrees in the direction of the missile to be launched. This
rotation ensures that the missile does not fly across the TADS LOS to create
an IAT break lock or degrade the TADS imagery.

5-37
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-21. LOBL/LOAL Autonomous Launch Offset

RULES FOR OPERATION IN OBSCURANTS

5-81. Performance is reduced when obscurants degrade the seeker’s lock-on
range. The following rules indicate how to determine if the situation supports
a missile launch.
5-82. The designator operator must have a clear enough image of the target
for accurate placement of the laser spot on the target without overspill or
underspill.
5-83. When the launch aircraft has a line of sight to the target, it must have
a good enough image in its day television or forward-looking infrared so that
the general shape of the target is recognizable. If the launch aircraft is
masked, the designating aircraft must have a sufficient image in its DTV or
FLIR for the aircrew to recognize the general shape of the target. Otherwise,
the seeker will probably not achieve a lock on, even after launch.
5-84. The designating aircraft should take laser range-finder readings and
not launch the missile until steady, plausible range readings are indicated.
Erratic range readings are generally caused by smoke or dust near the
target. Overspill or underspill onto foreground or background objects could
also cause the same erratic readings. If accurate designation does not fix the
problem, then the only solution is to change to a different designator or a
different target or relocate the designating aircraft.

5-38
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

5-85. For LOBL autonomous launches, constraints symbology must show an

in-constraints condition. Otherwise, the seeker is not tracking the true
target.

TARGET ILLUMINATION
5-86. The laser spot illuminates only the target. When the missile is in its
last few seconds of flight before impact, the entire laser spot must be placed
on the target. During the final few seconds of flight, even a momentary
placement of laser energy on adjacent terrain can prevent the missile from
hitting the target. Once the seeker is tracking, the designator should not be
turned off before all in-flight missiles have impacted. The seeker will not
initiate box scan once the laser energy is lost.
5-87. The portion of the target that is illuminated must be “seen” by the
missile. This requirement imposes a 60-degree limit on the angle between the
gun-target line and the remote designator-to-target line. The probability of
killing a target depends on missile flight path at impact and target attack
azimuth but generally is maximized if the laser spot can be held stable on the
base of the tank turret.

Boresight Error
5-88. Boresight error occurs when the laser spot is not properly aligned with
the TADS reticle, which produces an error in the location of the spot on the
target.

WARNING
Crew-induced AH-64 A and D boresight error can
and will cause a SAL Hellfire missile to miss its
intended target. Eliminating boresight error
eliminates one of the most fundamental errors that
crews make. The crew should know how the unit
plans to accomplish out-front boresighting. If there
is no good plan, the unit needs to create one. The
unit and crew need to allocate time for internal and
out-front boresighting in mission planning and
correctly complete both internal and out-front
boresight procedures for their aircraft. (Also, see
the note on trends in the preface.)

Spot Jitter
5-89. Spot jitter results from the motion of the designator or the beam
developed by the designator around the intended aim point. Spot jitter can
give the laser spot a bouncing movement on the target, which will increase
with designator distance from the target.

5-39
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Beam Divergence
5-90. The further the laser designator is from the target, the wider the spot
will be on the target. The amount of beam divergence will vary among
different types of designators.

Attenuation
5-91. Attenuation is a portion of the laser beam that is “scattered” by
obscurants along the laser-to-target LOS and the missile-to-target LOS,
resulting in a reduced target pulse to the seeker. In addition, low visibility
attenuates the target return to the seeker. If the attenuation is severe, the
seeker will not detect the laser energy from the target.

Overspill
5-92. Overspill is caused by placing the laser spot too high on the target so
that beam divergence and jitter cause the spot or a portion of the spot to spill
over onto the object or the terrain behind the target. Overspill can cause
intermittent background false targets, which become more severe at long
designation ranges. The missile is programmed with “last pulse logic,” which
is intended to defeat backscatter in the target area. If the missile receives
two spots of equal intensity—the first or closer return from backscatter and
the second/farthest that was reflected from the intended target—the missile
should fly to the intended target. If overspill is present, this last pulse logic
will cause the missile to fly past the intended target.

Underspill
5-93. Underspill is caused by placing the laser spot too low on the target so
that the spot or a portion of the spot spills onto the foreground. Underspill
can cause foreground false targets, which become more severe at long
designation ranges.
Note: Even a small number of overspilled or underspilled laser pulses can
cause the missile to follow false signals. If either of these conditions occurs
just before missile impact, the Ph is seriously degraded.

RADAR FREQUENCY HELLFIRE MISSILE CHARACTERISTICS AND

PERFORMANCE

5-94. Figure 5-22 shows the RF missile operational concept. The RF Hellfire
missile uses an active radar frequency signal to detect and track targets. It
emits RF energy and homes in on the reflected RF energy. It is an active
(emitting) missile that is inertially guided and radar assisted. The missile
radar seeker transmits frequencies within the millimeter wave Ka-band,
around 35 gigahertz. This frequency band was chosen for several reasons. A
relatively narrow radar beamwidth can be developed using Ka-band
frequencies while keeping the size of the radar antenna small. A narrow
beamwidth is desirable because it concentrates more of the available
transmit power on the target of interest while minimizing interference from
nearby clutter. The use of Ka-band frequencies also takes advantage of a

5-40
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

relative notch in the tendency of atmospheric water vapor to absorb radar

signals. This notch improves the capability of the missiles to operate in all
weather environments as well as in smoke.

Figure 5-22. RF Missile Operational Concept

5-95. The primary armament system of the AH-64D is the Longbow Hellfire
Modular Missile System. Crews of the AH-64D can fire all variants of the
SAL missile and the RF missiles. The Longbow RF missile can engage
moving and stationary targets at ranges between 0.5 and 8.0 kilometers. The
LBHMM consists of M299 launchers mounted on any of the four wing
stations. The M299 launcher is a modified M272 launcher that can launch
both SAL and RF Hellfire missiles. The M299 launcher cannot be used on the
AH-64A, and the M272 launcher cannot be used on the AH-64D. The M272
cannot launch the RF missile.
5-96. During missile operation, the aircrew should avoid RF
radiation-hazard areas (Figure 5-23). This area extends from the missile nose
outward one meter and 45 degrees polar from the missile centerline.
5-97. The RF missile operates in three modes: standby, prelaunch, and
postlaunch.

5-41
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-23. RF Radiation Hazard Areas

STANDBY MODE
5-98. After the missile completes power up and PBIT, it will enter and
remain in the standby mode until it receives target data (handover) from the
WP. On aircraft power up, the missiles begin a startup process. During
startup, the missiles initiate a power-up sequence, initialize in the standby
mode, perform BIT, and inform the WP that startup is complete and it is in
the standby mode.
5-99. A transfer alignment is completed immediately after the power-up BIT
sequence. TA allows the missile to receive continuously updated inertial
position, acceleration, and velocity data from the aircraft to align its own
inertial navigation system. The TA process accounts for known mechanical
alignments between the systems, pylon articulation, and communications
delays.
5-100. The attitude and velocity of the missile are maintained during the TA
function. While the missile is in the standby mode and ready, it will display
an “R” in its missile icon.

5-42
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

5-101. TA compares and updates attitude and velocity measurements from

the Longbow EGI to the missile INS. Items included in the TA message
are—
• Pitch and roll angle.
• True heading angle.
• Aircraft longitudinal, lateral, and vertical velocity.
• INU time tag.
• Pressure and density altitude.
• Static temperature.
• Pylon position relative to ADL.
• Pylon position time tag (articulation with aircraft pitch and roll rates).
• Aircraft pitch, roll, and yaw rate.
• Aircraft estimated heading error.

PRELAUNCH MODE
5-102. Actioning the missile system with acceptable target data (target
handover) will initiate the missile prelaunch mode. Prelaunch mode occurs
from the time that the WP transfers target data to the missile until the
missile is either launched or returns to the standby mode.

POSTLAUNCH MODE
5-103. The postlaunch mode is initiated when the firing command (weapon
trigger pull) occurs. The WP verifies launch constraints. These constraints
include safety and performance inhibits, launcher and missile BIT status,
missile gimbal angles, and RF tracking status for LOBL missiles. If no
constraints are active, the WP issues the release-consent message to the
launcher. Upon receipt of the release-consent message, the launcher issues
the launch command to the designated missile and, at the same time, issues
commands to enable the missile battery and pneumatic actuator control
system. When the missile receives the launch commands, the system mode
makes the transition to postlaunch. The launcher verifies battery power; if
valid, digital communications with the missile cease and the motor fire
command is sent to the missile. The missile achieves umbilical separation
and leaves the rail about one second after the launch command is issued. The
warhead is armed when the missile achieves 10 Gs acceleration (150 to 300
meters).
5-104. The missile receives a target handover in one of three ways: directly
from the aircraft’s own FCR, from the WP based on TADS information, or
from data received via the IDM (Figure 5-24).

5-43
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-24. Target Handover

5-105. The target handover message defines the target position and velocity
vector, current at the time of the assignment. The launcher receives the
target assignment from the acquisition sensor or WP. The launcher then
forwards the data to the priority missile. The missile remains in the standby
mode until a handover message is received. It then immediately makes the
transition to the prelaunch mode. The target handover contains the following
information:
• Target status—identification, target type (air/ground), and LOBL
inhibit (on/off).
• Target-detection time—time from initial detection until current
update.
• Target update time—time since last update.
• Target NED position—NED at time of detection.
• Updated NED position—NED position at update time.
• Target NED velocity.
• Cross-range—handover data for cross range.
• Height—handover data for height.
• Range—handover data for range.
• Range rate—handover data for radial velocity.
• Cross range—handover data for cross-range velocity.
• Aircraft time at request.

5-44
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

There are three types of target handovers.

FCR
5-106. When the selected sight is FCR and the 2ND TARGET INHIBIT mode
is not selected, the WP transfers target data for both a primary and
secondary target when the targets are detected. If the primary target is
stationary, a second stationary target may be supplied to the missile. This is
the only mode of the three that supplies a secondary target. If the Hellfire
system is actioned before an FCR scan, the WP initiates the target handover
at the completion of the scan. If the Hellfire system is actioned during an
FCR scan, the WP initiates handover of the NTS target immediately based
on the targets detected up to that point, with subsequent target handovers
occurring after completion of the first far-bar scan.

TADS
5-107. When TADS is the selected sight and the actioned missile type is RF,
the TARGET DATA? performance inhibit will be displayed. The target must
be designated for about three seconds to receive the target handover and
remove the TARGET DATA? message. If the laser data are erratic, the
message will not be removed and the handover will not occur until valid
range is acquired.

IDM
5-108. When the target handover is received via the IDM (RFHO) and the
mission is accepted, the RF handover data represent the target NED
coordinates relative to the receiving aircraft. To receive an IDM target
handover in an aircraft with or without radar, the aviator must have the
FCR as the selected sight and the missiles WASd. The aviator must press the
“record” button, before selecting FCR as sight (without radar).
5-109. After the WP transfers target NED data to the missile, the missile
determines the launch mode—either LOBL or LOAL based on target
velocities (moving or stationary) and range to target. Figure 5-25 shows RF
missile LOBL/LOAL acquisition modes. The displayed FCR target symbols do
not determine the type of missile mode for launch (that is, LOBL/LOAL).
Therefore, it is possible to launch a LOBL missile at a LOAL target symbol
and vice versa. During prelaunch LOBL operation, if the missile radar fails
to acquire the target after three attempts, the radar will make the transition
to standby—but the inertial tracking of the target will continue. If the
missile determines the target requires a LOBL acquisition, it will try to
acquire it by radiating three consecutive times for about three seconds each.
Actioning the missile system again would allow for three more scan attempts
on the same priority target.

5-45
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

*IDM RFHO/TADS RFHO

Figure 5-25. RF Missile LOBL/LOAL Acquisition Modes

5-110. The Longbow RF missile can engage moving and stationary targets at
ranges between 0.5 and 8.0 kilometers. The resulting missile performance
against these targets is a function of many factors—the most important of
which is the target handover error at the start of the target acquisition
process. The target handover error grows as the time between FCR detect
and the missile’s receipt of the target handover increases (Figure 5-26). In
the figure, the time between accepting the IDM RFHO and the time that the
actual target handover occurs (WASing) could cause an acquisition attempt
in the wrong area. This handover latency should be minimized for best
performance; however, the missile does optimize its performance by selecting
the appropriate acquisition mode and submode for best target detection and
tracking performance, based on handover latency and initial target handover
error.

5-46
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-26. Moving-Target Handover Delay

5-47
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5-111. The Longbow RF Hellfire missile, AGM-114L, flies a trajectory that is

optimized for radar performance while maintaining lethality. The LOBL and
LOAL elevation flight profiles are similar (Figure 5-27). To prevent the
missile from hitting the ground during launch, the minimum launch altitude
is 15 meters.

Figure 5-27. RF Missile-Elevation Flight Profiles

5-112. The missile flies a very direct azimuth flight profile for LOBL
operations (Figure 5-28). If the target becomes stationary after launch, an
off-axis trajectory is possible.

5-48
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-28. Direct Trajectory for RF LOBL

5-113. Figure 5-29 shows the moving-target azimuth profiles for a 20-degree
offset angle. As the offset angle decreases, the trajectory is closer to the
armament datum line.

Figure 5-29. RF Missile Moving-Target Azimuth Flight Profiles

5-49
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5-114. Figure 5-30 shows stationary (LOAL) target azimuth flight profiles.
The LOAL azimuth flight profile is driven by a Doppler beam sharpening
trajectory. This DBS trajectory is used for medium- to long-range stationary
targets. This illustration shows trajectories with a 1-degree offset angle.

Figure 5-30. RF Missile Stationary-Target Azimuth Flight Profiles With a 1-Degree Offset Angle

5-50
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

5-115. Figure 5-31 shows that increasing the offset angle will increase the
distance of the trajectory from the armament datum line.

Figure 5-31. RF Missile Stationary-Target Azimuth Flight Profiles With a 20-Degree Offset
Angle

RADAR-FREQUENCY MISSILE RADAR MODES

5-116. Figure 5-32 shows RF missile modes. The target acquisition and
tracking modes are terms used to explain the different ways that the missile
seeker improves its chances of locating and hitting LOBL and LOAL targets.
The missile radar has three target-acquisition modes tailored to specific
target characteristics. All modes require a target handover from the WP:
terminal track acquisition for short-range stationary targets (LOAL and
LOBL), preterminal track acquisition for long-range stationary targets
(LOAL), and moving target acquisition for moving targets (LOBL). The
missile has two tracking modes: preterminal track and terminal track. The
two stationary-target acquisition modes (PTA and TTA) use different types of
processing to separate targets from the surrounding clutter based on range.
The TTA mode uses high-range resolution to process targets from 0.5 to 2.5
kilometers for both LOBL and LOAL short-range targets. The missile cannot
perform DBS trajectory on short-range targets under 2.5 kilometers. HRR
can detect stationary targets in ground clutter by providing much tighter
range bins per range gate. This technique produces a much better resolution
of the designated target. With smaller range bins, this mode assists target
detection by measuring the size of the radar return for comparison with
target handover classification. The LOAL mode is exercised at ranges greater
than 1.0 kilometer to meet performance requirements for longer range HRR
operations and reduced RCS targets. For targets between 1.0 kilometer and

5-51
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

2.5 kilometers, a LOAL status will be supplied to the launch platform;

however, the radar will immediately attempt to acquire and track the target
(LOBL). This is why, between the ranges of 1.0 and 2.5 kilometers, the
missile mode can be either LOAL or LOBL. PTA is designed to acquire
long-range stationary targets in the LOAL mode at ranges between 2.5 to 8.0
kilometers using DBS (Figure 5-33).

Figure 5-32. RF Missile Modes

5-52
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-33. Doppler Beam Sharpening

5-53
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Doppler Beam Sharpening

5-117. DBS uses a curved trajectory to induce relative motion between a
stationary target and its background by flying an off-axis flight path to the
target (Figure 5-34). DBS significantly enhances the probability of detection
and tracking stationary targets at long ranges. Standard Doppler processing
(missile flying direct to the target) would cause a stationary target to be
included in the same Doppler bin as all of the mainlobe clutter return
because both types of return exhibit the same relative range rate. DBS,
because of the angular difference between the forward velocity vector of the
missile and the target LOS, causes the relative range rate of the target to be
different from that of the background, spreading the return over many
Doppler bins. The resulting spread increases the target signal-to-clutter ratio
in the target Doppler bin, enabling the radar to identify and locate the target.
DBS is selected for ground-clutter rejection during stationary target PTT or
when a target that was initially an MTI has become an STI during flight. If
this occurs, the missile would switch from a straight trajectory to a DBS
trajectory in flight. Two constraints determine when the in-flight DBS switch
option occurs. First, the switch is not allowed near the terminal phase in
which missile kinematics cannot support the trajectory switch. Second, the
trajectory will not switch from DBS back to a straight trajectory. The
probability of an in-flight DBS is very low.

Figure 5-34. DBS Trajectory

5-54
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

DBS Trajectory
5-118. The missile does not always turn in the same direction when DBS
occurs. The direction of the turn is determined at umbilical separation as a
function of the LOS to the target. Missiles launched from either side of the
aircraft will follow the same trajectory based on the following data. If the
target is right of the missile centerline, the missile trajectory curve will be a
left DBS trajectory to the target. If the target is left of the missile centerline,
the missile trajectory curve will be a right DBS trajectory to the target.
Targets close to the zero bearing may yield either a left or right DBS
trajectory. If the missile loses radar track of the target, it will shift to DBS in
an attempt to reacquire the target. The primary parameters used to
determine the extent of the DBS trajectory are the inertial guidance data of
the missile (where it is at that instant), the last-known point of the target
(point that the missile is tracking to), and for moving targets, the last-known
velocity of the target. If the missile does not reacquire the target, it will use
inertial guidance to fly to the calculated target location.

5-55
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

AIR-TO-AIR STINGER
5-119. The air-to-air Stinger (Figure 5-35) destroys enemy aircraft. The
ATAS uses infrared (heat-sensitive) homing and an overpressure blast with
some fragmentation for lethality. The ATAS can accept and function with the
unmodified basic Stinger (Figure 5-36) and the Stinger reprogrammable
microprocessor. In the RMP version, the missile guidance and IR
counter-countermeasure functions are reprogrammable by means of a
reprogrammable microprocessor in the launcher electronics assembly. This
upgrade provides greater countermeasure and background immunity with
improved detection characteristics. The RMP Stinger’s seeker dome cover is
clear, while the basic Stinger’s seeker dome cover is cloudy.

Figure 5-35. Air-to-Air Stinger Mounted on an OH-58D

5-120. The Stinger is 59 inches long and weighs 22.4 pounds. The warhead
case is titanium, with a 2.25-pound explosive filler that contains HTA-3
(HMX—49 percent, TNT—29 percent, and aluminum flake powder—22
percent). The impact fuze has a self-destruct feature. There are three modes

5-56
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

of detonation: a low-impact switch allows the warhead to penetrate a soft

target before detonation; a hard-target sensor allows the warhead to detonate
upon impact with a hard target; or, if the missile does not impact and
detonate, it automatically explodes 17 seconds after it is launched. Range is
based on target identification and acquisition and environmental conditions.
The demonstrated range capability within favorable conditions is classified.
5-121. When the Stinger is fired, the launch motor begins missile movement
within the launch tube. Before the missile exits the tube, the launch motor is
expended and separation sequence is initiated. At a safe distance from the
launcher, the launch motor falls from the missile. During this sequence,
flight-motor ignition takes place. Peak velocity of the Stinger is more than
Mach 2. Table 5-15 gives the basic characteristics of the Stinger missile.

Figure 5-36. Stinger Missile (Basic) Sections

Table 5-15. Characteristics of the Stinger Missile

STINGER MISSILE BASIC 1-INCH DATA 2-1/2-INCH

COLOR SQUARES MARKINGS SQUARES
Shipping and storage Forest Yellow Yellow
container green
Missile round Olive drab Yellow

Field-handler trainer Forest White Bronze

green

5-57
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5-122. The missile senses IR radiation emitted from a target by optically

focusing the radiation on the surface of an infrared detector cell within the
seeker. The cell is cooled by argon gas in the coolant reservoir; argon gas is
sensitive to IR radiation. When the seeker acquires the IR energy emitted by
a target, acquisition signals are produced that inform the pilot of target
detection. Figure 5-37 shows the electromagnetic spectrum including the IR
portion.

Figure 5-37. The Electromagnetic Spectrum Including the Infrared Portion

5-123. The atmosphere is not completely transparent to IR radiation. Certain
gases in the atmosphere, primarily carbon dioxide and water vapor, absorb
energy in the IR radiation frequency spectrum. The amount of carbon dioxide
in the air is fairly constant, and its effect on detection range is constant and
need not be considered. Water-vapor content varies widely with geographic
location and local weather conditions. The amount of humidity in the air
proportionately decreases the IR signature of an object. Other particles in the
atmosphere—such as dust, smoke, fog, and rain—also absorb and scatter IR
radiation and reduce IR acquisition ranges. Radiation types and sources
include the following:
• Scattered—sun and fire.
• Emitted—clear sky, terrain, and clouds.
• Reflected—clouds, terrain, lake surfaces, and snow.
Note: Clouds and terrain can be either emitting or reflecting sources,
depending on the conditions.

5-58
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

5-124. Intensity of emitted IR radiation energy varies, according to the size

of an area and the source of the radiation. For example, clear sky or clouds
cover a large area and emit low-intensity radiation. Forest and desert terrain
covers large areas and emits medium levels of infrared radiation. The sun
represents a large area of high-intensity infrared radiation, while an engine
exhaust emits a small area of high-intensity infrared radiation. Emitters
other than the target are also referred to as background radiation.
Note: With the exception of the sun, the engine exhaust or tailpipe of the
target is usually the smallest and hottest object in the environment.
5-125. When the target is approaching through clouds or haze or close to the
ground, the pilot must be aware that these and other obscurants can reflect,
absorb, transmit, and/or emit infrared radiation and a background lock-on
could occur.
5-126. If the pilot cannot acquire the target because of background noise, he
should continue tracking until the target burns through and acquisition is
evident. The pilot should keep launch boundaries in mind and be ready to
reposition if necessary.
5-127. If the pilot still cannot acquire the target, he may launch the missile
using the manual-uncage mode for missile launching. TM 55-1520-228-10
contains manual-uncage procedures.

5-59
 Chapter 6

Crew Warfighting
Warfighting is the mission of Army aviation aircrews. This chapter
provides information and tactics, techniques, and procedures for attack
and armed-reconnaissance helicopter crews.

SECTION I – FRATRICIDE PREVENTION

Fratricide is the employment of friendly weapons and munitions with

the intent to kill the enemy or destroy his equipment or facilities,
which results in unforeseen and unintentional death or injury to
friendly personnel.
TRADOC Fratricide Action Plan

6-1. Fratricide is a fact in combat operations. Historically, fratricide

incidents are most likely to occur in the early stages of combat, during
reduced visibility, or along shared unit boundaries. All soldiers share the
responsibility for fratricide prevention. However, they must avoid the
reluctance to employ, integrate, and synchronize all battlefield operating
systems because of fear of fratricide. On the modern battlefield, the extreme
range capability of the direct-fire weapons of the attack helicopter exceeds
the ability of the sights of the helicopter to positively identify targets.
Therefore, a soldier’s decision to fire is based considerably on situational
awareness.

SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DETRACTORS

INADEQUATE FIRE AND MANEUVER CONTROL
6-2. Situational awareness is the real-time accurate knowledge of one’s own
location and orientation, as well as the locations of friendly forces, enemy
forces, and noncombatants. Situational awareness includes awareness of the
METT-T conditions that affect the operation. The following are the most
frequent situational awareness breakdowns.

DIRECT FIRE-CONTROL FAILURES

6-3. Units fail to disseminate the minimum necessary maneuver and
fire-support control measures to coordinate operations. Units fail to tie
control measures to recognizable terrain features.
6-4. Units fail to designate easily recognizable and understandable target
reference points, engagement areas, and engagement priorities.

6-0
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

LAND-NAVIGATION FAILURES
6-5. Difficult terrain, bad weather, and/or poor visibility often complicate
navigation. Navigation problems can cause units to stray out of sector, report
wrong locations, become disoriented, or employ fire support weapons from
the wrong locations. Therefore, friendly units may collide unexpectedly or
engage each other erroneously.

REPORTING, CROSSTALK, AND BATTLE-TRACKING FAILURES

6-6. Commanders and leaders at all levels often do not generate timely,
accurate, and complete reports or track subordinates as locations and the
tactical situation change. This erroneous information permits erroneous
clearance of fires.

KNOWN BATTLEFIELD HAZARDS

6-7. Unexploded ordnance, unmarked and unrecorded minefields, FASCAM,
and booby traps litter the battlefield.

COMBAT IDENTIFICATION FAILURES

6-8. Combat identification failures occur because of the inability or failure of
the attack crew to positively identify the target.

WEAPONS ERRORS
6-9. Lapses in unit or individual discipline or violations of the rules of
engagement are not merely accidents. Examples of weapons error are
out-of-sector engagements, unauthorized discharges, mistakes with
explosives and hand grenades, charge errors, and incorrect gun.

CONTRIBUTING FACTORS
6-10. Many factors (or preconditions) contribute to fratricide. These factors
are crucial in the commander’s fratricide risk assessment before combat.
They include, based on METT-T, the following contributing factors.

MISSION AND COMMAND AND CONTROL

6-11. The following are mission and C2 factors that contribute to fratricide:
• High vehicle or weapons density.
• Unclear or complex commander’s intent.
• Poor flank coordination.
• Lack of internal coordination.
• Lack of habitual relationships between units.

ENEMY
6-12. The following are enemy factors that contribute to fratricide:
• Weak enemy intelligence or reconnaissance.
• Intermingled enemy and friendly forces.
• Enemy equipment similar to or the same as that of friendly forces.

6-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TERRAIN AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

6-13. The following are terrain and environmental conditions that contribute
to fratricide:
• Low light levels (unit training level).
• Obscuration or poor visibility.
• Extreme engagement ranges.
• Navigation difficulties.
• Absence of recognizable features.
• NBC environment.
• Battlefield hazards (such as minefields and submunitions).

TROOPS AND EQUIPMENT

6-14. The following are troop and equipment factors that contribute to
fratricide:
• High weapon lethality.
• Unseasoned leaders or troops.
• Poor fire-control SOPs.
• Incomplete rules of engagement.
• Anxiety, confusion, or fear.
• Failure to adhere to SOPs.
• Low unit-manning level.
• Communications ineffectiveness.
• Lack of available navigation and positioning equipment.

TIME
6-15. The following are time-related factors that contribute to fratricide:
• Soldier and leader fatigue.
• Inadequate rehearsals.
• Short planning cycle.

EFFECTS OF FRATRICIDE
6-16. The effects of a fratricide incident can be devastating to a unit. They
include the following:
• Hesitation to conduct limited-visibility operations.
• Loss of confidence in the unit’s leadership.
• Increase of leader self-doubt.
• Hesitation to use supporting combat systems (FA).
• Oversupervision of units.
• Loss of initiative.
• Loss of aggressiveness during fire and maneuver.
• Disrupted operations.

6-2
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

• Needless loss of combat power.

• General degradation of cohesion and morale.

FRATRICIDE PREVENTION
6-17. Aviation units must practice antifratricide tactics, techniques, and
procedures during all training. Unit SOPs must reflect a thorough
understanding of fratricide and must focus on those TTP that the soldiers
understand, innovate and refine themselves, and practice frequently. The
following initiatives can help establish and refine unit SOPs.

DOCTRINE/TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES

Direct-Fire Weapons Control Measures

6-18. Marking Target Reference Points. Use ground-burning
illumination, white phosphorus, beacons, colored smoke, strobes with IR
filters, and identifiable engagement areas to orient maneuver and fires.
6-19. Weapons Control Status for Direct Fires. Use a weapons-control
status similar to air defense. Weapons HOLD, TIGHT, and FREE would
indicate the necessity of an external verification of the fire command or call
for fire.
6-20. Rules of Engagement. Use detailed ROE to establish engagement
criteria for various conditions that crews may face. Establish a tie-in between
visibility, FLIR conditions, and weapon engagement ranges.
6-21. Control Measures. Establish control measures that provide spatial
separation between adjacent units; for example, an AH-64 battalion may
establish a free-fire area in which, in coordination with higher and adjacent
units, the crews can have a high degree of confidence that elements found
within the area are not friendly. Units may also establish buffer zones
around ground units for close combat. Before control measures can be
effective, they have to be accurately plotted on crew-members’ maps and fully
understood.

Indirect Fire-Control Measures (Rockets and Field Artillery)

6-22. The following are indirect fire-control measures for rockets and field
artillery:
• Establish and practice routine positive controls (permissive controls for
those who can see; restrictive measures protect those who are exposed).
• Establish simplified procedures for external clearance of fires; for
example, an attack battalion clears all fire missions through its fire
support officer.
• Incorporate fire-support members in liaison teams for detailed flank
coordination.
• Anticipate special controls needed for mixed voice-digital
environments.

6-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Reconnaissance Priorities
6-23. The following are reconnaissance priorities:
• Consider priority intelligence requirements relating to the feasibility of
the routes, navigation, and maneuver plan.
• Consider allocation of some reconnaissance to flank observation and
reporting.
• Accurately track movement of ground forces in sector by radio net
surveillance, visual observation, and tie-in with higher headquarters.
Rehearsals
6-24. The benefits of rehearsals include the following:
• Well-understood fire-control measures are established.
• Maneuver element locations and actions are well-known.
• Information reaches down to every crew member.
• Feedback to leaders results in refinements in the plan.
• Fratricide prevention measures are determined.
• Problems are identified and corrected.
• Crew-member confidence and aggressiveness increase.
• Crew members have a sense of partnership or ownership in the plan.

TRAINING

Control Measures and Graphics Training

6-25. Units must train each crew member on the different types of control
measures used and their graphic portrayal. Crews must ensure that they
copy and plot graphics and control measures accurately on their maps. A one-
or two-kilometer error could be the difference between life and death.

Combat Vehicle Identification Training

6-26. Great responsibility comes with the ability to quickly and efficiently
kill. Crews must be able to identify as many friendly and enemy ground and
air vehicle/systems as possible. Efforts to become proficient at this skill will
enhance combat effectiveness. All units are responsible for developing and
implementing a formal working, consistent training program. Part of this
formal training program should be the Recognition of Combat Vehicles
(ROC-V) Program. Units should include the ROC-V Program in their target
acquisition and identification training. For information on this program, call
commercial 703-704-1473/1718 (DSN 654-1473/1718). Combat vehicle
identification training key elements include the following:
• Do not key on vehicle details that the gunner could not realistically
discern such as bore evacuator position; key on chassis shape, turret
shape and position, and relative length of gun tube.
• Do not push for moving CVI training; studies show that it is not critical
in CVI training.
• Shift polarities regularly in FLIR/TIS.

6-4
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

• Use training in assembly areas for vehicle identification; the tactical

assembly area is a good place to train because it allows the crews to
key in on the prevailing terrain of the area.
Crew Training
6-27. Crew training focuses on collective situational awareness, particularly
at night. It includes training and assessment of the crew’s ability to maintain
awareness of the aircraft’s heading and location in relation to both friendly
and enemy forces.
6-28. TASCs have training tapes available from the U.S. Army Armor
Center, Fort Knox, Kentucky, and the Night Vision Laboratories, Fort
Belvoir, Massachusetts, showing thermal signatures of different vehicles—
friendly and threat.

Simulators
6-29. A situational training exercise in a compatible simulator can be an
excellent building block for reliable threat identification. Intermingling
threat and friendly vehicles on training scenarios may build crew confidence.
6-30. The U.S. Army Combined Arms Center, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas,
suggests placing friendly vehicles in target arrays on the range for Tables IX
through XII for situational awareness training. After-action reviews should
follow all training events.

Advanced Table Training/Live-Fire Training

6-31. Advanced table training/live-fire training—
• Allows leaders to track aircraft and ground-force orientation in a
“go-to-war” OPTEMPO.
• Uncovers weaknesses in the unit’s level of understanding of mission
and combined-arms operations.
• Uncovers weaknesses in unit leadership and planning.
• Builds confidence in the unit’s ability to conduct multiship warfighting
missions.
• Focuses on situational awareness from crew to battalion level.

ORGANIZATION
6-32. Liaison officers and liaison parties are normally located in the tactical
operations center of the higher headquarters. A liaison party normally
includes an assistant S3 officer, a fire support officer, and a communications
specialist (enlisted). Primary duties are to—
• Make sure that the aviation element understands scheme of maneuver
and the intent of the ground.
• Exchange information throughout the operation, not just on the front
end.
• Standardize graphic-control measures.
• Establish and maintain communications between the aviation element
and the ground element.

6-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

MATERIEL SOLUTIONS
6-33. Although the Army is investigating many technical solutions to
fratricide, there are no materiel solutions to the fratricide problem other than
panel markers or light-marking devices. During Operation Desert Storm,
deployed units painted an inverted “V” on vehicles to denote friendly forces.
Coalition forces understood this symbol; the inverted V—“Λ”—is the number
eight in Arabic. Some units also used IR reflective tape on vehicles to aid in
vehicle recognition. The drawback was that to be visible at 2,000 meters, the
symbol had to be at least 2 feet by 2 feet. Also, it was directional, meaning
that if the symbol was on the back of the vehicle, it was not visible from the
front of the vehicle.
6-34. Although there is an Army standard for marking vehicles, it is difficult
to discern these markings at the standoff ranges of attack helicopters.
Aviation units must not allow their training to focus solely on identifying
vehicles by their markings.

LEADER AND SOLDIER DEVELOPMENT

After-Action Reviews
6-35. All AARs should—
• Address fratricide, whether or not it occurs.
• Highlight near-fratricidal incidents and fire-control successes.
• Discuss and capture techniques for fratricide reduction.
Field Discipline
6-36. Mistakes with weapons and explosives, both friendly and enemy,
historically account for a large number of casualties, many self-inflicted,
during conflict. All soldiers must understand the command policies relating
to the handling of live munitions. To help prevent fratricide, commanders
must enforce strict rules of engagement on use of booby traps, weapons on
safe, employment of mines and explosives, and use of hand grenades.

SECTION II – TARGET ACQUISITION

ACQUISITION DEFINED
6-37. Target acquisition is the timely detection, location, and identification of
targets in enough detail to permit attack by either direct- or indirect-fire
weapons. Effective target acquisition requires the combined effort of the
crew. This section—
• Describes the target-acquisition process.
• Discusses methods for acquiring and classifying targets.
• Relates target-acquisition confirmation to conduct of fire.

6-6
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

TARGET-ACQUISITION PROCESS
6-38. The target-acquisition process is a series of progressive and
interdependent steps or actions with which an aircrew acquires enemy
targets for destruction. It is a continuing requirement for all aircrew
members, whether in the offense or defense, moving or stationary. Crew
search is the crew’s collective efforts—using both the unaided eye and
aircraft optics, within assigned sectors of observation—to explore the area of
operations visually for enemy presence. The acquisition process consists of
the following elements:
• Detection is the discovery, by any means available (sight, sound, or
smell) of any phenomena (personnel, equipment, or objects) of potential
military significance.
• Identification is the friendly or hostile character of a detected potential
target determined by its physical traits such as size, shape, or
functional characteristics.
ƒ Classification is the categorizing of a potential target by the
relative level of danger that it represents.
ƒ Confirmation is the rapid verification of a target in terms of the
initial identification and classification; during the engagement, the
crew must identify and classify the target before engaging it.
• Location is the determination (by direction, reference point, or grid) of
where a potential military target is on the battlefield (air or ground).
• Reporting includes spot reports that provide commanders with critical
information during missions; the requesting agency specifies the
method of sending or transmitting spot reports. Reports of no enemy
sighting are often just as important as actual enemy sightings.

CREW SEARCH
6-39. Crew search, or observation, is the act of carefully viewing or watching
the area of operation—using search and scanning techniques and sectors of
observation—to acquire targets. Sectors of observation are areas assigned to
each crew member for search and target acquisition. Crew members must
know their assigned sectors of observation to thoroughly cover the battlefield.
When operating in larger groups (team, platoon, and company), each
helicopter will overlap fields of observation with the coverage of other
helicopters.

AERIAL SEARCH TECHNIQUES

6-40. Crew members will scan their areas of observation at all times to detect
targets or possible target signatures. Three search techniques enable crew
members to locate targets quickly: side scan, motive, and stationary. Crews
must divide duties during deliberate search—someone must fly the
helicopter. Crews may employ all three techniques, using the aided or
unaided eye or aircraft optics, under both day and night conditions.

6-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

SIDE-SCAN TECHNIQUE
6-41. The crew normally uses this technique when the aircraft is operating at
an altitude of 100 feet AGL or higher at cruise airspeed. The crew is looking
for readily visible or obvious sightings. Over most terrain, the CPG/CPO
systematically—
• Looks out about 1,000 meters and searches in toward the aircraft.
• Looks out one-half of the distance (500 meters) and searches in toward
the aircraft.
• Looks out one-fourth of the distance (250 meters) and searches in
toward the aircraft.
• Repeats the procedure.

MOTIVE TECHNIQUE
6-42. The crew uses this technique when the aircraft is operating at
terrain-flight altitudes and at airspeeds of 10 KIAS or more. The crew divides
the entire area on either side of the aircraft into two major sectors: the
nonobservation sector and the observation work sector. The nonobservation
sector is the area where the aircrew’s field of vision is restricted by the
physical configuration of the aircraft. The observation work sector is that
portion of the field of vision to which search activity is confined. The
observation work sector is subdivided into two smaller sectors:
• The acquisition sector is the forward 45-degree area of the observation
work sector; this area is the primary area of search.
• The recognition sector is the remainder of the observation work sector.
In using the motive technique, the CPG/CPO looks forward of the
aircraft and through the center of the acquisition sector for obvious
sightings; he then scans through the acquisition sector, gradually
working back toward the aircraft.

STATIONARY TECHNIQUE
6-43. The crew uses this technique at NOE altitudes with the aircraft
hovering in a concealed position. The crew makes a quick, overall search for
sightings, unnatural colors, outlines, or movements. The crew members start
scanning to the immediate front, searching an area of about 50 meters in
depth. The crew continues to scan outward from the aircraft, increasing the
depth of the search area by overlapping 50-meter intervals until the crew has
covered the entire search area.

6-8
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

SPECIFIC AREA SEARCH USING OPTICS

6-44. If the crews do not find targets using the motive, side-scan, or
stationary techniques and if time permits, they may use their optics to make
a careful, deliberate search of specific areas in their sector. This method is
also used to search, in detail, small areas or locations with likely or suspected
enemy activity.
• Concentrate on one specific area or location, and study it intensely.
• Look for direct or indirect target signatures in a clockwise sweep
around the focal point (key terrain feature) of the area; some examples
of signatures to look for are the following:
ƒ Dust created by movement or firing.
ƒ Diesel exhaust.
ƒ Track or tire marks on the ground.
ƒ Reflection from glass or metal.
ƒ Angular object that does not blend in with the surroundings.
ƒ Vegetation that seems out of place.
ƒ Radical movement of vegetation.
ƒ Flash or smoke from a firing gun or missile.
ƒ Entrenchments or earthworks.

TECHNIQUES FOR CREW SEARCH

6-45. Crew members can search for targets in FLIR (if available) wide field of
view, both day and night. They can select a narrower field of view when they
acquire a target.

Note: Crew members should start with wide fields of view and, when they
acquire the target, select a narrower field. When firing at a target, they can
select a wider field of view to observe munition impacts. Many times, attack
crews will select a narrow field of view and maintain it through munitions
impact. Crew members will not be able to adjust the weapons on target if
they do not see the impacts.
6-46. Use the laser range-finder to determine how far the crew is looking.
Crews normally use the laser range-finder only to find ranges to an acquired
target. The laser range-finder can help overlap sectors of observation.
6-47. On qualification ranges, use the laser range-finder to bracket a target
before it pops up. For example, if crew members know that a target is
between 2,000 and 2,500 meters on a general azimuth from the firing point,
they can use their laser to pick a point to observe at about 2,300 meters.
When the target pops up, crew members will be looking in the general area
and target acquisition will be easier.
6-48. Switching between black and white hot on FLIR during a search will
sometimes cause a target to appear. A well-optimized FLIR, coupled with
frequently reversing polarities, will help the crew acquire targets.

6-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

6-49. AH-64 and OH-58D crews should use their onboard video recorder
during deliberate search. Playback of the videotape may reveal targets
unseen during search.

TARGET DETECTION
6-50. Target detection is the discovery of objects (personnel, vehicles, or
equipment) of potential military significance on the battlefield. It is the first
phase of target acquisition. Target detection occurs during crew search as a
direct result of observing target signatures.

TARGET SIGNATURES
6-51. Target signatures are telltale indicators or clues that help an observer
detect potential targets on the battlefield. Most weapons and vehicles have
identifiable signatures. These distinguishing characteristics may be the
result of equipment design or the environment in which the equipment is
used. Firing a tank main gun will produce blast, flash, dust, smoke, and
noise.
6-52. Look for track-vehicle signatures in open areas and rolling terrain.
Look for helicopters on the back side of tree lines, on ridgelines, and in
significant folds in the terrain. Crews must be familiar with where enemy
positions, both vehicular and dismounted, will likely be located.

EXAMPLES OF TARGET SIGNATURES

Soldier Signatures
6-53. Soldier signatures include—
• Foxholes.
• Broken vegetation.
• Footprints.
• Camp fires.
• Cleared fields of fire.
Track-Vehicle Signatures
6-54. Track-vehicle signatures include—
• Vehicle track on the ground.
• Dust clouds from movement.
• Weapon’s firing report and smoke.
• Bright, white flash at night.
• Thermal signatures:
ƒ Suspension and exhaust systems will be more visible than the rest
of the vehicle and surrounding area.
ƒ A gun tube that has just fired will appear much brighter than a
tube that has not.
ƒ Normally, the vehicle is more visible than the surrounding area
and is readily visible when weather conditions permit.

6-10
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

General Signatures
6-55. The general signature indicators are—
• Sun glint from objects such as canopies and windshields.
• Vapor trails from shoulder-fired missiles.
• Dust and movement of foliage.

TARGET-DETECTION CHALLENGES
6-56. Some targets are more difficult to detect than are others. Units must
train diligently in target-detection techniques to find the most elusive
targets. The following are some examples of these more difficult targets and
detection challenges:
• Targets on the extreme edge of the field of view.
• Targets that are camouflaged or in shadows.
• Small, single targets such as a lone, dismounted ATGM or a
shoulder-fired antiaircraft missile position.
• Natural obstacles such as weather and terrain.
• Man-made obstacles such as smoke and battlefield clutter.
• Crew fatigue.

TARGET LOCATION
6-57. Target location determines where a potential target is on the
battlefield. Locating a target occurs as a result of observation and detection
during crew search. Target location allows a crew member to fix or locate a
target for the other crew members; for example, a pilot locating a target for
his copilot/gunner. The following are common target location methods.

CLOCK METHOD
6-58. The clock method and sector methods are the fastest methods used to
get the gunner on target. The crew bases 12 o’clock on the direction of
helicopter movement while traveling and on aircraft orientation or the nose
of the aircraft when stationary; for example, “BMP, nine o’clock.”

SECTOR METHOD
6-59. Similar in concept to the clock method, the sector method is quicker.
Crews use the sector method to indicate a direction from the aircraft’s
direction of movement or orientation. Center sector is always to the direct
front; for example, “BMP, left front.”

WHEEL METHOD
6-60. The wheel method is a relatively quick method. Primarily, the pilot
uses this method to get the gunner on target; for example, “Turn left—stop
turn—hold.”

Note: When handing a target over to another aircraft, use a magnetic

heading. The previously discussed methods may not be relevant to another
crew because of its position.

6-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TARGET CLASSIFICATION
6-61. Target classification is the grouping of potential targets by the relative
level of danger that they represent. The aircrew determines target
classification after it completes target acquisition. To defeat the many enemy
targets that will appear on the battlefield, the crew must rapidly decide
which targets present the greatest danger. Target classifications are most
dangerous, dangerous, and least dangerous. Estimate of the threat array,
target by target, leads to a priority-of-engagement decision. The crew further
analyzes the targets in terms of hard (tank) versus soft (truck) and single
(tank) versus multiple (troops) to determine the proper ammunition (MPSM
or PD rockets) and weapon system to use in the engagement.

MOST DANGEROUS
6-62. When crew members observe an enemy air-defense target that exhibits
the intent to engage them, they classify that target as most dangerous. This
type of target is the greatest threat; the crew must engage it immediately. If
crew members encounter more than one target, they should engage the
closest one first.

DANGEROUS
6-63. When crew members observe an enemy air-defense target that does not
exhibit the intent to engage them, they classify that target as dangerous. The
crew should engage this type of target after destroying all of the most
dangerous targets, unless otherwise specified by the priority of engagements.
Multiple dangerous targets are engaged the same as most dangerous
targets—the closest one first.

LEAST DANGEROUS
6-64. A target that does not have an air-defense capability but can report the
crew to one that does is classified as least dangerous. The crew engages this
type of target after destroying/disabling all of the most dangerous and
dangerous targets unless certain least-dangerous targets have a high priority
of engagement as in the case of command-and-control vehicles.

6-12
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

CONFIRMATION
6-65. Target confirmation is the rapid verification of the initial identification
and classification of the target. Confirmation takes place after the crew has
completed the fire commands except for the execution command. The crew
may complete the evaluation of the target based on the six-step method. The
crew uses this technique at the discretion of the commander. It provides a
deliberate method for crews to classify a target. If crew members determine
that the target is enemy, they continue the engagement. However, if crew
members answer unknown to the following questions, they probably should
seek out assistance from other crews in the area unless they are taking fire.
Answer yes, no, or unknown for the following questions:
• LINE 1: Is the vehicle located in a briefed enemy sector? (Situational
awareness—a yes response does not necessarily mean that it is
enemy.)
• LINE 2: Is the vehicle oriented toward friendly positions? (Situational
awareness—a yes response does not necessarily mean that it is
enemy.)
• LINE 3: Is the vehicle tracked? (Categorizes the vehicle based on the
briefed enemy situation. If it is not tracked, assume that it is wheeled.)
• LINE 4: Does the vehicle have a gun? (Categorizes the vehicle as a
potential threat; may distinguish the vehicle between a tank and an
APC.)
• LINE 5: Does the vehicle have a turret? (Further refines LINE 3; also,
shifts attention to the turret, where the shape may help identify the
vehicle.)
• LINE 6: Does the vehicle have other equipment mounted on it? (For
example, radar, missiles and smoke generators may help identify an
ADA system.)

SECTION III – RANGE DETERMINATION

RANGE DETERMINATION
6-66. The laser range-finder is the primary method of determining range in
attack helicopters. LRF malfunctions, environmental conditions, battlefield
obscurants, or target size may force the crew to use alternate methods. This
section explains how to determine range without the LRF.

RECOGNITION METHOD
6-67. Range determination by recognition is simple and accurate when
practiced. The target must be visible to the unaided eye. The principle of this
method is that when crew members see a target, they can determine the
range according to what they recognize; for example, if a crew member can
recognize a target with the unaided eye as a tank, it is probably within 1,500
meters. Table 6-1 shows what the average person can identify with the
naked eye at various ranges. The ranges shown are the maximum
ranges for identification.

6-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 6-1. Identification Ranges

TARGET UNAIDED EYE

(METERS)

Tank crew, troops, machine gun, antitank gun, mortar 500

Tank, armored personnel carrier, truck—by model (for example, T-72) 1,000

Tank, howitzer, APC, truck—generic 1,500

Armored vehicle, wheeled vehicle 2,000

6-68. When using the recognition method, crew members must consider the
size and clarity of the target in relation to its background. Some light and
terrain conditions make a target seem closer; others make it seem farther
away. The conditions outlined below may cause an error in estimating range
by the recognition method.
6-69. A target seems closer—
• On a bright, clear day.
• When the sun is in front of it.
• When it is at a higher elevation.
• When it is brightly colored.
• When it contrasts with the background.
• When looking across ravines, hollows, rivers, or depressions.
• In the desert.
• At sea.
6-70. A target seems closer—
• In fog, rain, or haze.
• When the sun is behind the target.
• At lower elevations.
• When it is smaller.
• When it is dark colored.
• When it is camouflaged.

6-14
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

MAP METHOD
6-71. Crew members can use a map to determine range to target. The
CPG/CPO finds the position of his aircraft on the map using Doppler, GPS, or
other navigation system coordinates or terrain positioning. He then
determines the position of the target. Once he determines the position of the
aircraft and the target, he measures the distance between the two to
determine range. All aircrews must carry maps even if their aircraft have
electronic navigation devices.

KNOWN RANGES
6-72. Using battle-position cards, an attack-by-fire position card, or similar
techniques, the aircrew can overcome a laser range-finder failure. When
positioned in the battle position, the BPC or ABFC allows the crew to
determine ranges from the battle position/attack-by-fire position to center of
mass of the engagement area.

MIL RELATIONSHIP METHOD

6-73. The mil relationship method is useful in deliberate range
determination. To use this method, the crew must know the width, length, or
height of the target. Measure the width, length, or height with the
helicopter’s optics; substitute the mil relation; and compute the range.
Accuracy depends on knowledge of target dimensions and the ability of the
individual to measure with the helicopter’s displays and the ability to relate
the measurement to the actual target range.
6-74. There are about 18 mils in one degree. The mil is a unit of angular
measurement equal to 1/6,400 of a circle. One mil equals a width (or height)
of 1 meter at a range of 1,000 meters. The relationship of the angle, the
length of the sides of the angle, and the width (height) between the sides
remains constant.
6-75. Table 6-2 can help aircrews determine range to target when the
helicopter’s LRF is not working. Aircrews can use this chart for training
deliberate range determination.

6-15
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 6-2. Mil/Range Table—Tank and APC

AVERAGE THREAT TANK

VEHICLE MIL ANGLE AND RANGE IN METERS

DIMENSION
0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7

Length
13,400 6,700 4,467 3,350 2,680 2,233 1,914 1,675 1,489 1,340 1,218 1,117 1,031 957
6.7 meters

Width
6,800 3,400 2,267 1,700 1,360 1,133 971 850 756 680 618 567 523 486
3.4 meters

Full height
4,600 2,300 1,533 1,150 920 767 657 575 511 460 418 383 354 329
2.3 meters

Turret
2,000 1,000 667 500 400 333 286 250 222 200 182 167 154 143
height
1 meter

AVERAGE THREAT ARMORED PERSONNEL CARRIER

VEHICLE MIL ANGLE AND RANGE IN METERS

DIMENSION
0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7

Length
12,800 6,400 4,267 3,200 2,560 2,133 1,829 1,600 1,422 1,280 1,164 1,067 985 914
6.4 meters

Width
5,200 2,600 1,733 1,300 1,040 867 743 650 578 520 473 433 400 371
2.6 meters

Full height
4,200 2,100 1,400 1,050 840 700 600 525 467 420 382 350 323 300
2.1 meters

THE MIL RELATION

6-76. The relationship of the angle in mils (m), the length of the sides (or
range) in thousands of meters (R), and the width between the ends of the
sides in meters (W) is expressed as the mil relation of—

W=m
R

6-16
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

6-77. Because the mil relation is constant, the crew may substitute other
units of measurement—such as yards, feet, or inches—for meters in
expressing width or range. However, the relation holds true only if both W
and R are expressed in the same unit of measure; for example, if the sides of
a 1 mil angle are extended to 1,000 meters, the width between the ends of the
sides is 1 meter. Computations are difficult in a busy cockpit. The following
formula is the easiest to use and is preferred for quick range computations.

RANGE TO TARGET = (WIDTH OF TARGET/MIL) X 1,000

Note: Width refers to the measurement of width, length, or height of the
vehicle.

6-78. Using this formula, crew members divide the width of the target by the
determined mil measurement and multiply by 1,000. If they round the mil
values to a whole number and memorize a mil value for each of one or two
fields of view in the helicopter’s optics, practice will produce accurate, quick
range determinations. Table 6-3 shows some average measurements (in
meters) for the above formula.

Table 6-3. Average Measurements in Meters

TYPE OF VEHICLE LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT

(meters) (meters) (meters)

TANK 7 3 2

APC 6 3 2

AIRCRAFT MIL VALUES

6-79. The key to determining range with the mil method is that crew
members must remember mil values that relate to their particular aircraft.
The training program should focus on using one or two selected mil values
that the aircrew can easily remember. Focusing on a few values can speed up
the process and produce consistent ranges.

MIL DETERMINATION FOR THE AH-64

6-80. The Apache aircraft can display several different reticle symbologies to
the crew. The following provides a brief description of the different reticles.

TADS LOS Reticle

6-81. The TADS LOS reticle is a crosshair symbol that represents the TADS
line of sight. The TADS LOS reticle is generated by the TADS TEU and is
displayed as part of the TADS imagery.

6-17
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Note: If TADS becomes the selected NVS, then the TADS LOS reticle display
is inhibited and the aircraft symbol generator (AH-64A) or display processor
(AH-64D) will generate the LOS reticle for display, which has different
dimensions than the TADS LOS reticle.
LOS Reticle
6-82. The LOS reticle is displayed as part of the flight symbology format
(hover, transition, or bobup) and weapon symbology format. The LOS reticle
is a crosshair located at the center of the display and represents the LOS of
the crew member’s selected sight. The reticle is generated by the aircraft
symbol generator or the display processor.

LOS Reticle (Cruise)

6-83. The cruise LOS reticle is a bold crosshair reticle located in the center of
the cruise-mode flight format. It represents the crew-member’s selected sight
and is used as an aiming reticle. When the pilot selects cruise-flight mode
symbology, he will see the bolded reticle displayed. The reticle is generated
by the aircraft display processor (AH-64D).

Cued LOS Reticle

6-84. The cued LOS reticle is a bold, dashed crosshair symbol that represents
the crew-member’s acquisition source in the flight symbology and weapon
symbology formats. The reticle is generated by the aircraft symbol generator
or the display processor. When the fixed gun is used, the cued LOS reticle
represents the same mil value as the LOS reticle.
6-85. HMD display—NVS. The CPG and pilot’s HMD can present the LOS
reticle/cruise LOS reticle and the cued LOS reticle in the flight symbology
format when the NVS selection is PNVS or TADS. The reticles from point to
point and the center gap are nominally the same dimensions. Table 6-4
provides the mil values for the FOV and the LOS reticle dimensions for the
PNVS or TADS FLIR WFOV when selected as the NVS.

Table 6-4. Mil Values With the LOS Reticle and Cued LOS Reticle

SENSOR FOV HFOV VFOV HRET VRET HGAP VGAP

PNVS - 711.1 533.3 65.3 62.0 20.8 19.8
TADS/FLIR WIDE 636.5 490.7 58.4 57.1 18.6 18.2

6-86. HMD and ORT (HMD, HOD, and HDD) with the TADS Sight
Select. These displays are used by the CPG and provide him with a
45-degree FOV diagonal down to 0.45 degrees FOV diagonal depending on
the TADS sensor and field of view selected. Table 6-5 shows the mil values
for TADS FLIR and DTV fields of view and the TADS LOS reticle in the
FOV. Round numbers are used in range formulas.

6-18
 _________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Table 6-5. HMD, HOD, and HDD Mil Values With the TADS LOS Reticle

SENSOR FOV HFOV VFOV HRET VRET HGAP VGAP

TV WIDE 56.9 42.7 11.4 8.5 1.7 0.9
TV NARROW 12.8 9.6 2.6 1.9 0.4 0.2
TV ZOOM 6.4 4.8 1.3 1.0 0.2 0.10
FLIR WIDE 636.5 490.7 127.3 98.1 18.5 9.8
FLIR MEDIUM 130.3 100.1 26.1 20.0 3.8 2.0
FLIR NARROW 38.4 29.7 7.7 5.9 1.1 0.6
FLIR ZOOM 19.2 14.8 3.8 3.0 0.6 0.3
KEY:
1. SENSOR: Day TV or FLIR
2. FOV: Field of View
3. HFOV: Horizontal field of view
4. VFOV: Vertical field of view
5. HRET: Horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
6. VRET: Vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
7. HGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally
8. VGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured vertically

6-87. Longbow MPD Mil Determination. The AH-64D Longbow Apache

MPD can also present the sensor video with flight and weapon symbology.
The MPD is a 1:1 aspect ratio compared to the 4:3 aspect ratio with the HMD
and ORT that results in a different formatted video. The Longbow MPD
allows the sensor video to be presented in a wide, normal, or zoom “view”
selection. The MPD “view” selection is different from the actual sensor FOV
selection. A brief description is provided below.
• Wide view—Top and bottom area on MPD contains black or gray-
scale borders, and the image is cropped about 5 percent in width (2.5
percent on each side); in height, the vertical FOV presented is
nominally the same as the sensor vertical FOV. The mil dimensions
provided for the MPD wide-view tables are for the video presented and
do not include the top/bottom black or gray-scale borders.
• Normal view—The image is cropped about 25 percent in width (12.5
percent on each side); in height, the FOV is nominally the same as the
sensor vertical FOV.
• Zoom view—The center 30 percent of the image is presented over the
entire display with 70 percent of the image cropped.

6-19
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

6-88. MPD Views With NVS Sensor Selected. The following three tables
(Table 6-6 through 6-8) reflect the NVS sensor video FOV and LOS reticle
symbology presented on the Longbow MPD in mil dimensions for the PNVS
and TADS FLIR WFOV when selected as the NVS sensor. The reticle
dimensions from point to point and center gap are nominal for the LOS
reticle, cruise reticle, and cued LOS reticle in the flight symbology format.
6-89. MPD Views With the TADS Sight Select. The MPD can present the
TADS sensor video with the TADS LOS reticle for target acquisition
providing a 44-degree field-of-view diagonal down to 0.24 degrees FOV
diagonal depending on the sensor, sensor field of view, and MPD “view”
selected. Tables 6-9 through 6-11 show the mil values for FLIR and DTV
fields of view and TADS LOS reticle. The TADS LOS reticle is generated by
the TEU and displayed as part of the TADS imagery. The reticle displayed in
the different MPD “views” will change in apparent size on the display video
because of video reformatting; however, it will retain the nominal mil
dimensions of the TADS LOS reticle for the sensor FOV as displayed on the
ORT or HMD.

Table 6-6. MPD View Mil Values With NVS Sensor and LOS Reticle—Wide View

SENSOR FOV HFOV* VFOV* HRET VRET HGAP VGAP

PNVS - 678.1 533.3 75.5 74.2 25.2 24.8
TADS FLIR WIDE 606.5 490.6 67.5 69.4 22.5 22.8
* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

Table 6-7. MPD View Mil Values With NVS Sensor and LOS Reticle—Normal View

SENSOR FOV HFOV* VFOV* HRET VRET HGAP VGAP

PNVS - 542.6 533.3 60.4 59.4 20.1 19.8
TADS FLIR WIDE 483.9 490.6 53.9 54.6 18.0 18.2
* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

Table 6-8. MPD View Mil Values With NVS Sensor and LOS Reticle—Zoom View

SENSOR FOV HFOV* VFOV* HRET VRET HGAP VGAP

PNVS - 348.7 342.6 38.8 38.1 12.9 12.7
TADS FLIR WIDE 310.1 314.6 34.5 35.0 11.5 11.7
* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

6-20
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Table 6-9. MPD View Mil Values With the TADS and TADS LOS Reticle—Wide View

SENSOR FOV HFOV* VFOV* HRET VRET HGAP VGAP

TV WIDE 54.0 42.7 11.4 8.5 1.7 0.9
TV NARROW 12.2 9.6 2.6 1.9 0.4 0.2
TV ZOOM 6.1 4.8 1.3 1.0 0.2 0.1
FLIR WIDE 606.5 490.7 127.3 98.1 18.5 9.8
FLIR MEDIUM 123.8 100.1 26.1 20.0 3.8 2.0
FLIR NARROW 36.5 29.7 7.7 5.9 1.1 0.6
FLIR ZOOM 18.2 14.8 3.8 3.0 0.6 0.3
KEY:
1. SENSOR: Day TV or FLIR
2. FOV: Field of view
3. HFOV: Horizontal field of view
4. VFOV: Vertical field of view (does not include top/bottom borders)
5. HRET: Horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
6. VRET: Vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
7. HGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally
8. VGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured vertically
* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

Table 6-10. MPD View Mil Values With the TADS and TADS LOS Reticle—Normal View

SENSOR FOV HFOV* VFOV* HRET VRET HGAP VGAP

TV WIDE 42.6 42.7 11.4 8.5 1.7 0.9
TV NARROW 9.6 9.6 2.6 1.9 0.4 0.2
TV ZOOM 4.8 4.8 1.3 1.0 0.2 0.1
FLIR WIDE 483.9 490.6 127.3 98.1 18.5 9.8
FLIR MEDIUM 97.7 100.1 26.1 20.0 3.8 2.0
FLIR NARROW 28.8 29.7 7.7 5.9 1.1 0.6
FLIR ZOOM 14.4 14.8 3.8 3.0 0.6 0.3
KEY:
1. SENSOR: Day TV or FLIR
2. FOV: Field of view
3. HFOV: Horizontal field of view
4. VFOV: Vertical field of view
5. HRET: Horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
6. VRET: Vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
7. HGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally
8. VGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured vertically
* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

6-21
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 6-11. MPD View Mil Values With the TADS and TADS LOS Reticle—Zoom View

SENSOR FOV HFOV* VFOV* HRET VRET HGAP VGAP

TV WIDE 27.0 27.0 11.4 8.5 1.7 0.9
TV NARROW 6.1 6.1 2.6 1.9 0.4 0.2
TV ZOOM 3.0 3.0 1.3 1.0 0.2 0.1
FLIR WIDE 310.1 314.6 127.3 98.1 18.5 9.8
FLIR MEDIUM 62.0 63.5 26.1 20.0 3.8 2.0
FLIR NARROW 18.2 18.8 7.7 5.9 1.1 0.6
FLIR ZOOM 9.1 9.4 3.8 3.0 0.6 0.3
KEY:
1. SENSOR: Day TV or FLIR
2. FOV: Field of view
3. HFOV: Horizontal field of view
4. VFOV*: Vertical field of view
5. HRET: Horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
6. VRET: Vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
7. HGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally
8. VGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured vertically
* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

6-22
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

MIL DETERMINATION FOR THE OH-58D (KIOWA)

6-90. Table 6-12 shows the mil values for the Kiowa MFD.

Table 6-12. Mil Values for the Kiowa Warrior

SENSOR FOV RAS/WT RAS/HT MILLIMETERS MILLIMETERS GPC GPCL/

LOS/ LOS/HF H-V
R/A/G

TV WIDE .6 20.2 2.9 4.2 10.2 19.2

TV NARROW .4 5.0 .7 1.0 2.6 4.8

TIS WIDE 2.0 25.2 3.6 5.2 12.8 24

TIS WIDE 2x 1.0 12.6 1.8 2.6 6.4 12

TIS NARROW .6 7.6 1.1 1.6 3.8 7.2

TIS NARROW .3 3.8 .5 .8 1.9 3.6

2x

KEY:
ƒ RAS/WT: rocket aiming symbol, width.
ƒ RAS/HT: rocket aiming symbol, height.
ƒ LOS/R/A/G: line of sight, rockets, ATAS, gun.
ƒ LOS/HF: line of sight, Hellfire.
ƒ GPC: gun pitch cue, solid ring.
ƒ GPCL/H-V: gun pitch cue lines, horizontal and vertical.

LASER-OFF OPERATIONS
6-91. Laser range finders can fail. Always have a back-up plan. Few units
can use their laser range-finders during routine home-station training. Use
the mil-determination methods to send spot reports, target handovers, and
battle-damage assessments. In addition, units may set up a training program
on the ground using M22 binoculars. These binoculars have mil scales. They
reinforce the methods of mil-based range determination before the crew
executes them in the aircraft. Most aircraft are equipped with GPS or inertial
navigation. Crews may use these devices to determine range to target.

SECTION IV – CREW COMMUNICATION

STANDARDIZING CREW COMMUNICATION

6-92. Attack helicopter crew-member work loads increase during an
engagement. Review of videotapes of actual weapons engagements from
armed conflicts shows that communications between crew members lack
standardization and are often confusing. Because the sequence of
communication is unknown, crew members become confused in the busy
cockpit. Crew members sometimes become irritated with other crew members

6-23
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

because of a communication breakdown. For this reason, units should

develop standardized target engagement procedures (steps) to provide a
structure for consistent, effective engagements.
6-93. Rote memorization of words by crews is not the intent of this section.
The intent is for the phrases to make sense and become part of the crew’s
vocabulary through training. TCs 1-209, 1-213, and 1-214 discuss crew
coordination and establish a list of standardized phrases.
6-94. This section defines the process of cockpit communication and outlines
the steps necessary to implement standard fire commands. This section gives
some reasons why crews should use standard fire commands during
engagements.

CREW TURNOVER
6-95. When crew turnover occurs, the commander may have to cross-level
crews quickly to meet missions. Crews must use standard sequences during
target acquisition and engagement to avoid confusion between existing crew
members and newly assigned crew members.

TIME SEQUENCE
6-96. Testing shows that standard sequences during target acquisition and
engagement significantly reduce engagement times.

FOCUS
6-97. Standard sequences help the crew to stay focused during demanding
engagements. Crews should use proper communication in training to better
prepare themselves for actual combat engagements. Crew communication
and coordination consist of the following essential elements.

COMMUNICATE POSITIVELY
6-98. Communication is positive when the sender directs, announces,
requests, or offers. The receiver acknowledges the sender. Positive
communication—
• Is quickly and clearly understood.
• Permits timely actions.
• Uses a limited vocabulary to improve understanding in a
work-intensive cockpit.

DIRECT ASSISTANCE
6-99. A crew member may direct assistance, either for himself or another
crew member, when required. An example is communication during an
aircraft emergency procedure.

ANNOUNCE ACTIONS
6-100. Each crew member will announce actions that affect other crew
members.

6-24
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

OFFER ASSISTANCE
6-101. A crew member will offer assistance when he sees that another crew
member needs help.

ACKNOWLEDGE ACTIONS
6-102. Crew members must understand directives and announcements from
other crew members. Acknowledgements must be short and positively
indicate that the crew members received and understood the message.

BE EXPLICIT
6-103. Crew members should use clear terms and phrases and positively
acknowledge critical information.

FIRE COMMANDS
6-104. The following are the elements of standard fire commands. Crews
should use standard fire commands for all target engagements:
• Alert.
• Target location.
• Movement commands.
• Target identification.
• Weapon selection.
• Weapon engagement.
• Weapon effect.
• Adjust fire command.
6-105. The following is an explanation of each element of the standard fire
command. In this explanation, target refers to ground targets and air
targets.

ALERT
6-106. This is simply one crew member spotting a target and notifying
another crew member.

TARGET LOCATION
6-107. The crew member who observed the target tells the other crew
member its location.

MOVEMENT COMMANDS
6-108. Movement commands are commands to the crew member flying the
aircraft that explain how to maneuver the aircraft to engage the target.

TARGET IDENTIFICATION
6-109. Crew determines what the target is. If not readily apparent, the crew
uses deliberate action to classify the target.

6-25
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

WEAPON SELECTION
6-110. The crew determines the appropriate weapon for engagement. For
example, if the crew will fire a missile, the gunner will announce from which
side of the aircraft that he will launch the missile.

WEAPON ENGAGEMENT
6-111. The crew member firing will announce “shot” before trigger pull for
missiles or rockets or “firing” for cannon.

WEAPON EFFECT
6-112. The firing crew member reports target effect for BDA.

ADJUST-FIRE COMMAND
6-113. This command adjusts the fire of weapons on target. A crew member
primarily uses this command for engagement with rockets. It is similar to
shift commands for artillery.

LINES OF COMMUNICATIONS
6-114. Lines of communications must be established or communicated during
each step of the engagement. The following examples contain information
that crew members should pass between themselves.

ALERT
6-115. The following is an example of communication of an alert:
PILOT: “Gunner, target.” (The pilot indicates that he sees a target, and
he wants to hand the target over to the CPG for identification.)
COPILOT: “Tally.” (This message tells the pilot that the copilot sees the
target.)
TARGET LOCATION
6-116. The following is an example of a target-location communication:
COPILOT: “240 degrees, 3,200 meters.” (The copilot tells the pilot the
location of the target.)
MOVEMENT COMMANDS
6-117. The following is an example of a movement command:
COPILOT: “Turn right to 240 degrees.” (The copilot tells the pilot to turn
the aircraft.)
PILOT: “Turning right to 240 degrees.” (The pilot repeats the command
for confirmation.)
TARGET IDENTIFICATION
6-118. The following is an example of target identification communication:
COPILOT: “BMP, 3,200 meters.” (The copilot identifies the target and
states the range.)

6-26
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

WEAPONS SELECTION
6-119. The following is an example of a weapons-selection communication:
COPILOT: “One Hellfire ready, left side. Designating.” (This
communication denotes that the crew member will launch the missile
from the left side of the aircraft.) The copilot states the weapon of choice
for the engagement and declares laser status.
PILOT: “Turning right, in constraints.” (The pilot maneuvers the aircraft
into constraints.)
WEAPON ENGAGEMENT
6-120. The following is an example of a weapon-engagement communication:
COPILOT: “Shot.” (This communication indicates trigger pull for the
weapon.)
WEAPONS EFFECT
6-121. The following is an example of a weapons-effect communication:
COPILOT: “Target destroyed.” (This message tells the pilot that the
target has been destroyed.)

PHRASEOLOGY
6-122. The most important aspect of crew coordination is the sequence. The
following phrases are examples that facilitate crew coordination.

ALERT TERMINOLOGY
6-123. The following alert terminology is commonly used:
• Target. A crew member has spotted a ground target.
• Bogey. A crew member has spotted an unidentified airborne target.
• Bandit. A crew member has spotted an identified hostile airborne
target.
• Gunner, target. The pilot wants to hand a target over to the
copilot/gunner or door gunner.
• Pilot, target. The gunner wants to hand a target over to the pilot.
Note: Crews may substitute “bogey” or “bandit” for “target.”
• Multiple targets. The pilot/crew has spotted more than one ground
target.
• Multiple bandits (bogeys). The pilot/crew has spotted more than one
airborne target.

TARGET LOCATION
6-124. Target location information includes—
• Identification of the target (if known).
• Magnetic heading to the target; for example, “090 degrees.” The crew
states the heading from the nose of the aircraft.
• Range to target—estimated range or laser range to target.

6-27
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

MOVEMENT COMMANDS (IF REQUIRED)

6-125. The movement commands include—
• Break. Immediate action command to perform a maneuver to deviate
from present ground track; the word right or left will follow it.
• Hold—
ƒ At hover. Maintain present hover altitude and heading.
ƒ In flight. Maintain airspeed, altitude, and heading.
• Slide. Horizontal movement of aircraft followed by a direction: left,
right, forward, or back.
• Stop. Go no further; halt present action.
• Turn—
ƒ At hover. Perform pedal turn right or left.
ƒ In flight. Turn right or left from current ground track.
• Stop Turn. Terminates turn. Pilot holds heading/altitude present at
stop turn command.

TARGET IDENTIFICATION
6-126. Target identification is self-explanatory. The crew states the identity
of the target.

WEAPONS SELECTION
6-127. Weapons selection is self-explanatory. The engaging crew member will
announce the weapon of choice for target engagement.

WEAPONS ENGAGEMENT
6-128. The following are terms commonly used during weapons engagement:
• Ready. Used by the pilot or gunner during engagements; tells the other
crew member that the selected weapon is ready to fire.
• Shot. Announced at trigger pull for rocket or missile engagements.
• Firing. Announced at trigger pull for cannon engagements.
• Searching. Indicates that the gunner is actively searching for targets
or that he has selected a wider field of view and is observing the target
area for munition impacts.
• Match and shoot. Cooperative rocket engagement in AH-64; tells the
pilot that the CPG is ready and range is in the FCC and that the pilot
can line up symbology to fire rockets.
• Sensing. Indicates that the gunner is looking for rocket impacts to
adjust subsequent rounds during follow-on rocket engagements.

WEAPONS EFFECT
6-129. The following are terms commonly used to describe weapons effects:
• Hit. Rounds complete and target was hit.
• Destroyed. Rounds complete and target was killed.

6-28
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

• Miss. Rounds complete and crew did not hit target.

• Adjusting. Command from gunner that a miss has occurred and he is
adjusting rounds to target.
• Bad missile. Indicates that an apparent missile malfunction has
occurred based on suspect flight path.

ADJUST-FIRE COMMANDS
6-130. The following are commonly used range-adjustment terms:
• Long. Impact is behind the target.
• Short. Impact is in front of the target.
6-131. The following are examples of commonly used azimuth-adjustment
terms:
• Line. Azimuth is correct.
• Left. Impact is to the left of the target.
• Right. Impact is to the right of the target.
6-132. The following are examples of commonly used adjust-fire terms:
• Short, line. Impact is in front of the target, but the azimuth is correct.
• Long, left. Impact is to the left and behind the target.
• Short, right. Impact is to the right and in front of the target.

MISCELLANEOUS WEAPONS TERMS AND COMMANDS

6-133. The following are examples of miscellaneous weapons terms and
commands:
• Cease fire. This command means to stop firing but continue to track.
• Heads down. The gunner is in a weapons mode; the gunner’s attention
is primarily focused inside the aircraft.
• Heads up/out. The gunner is not in a weapons mode; the gunner’s
attention is primarily focused outside the aircraft.
• Strobe. The pilot indicates that the aircraft is being tracked by radar;
the pilot will then give a heading direction and identify the radar, if
possible.
• Spot. The aircraft sight/missile seeker is receiving laser
target-designation energy.
• Tally. The crew/crew member sees the traffic, obstacle, or target.
• Drifting. The crew/crew member alerts to the unintentional or
uncommanded movement of the aircraft.
• Looking. The crew is looking for the traffic, obstacle, or target.
• No joy. The crew/crew member does not see or identify the traffic,
obstacle, or target.
• Traffic. The crew/crew member identifies and alerts others to the
presence of friendly aircraft that may pose a hazard to the current
route of flight of the aircraft; crews/crew members will follow this alert
with an approximate clock position, altitude, and distance; for
example, “Traffic six o’clock, one-thousand AGL, two-thousand meters.”

6-29
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

• Visual. Contact is established visually.

REMOTE HELLFIRE MISSILE FIRING

6-134. A remote Hellfire missile call for fire is a concise message initiated by
the laser designator. It contains all information that the designator and
launch aircraft need to effect an engagement, with the exception of the exact
positioning of the two aircraft. Because of the specific parameters that are
required to safely and successfully fire remote Hellfire missiles, the
engagements are usually preplanned or part of unit SOPs.

REMOTE CALL FOR FIRE

6-135. The call for fire is transmitted in four parts consisting of seven
elements. The four parts are as follows:
• Designator identification and warning order.
• Number of missiles, target location, and control.
• Ready call with time of flight of missile, if known.
• Execution call.
6-136. The four parts consist of seven elements:
• Designator identification.
• Warning order.
• Number of missiles requested with requested code.
• Targeting information and laser target line.
• Ready call with time of flight.
• Execution call.
• Battle-damage assessment.

CALL-FOR-FIRE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATOR IDENTIFICATION
6-137. The designator identification call tells the launch aircraft who is
calling for the missiles, and it clears the net for the mission.

WARNING ORDER
6-138. The warning order alerts the launch crew of the upcoming mission
request.

NUMBER OF MISSILES REQUESTED

6-139. The number of missiles is self-explanatory. Crews will always launch
missiles on the designator’s designated code. For multiple missiles, unless
specified, the launch aircraft will launch missiles with 15 seconds between
launches. Also, unless specified, the launch crew will select LOAL-LO or
LOAL-HI, depending on terrain masks, cloud ceiling, and target range.

Note: The designating crew assumes that launch crew members accept the
mission if they acknowledge the warning-order transmission. If the launch

6-30
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

crew members cannot accept the mission, they alert the designating crew at
this time and give the reason for not accepting the mission; for example, the
launch crew responds “Blue 6, mission denied, out of missiles.”

TARGETING INFORMATION
6-140. This information allows the launch aircraft to launch the missile on
the proper heading and laser target line and within range constraints. The
target location can be a grid coordinate (six- or eight-digit) or a preplotted
target reference point. Designating aircraft will announce “Call when ready,”
“Fire when ready,” or “At my command.” If available, target altitude should
also be included in this transmission.

READY CALL AND TIME OF FLIGHT

6-141. The launch aircraft calls the designator when he is ready to fire and
provides the missile time of flight.

EXECUTION CALL
6-142. The designator initiates the missile launch by transmitting “Fire,
over” if he specified “At my command.” The launch aircraft responds with
“Shot, over.” The crew member launches the missile when the designator
responds with “Shot, out.”
6-143. For multiple launches, the launch aircraft will announce “Shot one,
over,” followed by a 15-second delay, then “Shot two, over.”
6-144. The designating aircraft may also specify “Fire when ready.” When
the designator gives this command, the firing aircraft announces “Shot,
over.” The designator responds with “Shot, out.” Then, the crew member fires
the missile.

BATTLE-DAMAGE ASSESSMENT
6-145. The designating aircraft will send the BDA to the launch aircraft.

SEQUENCE OF RADIO TRANSMISSIONS

6-146. Figures 6-1 through 6-3 give the sequence of radio transmissions for
fire missions.

WARNING
The crew will make the transmissions in Figures 6-1
through 6-3 via secure means.

6-31
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Note: The numbers in parentheses denote the sequence of radio

transmissions.
DESIGNATING AIRCRAFT—BLUE 6 LAUNCH AIRCRAFT—BLUE 4

(1) BLUE 4, THIS IS BLUE 6, ONE

ALPHA, OVER.

(2) BLUE 6, THIS IS BLUE 4, ONE

ALPHA, OUT.

(3) GRID AA 12345678, ALTITUDE

1,078, LTL 160, RANGE 4,000,
CALL READY, OVER.

(4) GRID AA 12345678, ALTITUDE

1,078, LTL 160, RANGE 4,000,
ROGER, OUT.

(5) READY, TIME OF FLIGHT 20

SECONDS.

(6) TOF 20 SECONDS (STANDBY

OR FIRE) FIRE, OVER.

(7) SHOT, OVER.

(8) SHOT, OUT.

(9) BDA: 1 T-72 DESTROYED, GRID

AA 12345678, TIME: 2115.

(10) BDA: 1 T-72 DESTROYED,

GRID: AA 12345678, TIME: 2115.

Figure 6-1. Example of Call for Fire, One Missile, Two Attack Helicopters

6-32
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Note: The numbers in parentheses show the sequence of radio transmissions.

DESIGNATING AIRCRAFT—BLUE 6 LAUNCH AIRCRAFT—BLUE 4

(1) BLUE 4, THIS IS BLUE 6, ONE

ALPHA, ONE BRAVO, RIPPLE,
OVER.

(2) BLUE 6, THIS IS BLUE 4 ONE

ALPHA, ONE BRAVO, RIPPLE, OUT.
(3) GRID AA 12345678, LTL 160,
RANGE 4,000, CALL READY, OVER.
(4) GRID AA 12345678, LTL 160,
RANGE 4,000, ROGER, OUT.

(5) READY, TIME OF FLIGHT 20

SECONDS.

(6) TOF 20 SECONDS (STANDBY

OR FIRE) FIRE, OVER.
(7) SHOT ONE, OVER.
(8) SHOT ONE, OUT.
(9) SHOT TWO, OVER.

(10) SHOT TWO, OUT.

(11) BDA: 2 T-72s DESTROYED,

GRID AA 12345678, TIME: 2115.

(12) BDA: 2 T-72s DESTROYED,

GRID: AA 12345678, TIME: 2115.

Figure 6-2. Example of Call for Fire, Two Missiles, Ripple Fire, Two Attack Helicopters

6-33
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Note: The numbers in parentheses denote the sequence of radio transmissions.

CALLING AIRCRAFT—BLUE 6 SHOOTING AIRCRAFT—BLUE 4

(1) BLUE 4, THIS IS BLUE 6, FIRE

MISSION (GUN, ROCKETS, OR
HELLFIRE), OVER.

(2) BLUE 6, THIS IS BLUE 4, FIRE

MISSION, HELLFIRE, OUT.

(3) ONE T-72, (POLAR, SHIFT FROM

KNOWN POINT, OR GRID) GRID AA
12345678, 1,078 FEET, ALPHA SPOT
ON, OVER.

(4) ONE T-72, GRID AA 12345678,

1,078 FEET, TALLY ALPHA SPOT,
OUT.

(5) CALL SPOT (OR FIRING), OVER.

(6) FIRING, OVER.

(7) BDA: 1 T-72 DESTROYED, GRID:

AA 12345678, TIME: 2115.

(8) ROGER, END OF MISSION, OUT.

Note: On transmission #3, the calling aircraft may use the following for handover:
• Polar: 360 degrees, 4,000 meters from location.
• Shift from known point: two kilometers south of TRP 5, EA CAT.
• Grid: AA 12345678, 1,078 feet (altitude).

Crews should use laser spot-tracker operations for this procedure.

Figure 6-3. Autonomous Fire Mission to Apache

6-34
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

SECTION V – CHECKS ON TRAINING

PRECOMBAT CHECKS
6-147. Commanders conduct precombat checks to ensure that the unit is
prepared for the mission. Aircrews and aircraft require extensive precombat
checks to ensure mission readiness.
6-148. Precombat checks are a part of all missions. They are included in this
manual to increase the success of helicopter gunnery operations. The
following paragraphs contain a suggested format for the aircrew precombat
checks.

BEFORE-MISSION RECEIPT CHECKS

6-149. Preflight the aircraft according to the appropriate checklist with the
PPC in progress. Place the aircraft logbook in a known location, preferably in
the aircraft.
6-150. Refuel the aircraft, and load it with ammunition (if applicable).
Compute weight and balance for the aircraft load.
6-151. Place aircrews on the appropriate crew-rest schedule. The commander
and the ASO should track crew rest.

UPON-MISSION RECEIPT CHECKS

6-152. The commander and company/troop planning cells provide the
following information, gathered from the various unit staff sections, to the
crews:
• Navigation/air-route planning according to posted A2C2 plan.
• Communications card or SOIs.
• COMSEC/IFF codes for aircraft.
• Mission graphics.
• Fire support and fire distribution on the objective.
• Weather and light data and fuel requirements.*
• Tactical flight-plan preparation and filing.
• Risk assessment.
• Assessment of enemy capability.*
• Actions on contact.*
• Aviation Mission Planning Station products—a three-way check of all
AMPS products should be SOP within a company/troop; the best time
for correcting mistakes is before mission execution.*
*Note: Units may develop much of this information concurrently with the
staff. Units can continually track and update the items marked with the
asterisks before mission receipt.

6-35
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

PREPARING FOR THE MISSION

6-153. After receiving the mission briefing (either written or oral), the
mission unit executes the following actions:
• The commander conducts a briefing to cover more detailed flight and
tactical procedures for the mission aircrews; the crew briefing
contained in FM 3-04.112(FM 1-112) is recommended.
• The planning cells receive updates from the staff, continually updating
the friendly and enemy situation, as well as weather and
environmental considerations.
• By backward planning, the commander and planning cells determine
the mission’s time sequence.
• Crews file a flight plan or field strip at flight operations with a current
risk assessment for the mission.

FINAL CHECKS
6-154. Before the crews move to the aircraft, the following checks will take
place.

GRAPHICS
6-155. Check mission graphics for completeness and accuracy. The
commander or a designated platoon leader will inspect the mission graphics
of the mission crews. Use a known, properly prepared map as the baseline.
This technique can be ongoing throughout the planning process, but a quick
check before the mission is critical.

COMMUNICATIONS CARD
6-156. If the crews copy their own frequencies and call signs, designate a
crew member to read the card aloud to the crews to check accuracy. Ensure
that crews know the proper frequencies to conduct a communications check.

MISSION STATEMENT AND COMMANDER’S INTENT

6-157. The commander will read the mission statement and the commander’s
intent to the crews.

CHAIN OF COMMAND
6-158. Restate the chain of command, and reiterate the downed-pilot points
and the SERE plan at this time. Ask for questions, and send the crews to
their aircraft.

6-36
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

CREW CHECKS
6-159. Crews will check the following items before getting into the aircraft:
• Crew members are within the limits of crew-endurance policy.
• The aircraft ignition key is present.
• Aviation life-support equipment, both personal and crew, is present.
• Checklist, operator’s manual, and all mission-related publications are
available.
• Special mission equipment (such as night vision goggles and sidearms)
is available and function check is complete.
• COMSEC and IFF codes are loaded in appropriate equipment.

RUN-UP CHECKS
6-160. Complete the start sequence according to the appropriate operator’s
manual checklist. Crews are required to complete weapons system
initialization according to the appropriate aircraft ATM. For armed
helicopters, weapons checks and boresights are one of the most critical
precombat checks.

COMMUNICATIONS CHECK
6-161. For brevity, complete the communications check in the following
manner. Techniques for communications checks may not be compatible with
all communications packages in armed helicopters. The commander may use
this technique for SOP development.
6-162. Chalk 1 starts the check on FM, selects UHF and transmits, and then
selects VHF and transmits; for example, “This is (call sign) on 1 (FM internal
frequency, nonsecure), 2 (UHF internal frequency), and 3 (VHF internal
frequency).”
6-163. This process continues through the chalk order until all aircraft in the
flight have checked. All aircraft will monitor to determine which radios work
on which aircraft.
6-164. Chalk 1 announces “This is (call sign); go secure on 1.” This call
instructs the flight to select the secure mode for its FM radio. The check
progresses, in chalk order, but only the FM is used.
6-165. Once FM secure is checked, the flight can go active on Have Quick,
with a designated aircraft in the flight sending the time. Sending the time is
not required if the unit is equipped with self-timing radio systems.
6-166. If crews use this procedure during all training missions,
communications checks become quick and routine. The commander may need
to readjust radio nets because of nonfunctioning radios in the flight. The
commander should let all crews know which radio nets will be used before
takeoff.

6-37
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

6-167. Once all checks are complete and the commander is satisfied that the
flight can communicate, he will call “Execute card.” This command will tell
the crews to tune their radios to the predetermined nets for the mission; it
probably will be the last radio transmission until takeoff.

PRACTICING
6-168. When the commander or AMC calls for takeoff, he must assume that
the crews in his flight have conducted all weapons system checks. Units
should practice precombat checks before all training missions. When
practiced regularly, these checks will become quickly performed habits for
unit crews.

6-38
 Chapter 7

Engagement Techniques
Attack helicopters can be extremely effective if aircrews understand the
techniques and standards associated with the employment of their
weapons systems. This chapter discusses the terminology, procedures,
and standards for helicopter-fired weapons.

SECTION I – MODES AND TYPES OF FIRE

TYPES OF FIRE
7-1. The two types of fire are direct and indirect. FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1)
defines direct and indirect fire:
• Direct fire is “fire directed at a target that is visible to the firer or firing
unit.”
• Indirect fire is “fire delivered on a target which cannot be seen by the
firing unit.”

MODES OF FIRE
7-2. Armed helicopters use three modes of fire—hover fire, running fire, and
diving fire.

HOVER FIRE
7-3. Hover fire is any engagement conducted below ETL. It may be either
stationary or moving. For objectively scored gunnery ranges, hover fire is
broken into two subgroups. When hover is specified on a gunnery task, the
crew will conduct the task from a stationary hover. This definition is not
intended to conflict with aircraft ATMs.

Stationary Fire
7-4. Hover engagements occur with the aircraft at stationary hover. Crews
can deliver both direct and indirect fires during hover fire.

Moving Fire
7-5. Moving fire is an engagement from a moving helicopter below effective
translational lift. Horizontal movement may be in any direction, but some
deliberate movement is present. Crews can deliver both direct and indirect
fires during moving fire.

7-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

RUNNING FIRE
7-6. Running fire is an engagement from a moving helicopter above ETL.
Crews can deliver both direct and indirect fires during running fire. The
forward airspeed adds stability to the helicopter and increases the delivery
accuracy of weapon systems, particularly rockets.

DIVING FIRE
7-7. Diving fire is a direct-fire engagement from a helicopter that is in a
diving flight profile according to the aircraft ATM. The airspeed and altitude
of the aircraft improve the accuracy of engagements, particularly for rockets.
The following are the advantages of diving fire:
• Normally, decreased vulnerability to small-arms fire.
• Increased armament loads because of decreased power requirements.
• Increased accuracy because of fewer rotor down-wash effects on
munitions and a more stable launch platform.
• A smaller beaten zone in the target-effect area.

SECTION II – TERMINOLOGY AND INFORMATION ON WEAPONS

EFFECTIVE RANGE
7-8. FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1) defines effective range as, “that range at which a
weapon or weapons system has a 50-percent probability of hitting a target.”
The effective range of a weapon extends from the minimum effective range to
the maximum effective range. Maximum effective range is the longest range
at which a weapon has a 50-percent probability of hitting a target.
7-9. The standard targets used in determining effective range for cannons
are 3- by 3-meter plywood silhouettes. These are vehicle-sized targets.
7-10. The training tables in this manual require aircrews to engage targets
within the effective range of the weapon with target-practice ammunition.
However, crews may have to shoot long-range engagements in combat using
service ammunition.

2.75-INCH ROCKETS
7-11. Whether fired from an AH-64 or OH-58D, the 2.75-inch rocket system
displays similar characteristics. The following general information applies to
all helicopters armed with this weapon.
7-12. The rocket system mounted on attack helicopters is a unique weapon
system. Rockets fired from an attack helicopter possess characteristics of
both direct- and indirect-fire weapons. Like indirect artillery fire, 2.75-inch
rockets are most effective when fired in mass. In addition, helicopter crews
can fire rockets in the direct-fire and indirect-fire mode.

7-2
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

7-13. Crews can expect 8 to 12 mils of dispersion (sometimes greater,

depending on a variety of factors) from rockets fired from helicopters. The
MK 66 rocket motor spins clockwise up to 30 revolutions per second to motor
burnout caused by the flutes on the motor nozzle. As the motor burns out, the
clockwise rotation of the rocket zeroes out and the wrap-around fins cause
the rocket to rotate rapidly counterclockwise. Engineers designed this
reversal of rotation for the following reasons:
• The high rate of rotation of the rocket may keep the set-back fuze of
the warhead from arming because of the centrifugal force of the
spinning rocket.
• The MPSM warhead’s submunition (other cargo warheads could be
affected as well) ejection pattern is disrupted by high rates of rotation;
the pattern of submunition impacts is inconsistent and provides poor
target coverage without proper submunition ejection.
• Live-fire testing shows that most rockets achieve best effectiveness
between 3,000 and 5,000 meters; these test results apply to both
MPSM and unitary warhead rockets.
7-14. Crews must select the proper weapon for the target. The targets most
suited for rockets are large target areas with high concentrations of enemy
personnel and materiel. Figures 7-1 and 7-2 show examples of rocket targets.
The targets best suited for neutralization with rockets include—
• Troops in the open.
• Tactical assembly areas.
• Command, control, and communications facilities.
• Motor parks and vehicle marshalling area.
• Convoys of thin-skinned vehicles.
• River-crossing sites.
• Deployed artillery or air-defense sites.

7-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 7-1. Example of Rocket Range

7-4
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

Figure 7-2. Emerging Contemporary Threat Array

BORESIGHTING AND DYNAMIC HARMONIZATION

7-15. Armament personnel and aircrews must adjust each weapon system to
ensure that the aiming point and the impact point of the projectile are the
same. Boresighting is the first step in this process. It involves adjusting the
boreline axis of the weapon and the optical axis of the sight. Boresighting
does not compensate for deviations caused by the ballistic characteristics
covered in Chapter 4.
7-16. Normally, armament personnel are responsible for boresighting before
range training. However, aircrews should be knowledgeable in the
procedures for boresighting weapon systems. The publications in the
bibliography describe boresighting procedures for specific helicopters and
weapon subsystems. Table VI shows the ammunition for weapons
calibration and verification.
7-17. The dynamic harmonization procedure is for AH-64 units only. Crews
conduct dynamic harmonization during Table VI. This procedure greatly
improves the accuracy of the 30-millimeter cannon.

7-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

7-18. The range specified by the dynamic harmonization procedure (range

specified within the applicable operator’s manual) is selected to negate the
effect of environmental conditions. In addition, the FOV diagrams and the
correctors are scaled to that range.

Note: This procedure is not a replacement for the CBHK ground procedure.

SECTION III – CREW TECHNIQUES

FIRING TECHNIQUES
7-19. Firing helicopter weapons systems requires a great deal of skill by the
pilot and CPG/CPO. These skills require development and sustainment. They
include aircraft control and burst on target.

AIRCRAFT CONTROL
7-20. Aircraft control is most critical when engaging targets with rockets.
Changes in pitch attitude and relative wind affect rockets as they leave the
launcher. Regardless of the engagement technique used, aircrews should use
a consistent sequence. This sequence is known as the four Ts—target, torque,
trim, and target. This sequence, regardless of aircraft type, assures a
consistent launch. The following describes the sequence.

Target Verified
7-21. Crews verify that they are engaging the correct target. They verify the
correct azimuth. The pilot may select key terrain to assist in lining up on the
target.

Torque Verified
7-22. The pilot verifies the torque required to maintain altitude and does not
change it. Any torque changes during the firing sequence will affect the
distance that the rockets fly based on the changed induced flow from the
rotor system.

Trim Verified
7-23. The trim of the aircraft includes both horizontal and vertical trim.
During hovering fire, the pilot should verify and adjust the pitch attitude
(vertical trim) for the specific range with the cyclic. During running fire, the
pilot should verify and adjust the trim of the aircraft (horizontal trim) with
the pedals before firing. An out-of-trim condition will deflect the rockets
toward the opposite side. That is, if the nose of the aircraft is out of trim to
the left (right sideslip), the rockets will plane into the relative wind to the
right, and vice versa.

Target Reverified
7-24. Finally, the crew reverifies the correct target and azimuth before firing.

7-6
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

BURST ON TARGET
7-25. BOT is the technique used to adjust fires on target. This technique
requires the crew member firing the weapon to sense projectile impacts of the
weapon system and then use proper technique to adjust the rounds on target.
Crews use BOT with cannon, machine-gun, and rocket engagements.
Techniques for applying BOT include the following methods.

Laser Range-Finder Method

7-26. The crew member should—
• Select a narrow field of view on the optics of the helicopter, lase the
target, and note the range to the target.
• Fire a burst of cannon fire at the target.
• Immediately select a wider field of view on the optics.
• Note the impacts of the bullets:
ƒ Lase the impact. Note the range to the impacts; the difference
between the laser range to target and the laser range to the center
of the bullet impacts is the range error.
ƒ Note the azimuth to the impact; if impacts were right or left of the
target, make minor corrections in the aiming point to the opposite
side of the target to adjust bullets on the target.
• Change the range:
ƒ Add/subtract the range error to the original range to target, and
manually enter the corrected range into the aircraft.
ƒ Add/subtract the range error from the original range to target and
lase either short or long of the target to get the corrected range.
• Continue the engagement.
Mil Relation Method
7-27. Using the mil relation method, the crew member should—
• Select a narrow field of view on the optics of the helicopter, estimate
the range to the target using mil values, and input or adjust the range
manually, noting the range to the target.
• Fire a burst of cannon fire at the target.
• Immediately select a wider field of view on the optics.
• Note the impacts of the bullets and measure the distance between the
impacts and the target using the symbology in the optics of the
helicopter; using the mil values in Section III, Chapter 6, determine
the distance—in both range and azimuth—from the target where the
impact occurred.
• Change the range by adding or subtracting the range error to the
original range to target and manually entering the corrected range.
• Continue the engagement.

7-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Recognition Method
7-28. The recognition method is also known as Kentucky Windage. The
effectiveness of this technique is directly proportional to the experience of the
crew member making the corrections. To use this method, the crew member
fires a burst, senses its impact, and estimates the amount of correction
needed to adjust rounds onto the target. Range changes are affected by
moving the selected LOS up or down in relation to the target.

TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES FOR THE MODES OF

FIRE
HOVER FIRE
7-29. Hover fire is fire delivered when the helicopter is below effective
translational lift, either in-ground effect or out-of-ground effect. It may be
stationary or moving, but movement during hover fire is always below ETL
airspeed.
7-30. The four Ts in paragraph 7-20 apply to hover fire. Vertical trim and
horizontal trim are important when the pilot engages from a hover. During
high temperature, high-pressure altitude, and/or high gross-weight
conditions, many aircraft hover OGE near their maximum torque available
limit or are unable to hover OGE at all. Pilots must make smooth, deliberate
control inputs when narrow power margins exist.
7-31. When firing at a hover, the pilot verifies proper torque control by
setting the collective and ensuring that the vertical speed indicator is steady.
The pilot should confirm the pitch of the aircraft with the attitude indicator
or symbology. He should keep the aircraft stable for the most accurate
shots. The pilot can drift with the wind if the threat situation and
terrain permit.
7-32. AH-64 pilots can check the speed of the real wind around the aircraft.
If a crew is shooting rockets on a windy day, a technique is to watch the true
airspeed display and let it become stable, or “constant,” before firing the
rockets.
7-33. When a pilot fires from a hover, the attitude of the aircraft may
prevent him from seeing directly over the nose of AH-64 aircraft. The pilot
should select reference points identifiable from the aircraft to maintain
aircraft alignment and position over the ground during the engagement.

7-8
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

RUNNING FIRE
7-34. The crew selects an initial point about 8 to 10 kilometers from the
target. The initial point should be an identifiable terrain feature. The initial
point is selected primarily as a function of the desired route to the target.
The aircraft departs the initial point toward the target flying contour, using
terrain to mask the approach:
• About 6 kilometers from the target, the pilot starts a climb to achieve
intervisibility with the target; once the crew acquires the target, the
pilot levels the aircraft.
• At 5 kilometers (rockets) or 1,500 meters (cannon) from the target, the
pilot starts a shallow 3- to 5-degree dive angle and the crew begins
engaging the target.
• At 3 kilometers (rockets) or 1 kilometer (cannon) from the target, the
pilot begins his break and uses terrain to cover his departure from the
target area.
7-35. The crew returns for an immediate reattack on the target or returns to
the initial point and holds.
Note: The crew does not fly over the target in running fire.

DIVING FIRE
7-36. Figure 7-3 shows diving fire. Use diving fire when—
• The line of sight to target from hover is obstructed and direct fire is
required on target for a destruction or neutralization mission.
• A high volume of accurate rocket and cannon fire is required on the
target and there is a minimal air-defense threat.
• A high gross weight or environmental conditions prevent hover fire.

7-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 7-3. Diving Fire

7-37. The AH-64A and AH-64D ATMs address diving flight. TC 1-213 (Task
2069) and TC 1-214 (Task 2069) give specific performance standards for
diving flight. The following discussion covers techniques for firing weapons
during diving flight.
7-38. Use the four Ts in paragraph 7-30 (target, torque, trim, and target).
Proper aircraft control enhances the accuracy of the aircraft weapon systems,
primarily with rockets.
7-39. Engage targets with rockets and cannon similar to techniques used in
running fire. Use rockets employing point-detonating fuses, and use “fixed
gun” for cannons during the engagement.
7-40. Use a careful crosscheck because target fixation may cause the pilot to
fly the aircraft into the ground. The pilot should complete the recovery from
the dive no lower than 500 feet AGL for training.
7-41. High rates of descent, coupled with high flight-path speeds, require the
pilot to closely monitor rate of closure and terrain features. The pilot must
plan the dive recovery in time to avoid abrupt recovery maneuvers. If the
pilot attempts an abrupt recovery at high airspeed, “mushing” may occur.

7-10
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

When the pilot tries to recover from a dive, the high rate of descent and high
power setting cause the controls of the helicopter to become less responsive.
Mushing may prevent the pilot from recovering the aircraft from the dive.

Note: The crew should avoid flying over the target in diving fire.

SECTION IV – AIR COMBAT WEAPONEERING

7-42. This section provides information on helicopter weapons and their

employment against airborne targets. Air-combat weaponeering techniques
increase the survivability of the aviation force.

Note: When discussing sighting systems for air-to-air firing, the pilot needs
to understand that it is far more important to know where the bullet is in
relation to the sight at different ranges than it is to know how far the bullet
can go.

WEAPON SYSTEMS ENGAGEMENT RANGES

30-MILLIMETER CANNON, AH-64
7-43. The 30-millimeter cannon when fired FIXED GUN has a bullet impact
at 1,575 meters and a TOF of 3.9 seconds. Recommended range setting is
1,000 meters. Elevation mil corrections for air combat engagement from 500
to 1,500 meters are minimal. Therefore, Kentucky Windage adjustments are
easier and faster than readjustment for range. Table 7-1 contains
information on adjusting aim for elevation.

Table 7-1. Range Adjustment for 30-Millimeter Cannon

RANGE AIM ADJUSTMENT

(meters) (mils)

500 -29.0

1,000 0.0

1,500 +23.3

2.75-INCH ROCKETS
7-44. The MK 66 rocket motor reaches its maximum velocity within 400
meters after launch (at motor burnout). For the purpose of air combat, the
rocket warhead of choice is the flechette, followed by the HEPD.
7-45. The flechette warhead detonates 150 meters before the predetermined
range set by the rocket-management system. Detonation of the warhead
deploys the flechettes at a 12-degree angle and creates a flechette cloud that
becomes a cylinder after 150 meters. This cylinder is about 15.7 meters (49.7
feet) in diameter.

7-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

7-46. Analysis of the firing characteristics of the flechette warhead indicates

that firing three pairs of rockets at a range of 2,000 to 2,500 meters will
result in a 75- to 82-percent probability of hit. Table 7-2 shows range, TOF,
and velocity for the flechette and HEPD MK 66 rockets for air combat
engagements.

Table 7-2. Air Combat Engagement With Rockets

RANGE TIME OF FLIGHT VELOCITY

(METERS) (SECONDS) (METERS/SECOND)
1,000 1.96 510

2,000 4.38 413

3,000 7.41 330

4,000 11.0 278

5,000 15.17 240

6,000 19.93 210

7,000 25.06 195

HELLFIRE MISSILE
7-47. The maximum range of the Hellfire missile is 8,000 meters. Firing the
missile at ranges greater than 8,000 meters greatly reduces the Ph. With an
onboard laser designator, aircrews can engage targets at ranges up to the
maximum range. Ideally, aircrews should engage enemy helicopters
indirectly with the Hellfire. An OH-58D or a ground laser can designate the
target, enabling aircrews to fire the missile from concealed positions behind
masking terrain.

STINGER MISSILE
7-48. Crews should use the air-to-air Stinger at or near maximum range
before the enemy can detect the friendly aircraft. In extended range firing
where/when the friendly aircraft has not been detected, the aircrew should be
aware that the ATAS has a detectable smoke signature under certain
atmospheric conditions. Crews may use the ATAS in short-range firings of
less than 1,000 meters. However, the minimum arming range may affect its
lethality.

7-12
_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

TARGET-ENGAGEMENT FACTORS
RANGE
7-49. Inaccurate range estimation results in rounds missing the target. It
reduces the element of surprise by alerting the enemy to an impending
attack. Therefore, aircrews must train to estimate the range accurately. The
following methods are recommended:
• Visual range estimation.
• Tracer burnout.
• Maps and photomaps.
• Electronic devices.
• Sight mil values.
• Laser range finders—the most accurate of all these methods.

TARGET MOTION
7-50. If a target is not stationary, it becomes necessary to aim the gun ahead
of the target to compensate for motion. The lead requirements for a motion of
a target occur because the target has a velocity and sometimes acceleration.
7-51. The lead component compensating for the velocity of the target is
generally 85 to 90 percent of the total lead requirement. It is a function of the
target’s true airspeed and aspect. The lead component compensation for
target acceleration comprises the remaining 10 to 15 percent of the total lead
requirement.
7-52. The lead for target velocity is a function of the TAS and aspect of the
target. The velocity of the target is not nearly as important as the LOS
motion rate that it creates. The magnitude of that LOS rate is a function of
the magnitude of the target rate of motion and distance. At longer ranges, a
smaller LOS rate is required to match the rate of the movement of the target.
As the range decreases, LOS rate will proportionally increase. To determine
the amount of lead required to compensate for target velocity—
• Compute the amount of target movement in degrees per second and
then multiply that number by 17.45; this number gives the rate of
target movement in mils per second.
• Multiply this number by the TOF of the bullet to the target. The result
is the amount of velocity lead required; for example, if the aircraft is
turning at 10 degrees/second (10 degrees x 1,745 = 174.5 mils per
second) to match (track) the target’s velocity relative to the LOS and
the apparent TOF of the bullet is 0.5 second, the required velocity lead
would be—
Velocity lead = (174.5 mils/second) x (0.5 second) = 87.25 mils

TARGET ACCELERATION (COMPENSATION FOR TARGET ACCELERATION

DURING TAIL-CHASE ENGAGEMENT)
7-53. The acceleration of the target does not actually increase the LOS of the
target before the bullet is fired. What is required, however, is an additional

7-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

lead component to compensate for the change in the motion path of the target
during the TOF of the bullet. The additional lead component compensates for
a turning situation in which the target is turning after the bullet is fired. A
miss distance has been generated because the target turns after the bullet
leaves the gun. The magnitude of acceleration is a function of the total Gs
(crew station G-force) that the target aircraft is generating. Gun-control
theory assumes that over the short TOF of the bullet, the speed of the target
remains constant. The amount of correction will depend on the amount of Gs
pulled by the target aircraft and TOF of the bullet. This amount would not be
greater than 50 mils in most cases.

LEAD ANGLE
7-54. Placing a killing burst onto a moving target requires more than a
passing degree of skill. One of the biggest problems to solve is how much to
lead the target. Without a fire-control computer that can compute lead
angles, the pilot and gunner have an increased workload.
7-55. “Lead the speed” refers to leading the target aircraft by the number of
mils equal to the maximum speed of the aircraft. For example, if the
maximum speed of an aircraft is 120 knots, lead the aircraft by 120 mils in
an engagement. The following are a few guidelines for tracking airborne
targets and engaging them. These guidelines will get the bullets going in the
right direction but will probably require adjustment by the pilot or gunner:
• The 7.62-millimeter weapon system—lead the speed.
• The 30-millimeter cannon—lead the speed.
• Rockets—lead the speed plus 10 percent.
• ATAS—track the target.

WEAPONS GUIDE
7-56. Table 7-3 shows the recommended weapon system to use for air combat
at various ranges to target.

Table 7-3. Recommended Weapon System for Air Combat

RANGE TO TARGET WEAPON SYSTEM

(METERS)
0–1,250 7.62-Millimeter
0–1,500 30-Millimeter
700–2,500 2.75" Rockets
2,000–8,000 Hellfire Missile
1,000–8,000 Air-to-Air Stinger

SIGHT REFERENCE
7-57. Chapter 6 has mil values for sights.

7-14
 Appendix A

Helicopter Door Gunnery

This appendix contains the tactics, techniques, and procedures required
for training and employing door gunners for utility and cargo helicopters.

SECTION I – DOOR GUNNERY TRAINING STRATEGY

DOOR GUNNERY OVERVIEW

MISSION
A-1. Utility and cargo helicopter units will conduct annual live-fire door
gunnery qualification, according to this appendix, on objectively scored range
facilities. Door gunners on utility and cargo helicopters are concerned with
threats to the helicopter and crew on board, whether the helicopter is in the
air or on the ground. Door gunners must be able to acquire and engage a
variety of targets from many different flight profiles. Evaluation of door
gunners includes a time standard to acquire, engage, and hit the target.
A-2. Door gunners are normally helicopter crew chiefs or repairers. They may
also be soldiers from within or outside the unit. Crew coordination is critical
between the door gunners and the pilots of the helicopter. The door gunners
and pilots maintain communication and work as a team to safely operate the
aircraft and to acquire and engage targets as required by the tactical
situation.
A-3. The door gunner’s primary weapon is the 7.62-millimeter M60D/M240
machine gun. The M60D/M240 is a direct-fire weapon system. The
configuration of the M60D/M240 is similar for all cargo and utility
helicopters and differs mainly in the helicopter gun mount and auxiliary
equipment.

DOOR-GUNNER DUTIES
A-4. Door gunners provide direct fire as protection for the aircraft and crew.
To effectively employ their weapon, door gunners must—
• Thoroughly understand the functional characteristics and operation of
the weapon system, as well as its capabilities and limitations.
• Have a thorough knowledge of tactical helicopter employment.
• Be prepared to act independently, based on the threat, and engage
targets without a specific command from the pilot or copilot.
• Act as observers to assist the pilot and copilot in maintaining
situational awareness—in training and in combat.

A-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

A-5. The door gunner will inspect the weapons and weapon subsystems on
the aircraft unless unit SOP or directives specify otherwise. The door gunner
will perform operator-level maintenance on the aircraft weapon system. The
door gunner ensures that the correct type and amount of clean and
serviceable ammunition are on board the aircraft for the mission.
A-6. The door gunner normally assists in daily aircraft maintenance
operations. The unit SOP should specify additional duties/aviation-specific
duties required of the door gunner (not crew chief). Door gunners must act as
integral crew members to help the pilot and copilot operate the aircraft safely
and effectively within the mission envelope.
A-7. During flight and ground operations, door gunners will watch for
hazards and obstructions to flight. These obstructions may vary from
high-tension wires and other aircraft along the flight path to obstacles such
as tree stumps in the landing zone or dunnage in the FARP.
A-8. Reporting potential or actual targets to the pilot/copilot is a specified
task of the door gunner. From the gunner’s side of the aircraft, the primary
observation sector is normally 60 degrees off the nose of the helicopter all the
way to the rear.
A-9. During both combat operations and training, door gunners must
maintain situational awareness. They must know the location of friendly
troops, the location of other aircraft in their formation (including escorting
attack helicopters), and the classification and location of the targets to be
engaged. A door gunner may also be required to mark a ground location with
smoke grenades or tracers.
A-10. The unit SOP should have procedures for crews to follow during an
emergency landing. The door gunners must know the procedures for
removing weapons, electronic equipment (such as radios and COMSEC
devices), or other sensitive equipment or items (such as maps and SOIs) from
the helicopter. The gunner must know how to destroy or assist in the
destruction of sensitive equipment, if necessary, to prevent capture.

DOOR-GUNNER TRAINING PROGRAM

Note: AR 600-106, paragraph 2-3, describes the duties of door gunners. Door
gunners work with aviators under the team concept; the aircrew training
program will be conducted according to the commander’s guide and the
appropriate ATM.
A-11. This program is progressive. It has training gates similar to the gates
found in the attack helicopter qualification program. This training program
gives the door gunner the skills necessary to perform door-gunner duties in a
crew. The training program consists of 10 training tables. These tables
progress in numerical order—from individual marksmanship training to
multiship live-fire training. The training tables support the commander’s
METL and the unit’s MTP.

A-2
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

BASIC GUNNERY
A-12. Tables I through IV are the initial M60D/M240 ground qualification
using the bipod:
• Table I—10-meter practice fire.
• Table II—10-meter record fire.
• Table III—transition practice fire from 100 to 800 meters.
• Table IV—transition record fire from 100 to 800 meters.
A-13. Tables I through IV qualify the door gunner according to FM
3-23.67(FM 23-67) with tasks modified for the M60D/M240 machine gun
using the bipod, tripod, or static aircraft. The philosophy of ground
qualification is to instill confidence in the door gunner and in the soldiers
transported in the helicopter.
A-14. Before firing the basic tables, the door-gunner candidate will receive
premarksmanship instruction on the M60D/M240 machine gun. Figure A-1
shows the minimum instruction required for Tables I through IV.
A-15. Door-gunner candidates must complete ground qualification according
to FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67) before progressing to air qualification. Ground
qualification is a training gate. The door gunner must ground qualify only
once, providing the aircraft qualification (for example, Tables V through VIII)
is completed within 12 months. If the door-gunner candidate does not
complete aircraft qualification—that is, Tables V through VIII—within 12
months of ground qualification, the individual must refire Tables I through
IV before progressing to the aircraft qualification. Once the individual
completes aircraft qualification, within his or her assigned unit, the crew
member does not have to requalify on Tables I through IV if the individual
qualifies annually.
A-16. Units may conduct live-fire training from a helicopter cabin mock-up
during basic gunnery. Many units build a helicopter cabin mock-up for
training their door gunners. They approximate the dimensions of the
immediate area of a door-gunner’s station in the helicopter’s cabin. The
door-gunner trainee can then fire his weapon using a sight picture similar to
that used in the actual aircraft. These “simulators” range in complexity from
simple 20-foot towers to those mounted on 2-1/2-ton trucks, simulating
aircraft movement during engagements. No standard design exists; units
may develop their own design for enhancing door gunnery training.

INTERMEDIATE GUNNERY

Table V
A-17. Table V is the door gunnery skills training and test table. During this
annual table, the door gunner will learn skills needed to execute his duties.
The commander uses this table to assess the readiness of the door gunners
before they progress to Table VI.

A-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

A-18. The Table V program contains two parts: training and assessment. The
training program prepares the door gunner for intermediate live-fire tables.
To fill both door-gunner positions, the commander may designate a noncrew
member. If he does so, Table V training must include instruction on the
basics of the aircraft.
A-19. At a minimum, Table V will include academic instruction on the
subjects outlined in Figure A-2 and a door gunnery skills test of at least 50
questions. Subject areas for the questions will be selected by the commander.
These questions will include questions on the academic instruction, with
emphasis on weapon function, ballistics, target acquisition, and aircraft
procedures. Door gunners will score at least 70 percent on the DGST. Door
gunners must complete the DGST within 180 days before starting
intermediate gunnery.
A-20. Aircraft orientation applies only to door gunners who are not crew
chiefs or who are not familiar with the unit aircraft.
A-21. Units should ensure that their door gunnery training programs are
conducted year round. A gunnery program does not start just before the
qualification range.

Table VI
A-22. If the door gunner completes Table V to standard, he will progress to
Table VI. Table VI is the initial aircraft live-fire table. The door gunner will
fire the M60D/M240 from the aircraft for the first time if he did not fire from
static aircraft for Tables I through IV:
• The table consists of five day tasks, of which one is an NBC task.
• The tables verify the function of the door gunner’s assigned weapons.
• Gunners fire the NBC task in mask and gloves only; this task has no
requirement for a MOPP suit.
Table VII
A-23. Table VII is a day/night practice table for Table VIII. The table consists
of eight tasks (five day and three night) of which one is an NBC task.
Gunners complete this table from the aircraft in a variety of flight modes.

Table VIII
A-24. Table VIII is the qualification table. The table consists of the same
number of tasks as Table VII. Table VIII contains both day and night tasks
and is the gate for advanced table gunnery. Gunners who do not qualify on
Table VIII will not progress to advanced table training. The unit METL and
MTP determine whether to conduct night training and qualification tables.
Night door gunnery is designed for door gunners and crews to use NVGs.
Commanders must designate night/NVG modes to be conducted to meet the
unit’s METL. The more demanding mode of flight does not apply. NVGs may
be used with mounted AIM-1 lasers.

A-4
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Training Objective: To provide initial M60/M240 qualification for personnel assigned to

door gunnery positions

SUBJECT DESCRIPTION REFERENCES

Operation and A class to provide the basic knowledge FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67),

Function of the of how the components of the M60/M240 TM 9-1005-224-10
M60/M240 function during operation.

Assembly, A demonstration and a practical exercise FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67),

Disassembly, and on the general and detailed assembly, TM 9-1005-224-10
Nomenclature of the disassembly, and nomenclature of the
M60/M240 M60/M240 machine gun.

Malfunctions, A class to provide information FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67),

Immediate Action, concerning abnormal operation, TM 9-1005-224-10
and Maintenance corrective action, and maintenance.

Range Estimation A class and practical exercise to provide FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67),

information on methods of determining FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140),
the distance between gunner and target. TM 9-1005-224-10

Fire Control/ A class to provide information on the FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67)

Fire Commands methods used in controlling and
delivering fires.

M60/M240 A briefing on the conduct and standards Unit SOP, Range SOP,
Machine-Gun of Tables I-IV. FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67)
Practice and Record
Fire

Figure A-1. Basic Weapon Qualification

A-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Training Objective: To qualify door gunners

SUBJECT DESCRIPTION REFERENCES

Duties of the Door A class on the duties of door gunners. Unit SOP, Appendix A,
Gunner FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140)

Aircraft Orientation A class and practical exercise to familiarize the Appropriate aircraft
student with the capabilities and limitations of operator’s manual
the unit’s aircraft.

Techniques of Fire A class on principles and techniques of Appendix A,

and Employment helicopter machine-gun firing. FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140),
FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67)

Ballistics A class on ballistics for spin-stabilized Chapter 4, FM

projectiles. 3-04.140(FM 1-140);
Chapter 7,
FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67)

Armament System A class and practical exercise on the TM 9-1005-262-13

Introduction M60D/M240 to include safety procedures and
operator maintenance.

Aviation Battlefield A class to provide an overview of threat defense Bde/Bn S2 brief

Survivability systems that aircrews may face.

Visual Search and A class on techniques of visual search, to FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140)

Target Detection include limitations and procedures of target
detection.

Crew Member A class and demonstration of duties and actions Aircraft operator’s
Emergency taken by the door gunner during in-flight and manual and unit SOP
Procedures forced-landing emergencies.

Night Gunnery A class on techniques and procedures of night FM 3-04.201(FM 1-203)

firing. Range SOP

First-Aid Training A class on principles of first aid. FM 3-04.301(FM 1-301),

FM 4-25.11(FM 21-11)

Protective Mask A class and practical exercise on the TM 3-4240-280-10

description, characteristics, and procedures for
wearing the protective mask during
engagements.

Door-Gunnery A briefing on the conduct and standards of Range SOP,

Qualification Tables VI-VIII. TM 9-1005-224-10,
TM 9-1005-262-13

Figure A-2. Table V, Intermediate Gunnery Training

A-6
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

ADVANCED GUNNERY

Table IX
A-25. Table IX is multiship gunnery using MILES/AGES and blanks with the
M60D/M240. This table will give the door gunners who completed
intermediate gunnery qualification the first opportunity to participate in
training with more than one aircraft.

Table X
A-26. Table X is multiship live-fire gunnery. The intent of Table X is for units
to fire the table at CTCs or large range complexes. The large surface danger
zone of two M60Ds/M240s prohibits multidoor-gunner gunnery at most
installations. The maximum recommended number of aircraft participating
in Table X gunnery is five.

UNIT TRAINING STRATEGY

A-27. Commanders will designate in writing a door gunnery nonrated
crew-member standardization instructor. The door gunnery SI should be a
senior noncommissioned officer with experience in door gunnery. The
standardization instructor is the commander’s point of contact and
subject-matter expert on door gunnery. The SI is responsible for training new
personnel and conducting sustainment training for personnel already
qualified. The standardization instructor will—
• Be a qualified door gunner.
• Organize all training in coordination with the S3.
• Supervise the preparation and execution of all instruction.
• Supervise initial qualification and annual qualification from the
aircraft.
• Evaluate qualification tables.
• Maintain qualification records on all door gunners according to
Chapter 2.
A-28. The commander may designate nonrated crew-member instructors
(FIs) to assist the standardization instructor. The SI will work closely with
the commander and the S3 to administer and evaluate the training program
for unit door gunners. The SI and the FIs should be the best-qualified
personnel to conduct door-gunnery training; however, the standardization
instructor does not have to be a “master gunner,” as paragraphs 1-25 through
1-27 describe.
A-29. The commander, assisted by the standardization instructor, will
complete a unit training assessment according to Chapter 2. Once the
assessment is complete, the commander will outline his objectives for the
door gunnery training program. His guidance must include the desired
training end-state for the program; for example, “two qualified door gunners
per UH-60 in A Company.” The commander should base this requirement on
available resources.

A-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

A-30. Once the objectives for the gunnery are clear, the S3 and the SI will
begin planning the conduct of the training program. Door-gunner training
should be incorporated into the unit training plan as a continual program.
A-31. Units should incorporate door gunnery training into a written SOP
with clear objectives and training goals throughout the training year. Door
gunnery subjects are relevant for sergeants’ time or prime-time training
programs common to most active Army units.
A-32. The unit commander will designate door gunners in writing. The
commander will accomplish this with a memorandum similar to standard
additional-duty appointment orders.
A-33. The door gunnery section of this appendix defines the requirements for
conducting and evaluating live-fire door-gunnery tables. Units that have
night missions as part of their METL will complete the night tasks. The door
gunners will use night-vision goggles while firing from the aircraft.
A-34. Once the intermediate gunnery is complete, the SI will document the
training. He maintains records at least 36 months, according to Chapter 2.

Note: Units should allow door gunners to fire from both sides of the aircraft
for familiarization if resources are available. However, range-control
personnel have specific instructions for door gunnery, which vary from
installation to installation; for example, at one installation, firing may be
allowed only from the right side of the aircraft. Local range-control personnel
have information on local restrictions.

CREW COORDINATION
Note: Aircrew coordination training is a requirement for all door gunners as
directed by DA Message 141500Z June 95.
A-35. High personnel turnover and OPTEMPO make crew coordination for
door gunnery more crucial than in recent years. Crew chiefs stay with their
aircraft; they are an integral part of the crew. Because of personnel turnover
and maintenance, the pilots and copilots may not always fly the same aircraft
or fly with the same crew chief. Training must focus on standardization of
cockpit communication and procedures.

WEAPONS CONTROL AND FIRE COMMANDS

A-36. Before departure on a mission, the pilot in command will brief the crew
on the situation and mission. The briefing is mission dependent but will
normally include the friendly situation, enemy situation, rules of
engagement, possible target areas, marking of targets, mission-specific fire
commands, and other mission-specific information. The unit SOP or
parent-unit operating procedures or directives should dictate when
ammunition is loaded in the aircraft weapons systems.

A-8
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

STANDARD WEAPON CONTROL MEASURES

A-37. The following are the standard weapon control measures/terms:
• Weapons hold. The door-gunner’s weapons will remain in a stowed
position; enemy contact is not likely, or it is an administrative measure
by the PC.
• Weapons tight. The door gunner will place his weapon in a position to
fire and will fire only on order of the PC. Enemy contact is possible.
• Weapons free. Door gunners make the decision to fire, based on the
mission brief where enemy contact is expected.
A-38. The door gunner will acknowledge the weapon-control status to the PC.
If the weapon status is other than weapons hold, the gunner will announce
that the weapon is in a condition and position to fire. The door gunner will
report “gun ready.”

CREW WEAPON SEQUENCE

A-39. Crews should use a standard sequence for engagements (Chapter 6).
The following is the standard weapon sequence for utility/cargo crews. The
intent is for the sequence to follow a logical progression for the crew member.
If the pilot, copilot, or other crew members acquire a target, the observing
crew member will alert the other crew members. The standard weapon
sequence is—
• Which crew member should know (left or right gunner)?
• What is it (for example, target or bandit)?
• Where is it (clock position and range)?
• Who is it (target type)?
A-40. The crew members take action. (What are the crew members doing, or
what should they be doing?) The following is a typical weapon sequence:
• “Left gunner, target, eleven o’clock, six hundred meters, soldiers in tree
line, engage.”
A-41. The left-side door gunner, upon acquisition, would announce—
• “Tally, firing.”
A-42. Chapter 6 lists standard phrases for crew communication. The
following are phrases specifically for door gunnery:
• Open fire. Instructs the gunners to start firing at an obvious threat to
the aircraft and may also apply to a specific gunner; for example, “right
gunner, open fire.”
• Cease fire. Instructs the gunners to stop firing and may also apply to a
specific gunner; for example, “right gunner, cease fire.”
• Right gun/left gun ready. Indicates that guns are ready to fire.
• Right gun/left gun jam. Indicates that a gun is jammed and cannot
fire; right/left indicates which side that the gun is on.
• Right gun/left gun out of ammo. Indicates that the door gunner is out
of ammunition; right/left indicates which side that the gun is on.

A-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Note: “Back gunner” or “back gun” indicates the rear door gunner and will be
used on CH-47s with the third door gunner.

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
FLIGHT EQUIPMENT
A-43. Door gunners, during flight operations, will wear ALSE (such as flight
helmet, flight suit, and gloves) and other pieces of equipment (such as the
AIM-1 laser) specified by regulations/directives. The commander may direct
that door gunners wear additional hearing protection because of the
increased sound-pressure levels generated during weapons firing. For
increased eye protection, door gunners should lower helmet visors during any
firing operations.

SEAT BELT/SAFETY HARNESS

A-44. The door gunner should remain strapped in his seat during normal
aircraft operations. A safety harness (monkey strap) will permit additional
movement inside the aircraft, particularly during engagements.

EJECTED BRASS
A-45. Spent brass that collects on the floor of the aircraft can make footing
hazardous. The slipstream of the aircraft can carry ejected brass from a firing
weapon into the aircraft, causing damage. Door gunners should use
serviceable ejection-control bags (brass catchers) to control spent brass.

BARREL CHANGE
A-46. The airflow around a helicopter in flight helps to cool the machine-gun
barrel. However, a barrel change may still be necessary, depending on the
rate of fire. A barrel change is normally a team effort (gunner and assistant
gunner) on a standard M60. However, on board an aircraft, a barrel change
will more than likely be performed by the individual door gunner. Although
barrel removal and replacement is relatively simple, safety dictates that
standardization of the procedure be emphasized. The unit SOP should specify
when, where, and how crews will carry and secure an extra barrel and how
gunners will accomplish barrel changes. FM 3-23.67(FM 23-67) recommends
barrel change based on the following rates of fire:
• Sustained (100 rounds per minute)—change the barrel every 10
minutes.
• Rapid (200 rounds per minute)—change the barrel every 2 minutes.
• Cyclic (550 rounds per minute)—change the barrel every minute.

AMMUNITION
A-47. DA Pamphlet 350-38 identifies ammunition to train one door gunner
per aircraft annually. Total rounds per aircraft will double when the second
gunner position is authorized. Ammunition for the M60D/M240 is standard
7.62-millimeter mix. Figure A-3 shows the ammunition allocation per table.

A-10
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

GUNNERY TABLES
A-48. Figures A-4 through A-8 (Gunnery Tables VI, VII and VIII) provide the
framework for the door gunnery training program. Commanders may vary
the engagement sequences, conditions, and target arrays within the tables to
meet mission-training requirements or to fit resource constraints such as
range layout. Modified tables must be no less demanding than those in the
manual; such modifications will be temporary. Commanders must work
continuously with installation or regional range authorities to upgrade and
improve gunnery ranges. Commanders may allocate additional ammunition
to Table VI for weapons calibration, if available.
A-49. Tables VII and VIII encompass eight tasks. For the door gunner to be
qualified, he must qualify on five tasks and score at least 350 points on Table
VIII. The score sheet in Chapter 2 can help to score engagements.

A-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

GUNNERY TABLE DESCRIPTION # ROUNDS

I 10-meter practice fire 117/117 ball

II 10-meter record fire 119/119 ball

III Transition range practice fire 182/182 mix

IV Transition range record fire 154/154 mix

V Door-gunner training and assessment 0

VI Aircraft transition/weapons calibration 150/150 mix

VII Aircraft practice 240/240 mix

VIII Aircraft qualification 240/240 mix

IX Section/platoon training (MILES) 200/200 blank

X Section/platoon training 200/0 mix

TOTALS:
7.62-mm ball: 236/236
7.62-mm mix: 1,166 (Active Component) 966 (Reserve Component)
7.62-mm blank: 200/200

NOTES:
1. DA Pamphlet 350-38 contains current ammunition authorizations.
2. The unit METL and MTP determine whether the unit will conduct night training and
qualification tables. Night door gunnery is designed for door gunners and crew to use
NVGs.

Figure A-3. Annual Ammunition Allocation per Gunnery Table

A-12
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TARGET AMMO

(METERS) EFFECT

1 Engage stationary Ground 300-500 Troops 1 Hit 30

target, NBC

2 Engage stationary Takeoff 300-500 Troops 1 Hit 30

target

3 Engage moving target Hover 400-600 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

4 Engage moving target Moving 400-500 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

5 Engage stationary Running 300-800 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

target

Figure A-4. Table VI. Door-Gunner Transition Course

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TARGET AMMO

(METERS) EFFECT

1 Engage stationary Ground 300-500 Troops 1 Hit 30

target, NBC

2 Engage stationary Takeoff 300-500 Troops 1 Hit 30

target

3 Engage moving target Hover 400-600 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

4 Engage stationary Moving 400-500 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

target

5 Engage stationary Running 300-800 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

target

Figure A-5. Table VII. Day Door-Gunner Practice Course

A-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TARGET AMMO
(METERS) EFFECT

1 Engage stationary target Ground 250-350 Troops 1 Hit 30

2 Engage stationary target Hover 400-500 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

3 Engage stationary target Moving 400-600 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

Figure A-6. Table VII. Night Door-Gunner Practice Course (Door Gunners and Crew Use NVGs
and, if Available, AIM-1 Lasers)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TARGET AMMO
(METERS) EFFECT

1 Engage stationary target, Ground 300-500 Troops 1 Hit 30

NBC

2 Engage stationary target Takeoff 300-500 Troops 1 Hit 30

3 Engage moving target Hover 400-600 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

4 Engage stationary target Moving 400-500 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

5 Engage stationary target Running 300-800 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

Figure A-7. Table VIII. Day Door-Gunner Qualification Course

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TARGET AMMO
(METERS) EFFECT

1 Engage stationary target Ground 250-350 Troops 1 Hit 30

2 Engage stationary target Hover 400-500 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

3 Engage stationary target Moving 400-600 Vehicle 3 Hits 30

Figure A-8. Table VIII. Night Door-Gunner Qualification Course (Door Gunners and Crew Use
NVGs and, if Available, AIM-1 Lasers)

A-14
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

A-50. Using the point-calculation table below, scorers can determine a

numerical score for each engagement. To use Table A-1—
• Time the engagement, using the methods outlined in Chapter 2.
• Find the time of the engagement in the “Time” column below; read
down to the “Points” column to determine the score.
• If the engagement time is exactly halfway between two times, figure
the number in between the two scores that the engagement time falls
between; for example, if the engagement time is 10.5 seconds, the score
is 95 points.
• Always round down to get the score; for example, if the engagement
time is 11.7 seconds, the score is 93 (rounded down to 11.5 seconds).
Table A-1. Point Calculation for Tables VII and Table VIII

Time 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 27 30

Points 100 98 96 94 92 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76 74 72 70 50 30

Note: Appendix C contains a full-size version of this point-calculation table.

SECTION II – TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES

FIRE-CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
A-51. Fire control is the name given to the observations, calculations, and
actions involved in firing a weapon. Fire control is the method of directing
munitions so that they will hit the target with a minimum expenditure of
ammunition.
A-52. Most gun systems contain the same basic elements. The line of sight is
the direction from the gun to the target. The line of aim is offset from the
LOS by an amount determined by the following:
• Target motion.
• Helicopter motion.
• Range to target.
• Projectile drop.
• Wind effects.
• Projectile and gun characteristics.
A-53. The gunner must estimate all of the factors that determine the amount
of compensation required. He estimates range and lead for an initial burst
and corrects for elevation and deflection by adjusting the rounds on target;
this is known as applying “burst on target.” Chapter 4 covers the ballistic
factors for door guns (flexible mode).

A-15
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

RANGE ESTIMATION
A-54. Chapter 6 covers range estimation. Door gunners will normally use the
recognition method for range estimation. When the door gunner uses the
recognition method, the following factors affect the accuracy of the range
estimation process.
A-55. Objects seem closer when—
• Viewed from altitude.
• Looking down a straight road or railroad track.
• Objects are in bright light.
• Looking over smooth terrain.
• Color of the object contrasts sharply with the color of background.
A-56. Objects seem farther away when—
• Looking from low altitude to higher terrain.
• Looking over rough terrain.
• There is poor light or fog.
• Only a small part of the object is visible.

WEAPON ENGAGEMENT RANGE

A-57. The maximum range of the M60D/M240 machine gun with the
7.62-millimeter round is 3,725 meters. Maximum range means that, with the
necessary elevation applied to the weapon with standard ball ammunition
over flat earth, the projectile should travel 3,725 meters.
A-58. The published maximum effective range of the M60D/M240 is 1,100
meters. However, the planning maximum effective range is 900 to 950
meters, based on probabilities of hit and tracer burnout.

FIRING TECHNIQUES
A-59. The door gunner must understand the challenges of firing a machine
gun from a helicopter in flight. These challenges include variable airspeeds,
ranges, firing angles, and ballistics. The discussion below explains some of
these complexities, as compared to a ground gunner:
• The door gunner’s firing platform is normally moving; the ground
gunner usually fires from a stationary platform.
• The door gunner normally has only his eyes to estimate range; the
ground gunner can use range finders, maps, or known ground
reference points to more easily determine range.
• The door gunner is usually autonomous regarding fire control and
ammunition conservation; the ground gunner receives fire-control
instructions from his section leader and ammunition-conservation
assistance from the assistant gunner.
A-60. Range estimation is the door gunner’s first consideration when he
prepares to fire at a target; door gunners must be able to estimate range

A-16
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

quickly and accurately. They should practice range estimation throughout

their training.
A-61. Proper aiming points for target engagement from a moving helicopter
vary with airspeed, altitude, bank angle, and rate of turn. As a rule, the point
of aim is to the near side of the target (the side of the target closest to the
firer). The aiming point is, in part, due to the motion of the aircraft and the
effects of projectile drift that carry the bullet forward.
A-62. Another accepted method of initial target engagement is for the door
gunner to aim low when firing from the left side of the aircraft and to aim
high when firing from the right side. Bank angles, approach angles, turns,
and other aircraft motions will also be factors in aiming the weapon and
placing effective fire on a target (see Figure A-9).

A-63. When crews have AIM-1 lasers available, they should ensure that they
turn off their lasers between engagements. Crews should treat lasers with
the same discipline that they use with loaded weapons.

Figure A-9. Aiming Points

FIRE ADJUSTMENT
A-64. Observation and adjustment of fire must be continuous throughout the
engagement. Initial delivery of long bursts will normally help the gunner
adjust subsequent bursts.
A-65. Gunners must try to anticipate the movement of a target. Personnel on
the ground and in vehicles will tend to move when fired upon. Gunners need
to quickly react to that movement by shifting fire in the direction of the
movement.
A-66. A four-to-one (ball-to-tracer) ratio of ammunition will normally provide
enough tracers for positive adjustment of fire. At engagement ranges beyond
tracer burnout, the door gunner must consider other factors. Tracer burnout
of 7.62-millimeter ammunition is about 900 meters. At ranges beyond 900

A-17
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

meters, the firer could observe tracer burnout and believe that he aimed low
when, in reality, the projectile continued along its trajectory and struck
beyond the target.
A-67. The M60D/M240 machine-gun barrel tends to climb during firing.
Gunners should exercise caution to prevent this. If a gunner fails to correct
for a climbing muzzle, rounds could reach an angle that could endanger other
aircraft, or even the main rotor blades of the firing aircraft.
A-68. When firing with the M60D/M240, the door gunner can place the
horizontal crosshair and front sight blade on line with the target to correct
for bullet drop at ranges up to 750 meters. Gunners must aim higher at
ranges beyond 750 meters.
A-69. When correcting for lead effect, the gunner must align the target, front
sight blade, and the approximate point on the horizontal crosshair. This
alignment is only an estimated point of aim because aircraft speed/movement
will make accurate aiming difficult. When firing from the right side of the
helicopter, the gunner will use the right-hand section of the sighting rings
according to target location and aircraft speed. When firing from the left side
of the helicopter, the gunner will use the left side of the sighting rings.
Figures A-10 and A-11 contain more information on the lead effect.

OVERVIEW
A-70. This section describes the tactics, techniques, and procedures for
planning and conducting multihelicopter door gunnery operations. It is used
to establish M60D/M240 multihelicopter door gunnery training programs in
aviation units that have assigned utility or cargo helicopters.
A-71. This section applies to commanders, platoon leaders, crew members,
and nonrated crew members of aviation units who conduct air movement and
air-assault missions. It does not replace aviation unit door gunnery training
manuals or SOPs. It provides planning and training requirements for aerial
door gunnery that are not in doctrinal publications or ATMs.
A-72. These tactics, techniques, and procedures apply to the UH-1, UH-60,
and CH-47 helicopters. However, these principles apply to all aviation units
that conduct multihelicopter air-movement and air-assault operations.

MULTIHELICOPTER DOOR GUNNERY

A-73. Multihelicopter door gunnery consists of the techniques used to acquire
and engage targets from helicopters flying in formation at terrain-flight
altitudes. Aircrews and door gunners in the formation must use effective
crew-coordination procedures to visually acquire, identify, and engage
targets. Both aircraft and passengers are vulnerable to attack during
air-movement operations and throughout all phases of air-assault operations.
Therefore, door gunners must respond by delivering direct and indirect fires
on these targets. This section discusses crew-coordination procedures, gunner
employment, and firing techniques that units should use during
multihelicopter operations.

A-18
_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

A-74. Before conducting multihelicopter door gunnery, the aircrews and door
gunners must be qualified in the techniques and skills of basic door gunnery
and they must complete crew qualification, Table VIII, according to this
appendix.

APPROXIMATE SIGHT CORRECTION, RIGHT SIDE OF HELICOPTER

OUTER SIGHT RING

FRONT SIGHT BLADE AT 20 KTS FRONT SIGHT BLADE AT 100 KTS

HORIZONTAL CROSS HAIR

INNER SIGHT RING

VERTICAL CROSS HAIR

DIRECTION OF FLIGHT

Figure A-10. Sight Picture, Right Side of Aircraft

A-19
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

APPROXIMATE SIGHT CORRECTION, LEFT SIDE OF HELICOPTER

OUTER SIGHT RING

FRONT SIGHT BLADE AT 100 KTS FRONT SIGHT BLADE AT 20 KTS

HORIZONTAL CROSS HAIR

INNER SIGHT RING

VERTICAL CROSS HAIR

DIRECTION OF FLIGHT

Figure A-11. Sight Picture, Left Side of Aircraft

A-20
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

SECTION III – ADVANCED TABLE TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND

PROCEDURES

CREW COORDINATION
AIRCREW DUTIES
A-75. Before departing on a mission, the pilot-in-command must orient his
crew on the situation and the mission. This orientation will include the
friendly situation, rules of engagement, possible target areas, fire commands,
the location of emergency medical and survival equipment, and other
available information essential to mission success. A crew member cannot
assume that others know what he knows or see what he sees.

COORDINATION BETWEEN AIRCRAFT

A-76. The unit will standardize and specify in its SOP the detailed
procedures for communicating during live fire (training and combat). Crew
members must clearly understand one another. In addition, positive
communication between aircrews must specify commence-fire and cease-fire
procedures and firing azimuths of overlapping or sector fires for the flight; for
example, lead calls formation “cease fire” upon landing in the LZ.
Coordination between aircraft/aircrews can prove to be the critical element in
accident/incident prevention. A crew member cannot assume that others
know what he knows or see what he sees.

DOOR-GUNNER EMPLOYMENT IN FORMATION

SECTORS OF FIRE
A-77. Door gunners are normally assigned two sectors of fire: a primary
sector and a secondary sector. Door gunners must know the traversing limits
and the definitions that apply when calculating sectors of fire in formation.
The aircraft operator’s manual covers traversing limits.

DEFINITIONS

Inboard Gunner
A-78. The gunner on the inboard side of a formation is the inboard gunner.
This gunner usually has another aircraft in his field of fire. Figures A-12
through A-16 show examples of inboard gunner positions.

Outboard Gunner
A-79. The gunner on the outboard side of a formation who does not have
another aircraft in his field of fire is the outboard gunner. Figures A-12
through A-16 show examples of outboard gunner positions.

A-21
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

The Safety Limit

A-80. The safety limit is an imaginary line from the gunner’s position to a
point in space that is no closer than two rotor diameters (day) and three rotor
diameters (night) from any other aircraft.

Permissible Sector of Fire

A-81. The door-gunner’s permissible sector of fire is defined as the area in
which the weapon may move freely within its traversing limits, minus the
area in which weapons’ fire would affect friendly troops or equipment. For
safety reasons, the door gunner should not fire any closer than a lateral
distance of two rotor diameters (day safety limit) and three rotor diameters
(night safety limit) from another aircraft. The gunner will determine this
distance. The figures in this section show the approximate angles for the
sectors of fire for different aircraft when the door gunner allows for the safety
limit. The permissible sectors of fire will constantly change because of
changes in position of aircraft during formation flying.

FORMATION CONSIDERATIONS
A-82. Multihelicopter door gunnery training operations should include at
least two aircraft, with a maximum of five aircraft in formation. Aircrews
conducting formation flight must do so with an extreme sense of
responsibility. The employment of door gunners while in formation flight
adds another responsibility to the entire aircrew. In addition to being
concerned with separation from other aircraft, the aircrew must concentrate
on permissible sectors of fire and when firing can commence and when it
must cease. Door gunners must be constantly vigilant to avoid mistakes that
could prove fatal during live-fire formation flight.

AERODYNAMIC INTERFERENCE
A-83. Aircrews, especially door gunners, should anticipate aerodynamic
interference between helicopters during formation flight. Aircrews flying
trailing aircraft may encounter wake turbulence if they permit their aircraft
to get below leading aircraft. Flight in the turbulent air may result in rapid
attitude (pitch), roll, and yaw changes. The pilot may also have to increase
power to maintain a proper position in a formation. Door gunners must be
aware of the possibility of aerodynamic interference.

AIRCRAFT SEPARATION
A-84. The tactical situation may dictate an increase in the distance between
helicopters or formations of helicopters. At higher altitudes, helicopters
should be positioned far enough apart to prevent a burst of antiaircraft fire
from destroying the entire flight. At terrain-flight altitudes, aircraft may be
spread out to take advantage of the terrain. In addition, flying loose and
extended formations is less fatiguing to the pilot than flying close formations.
Door gunners must be familiar with the techniques for maintaining proper
aircraft separation. Understanding these techniques will aid door gunners in
determining their permissible sectors of fire while in formation.

A-22
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

AIRCRAFT MANEUVERING
A-85. A pilot normally maneuvers his or her aircraft primarily referencing
only one other aircraft in the formation. The constant effort required to
detect any change in altitude, airspeed, or heading of the reference aircraft
precludes watching aircraft other than the reference aircraft. If all aircraft
guide correctly to their reference aircraft, then all aircraft have adequate
distance and altitude separation for safe operation of the flight as well
as door-gunner employment. In those formations, requiring a relative
position to more than one aircraft (staggered trail), the aviator must use
peripheral vision to the maximum, while concentrating on the reference
aircraft. The pilot must also keep a constant mental picture of his
door-gunners’ permissible sectors of fire as well as keeping track of locations
of other aircraft in the formation. Gunners will also play a role in
determining when they do and do not have permissible sectors of fire. A
gunner on one side of the aircraft may have a permissible sector of fire while
the gunners in other positions do not and vice versa.

MANEUVERS
A-86. Aircrews that will be conducting formation flight must also be familiar
with the many different maneuvers normally associated with multihelicopter
operations. They must be aware of how those maneuvers could change the
permissible sectors of fire or, in some cases, restrict the gunners’ fire
altogether. Maneuvers they must be familiar with include—
• Formation takeoff.
• Formation turns.
• Formation changes en route.
• Rendezvous and join up.
• Tactical formation breakup.
• Formation landing.
• Night formation landing.
• Evasive actions.
A-87. FM 3-04.201(FM 1-203) covers the procedures for these maneuvers.
The appropriate ATM for each aircraft contains the tasks, conditions, and
standards for some of the maneuvers, particularly evasive maneuvers. Listed
below are commonly used formations and their permissible sectors of fire.

Echelon Left/Right
A-88. This formation allows rapid deployment of the flank and allows
unrestricted fires by outboard gunners in the lead and trail aircraft. It
somewhat restricts suppressive fire by inboard gunners of lead and trail
aircraft as well as the inboard and outboard gunners of other aircraft within
the formation. Figure A-12 shows echelon left. Figure A-13 shows echelon
right.

Trail

A-23
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

A-89. Trail formation allows rapid deployment of forces to the flank; it

somewhat restricts fires by all gunners. Separation is two rotor disks during
the day and three rotor disks at night. Figures A-14 and A-15 show trail
formations for day and night.

Tactical Free Cruise

A-90. Free cruise is a technique that permits the wingman in a two-ship
section or more to freely maneuver in the zone extending 45 degrees on either
side and to the rear of the leader’s tail. Within the zone, the wingman may
vary vertical separation, airspeed, and distance from the leader. The distance
that the wingman trails the leader varies and depends on visibility and
terrain. The wingman must maintain visual contact with the leader.
However, he must exercise caution not to overtake the leader. The flexibility
of free cruise enables the wingman to change his position behind the leader
at will without radio communication. The wingman is able to choose his own
flight path to avoid obstacles, use terrain to the maximum advantage, or
provide fires against known or suspected enemy positions. Free cruise is best
suited for tactical situations. This formation causes continuous changes in
the permissible sectors of fire. Depending on aircraft position in the flight, it
sometimes allows unrestricted fires of gunners while restricting fires of other
gunners within the formation. Figure A-16 shows tactical free-cruise sectors
of fire.

Note: Tactical free cruise is the most challenging formation for controlling
fires from door gunners. Because of the constant change involved in the
formation, employment of door gunners during free cruise requires a great
deal of training and command and control.

FIRING TECHNIQUES
FIRE-CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A-91. Fire control includes all actions of the aircrews in planning, preparing,
and actually applying fire on a target. These actions include—
• Selecting and designating targets.
• Opening fire at the instant desired.
• Adjusting fire and regulating the rate of fire.
• Shifting from one target to another.
• Overlapping fires with other gunners.
• Ceasing fire.
A-92. Failure to exercise fire control causes ineffective employment of the
weapon systems. It can endanger friendly troops or aircraft. It also can result
in failure to engage a threatening target, loss of surprise, premature
disclosure of positions, fire on unimportant targets, loss of time in adjusting
fire, and wasted ammunition.

A-24
_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Figure A-12. Sectors of Fire, Echelon Left

A-25
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure A-13. Sectors of Fire, Echelon Right

Figure A-14. Trail Formation, Day

A-26
_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Figure A-15. Trail Formation, Night

Figure A-16. Tactical Free Cruise

A-27
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TARGET OF OPPORTUNITY
A-93. The requirement for immediate fires arises from targets of opportunity
or changes in the tactical situation. Any of the door gunners in the formation
may acquire immediate fire targets. However, all immediate fires require
close coordination between other aircraft in the formation and, if the
situation dictates, with the ground commander or his fire-support
coordinator.

TARGET ACQUISITION
A-94. Gunners should acquire targets by all available means. Then the
pilot-in-command, pilot, or air mission commander will direct engagements.
Engagement of targets acquired by other means will be according to existing
directives or policies of the supported headquarters.
A-95. Target identification under natural-light conditions at night may be
difficult. The factors of METT-T and the tactical situation (such as
cross-FLOT) also apply to night operations. As with all operations, gunners
must positively identify targets before firing.
A-96. At night or during periods of low visibility, target acquisition becomes
more difficult and crew responsibilities take on added importance. Proper
crew training and knowledge of techniques available can turn the operation
into an advantage for the door gunners. Aids to night target acquisition
include—
• Artificial illumination.
• Night-vision devices.
• Enemy fire—observers may spot enemy fire by seeing muzzle flashes
or tracers from the air; however, the observer must rapidly pinpoint
the muzzle flash or tracer location before it disappears.

PRINCIPLES OF APPLICATION OF FIRE

A-97. Application of fire consists of the methods that crews use to get
complete and effective coverage of a target area. Training in the methods of
applying fire can be accomplished only after the aircrews and door gunners
have learned—
• How to recognize the different types of targets that they may find in
combat.
• How to properly distribute, overlap and concentrate their fire.
• How to maintain the proper rate of fire.
Airspeeds 80 to 120 Knots
A-98. Airspeeds en route should not exceed 120 knots if door gunners are to
be used. Airspeeds exceeding 120 knots can render the M60D/M240 machine
gun ineffective.

Targets
A-99. The door gunner may have to engage a variety of targets during a
mission. Suppression is a self-defense engagement. It allows friendly
helicopters to bypass the threat. Door gunners do not shoot at targets

A-28
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

that they do not intend to hit. Therefore, coordinated fires from all aircraft in
the formation will enhance the probability of destroying the target.

Fires En Route
A-100. Gunners should initiate overlapping fires to provide the maximum fire
available to destroy or suppress targets encountered en route. The unit will
specify techniques and procedures for engaging targets en route to enhance
mission security. En route targets might include an SA-14 team, an
observation post, and small-arms fire. Targets identified en route will be
visible for a short time; therefore, door gunners must be prepared to respond
immediately to this threat.

Approach to Landing
A-101. Aircrews and troops are most vulnerable during landing. Therefore,
units must develop procedures to coordinate and employ simultaneous fires.

On the Ground
A-102. Door gunners must fire immediately or continue firing to suppress or
destroy targets while troops disembark.
A-103. During Troop Egress. To prevent fratricide, units must carefully
develop procedures for gunners firing within the aft 75 degrees (UH-60) fan.
Situations may require continued suppression while troops egress. Soldiers
will have to egress toward the aft part of the helicopter; they will then
immediately take the prone position. This technique is potentially dangerous.
It takes a great deal of training. Soldiers should practice this technique
during Table IX training.
A-104. Overlapping or Sector Fire. After landing, door gunners should
expect enemy fires from any direction. Therefore, they must use their
discretion regarding fire control. Gunners should use overlapping fires or
sector fires. These provide the most effective engagement techniques.

Departure
A-105. Units must train gunners, according to FM 3-97.4(FM 90-4), in troop
dismounting and movement procedures from all aircraft-landing formations.
The gunner’s ability to suppress targets depends on troop actions and
movements from aircraft in different formations. Depending on the threat in
the landing zone, door gunners may be required to continue suppression to
assist the inserted soldiers as they organize their actions during the ground
tactical plan.

SECTION IV – ADVANCED TABLES AND RANGE TRAINING

TABLE IX
A-106. Table IX is the first opportunity for door gunners to participate in
multiship door gunnery. Units will use Table IX to train the TTP necessary
to progress to multiship live fire. The commander selects the specific tasks
that he wants to train during Table IX. This table is the commander’s

A-29
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

training and assessment event before live-fire multiship door gunnery. The
following are the guidelines for firing Table IX.
A-107. A maximum of five aircraft should participate in multiship door
gunnery formations. The S3 and the standardization instructor should select
a route for the flight on which the door gunners can engage targets en route
and in the LZ.
A-108. OPFOR should be available to engage the aircraft and provide targets
for the door gunner. The OPFOR should be soldiers with infantry MILES
equipment. The OPFOR must have weapons that can engage the aircraft.
A-109. Units will thoroughly brief and rehearse crews involved in
exercises/missions. Because the door gunners will not be shooting live-mix
ammunition, adjusting fires onto the targets may be difficult. This situation
is unavoidable. The training value is in rehearsing formations and fire
commands. The objectives of the training are to—
• Allow units to refine fire discipline.
• Expose door gunners to multiship door gunnery.
• Exercise command and control with blanks.
• Train gunners to place fires on target.
• Uncover multiship door gunnery weaknesses within the unit.

TABLE X
A-110. Commanders conduct Table X at combined training centers. Table X is
the live-fire “graduation exercise” for unit door-gunnery training.
Commanders will use the same premission planning procedures, with
additional emphasis on safety, for Table X as for Table IX.
A-111. The primary reason for firing Table X at a CTC is that the surface
danger area for a helicopter with two door gunners firing is almost 6,500
meters wide. Thus, most units cannot conduct this training on their
home-station range. However, if commanders have the resources and
adequate range facilities, they can fire Table X at their home station.
A-112. The CTC will dictate the scenario, but it will have the following
characteristics:
• OPFOR will be en route and in the LZ.
• Only the crew—no troops—will be onboard the aircraft.
• A maximum of five aircraft will be in the formation.
• For initial live fire, trail is the mandated formation.
A-113. Gunners must complete Table IX no earlier than 180 days before the
conduct of Table X.
A-114. The unit commander must decide whether his unit is ready for live
fire. Units must complete a thorough risk assessment before the
exercise/mission.

A-30
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

GUIDES FOR SUCCESSFUL TRAINING

A-115. Units must thoroughly prepare for door-gunner qualification ranges.
Pilots must practice the flight profiles required by the tables before the
range. Running fire and takeoff will present the greatest challenge to the
pilot. In addition, the helicopter should hover only high enough to give the
door gunner intervisibility with the target. Extremely high hovers present
unrealistic training for the door gunner. Engagement timing is important. To
make the timing objective—
• Make sure that the pilot of the firing aircraft is ready before target
presentation.
• Make sure that the soldiers timing the engagements practice the calls
to the firing aircrew and timing sequences to ensure uniform scoring.
• Make sure that the pilots understand the required flight profile for the
engagement.
• Refer to the running-fire diagram in Chapter 2; adopt this method to
door-gunner running fire. The running-fire engagement must start and
stop at the same point for all qualifying door gunners; in addition, the
door gunner must have intervisibility with the target during the
running engagement.
A-116. Door gunners must engage both troop and vehicle targets during
qualification. The recommended vehicle targets are BMP silhouettes. For
troop targets, units have several options.
A-117. Figures A-17 and A-18 show the proper use of three-dimensional and
“E” silhouettes on the door gunnery range. TC 25-8 contains the dimensions
of the targets.

Figure A-17. Troop Target With Three-Dimensional Silhouettes

A-31
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure A-18. Target Lifter With Troop Silhouettes

A-32
 Appendix B

Helicopter Gunnery Tables

SECTION I – GUNNERY TABLE OVERVIEW

INTRODUCTION
B-1. The gunnery tables in this appendix provide the framework for
helicopter gunnery training and evaluation. They are designed to develop
and test the proficiency of individual, crew, and unit gunnery techniques at
the basic, intermediate, and advanced levels.
B-2. Because all units do not have the same METL, the anticipated shooting
situations will vary from unit to unit. A unit conducting a pure attack
mission would likely execute deliberate engagements (for example, longer
ranges—precision munitions). In contrast, a unit conducting a
reconnaissance or a screen mission may do more “hip shooting” (shorter
ranges—secondary or tertiary weapon systems). Aside from the tactical
situation, the topography will often dictate how, where, and what type of
engagements will be fired. All crews must understand the limitations or the
opportunities that terrain may provide. Engaging a group of foot soldiers in a
built-up area will be vastly different from engaging a mechanized force on
the open desert. Mountainous terrain—compared to dense jungle or a heavily
wooded area—will present yet another weapon-system employment
capability or limitation consideration.
B-3. To provide the commander with latitude to address his unit’s likely
combat mission, with respect to specific gunnery tasks, Tables VII and VIII
have been modified. Five selected engagements have been identified for
crews/units equipped with AH-64 and OH-58D aircraft. These engagements
are referred to as core tasks. They are considered basic engagements or
engagements common to all crews. The commander/master gunner will select
the remainder of engagement tasks from the additional and optional
task-condition-standard lists within the tables. In addition, the commander
may vary the engagement sequences and target arrays within the tables to
meet specific training requirements or to meet resource constraints. Resource
constraints may include ammunition availability, range size/layout, or
suitable targets.
B-4. Modified tasks/tables must be no less demanding than those described
within this appendix. Commanders and master gunners must work
continuously with installation or regional range officers to upgrade and
improve ranges so that gunnery tasks can be conducted as prescribed.

B-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TARGETS
B-5. The tables in this appendix specify the targets suitable for each
engagement task. These targets include heavy armor, light armor, wheeled
vehicles, and troops.
B-6. TC 25-8 depicts standard target silhouettes for range training. The
following are the approved targets for the tables in this appendix:
• Heavy armor. T-72 front or flank target.
• Light armor. BMP, BRDM, ZSU 23-4, 2S6, BMD, or BTR-series targets
(front or flank profiles).
• Wheeled vehicles. U-375 truck fronts or flank targets.
• Troops. E-type or three-dimensional personnel silhouettes. Three to
four personnel silhouettes can be attached to a single target board or
lifter for scoring. In addition, Appendix A, Section IV, shows other
options for personnel target scoring. The commander will decide
whether to use flank or frontal target silhouettes. This decision will
most likely depend on target intervisibility, target lifters used, and
range layout.
• Rockets. The condition for each rocket task specifies a target silhouette
for the engagement. Portray the rocket target effect area as a notional
large target area (for example, an assembly area) with the target
silhouette located in the center, serving as the crew’s aim point. The
TEA is oriented with its long axis parallel to the firing helicopter’s
gun-target line.

TARGET ENGAGEMENTS
B-7. The target engagement ranges on the tables in this appendix are within
the effective range of the weapons specified by the task. Commanders may
combine single table tasks into multiple engagements. Each individual task
within a multiple task must be evaluated by its individual standard. For
example, when commanders combine single Hellfire and cannon engagement
tasks, each task must be scored and timed separately, even if the tasks occur
at the same time. No engagement timetables are available for multiple
engagements—only for single engagements.

AMMUNITION
B-8. Ammunition conservation is not evaluated, but it is an implied task. In
addition to stating the task, condition, and standard for engagements, each
Table VII and VIII task has a specific type and quantity of ammunition
allocated. Commanders will ensure that the proper type and quantity of
ammunition are available for the conduct of tables.
B-9. The ammunition used to execute the crew’s first attempt at Table VII or
VIII will not exceed the total table allocation. Crews must manage their
ammunition carefully to ensure that they have enough ammunition for each
task.
B-10. Crews are allowed to exceed the ammunition allocation for a task but
are not given additional ammunition to make up for that ammunition. If a

B-2
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

crew uses more than the allocated ammunition on a task and does not have
enough ammunition to execute the remaining tasks, no credit will be given
for those tasks not fired because of insufficient ammunition. Incomplete tasks
or tasks not fired for reasons deemed appropriate by the master gunner will
be executed during the rerun or refire portion of that crew’s training.
B-11. For example, an AH-64 crew is authorized a total of 100 30-millimeter
rounds for the three required 30-millimeter tasks in Table VII Day. If the
crew only used a total of 30 rounds to qualify on its first two 30-millimeter
tasks, it could use the remaining 70 rounds for the last 30-millimeter
engagement. While the crew could shoot its remaining rounds during its last
engagement, the time standard would not increase and would remain the
same as if the crew had only the rounds prescribed by the task to fire.
B-12. The ammunition allocations serve as planning factors for the conduct of
the gunnery tables. They allow the commander/master gunner to assess
resources required for each gunnery table. In addition, the allocations show
individual crews the maximum amount of ammunition available for them to
engage the table’s targets. In addition, the ammunition allocation serves as a
guide for Q2 and Q3 engagements when crews must reshoot a specific task.
DA Pamphlet 350-38 lists the total amount of ammunition for each table. The
numbers listed are all-inclusive; that is, the amount of ammunition listed for
Table VII, for example, is the total amount for Table VII Day and Table VII
Night.

Note: No ammunition resources are provided for Q2 crew firings.

TABLE VI
B-13. The following procedures should be followed for Table VI:
• Execute Table VI during daylight hours.
• Check all systems, shooting and sighting, on the helicopter.
• Execute this table under the supervision of the unit armament and
maintenance officers.
B-14. Table VI is not a gate for each crew. However, it is recommended that
each crew use the same aircraft to fire Tables VI, VII, and VIII. Table VI is a
requirement for all aircraft requiring calibration/harmonization/verification
before firing Tables VII/VIII.

TABLES VII AND VIII AH-64 AND OH-58D

B-15. Tables VII Day/Night and VIII Day/Night consist of 12 engagement
tasks: 5 core tasks as listed and 7 additional/optional tasks selected from the
list provided within the tables.
B-16. Table VII provides crew training in preparation for Table VIII
qualification. Consistency should be maintained between tables. For
example, if a .50-caliber machine-gun engagement is conducted in Table VII
Day at a given target at a given range, then a similar engagement should be
conducted during Table VIII Day. Tables should resemble each other, but
they should not be identical.

B-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

B-17. DA Pamphlet 350-38 does not provide Hellfire or Stinger missiles.

When available because of stockpile reliability, surveillance/stock rotation, or
shelf life, live missiles may be used when all pertinent regulations and
directives are met concerning missile live fire.

EVALUATION
B-18. Score the tables according to the guidance in Chapter 2 of this manual.
There are no degraded-mode gunnery tasks specified during conduct of the
qualification table gunnery training/qualification tables. The
commander/master gunner should mandate the use of the most accurate
sighting system on the helicopter for intermediate gunnery tables unless
otherwise required for specific mission-training purposes.

ALIBI FIRES
B-19. The unit commander or the master gunner will decide whether alibis
will be fired. Any aircraft system or subsystem malfunction not detectable by
the crew before the engagement that adversely affects the performance of the
selected weapon system will constitute an alibi. Malfunctions induced by
crew error will not constitute an alibi. A simulator cannot be used for any
weapon-system alibi fires.

ADVANCED TABLES
B-20. The advanced tables in this appendix are examples. The commander
may modify them to support the unit METL and applicable MTP. Each
section includes advanced tables with both attack and cavalry scenarios.
B-21. Advanced tables are the commander’s collective training tables. Units
progress to advanced tables once they have completed intermediate tables.
Advanced tables allow the commander to train and subjectively evaluate his
unit’s ability to control and distribute fires and engage targets as a unit in a
tactical scenario. Tables IX and X focus on ensuring that two aircraft can
function as an integrated team. In Tables XI and XII, the battalion
commander ensures that the unit can conduct collective live-fire attack.

Note: Crews who do not validate on Table VII or qualify on Table VIII will
not progress to advanced table training.
B-22. The commander determines the tasks that he wants to accomplish. The
scenario should be built as an STX according to TC 1-210 and should support
the unit METL and battle tasks.
B-23. The S3 and master gunner must consider the physical dimensions of
the assigned range complex when designing the scenario for advanced table
live fire. Realistic target arrays and tactical spacing between helicopters
firing simultaneously will provide a planning challenge. The following is an
example flow for a company Table XII.
B-24. The evaluation starts at the assembly area. The crews receive an
OPORD from the battalion staff and plan the mission. The company
continues its planning process as it would during normal collective training

B-4
_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

missions. When the company planning is complete, the company conducts a

rehearsal and brief-back to the commander.
B-25. When rehearsals and brief-backs are complete, the company starts the
mission. The company moves along briefed air routes to the FARP,
rearms/refuels, and continues to the attack-by-fire position.
B-26. Figure B-1 shows the initial occupation of the ABF and engagement of
long-range targets with missiles. The initial engagements are accomplished
with missiles to simulate a deliberate attack. The standard is to hit all
targets. Scoring is accomplished with onboard videotape or hits with live
missiles.
B-27. Figure B-2 shows the company engaging short-range cannon targets.
Three to five minutes after the initial target handover for the missile
engagements, present pop-up targets at about 1,000 meters. The standard is
to hit all targets. Present at least two targets per aircraft. As Figure B-3
shows, a simulated artillery battery opens fire during the cannon
engagements. Use Hoffman charges to simulate the artillery battery. The
teams will engage the target with rockets. Neutralization is the standard for
this engagement.
B-28. Once the rocket engagement is complete, the company departs the ABF
and returns to the FARP. Figure B-4 shows the company departing the ABF.
B-29. The performance of the units should be judged against each other. The
standard should include fire distribution, target effect for each of the
weapons, and movement techniques.

Teams complete
tactical movement
and occupy the ABF.
Controller issues
target handover for
armored vehicles in
the EA at a range of
about 4,000 meters
Then, the controller
instructs elements to
engage and destroy
with missiles.

Figure B-1. Occupation of the ABF

B-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Teams engage missile

targets. About 3 to 5
minutes into the
engagement, short-range
targets pop up, and
teams engage with
cannon. Cannon targets
are presented for a
maximum of 2 minutes.

Figure B-2. Short-Range Cannon Engagements

About 2 minutes into

the engagement,
simulated artillery
battery opens fire.
Team neutralizes
target with long-range
fires.

Figure B-3. Neutralization of Artillery Battery

B-6
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

When rocket
mission is
complete, the
controller calls
“mission complete”
and instructs the
team to return to
the FARP for refuel.
Teams clear the
ABF and return to
the FARP on
briefed route.

Figure B-4. Mission Complete, Depart ABF

TARGET-EFFECT STANDARDS
B-30. The three target-effect standards for armed helicopter engagements are
suppression, neutralization, and destruction.

SUPPRESSION
B-31. Popular definitions of suppression include—
• “Shoot enough to get their heads down.”
• “Make those tanks button up.”
• “Shoot enough to cover my break.”
B-32. However, FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1) defines suppression as “direct and
indirect fires, electronic countermeasures, or smoke brought to bear on
enemy personnel, weapons, or equipment to prevent effective fire on friendly
forces.”
B-33. Suppression for the individual aircraft is normally unplanned,
defensive in nature, and executed as a self-defense engagement. A
suppression engagement is a hasty engagement to prevent, modify, or stop an
enemy engagement. Aircrews should use suppression to break contact and
gain maneuver time and space.

B-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

B-34. Suppression is not a decisive engagement. FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1)

defines a decisive engagement as “an engagement in which a unit is
considered fully committed and cannot maneuver or extricate itself. In the
absence of outside assistance, the action must be fought to a conclusion and
either won or lost with the forces at hand.”
B-35. The crew firing the suppression engagement may not be able to observe
target effect.
B-36. Aircrews may attempt suppression against virtually any target for
self-defense; for example, a crew may have to engage an armored target with
cannon at close range to gain time and situational awareness for egress.
B-37. Training suppression on live-fire gunnery ranges provides limited
training value. The amount of ammunition required to suppress a target is
not definable. In addition, all weapons mounted on armed helicopters can
suppress targets.

NEUTRALIZATION
B-38. Neutralization knocks a target out of action temporarily.
Neutralization of a target occurs when it suffers 10 percent or more
casualties or damage.
B-39. Neutralization is the standard for rocket engagements. Neutralization
is a deliberate engagement in which the crew fires an initial engagement,
senses the impacts, makes adjustments, and fires for effect.
B-40. The crew selects a central aiming point for multiple targets covering a
large area and adjusts the aiming point on observed impacts. Crews must
observe the impacts of the sensing rockets to adjust for the fire for effect.
B-41. Rockets are usually the most effective when fired in mass. For
neutralization training, resource constraints do not allow aircrews to fire
rockets in mass to achieve a fire-for-effect standard. The training strategy for
neutralization is to teach and evaluate crews on their ability to select a
central aiming point (target center of mass) and adjust rockets onto the
target without completing a decisive fire for effect.
B-42. The optimal solution for training and evaluating neutralization is for
units to set up an assembly area complete with tents and vehicles in the
range impact area and allow the crews to engage the area with rockets. When
a crew completes the engagement, the master gunner goes to the target area
and counts impacts. Units cannot achieve this complete array of targets
because of resource constraints. The neutralization standard for training is,
therefore, to use single (or several) silhouettes on the range as central aiming
points. The crew adjusts the rockets onto the individual targets.
B-43. All aircrews will train to the neutralization standard. Although
commanders may consider suppression a more relevant rocket mission for
their units, neutralization will provide the maximum training value per
trigger pull for basic and intermediate gunnery training.
B-44. Paragraphs 7-29 through 7-41 contain more information on the
employment of 2.75-inch rockets.

B-8
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

DESTRUCTION
B-45. Destruction puts a target out of action permanently. Direct hits with
high-explosive munitions are required to destroy hard materiel targets.
Destroying a tank should not be confused with a destruction mission.
Destruction often requires large expenditures of ammunition. Destruction is
a deliberate engagement.
B-46. Crews use precision-guided missiles against hard targets during
destruction missions. While crews may use other weapons for destruction,
unit and crew mission planning normally focuses on the standoff capability of
Hellfire missiles.

B-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

SECTION II – AH-64A GUNNERY TABLES

B-47. AH-64A aircraft will use the gunnery tables in this section.

TABLE I. DAY AH-64A INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE I. NIGHT AH-64A INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE II. DAY AH-64A INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPG)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE II. NIGHT AH-64A INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPG)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

B-10
_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE III. DAY AH-64A COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A
TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING >3,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT

3 ENGAGE MOVING 1,000- LIGHT

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING 1,500 ARMOR HIT

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A

TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING >4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MOVING/ 2,000- HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

6 ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/ LIGHT

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS RUNNING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

7 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL 2,000- HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

8 ENGAGE STATIONARY WHEELED

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING >1,000 VEHICLES HIT

9 ENGAGE MOVING 6 3,000- LIGHT 2 RKTS IN A

TARGET W/ROCKETS MPSM HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
RKTS TEA

10 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

11 ENGAGE MOVING 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

12 ENGAGE MOVING 1 SAL HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

Notes:
1. Table III is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level.
2. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table; conduct in the AH-64A simulator.
MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE III. NIGHT AH-64A COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A
TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING >3,000 VEHICLES 300- X
400-m TEA

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING 3,000-5,000 ARMOR HIT

3 ENGAGE MOVING LIGHT

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 ARMOR HIT

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A

TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING >4,000 VEHICLES 300- X
400-m TEA

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING 2,000-4,000 ARMOR HIT

6 ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/ LIGHT

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS RUNNING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

7 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING 2,000-4,000 ARMOR HIT

8 ENGAGE STATIONARY WHEELED

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING >1,000 VEHICLES HIT

9 ENGAGE MOVING 6 MPSM LIGHT 2 RKTS IN A

TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING 3,000-4,000 ARMOR 300- X
400-m TEA

10 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

11 ENGAGE MOVING 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

12 ENGAGE MOVING 1 SAL HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

Notes:
1. Table III is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness
level.
2. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table; conduct in the AH-64A simulator.
MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-12
_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IV. DAY AH-64A COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE (CPG)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A
TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING >3,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)

3 ENGAGE MOVING 1,000- LIGHT

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING 1,500 ARMOR HIT

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A

TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING >4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MOVING/ 2,000- HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

6 ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/ LIGHT

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS RUNNING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

7 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL 2,000- HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

8 ENGAGE STATIONARY WHEELED

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING >1,000 VEHICLES HIT

9 ENGAGE MOVING 6 MPSM 3,000- LIGHT 2 RKTS IN A

TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA

10 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

11 ENGAGE MOVING 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

12 ENGAGE MOVING 1 SAL HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

Notes:
1. Table IV is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level.
2. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table; conduct in the AH-64A simulator.
MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE IV. NIGHT AH-64A COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE (CPG)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A
TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING >3,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)

3 ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 1,000- LIGHT

W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING 1,500 ARMOR HIT

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A

TARGET W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING >4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MOVING/ 2,000- HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

6 ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/ LIGHT

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS RUNNING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

7 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL 2,000- HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

8 ENGAGE STATIONARY WHEELED

TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING >1,000 VEHICLES HIT

9 ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 6 MPSM 3,000- LIGHT 2 RKTS IN A

W/ROCKETS RKTS HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA

10 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

TARGET W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

11 ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 1 SAL MOVING/ HEAVY

W/HELLFIRE MSL RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

12 ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 1 SAL HEAVY

W/HELLFIRE MSL HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

Notes:
1. Table IV is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level.
2. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table; conduct in the AH-64A simulator.
MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-14
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE V. HELICOPTER GUNNERY SKILLS TEST AND G-COFT

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

Pass a written test consisting of at least 50 Without reference to Minimum of 70%

questions from the following subject areas: publications. correct.

• Weapon Systems Operation/Firing

Characteristics.

• Ballistics.

• Delivery Techniques.

• Munitions:
Identification/Function/Operation.

Perform relevant tasks from the following Demonstrate ability to perform Overall
areas: or explain selected subject GO/NO-GO is
areas: based on
scorer’s
• Armament/Weapon Systems Preflight. Aircraft. assessment.

• Armament/Weapon Systems Switchology. Simulator or Aircraft.

• Procedures for Hangfire/Misfire/Emergency Simulator or Aircraft.

Conditions Involving Armament Systems.

• Munitions Handling, Uploading/ Aircraft With Training or Live

Downloading. Munitions.

Pass G-COFT. Simulator. Achieve 70

points on 8 out of
12 engagements
on each iteration
(day and night).
Must receive at
least one GO (at
least 70 points)
for each weapon
system.

Other requirements according to Chapter 2, FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140).

Note: Some hands-on tasks are also ATM tasks. However, conduct these tasks as part of the
HGST to confirm crew proficiency before live-fire training/qualification.

B-15
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VI. AH-64A WEAPONS CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

1 CONDUCT AWS REFER TO

DYNAMIC 60 RDS HOVERING 1,000 TADS HARMONIZATION
HARMONIZATION PROCEDURE

OPERATE 1,000-
2 30 RDS HOVERING TADS HIT
CANNON WITH 1,500
TADS/LASER

OPERATE IHADSS
3 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 HIT
CANNON WITH (PILOT)
IHADSS (PILOT)

OPERATE IHADSS
4 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 HIT
CANNON WITH (GUNNER)
IHADSS (GUNNER)

6 RKTS 2,000- 2 RKTS IN A 300-

5 OPERATE ARCS HOVERING COOP
M274 4,000 X 400-m TEA

6 RKTS 2 RKTS IN A 300-

6 OPERATE ARCS HOVERING >4,000 COOP
M274 X 400-m TEA

1 SAL 2,000- PROPER

7 OPERATE PTWS HOVERING TADS
HF 4,000 PRELAUNCH/
POSTLAUNCH
SYMBOLOGY

Note:
This table is designed to verify weapon-systems operation. If the Laser Aim Scoring System is available,
verify laser spot as well.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) 12 rkts (M274), 150 rds 30-mm.

B-16
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING >2,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING <2,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING >4,000 HVY ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 40 RDS 30-mm

TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 LIGHT ARMOR HIT

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 8 RKTS (M267 2,000– 3 RKTS IN 300-

TARGET WITH ROCKETS or M274) HOVERING 5,000 LIGHT ARMOR X 400-m TEA

6 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON

FOLLOWING PAGE.
7 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
8 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
9 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
10 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
11 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
12 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following page. There will be
a total of 12 engagement tasks: 6 missile, 3 cannon, and 3 rocket.

STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least
one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings for
the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm.
Notes:
1. Task 5 is a core task that uses eight M267 or M274 rounds during the day or night portion of the table. The commander may
select one of the rocket engagements (8 M267 or 8 M274) to fire on Table VII Day. The remaining eight rockets will be fired
during the night portion of the table.
2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables.
4. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
6. The commander and master gunner determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering.

B-17
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT
1 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

2 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm DIVING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET LIGHT

3 WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

4 WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm DIVING >1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT

5 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

6 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS DIVING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm APPROPRIATE LIGHT

7 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS MODE <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 30 RDS 30-mm APPROPRIATE LIGHT

8 WITH CANNON IHADSS MODE <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

9 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS DIVING <5,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
10 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS HOVERING <5,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
11 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP DIVING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
12 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

13 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP DIVING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400–m TEA

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

14 WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

15 TGT W/HELLFIRE LOAL-AUTO MOVING/RUNNING >3,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

16 TGT W/HELLFIRE LOAL-REMOTE MOVING/RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

17 TGT W/HELLFIRE LOBL-REMOTE MOVING/RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

18 TGT W/HELLFIRE RIPL MOVING/RUNNING 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/ 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

19 HELLFIRE RAPID MOVING/RUNNING 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT

B-18
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY
TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY

TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY

TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)
4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 40 RDS 30-mm LIGHT
TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 8 RKTS (M267 2,000– LIGHT 3 RKTS IN 300-

TARGET WITH ROCKETS or M274) HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

6 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON

FOLLOWING PAGE.
7 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
8 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
9 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
10 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
11 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
12 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on
following page. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 6 missile, 3 cannon, and 3 rocket.

STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew
must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day
and night firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm.

Notes:
1. Task 5 is a core task that uses eight M267 or M274 rounds during the day or night portion of the table. The commander
may select one of the rocket engagements (8 M267 or 8 M274) to fire on Table VII Day. The remaining eight rockets
will be fired during the night portion of the table.
2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables.
4. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
6. The commander and master gunner determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering.

B-19
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT
1 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

2 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm DIVING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET LIGHT

3 WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

4 WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm DIVING >1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT

5 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

6 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS DIVING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm APPROPRIATE LIGHT

7 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS MODE <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 30 RDS 30-mm APPROPRIATE LIGHT

8 WITH CANNON IHADSS MODE <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

9 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS DIVING <5,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
10 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS HOVERING <5,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

11 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP DIVING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

12 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
13 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP DIVING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400–m TEA
ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
14 WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ENGAGE 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY
15 STATIONARY/MVNG TGT LOAL-AUTO MOVING/RUNNING >3,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE

ENGAGE 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

16 STATIONARY/MVNG TGT LOAL-REMOTE MOVING/RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE

ENGAGE 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

17 STATIONARY/MVNG TGT LOBL-REMOTE MOVING/RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE

ENGAGE 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

18 STATIONARY/MVNG TGT RIPL MOVING/RUNNING 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE
ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY
19 W/HELLFIRE RAPID MOVING/RUNNING 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT

B-20
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64A CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY
TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY

TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY

TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)
4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 40 RDS 30-mm LIGHT
TARGET WITH IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 ARMOR HIT
CANNON

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 8 RKTS (M267 2,000– LIGHT 3 RKTS IN

TARGET WITH or M274) HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
ROCKETS TEA
6 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
7 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
8 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
9 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
10 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
11 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
12 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from the list on the following
page. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 6 missile, 3 cannon, and 3 rocket.

STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at
least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night
firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm.
Notes:
1. Task 5 is a core task that uses eight M267 or M274 rounds during the day or night portion of the table. The commander
may select one of the rocket engagements (8 M267 or 8 M274) to fire on Table VIII Day. The remaining eight rockets
will be fired during the night portion of the table.
2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables.
4. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
6. The commander and master gunner determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering.

B-21
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT
1 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

2 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm DIVING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING LIGHT

3 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

4 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm DIVING >1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT

5 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

6 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS DIVING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm APPROPRIATE LIGHT

7 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS MODE <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING 30 RDS 30-mm APPROPRIATE LIGHT

8 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS MODE <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

9 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS DIVING <5,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

10 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS HOVERING <5,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

11 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP DIVING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X
12 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X
13 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP DIVING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 400–m TEA
ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X
14 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA
ENGAGE 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY
15 STATIONARY/MVNG TGT LOAL-AUTO MOVING/RUNNING >3,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE
ENGAGE 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY
16 STATIONARY/MVNG TGT LOAL-REMOTE MOVING/RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE
ENGAGE 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY
17 STATIONARY/MVNG TGT LOBL-REMOTE MOVING/RUNNING >2,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE
ENGAGE 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY
18 STATIONARY/MVNG TGT RIPL MOVING/RUNNING 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE
ENGAGE STATIONARY 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY
19 TGT W/ HELLFIRE RAPID MOVING/RUNNING 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT

B-22
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64A CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING >2,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET WITH HF 1 SAL HF HOVERING <2,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET WITH HF (REMOTE) 1 SAL HF HOVERING >4,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 40 RDS LIGHT

TARGET WITH CANNON 30-mm HOVERING <1,000 ARMOR HIT
IHADSS

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 8 RKTS 2,000– LIGHT 3 RKTS IN 300-

TARGET WITH ROCKETS (M267 or HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA
M274)
6 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.

7 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON

FOLLOWING PAGE.
8 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
9 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
10 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
11 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
12 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON
FOLLOWING PAGE.
ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from the list on the following
page. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 6 missile, 3 cannon, and 3 rocket.

STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive
at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night
firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm.

Notes:
1. Task 5 is a core task that uses eight M267 or M274 rounds during the day or night portion of the table. The
commander may select one of the rocket engagements (8 M267 or 8 M274) to fire on Table VIII Day. The remaining
eight rockets will be fired during the night portion of the table.
2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables.
4. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
6. The commander and master gunner determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering.

B-23
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64A CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT
1 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

2 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm DIVING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET LIGHT

3 WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

4 WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm DIVING >1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT

5 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT

6 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS DIVING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm APPROPRIATE LIGHT

7 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS MODE <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 30 RDS 30-mm APPROPRIATE LIGHT

8 WITH CANNON IHADSS MODE <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

9 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS DIVING <5,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

10 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS HOVERING <5,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

11 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP DIVING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

12 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/RUNNING/ LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

13 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP DIVING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 400–m TEA

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X

14 WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 1 SAL HF HOVERING/

15 TGT W/HELLFIRE LOAL-AUTO MOVING/RUNNING >3,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 1 SAL HF HOVERING/

16 TGT W/HELLFIRE LOAL-REMOTE MOVING/RUNNING >2,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 1 SAL HF HOVERING/

17 TGT W/HELLFIRE LOBL-REMOTE MOVING/RUNNING >2,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 2 SAL HF HOVERING/

18 TGT W/HELLFIRE RIPL MOVING/RUNNING 500-8,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/ 2 SAL HF HOVERING/

19 HELLFIRE RAPID MOVING/RUNNING 500-8,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

B-24
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IX. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ACFT 1 1 SAL HF HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY HIT
ENGAGE STATIONARY ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE

ACFT 2 4 RKTS HOVERING >4,000 LIGHT 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 ARMOR 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

2 ACFT 1 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 TROOPS HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 2 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 WHEELED HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY VEHICLES
TARGET W/CANNON

3 ACFT 1 4 RKTS HOVERING >4,000 LIGHT 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 ARMOR 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

ACFT 2 1 SAL HF HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE

4 ACFT 1 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 WHEELED HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY VEHICLES
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 2 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 TROOPS HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET W/CANNON

5 ACFT 1 4 RKTS HOVERING 3,000-4,000 WHEELED 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

ACFT 2 4 RKTS HOVERING 3,000-4,000 WHEELED 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

STANDARD:
Acft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 70% of all tasks to receive an overall GO for this table.

Notes:
1. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the unit’s METL/MTP.
2. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.
4. All rockets will be fired as pairs.

B-25
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE X. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
1 ACFT 1 1 SAL HOVERING >4,000 Day HEAVY HIT
ENGAGE STATIONARY MSL 3,000–5,000 ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE Night

ACFT 2 4 RKTS HOVERING >4,000 WHEELED 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

2 ACFT 1 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 TROOPS HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 2 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 WHEELED HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY VEHICLES
TARGET W/CANNON

3 ACFT 1 4 RKTS HOVERING >4,000 LIGHT 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 ARMOR 400-m TEA
TARGETW/ROCKETS

ACFT 2 1 SAL HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY MSL ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE

4 ACFT 1 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 WHEELED HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY VEHICLES
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 2 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 TROOPS HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET W/CANNON

5 ACFT 1 4 RKTS HOVERING 3,000-4,000 WHEELED 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

ACFT 2 4 RKTS HOVERING 3,000-4,000 WHEELED 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

STANDARD:
Acft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 70% of all tasks to receive an overall GO for this table.

AMMUNITION PER A/C:

8 rkts M274
60 rds 30-mm

Notes:
1. Commanders can modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the unit’s METL/MTP.
2. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet.
3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table.
4. All rockets will be fired as pairs.

B-26
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
Receive Commander receives on-order deliberate Commander will ensure that precombat
mission, attack mission. Enemy is two to three checks are complete. Commander briefs
conduct hours from decision point. Operations mission to aircrews. Unit conducts
mission overlay includes lateral boundaries, mission planning and rehearsal.
planning phase lines, air routes, and engagement
area.

Conduct air Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
movement mission. Unit departs TAA en route to the coordinates with ground elements in
ABF according to briefed time schedule. vicinity of HA and ABF, and meets times
for crossing start point, ACPs, CCPs,
and release point.
Conduct Unit occupies ABF per SOP. SITREP Unit occupies ABF along briefed routes.
battle-position from S2 indicates that the enemy is near Unit establishes security in ABF. Unit
operations the planned engagement area. prepares to engage IAW briefed
schedule.
Engage Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit Direct fire distribution according to the
multiple targets engages targets with long-range missile SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver
fires. according to the commander’s guidance.

Detect and During missile engagements, the unit Execute distribution of fires according to
react to makes contact with lead elements of the the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver,
OPFOR OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with engage troops and vehicles with
lightly armored vehicles and troops cannon, and neutralize artillery with
supported by artillery. Unit engages with rockets. Commander reports to higher
cannon at short to medium ranges and HQ.
rockets at medium to long ranges.

Conduct FARP Upon completing briefed mission, unit Commander consolidates BDA and
operations rallies at HA and returns along briefed air FARM and reports to higher command.
route to FARP. Commander determines proper
weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft
sequence into FARP and refuel
according to the SOP.
Return to TAA, Commander orders the unit to depart the Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts
and prepare FARP and return to the TAA along AAR, prepares for future operations, and
for future briefed air routes. completes precombat checks.
operations

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-27
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

Receive mission, Commander receives on-order zone Commander will ensure that
conduct mission recon mission. Enemy situation is precombat checks are complete.
planning unknown. Operations overlay includes Commander briefs mission to
lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. aircrews. Unit conducts mission
planning and rehearsal.

Conduct Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan and
movement to LD mission. Unit departs TAA en route to coordinates with ground elements for
the LD. LD passage.

Conduct zone Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses Unit conducts recon of assigned
reconnaissance bounding overwatch to conduct zone IAW time constraints in
reconnaissance. OPORD.

Detect and react Unit makes contact with lead elements Unit engages OPFOR and breaks
to OPFOR of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon contact. The engagement is not
element with lightly armored vehicles decisive. The commander reports to
and dismounted troops. higher HQ.

Conduct FARP Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, Commander determines the proper
operations and returns along briefed air routes to weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft
the FARP. sequence into FARP and refuel
according to the SOP.

Return to the Commander orders the unit to depart Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
TAA, and the FARP and return to the TAA along conducts AAR, prepares for future
prepare for briefed air routes. operations, and completes
future operations precombat checks.

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. Accomplish tasks according to standards in the applicable MTP.
4. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-28
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

Receive Commander receives on-order Commander will ensure that precombat
mission, deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two checks are complete. Commander briefs
conduct to three hours from decision point. mission to aircrews. Unit conducts
mission Operations overlay includes lateral mission planning and rehearsal.
planning boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and
engagement area.

Conduct air Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan, coordinates
movement mission. Unit departs TAA en route to with ground elements in vicinity of HA and
ABF according to the briefed time ABF, and meets times for crossing start
schedule. point, ACPs, CCPs, and release point.

Conduct Unit occupies ABF according to SOP. Unit occupies ABF along briefed routes,
battle-position SITREP from S2 indicates that the establishes security in ABF, and prepares
operations enemy is near the planned engagement to engage IAW briefed schedule.
area.
Engage Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit Direct fire distribution according to the
multiple engages targets with long-range missile SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver
targets fires. according to the commander’s guidance.

Detect and During missile engagements, unit Execute distribution of fires according to
react to makes contact with lead elements of the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver,
OPFOR the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element engage troops and vehicles with cannon,
with lightly armored vehicles and troops and neutralize artillery with rockets. The
supported by artillery. Unit engages commander reports to higher HQ.
with cannon at short to medium ranges
and rockets at medium to long ranges.

Conduct Upon completing briefed mission, the Commander consolidates BDA and
FARP unit rallies at HA and returns along FARM and reports to higher command.
operations briefed air route to FARP. Commander determines proper weapons
load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into
FARP and refuel according to the SOP.

Return to Commander orders the unit to depart Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts
TAA, and the FARP and return to the TAA along AAR, prepares for future operations, and
prepare for briefed air routes. completes precombat checks.
future
operations

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for
this table.

B-29
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

Receive Commander receives on-order zone Commander will ensure that
mission, recon mission. Enemy situation is precombat checks are complete.
conduct mission unknown. Operations overlay includes Commander briefs mission to
planning lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. aircrews. Unit conducts mission
planning and rehearsal.

Conduct Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan and
movement to mission. Unit departs TAA en route to coordinates with ground elements for
LD the LD. LD passage.

Conduct zone Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses Unit recons assigned zone according
reconnaissance bounding overwatch to conduct to time constraints in the OPORD.
reconnaissance.

Detect and Unit makes contact with lead elements Unit engages OPFOR and breaks
react to OPFOR of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon contact. The engagement is not
element with lightly armored vehicles decisive. The commander reports to
and dismounted troops. higher HQ.

Conduct FARP Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, Commander determines proper
operations and returns along briefed air routes to weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft
the FARP. sequence into FARP and refuel
according to the SOP.

Return to TAA, Commander orders the unit to depart Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
and prepare for the FARP and return to the TAA along conducts AAR, prepares for future
future briefed air routes. operations, and completes precombat
operations checks.

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire.
2. Commanders can modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for
this table.

B-30
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

SECTION III – AH-64D GUNNERY TABLES

B-48. AH-64D aircraft will use the gunnery tables in this section.

TABLE I. DAY AH-64D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE I. NIGHT AH-64D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE II. DAY AH-64D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPG)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE II. NIGHT AH-64D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPG)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

B-31
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE III. DAY AH-64D COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MSL HOVERING 3,000- HEAVY HIT
1 TGT W/HF MISSILE LOBL (HTM) 4,000 ARMOR

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS HOVERING >1,500 LIGHT HIT

2 TGT W/CANNON ARMOR

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD RKTS HOVERING 3,000- WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A

3 TGT W/ROCKETS (M274) 4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 SAL MSL HOVERING 4,000- HEAVY HIT
4 W/HF MISSILE LOAL (HTM) 5,000 ARMOR

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL HOVERING 2,500- HEAVY HIT

5 TGT W/HF MISSILE (HTM) 6,000 ARMOR

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL MOVING/ 2,500- HEAVY HIT

6 TGT W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING 6,000 ARMOR
ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD RKTS HOVERING >4,000 WHEELED 2 RKTS IN
7 TGT W/ROCKETS (M274) VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 30 RDS MOVING/ <1,000 LIGHT HIT

8 W/CANNON RUNNING ARMOR
ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF MSL MOVING/ 2,500- HEAVY HIT
9 W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING 6,000 ARMOR
ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 SAL MSL MOVING/ 2,000- HEAVY HIT
10 W/HF MISSILE LOAL (HTM) RUNNING 4,000 ARMOR

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL HOVERING 2,500- HEAVY HIT

11 TGT W/HF MSL RFHO (HTM) 6,000 ARMOR
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL HOVERING 4,000- HEAVY HIT
12 TGT W/HF MSL (HTM) 8,000 ARMOR
HF-FCR
Notes:
1. Conduct in the AH-64D simulator or in the aircraft using weapon-train mode.
2. Table is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness
level.
3. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-32
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE III. NIGHT AH-64D COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

(meters)

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MSL 3,000- HEAVY

1 TGT W/HF MISSILE LOBL (HTM) HOVERING 5,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS LIGHT

2 TGT W/CANNON HOVERING >1,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD RKTS 3,000- WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A

3 TGT W/ROCKETS (M274) HOVERING 4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MSL HEAVY

4 TGT W/HF MISSILE LOAL (HTM) HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL 2,500- HEAVY

5 TGT W/HF MISSILE (HTM) HOVERING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 30 RDS MOVING/ LIGHT

6 W/CANNON RUNNING >1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL MOVING/ 2,500- HEAVY

7 TGT W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 MPSM RKTS 3,000- WHEELED 1 RKT IN A

8 TGT W/ROCKETS (M267) HOVERING 4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF MSL MOVING/ 2,500- HEAVY

9 W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MSL MOVING/ 3,000- HEAVY

10 TGT W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING 5,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL 2,500- HEAVY

11 TGT W/HF MSL RFHO (HTM) HOVERING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL 4,000- HEAVY

12 TGT W/HF MSL HF-FCR (HTM) HOVERING 8,000 ARMOR HIT

Notes:
1. Conduct in the AH-64D simulator or in the aircraft using weapon-train mode.
2. Table is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness
level.
3. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-33
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE IV. DAY AH-64D COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE (CPG)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

(meters)

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MSL HEAVY

1 TGT W/HF MISSILE LOBL (HTM) HOVERING <3,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MSL HEAVY

2 TGT W/HF MISSILE LOAL (HTM) HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)

ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT

3 TGT W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING >1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD RKTS 3,000- WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A

4 TGT W/ROCKETS (M274) HOVERING 4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 SAL MSL MOVING/ 3,000- HEAVY

5 W/HF MISSILE LOAL (HTM) RUNNING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF MSL 2,500- HEAVY

6 W/HF MISSILE (HTM) HOVERING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL MOVING/ 2,500- HEAVY

7 TGT W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TGT MOVING/ LIGHT

8 W/CANNON 30 RDS RUNNING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 SAL MSL MOVING/ HEAVY

9 W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING >4,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TGT WHEELED

10 W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING >1,000 VEHICLES HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL 2,500- HEAVY

11 TGT W/HF MSL RFHO (HTM) HOVERING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL 4,000- HEAVY

12 TGT W/HF MSL HF-FCR (HTM) HOVERING 8,000 ARMOR HIT

Notes:
1. Conduct in the AH-64D simulator or in the aircraft using weapon-train mode.
2. This table is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level.
3. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-34
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IV. NIGHT AH-64D COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE (CPG)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

(meters)

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MSL 3,000- HEAVY

1 TGT W/HF MISSILE LOBL (HTM) HOVERING 5,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL MSL HEAVY

2 TGT W/HF MISSILE LOAL (HTM) HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)

ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT

3 TGT W/CANNON 30 RDS HOVERING >1,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 PD RKTS 3,000- WHEELED 2 RKTS IN A

4 TGT W/ROCKETS (M274) HOVERING 4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL MOVING/ 2,000- HEAVY
5 TGT W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TGT MOVING/ LIGHT

6 W/CANNON 30 RDS RUNNING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL 2,500- HEAVY

7 TGT W/HF MISSILE (HTM) HOVERING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF MSL MOVING/ 3,000- HEAVY

8 W/HF MISSILE (HTM) RUNNING 4,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TGT MOVING/ LIGHT

9 W/CANNON 30 RDS RUNNING >1,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 MPSM RKTS 3,000- WHEELED 1 RKT IN A

10 TGT W/ROCKETS (M267) HOVERING 4,000 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL 2,500- HEAVY
11 TGT W/HF MSL RFHO (HTM) HOVERING 6,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF MSL 4,000- HEAVY

12 TGT W/HF MSL HF-FCR (HTM) HOVERING 8,000 ARMOR HIT

Notes:
1. Conduct in the AH-64D simulator or in the aircraft using weapon-train mode.
2. This table is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness
level.
3. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-35
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE V. HELICOPTER GUNNERY SKILLS TEST AND G-COFT

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
Pass written test consisting of a minimum of Without reference to Minimum of 70%
50 questions from the following subject publications. correct.
areas:

• Weapon Systems Operation/Firing

Characteristics.

• Ballistics.

• Delivery Techniques.

• Munitions: Identification/Function/Operation.

Perform relevant tasks from the following Demonstrate ability to Overall GO/NO-GO is
areas: perform or explain based on scorer's
selected subject areas: assessment.

• Armament/Weapon Systems Preflight. Aircraft.

• Armament/Weapon Systems Switchology. Simulator or Aircraft.

• Procedures for Hangfire/Misfire/Emergency Simulator or Aircraft.

Conditions Involving Armament Systems.

• Munitions Handling, Aircraft with Training or

Uploading/Downloading. Live Munitions.

Pass G-COFT. Simulator*. Achieve 70 points on 8

out of 12 engagements
on each iteration (day
and night). Must
receive at least one
GO (at least 70 points)
for each weapon
system.

Other requirements according to Chapter 2, FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140).

Note:
Some hands-on tasks are also ATM tasks. However, conduct these tasks as part of the HGST
to confirm crew proficiency before live-fire training/qualification.
*Depends upon fielding of the Longbow crew trainer.

B-36
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VI. AH-64D WEAPONS CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE SIGHT TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE AWS
1 DYNAMIC 60 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-1,000 TADS HIT
HARMONIZATION

OPERATE
2 CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 1,000-1,500 TADS HIT
W/TADS
OPERATE IHADSS
3 CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <1,000 (PILOT) HIT
W/IHADSS
OPERATE IHADSS
4 CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <1,000 (CPG) HIT
W/IHADSS
2 ROCKETS IN
5 OPERATE ARCS 6 RKTS M274 HOVERING 3,000-4,000 COOP 300- X 400-m TEA

2 ROCKETS IN
6 OPERATE ARCS 6 RKTS M274 HOVERING >4,000 COOP 300- X 400-m TEA
OPERATE PTWS 1 TRAINING PROPER
7 (SAL) MISSILE HOVERING 2,000-6,000 TADS SYMBOLOGY
OPERATE PTWS 1 TRAINING PROPER
8 (RF) MISSILE HOVERING 2,000-6,000 TADS SYMBOLOGY

OPERATE PTWS 1 TRAINING PROPER

9 (FCR) MISSILE HOVERING 2,000-6,000 FCR SYMBOLOGY
(see
note
2)

Notes:
1. This table is designed to verify weapon-system operation.
2. Engagement 9 is only required for aircraft equipped with the FCR.

AMMUNITION:
12 rkts M274
150 rds 30-mm

B-37
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY
1 TARGET WITH SAL HF 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY

2 TARGET WITH SAL HF 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY HVY

3 TARGET WITH SAL HF 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)
ENGAGE STATIONARY 40 RDS 30-mm LIGHT
4 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 8 RKTS (M267 or 2,000– LIGHT 3 RKTS IN 300-

5 TARGET WITH M274) HOVERING 4,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA
ROCKETS
HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
6 ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
7 ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
8 ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
9 ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
10 ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
11 ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
12 ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following pages. There will
be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 6 missile, 3 cannon, and 3 rocket.

STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at
least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings for the
given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm.

Notes:
1. Task 5 is a core task that uses eight M267 or M274 rounds during the day or night portion of the table. The commander
may select one of the rocket engagements (8 M267 or 8 M274) to fire on Table VII Day. The remaining eight rockets will be
fired during the night portion of the table.
2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables.
4. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
6. Appendix D contains an example of a digital gunnery program.
7. The commander and master gunner determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering.

B-38
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT
1 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/ LIGHT

2 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm RUNNING/ <2,000 ARMOR HIT
DIVING

ENGAGE MOVING 500- LIGHT

3 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING MOVING/ 500- LIGHT

4 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm RUNNING/ 3,500 ARMOR HIT
DIVING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm 500- LIGHT

5 TARGET WITH CANNON FCR HOVERING 3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm MOVING/ 500- LIGHT

6 TARGET WITH CANNON FCR RUNNING/ 3,500 ARMOR HIT
DIVING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

7 TARGET WITH IHADSS RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ROCKETS DIVING

ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

8 TARGET WITH COOP HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ROCKETS

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

9 TARGET WITH COOP RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ROCKETS DIVING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

10 TARGET WITH COOP HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ROCKETS

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

11 TARGET WITH FCR RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ROCKETS DIVING

B-39
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

(meters)

ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

12 TARGET WITH FCR HOVERING 1,500-7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
ROCKETS TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

13 MVNG TGT RAPID MOVING/ >3,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY
14 MVNG TGT LOBL MOVING/ <2,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

15 MVNG TGT LOAL MOVING/ >2,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

16 MVNG TGT RIPL MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

17 TGT W/HELLFIRE RFHO MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 RF HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

18 MVNG TGT RFHO MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

19 TGT W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

20 W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 RF HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

21 MVNG TGT RAPID MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 RF HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

22 MVNG TGT TADS HO MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

B-40
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HVY
1 TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HVY

2 TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HVY

3 TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)
ENGAGE STATIONARY 40 RDS 30-mm LIGHT
4 TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 ARMOR HIT

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 8 RKTS (M267 2,000–

LIGHT 3 RKTS IN
TARGET WITH ROCKETS or M274) HOVERING ARMOR 300- X 400-m
4,000
TEA
6 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM
LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
7 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM
LIST ON NEXT PAGES.
8 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM
LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
9 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM
LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
10 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM
LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
11 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM
LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
12 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM
LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following pages.
There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 6 missile, 3 cannon, and 3 rocket.

STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must
receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night
firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm.
Notes:
1. Task 5 is a core task that uses eight M267 or M274 rounds during the day or night portion of the table. The
commander may select one of the rocket engagements (8 M267 or 8 M274) to fire on Table VII Day. The remaining
eight rockets will be fired during the night portion of the table.
2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables.
4. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
6. Appendix D contains an example of a digital gunnery program.
7. The commander and master gunner determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering.

B-41
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT
1 TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/ LIGHT

2 TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm RUNNING/ <2,000 ARMOR HIT
DIVING

ENGAGE MOVING LIGHT

3 TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING MOVING/ LIGHT

4 TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm RUNNING/ 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT
DIVING
ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm LIGHT
5 TARGET W/CANNON FCR HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm MOVING/ LIGHT

6 TARGET W/CANNON FCR RUNNING/ 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT
DIVING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

7 TARGET W/ROCKETS IHADSS RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
DIVING

ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

8 TARGET W/ROCKETS IHADSS HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

9 TARGET W/ROCKETS COOP RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
DIVING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

10 TARGET W/ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

11 TARGET W/ROCKETS FCR RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
DIVING

B-42
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
12 TARGET WITH ROCKETS FCR HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY
13 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE RAPID MOVING/ >3,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY
14 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE LOBL MOVING/ <2,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY
15 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE LOAL MOVING/ >2,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ 3,000– HVY
16 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE RIPL MOVING/ 5,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ 3,000– HVY
17 TGT W/HELLFIRE RFHO MOVING/ 5,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY
18 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE RFHO MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY
19 TGT W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY

20 W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY

21 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE RAPID MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY
22 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE TADS HO MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

B-43
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

1 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL

TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING >2,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL

TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING <2,000 HVY ARMOR HIT

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL

TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 HVY ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 40 RDS 30-mm

TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 LIGHT ARMOR HIT

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 8 RKTS (M267 3 RKTS IN

TARGET WITH ROCKETS or M274) HOVERING 2,000–4,000 LIGHT ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA

6 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT

TWO PAGES.
7 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT
TWO PAGES.
8 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT
TWO PAGES.
9 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT
TWO PAGES.
10 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT
TWO PAGES.
11 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT
TWO PAGES.
12 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT
TWO PAGES.
ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following pages. There
will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 6 missile, 3 cannon, and 3 rocket.

STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at
least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings
for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm.
Notes:
1. Task 5 is a core task that uses eight M267 or M274 rounds during the day or night portion of the table. The commander may
select one of the rocket engagements (8 M267 or 8 M274) to fire on Table VIII Day. The remaining eight rockets will be fired
during the night portion of the table.
2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables.
4. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
6. Appendix D contains an example of a digital gunnery program.
7. The commander and master gunner determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering.

B-44
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

(meters)

ENGAGE STATIONARY LIGHT

1 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY MOVING/ LIGHT

2 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm RUNNING/ <2,000 ARMOR HIT
DIVING

ENGAGE MOVING 500- LIGHT

3 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE MOVING MOVING/ 500- LIGHT

4 TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30-mm RUNNING/ 3,500 ARMOR HIT
DIVING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm 500- LIGHT

5 TARGET WITH CANNON FCR HOVERING 3,500 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY 30 RDS 30-mm MOVING/ 500- LIGHT

6 TARGET WITH CANNON FCR RUNNING/ 3,500 ARMOR HIT
DIVING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS

7 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR IN 300- X
DIVING 400-m TEA

ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS

8 TARGET WITH ROCKETS IHADSS HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR IN 300- X
400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS

9 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR IN 300- X
DIVING 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS

10 TARGET WITH ROCKETS COOP HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR IN 300- X
400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS

11 TARGET WITH ROCKETS FCR RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR IN 300- X
DIVING 400-m TEA

B-45
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
12 TARGET WITH FCR HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
ROCKETS TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 SAL HOVERING/ HVY
13 MVNG TGT HELLFIRE MOVING/ >3,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RAPID RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 SAL HOVERING/ HVY

14 MVNG TGT HELLFIRE MOVING/ <2,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE LOBL RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 SAL HOVERING/ HVY

15 MVNG TGT HELLFIRE MOVING/ >2,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE LOAL RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

16 MVNG TGT RIPL MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY I SAL HF HOVERING/ HVY

17 TGT W/HELLFIRE RFHO MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 RF HF HOVERING/ HVY

18 MVNG TGT RFHO MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF HF HOVERING/ HVY

19 TGT W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF HF HOVERING/ HVY
20 W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 RF HF HOVERING/ HVY

21 MVNG TGT RAPID MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ I RF HF HOVERING/ HVY
22 MVNG TGT TADS HO MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

B-46
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDAR

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

1 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HVY

TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING >2,000 ARMOR HIT

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HVY

TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HVY

TARGET WITH SAL HF HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 ARMOR HIT
(REMOTE)
4 ENGAGE STATIONARY 40 RDS 30-mm LIGHT
TARGET WITH CANNON IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 ARMOR HIT
5 ENGAGE STATIONARY 8 RKTS (M267 2,000–
LIGHT 1 RKT IN
TARGET WITH ROCKETS or M274) HOVERING ARMOR 300- X 400-m
4,000
TEA
6 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
7 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
8 HF MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
9 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
10 30-mm MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
11 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
12 2.75" MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST
ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from the list on the following
pages. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 6 missile, 3 cannon, and 3 rocket.

STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at
least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night
firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm.
Notes:
1. Task 5 is a core task that uses eight M267 or M274 rounds during the day or night portion of the table. The
commander may select one of the rocket engagements (8 M267 or 8 M274) to fire on Table VIII Day. The remaining
eight rockets will be fired during the night portion of the table.
2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables.
4. All rocket engagements will be fired as pairs.
5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
6. Appendix D contains an example of a digital gunnery program.
7. The commander and master gunner determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering.

B-47
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE LIGHT
1 STATIONARY TARGET 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING <2,000 ARMOR HIT
WITH CANNON

ENGAGE MOVING/ LIGHT

2 STATIONARY TARGET 30 RDS 30-mm RUNNING/ <2,000 ARMOR HIT
WITH CANNON DIVING

ENGAGE MOVING LIGHT

3 TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT
CANNON

ENGAGE MOVING MOVING/ LIGHT

4 TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30-mm RUNNING/ 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT
CANNON DIVING
ENGAGE 30 RDS 30-mm LIGHT
5 STATIONARY TARGET FCR HOVERING 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT
WITH CANNON

ENGAGE 30 RDS 30-mm MOVING/ LIGHT

6 STATIONARY TARGET FCR RUNNING/ 500-3,500 ARMOR HIT
WITH CANNON DIVING

ENGAGE 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

7 STATIONARY TARGET IHADSS RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
WITH ROCKETS DIVING

ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

8 TARGET WITH IHADSS HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
ROCKETS
ENGAGE 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN
9 STATIONARY TARGET COOP RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
WITH ROCKETS DIVING

ENGAGE 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

10 STATIONARY TARGET COOP HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
WITH ROCKETS

ENGAGE 6 RKTS (M274) MOVING/ 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

11 STATIONARY TARGET FCR RUNNING/ 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
WITH ROCKETS DIVING

B-48
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW QUALIFICATION TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

ENGAGE MOVING 6 RKTS (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 2 ROCKETS IN

12 TARGET WITH FCR HOVERING 7,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
ROCKETS TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY
13 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE RAPID MOVING/ >3,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY
14 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE LOBL MOVING/ <2,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 SAL HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY
15 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE LOAL MOVING/ >2,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 SAL HF HOVERING/ 3,000- HVY
16 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE RIPL MOVING/ 5,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 SAL HF HOVERING/ 3,000- HVY
17 TGT W/HELLFIRE RFHO MOVING/ 5,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY
18 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE RFHO MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY
19 TGT W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY
20 W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 2 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY
21 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE RAPID MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ 1 RF HF HOVERING/ 500- HVY
22 MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE TADS HO MOVING/ 8,000 ARMOR HIT
RUNNING

B-49
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE IX. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TM/PLT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT

(meters)

ACFT 1 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 Day HEAVY HIT

1 ENGAGE STATIONARY (SAL) 3,000–5,000 ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE Night

ACFT 2 4 RKTS HOVERING >4,000 LIGHT 1 RKT IN

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TARGET W/ROCKETS TEA

ACFT 1 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 TROOPS HIT

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 2 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 WHEELED HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY VEHICLES
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 1 4 RKTS HOVERING >4,000 LIGHT 1 RKT IN

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TARGET W/ROCKETS TEA

ACFT 2 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 Day HEAVY HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY (SAL) 3,000–5,000 ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE Night

ACFT 1 NA HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY NA

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(REMOTE
DESIGNATION)

ACFT 2 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 Day HEAVY HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY (SAL) 3,000–5,000 ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE Night
(REMOTE LAUNCH)

ACFT 1 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 WHEELED HIT

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY VEHICLES
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 2 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 TROOPS HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET W/CANNON

B-50
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IX. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TM/PLT)

(CONCLUDED)
TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ACFT 1 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY HIT
6 ENGAGE STATIONARY (SAL) ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(REMOTE LAUNCH)

ACFT 2 NA HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY NA

ENGAGE STATIONARY ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(REMOTE
DESIGNATION)

ACFT 1 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 2,000-6,000 HEAVY HIT

7 ENGAGE STATIONARY (RF) ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(FCR)

ACFT 2 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 2,000-6,000 HEAVY HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY (RF) ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(RF HANDOVER)
ACFT 1 4 RKTS HOVERING 3,000-4,000 WHEELED 1 RKT IN
8 ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TARGET W/ROCKETS TEA

ACFT 2 4 RKTS HOVERING 3,000-4,000 WHEELED 1 RKT IN

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 VEHICLES 300- X 400-m
TARGET W/ ROCKETS TEA

STANDARD:
Acft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 70% of all tasks to receive a GO for this table.

Notes:
1. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the
unit’s METL/MTP.
2. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation
sheet.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-51
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE X. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TM/PLT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

ACFT 1 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY HIT

1 ENGAGE STATIONARY (SAL) ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE

ACFT 2 4 RKTS HOVERING >4,000 LIGHT 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 ARMOR 400-m
TARGET W/ROCKETS TEA

ACFT 1 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 TROOPS HIT

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 2 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 WHEELED HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY VEHICLES
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 1 4 RKTS HOVERING >4,000 LIGHT 1 RKT IN 300- X

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 ARMOR 400-m
TARGET W/ROCKETS TEA

ACFT 2 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY (SAL) ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE

ACFT 1 NA HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY NA

4 ENGAGE STATIONARY ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(REMOTE
DESIGNATION)

ACFT 2 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY (SAL) ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(REMOTE LAUNCH)

ACFT 1 30 RDS HOVERING 1,000-1,500 WHEELED HIT

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY VEHICLES
TARGET W/CANNON

ACFT 2 30 RDS HOVERING <1,000 TROOPS HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY
TARGET W/CANNON

B-52
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE X. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TM/PLT)

(CONCLUDED)
TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ACFT 1 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY HIT
6 ENGAGE STATIONARY (SAL) ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(REMOTE LAUNCH)

ACFT 2 NA HOVERING >4,000 HEAVY NA

ENGAGE STATIONARY ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(REMOTE
DESIGNATION)
ACFT 1 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 2,000- HEAVY HIT
7 ENGAGE STATIONARY (RF) 6,000 ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(FCR)

ACFT 2 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 2,000- HEAVY HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY (RF) 6,000 ARMOR
TARGET W/HELLFIRE
(RF HANDOVER)
ACFT 1 4 RKTS HOVERING 3,000- WHEELED 1 RKT IN 300- X
8 ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 4,000 VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

ACFT 2 4 RKTS HOVERING 3,000- WHEELED 1 RKT IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 4,000 VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS

STANDARD:
Acft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 70% of all tasks to receive an overall GO for
this table.

AMMUNITION PER A/C: (See Note 3.)

8 rkts M274
60 rds 30-mm

Notes:

1. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those
required by the unit’s METL/MTP.
2. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the
appropriate calculation sheet.
3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided
for this table.

B-53
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
Receive Commander receives on-order deliberate Commander will ensure that precombat
mission, attack mission. Enemy is two to three checks are complete. Commander
conduct hours from decision point. Operations briefs mission to aircrews. Unit
mission overlay includes lateral boundaries, conducts mission planning and
planning phase lines, air routes, and engagement rehearsal.
area.
Conduct air Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
movement the mission. Unit departs TAA en route to coordinates with ground elements in
ABF according to the briefed time vicinity of HA and ABF, and meets
schedule. times for crossing start point, ACPs,
CCPs, and release point.
Conduct Unit occupies ABF per SOP. SITREP Unit occupies ABF along briefed
battle-position from S2 indicates that the enemy is near routes, establishes security in BP, and
operations the planned engagement area. prepares to engage IAW briefed
schedule.
Engage Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit Direct fire distribution according to the
multiple targets engages targets with long-range missile SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver
fires. according to the commander's
guidance.
Detect and During missile engagements, unit makes Execute distribution of fires according
react to contact with lead elements of the to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver,
OPFOR OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with engage troops and vehicles with
lightly armored vehicles and troops cannon, and neutralize artillery with
supported by artillery. Unit engages with rockets. The commander reports to
cannon at short to medium ranges and higher HQ.
rockets at medium to long ranges.

Conduct FARP Upon completing briefed mission, unit Commander consolidates BDA and
operations rallies at HA and returns along briefed air FARM, reports to higher command, and
route to FARP. determines proper weapons load for
aircraft. Aircraft sequence into the
FARP and refuel according to the SOP.
Return to TAA, Commander orders the unit to depart the Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts
and prepare FARP and return to the TAA along AAR, prepares for future operations,
for future briefed air routes. and completes precombat checks.
operations

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-54
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

Receive mission, Commander receives on-order zone Commander will ensure that
conduct mission recon mission. Enemy situation is precombat checks are complete.
planning unknown. Operations overlay includes Commander briefs mission to
lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. aircrews. Unit conducts mission
planning and rehearsal.

Conduct Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan and
movement to LD mission. Unit departs TAA en route to coordinates with ground elements for
the LD. LD passage.

Conduct zone Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses Unit recons assigned zone IAW time
reconnaissance bounding overwatch to conduct constraints in OPORD.
reconnaissance.

Detect and react Unit makes contact with lead elements Unit engages OPFOR and breaks
to OPFOR of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon contact. The engagement is not
element with lightly armored vehicles decisive. The commander reports to
and dismounted troops. higher HQ.

Conduct FARP Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, Commander determines proper
operations and returns along briefed air routes to weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft
FARP. sequence into FARP and refuel
according to the SOP.

Return to TAA, Commander orders the unit to depart Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
and prepare for the FARP and return to the TAA along conducts AAR, prepares for future
future operations briefed air routes. operations, and completes
precombat checks.

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. Accomplish tasks according to standards in the applicable MTP.
4. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-55
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
Receive Commander receives on-order Commander will ensure that precombat
mission, deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two checks are complete. Commander briefs
conduct to three hours from decision point. mission to aircrews. Unit conducts
mission Operations overlay includes lateral mission planning and rehearsal.
planning boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and
engagement area.
Conduct air Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan, coordinates
movement mission. Unit departs TAA en route to with ground elements in vicinity of HA and
ABF according to the briefed time ABF, and meets times for crossing start
schedule. point, ACPs, CCPs, and release point.

Conduct Unit occupies ABF per SOP. SITREP Unit occupies ABF along briefed routes,
battle-position from S2 indicates that the enemy is establishes security in ABF, and prepares
operations near the planned engagement area. to engage IAW briefed schedule.

Engage Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit Direct fire distribution according to the
multiple engages targets with long-range missile SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver
targets fires. according to the commander's guidance.

Detect and During missile engagements, the unit Execute distribution of fires according to
react to makes contact with lead elements of the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver,
OPFOR the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element engage troops and vehicles with cannon,
with lightly armored vehicles and troops and neutralize artillery with rockets. The
supported by artillery. Unit engages commander reports to higher HQ.
with cannon at short to medium ranges
and rockets at medium to long ranges.

Conduct Upon completing briefed mission, unit Commander consolidates BDA and
FARP rallies at HA and returns along briefed FARM, reports to higher command, and
operations air route to FARP. determines proper weapons load for
aircraft. Aircraft sequence into the FARP
and refuel according to the SOP.

Return to Commander orders the unit to depart Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts
TAA, and the FARP and return to the TAA along AAR, prepares for future operations, and
prepare for briefed air routes. completes precombat checks.
future
operations

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for
this table.

B-56
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

Receive Commander receives on-order zone Commander will ensure precombat

mission, recon mission. Enemy situation is checks are complete. Commander
conduct mission unknown. Operations overlay includes briefs mission to aircrews. Unit
planning lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. conducts mission planning and
rehearsal.

Conduct Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan and
movement to mission. Unit departs TAA en route to coordinates with ground elements for
LD the LD. LD passage.

Conduct zone Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses Unit recons assigned zone IAW time
reconnaissance bounding overwatch to conduct constraints in OPORD.
reconnaissance.

Detect and Unit makes contact with lead elements Unit engages OPFOR and breaks
react to OPFOR of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon contact. The engagement is not
element with lightly armored vehicles decisive. The commander reports to
and dismounted troops. higher HQ.

Conduct FARP Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, Commander determines proper
operations and returns along briefed air routes to weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft
FARP. sequence into FARP and refuel
according to the SOP.

Return to TAA, Commander orders the unit to depart Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
and prepare for the FARP and return to the TAA along conducts AAR, prepares for future
future briefed air routes. operations, and completes precombat
operations checks.

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire.
2. Commanders can modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/
MTP.
3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for
this table.

B-57
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

SECTION IV – OH-58D GUNNERY TABLES

B-49. Units assigned OH-58D aircraft will use the gunnery tables in this
section.

TABLE I. DAY OH-58D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT AMMO

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE I. NIGHT OH-58D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT AMMO

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE II. DAY OH-58D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPO)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT AMMO

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE II. NIGHT OH-58D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPO)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT AMMO

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

B-58
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE III. DAY OH-58D COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ HOVERING/ HIT OR 10% IN
1 MOVING TGT W/.50-CAL 80 RDS MOVING 500-1,500 TROOPS 36- x 36-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ HIT OR 10% IN

2 MOVING TGT W/.50-CAL 80 RDS RUNNING 500-1,500 TROOPS 36- x 36-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 RKTS HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 RKT IN A

3 TARGET W/ROCKETS M267 MOVING/ 800-6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
RUNNING TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 5 RKTS HOVERING/ LIGHT 2 RKTS IN A

4 TARGET W/ROCKETS M274 MOVING/ 800-6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
RUNNING TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 5 RKTS LIGHT 2 RKTS IN A

5 TARGET W/ROCKETS M274 RUNNING 800-6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA

ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY

6 HELLFIRE (REMOTE) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET W/HF HEAVY

7 (AUTONOMOUS) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET HOVERING/

8 W/ATAS 1 STINGER MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

Note: DA Pam 350-38 does not provide Hellfire and Stinger missiles for this table. Training
missiles should be used.

AMMUNITION:
4 rkts M267
10 rkts M274
160 rds .50-cal

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-59
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE IV. NIGHT OH-58D COMMANDER’S EVALUATION TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ HOVERING/ HIT OR 10% IN

1 MOVING TGT W/.50 80 RDS MOVING 500-1,500 TROOPS 36- x 36-m TEA
CAL

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ HIT OR 10% IN

2 MOVING TGT 80 RDS RUNNING 500-1,500 TROOPS 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL

ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 RKTS HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 RKT IN A

3 TARGET W/ROCKETS M267 MOVING/ 800-6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
RUNNING TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 5 RKTS HOVERING/ LIGHT 2 RKTS IN A

4 TARGET W/ROCKETS M274 MOVING/ 800-6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
RUNNING TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 5 RKTS LIGHT 2 RKTS IN A
5 TARGET W/ROCKETS M274 RUNNING 800-6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY
6 HELLFIRE (REMOTE) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY

7 HF (AUTONOMOUS) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET HOVERING/

8 W/ATAS 1 STINGER MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

Note: DA Pam 350-38 does not provide Hellfire and Stinger missiles for this table. Training missiles
should be used.

AMMUNITION:
4 rkts M267
10 rkts M274
160 rds .50-cal

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

B-60
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE V. HELICOPTER GUNNERY SKILLS TEST

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
Pass written test consisting of a minimum of 50 Without reference to Minimum of 70%
questions from the following subject areas: publications. correct.

• Weapon Systems Operation/Firing

Characteristics.

• Ballistics.

• Delivery Techniques.

• Munitions: Identification/Function/Operation.

Perform relevant tasks from the following areas: Demonstrate ability to Overall
perform or explain GO/NO-GO is
selected subject areas: based on scorer’s
assessment.
• Armament/Weapon Systems Preflight. Aircraft.

• Armament/Weapon Systems Switchology. Simulator or Aircraft.

• Procedures for Hangfire/Misfire/Emergency Simulator or Aircraft.

Conditions Involving Armament Systems.
Aircraft With Training
• Munitions Handling, Uploading/Downloading. or Live Munitions.

Other requirements are according to Chapter 2, FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140).

Note:
Some hands-on tasks are also ATM tasks. However, conduct these tasks as part of the HGST to
confirm crew proficiency before live-fire training/qualification.

B-61
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VI. OH-58D WEAPONS CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

1 OPERATE .50- 40 RDS HOVERING 800- AS HIT OR 10% OF

CAL MACHINE 1,200 REQUIRED RDS IN 36- x 36-m
GUN TEA

2 OPERATE 7 RKTS HOVERING 2,000- AS 3 RKTS IN 300- X

2.75" ROCKET M274 4,000 REQUIRED 400-m TEA
SYSTEM

3 OPERATE HF TNG HOVERING 2,000- AS PROPER

HELLFIRE MSL 4,000 REQUIRED PRELAUNCH/
MISSILE POSTLAUNCH
SYSTEM WITH SYMBOLOGY
LASER

4 OPERATE STINGER HOVERING 2,000- AS PROPER

STINGER CFT 5,000 REQUIRED PRELAUNCH/
MISSILE POSTLAUNCH
SYSTEM SYMBOLOGY

AMMUNITION:
7 rkts M274
40 rds .50-cal

B-62
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT
(meters) EFFECT

ENGAGE STATIONARY HOVERING/ HIT OR 10%

1 TARGET W/.50-CAL MG 70 RDS MOVING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS IN 36- x 36-m
RUNNING TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 (M267) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 RKT IN A

2 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING/ 800-6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
RUNNING TEA

ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY

3 HELLFIRE (REMOTE) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY

4 HF (AUTONOMOUS) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET STATIONARY/

5 W/ATAS 1 STINGER MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

6 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

7 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
8 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
9 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
10 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
11 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
12 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
STANDARD: Crew must achieve a GO rating on 8 of 12 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. The
crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION:
280 rounds .50-cal
10 rkts M274
4 rkts M267

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL; APPROPRIATE MODE—maneuvering aircraft as necessary

to execute appropriate TTP.

Notes:
1. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
2. Table execution will be accomplished with 4 gun engagements, 4 rocket engagements, and 4 missile
engagements.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide Hellfire and ATAS missiles for this table. Training missiles should
be used.
4. At least one of the rocket swing tasks must be accomplished at a range of 3 to 6 kilometers.

B-63
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

ENGAGE MOVING/ 70 RDS HOVERING/ WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN

1 STAT TARGET .50-CAL MOVING 500-800 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE MOVING/ 70 RDS WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
2 STAT TARGET .50-CAL RUNNING 500-800 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE MOVING/ 70 RDS HOVERING/ WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
3 STAT TARGET .50-CAL MOVING 800-1,200 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE MOVING/ 70 RDS WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
4 STAT TARGET .50-CAL RUNNING 800-1,200 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE MOVING/ 70 RDS APPROPRIATE 500-1,500 WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
5 STAT TARGET .50-CAL MODE VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE MOVING/ 70 RDS APPROPRIATE 500-1,500 WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
6 STAT TARGET .50-CAL MODE VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-
7 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 800-1,500 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 7 (M274) LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

8 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 800-1,500 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ 1,500- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

9 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 3,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 7 (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

10 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 3,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE MOVING 3 (M274) APPROPRIATE 500-3,000 LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

11 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MODE ARMOR X 400-m TEA

B-64
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE 3 (M274) APPROPRIATE 800-3,000 LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
12 STATIONARY TARGET ROCKETS MODE ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
W/ROCKETS

ENGAGE 4 (M274) HOVERING/ 3,000- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN

13 STATIONARY TARGET ROCKETS MOVING 6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
W/ROCKETS

ENGAGE 4 (M274) 3,000- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN

14 STATIONARY TARGET ROCKETS RUNNING 6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
W/ROCKETS

ENGAGE 4 (M274) HOVERING/ 3,000- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN

15 STATIONARY TARGET ROCKETS MOVING/ 6,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
W/ROCKETS RUNNING
ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY
16 STATIONARY TARGET REMOTE MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE (LOAL) RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

17 STATIONARY TARGET REMOTE MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE (LOBL) RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

18 STATIONARY TARGET AUTO (LOAL) MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HF HOVERING/ HVY

19 STATIONARY TARGET AUTO (LOBL) MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE TARGET 1 STINGER

20 W/ATAS CFT HOVERING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

ENGAGE TARGET 1 STINGER

21 W/ATAS CFT MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

B-65
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY HOVERING/ HIT OR 10% IN 36-
1 TARGET W/.50-CAL 70 RDS MOVING/RUNNING 500-1,500 TROOPS x 36-m TEA
MG

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M267) HOVER/ LIGHT 1 RKT IN A 300- X

2 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING/RUNNING 800-6,000 ARMOR 400-m TEA

ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY

3 HELLFIRE (REMOTE) 1 HELLFIRE HOVER 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY

4 HF (AUTONOMOUS) 1 HELLFIRE HOVER 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET STATIONARY/

5 W/ATAS 1 STINGER MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

6 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

7 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
8 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
9 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
10 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
11 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
12 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

STANDARD: Crew must achieve a GO rating on 8 of 12 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew
must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION:
280 rounds .50-cal
9 rkts M274
3 rkts M267

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL; APPROPRIATE MODE—maneuvering aircraft as necessary to

execute appropriate TTP.

Notes:
1. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
2. Table execution will be accomplished with 4 gun engagements, 4 rocket engagements, and 4 missile
engagements.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide Hellfire and ATAS missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
4. At least one of the rocket swing tasks must be accomplished at a range of 3 to 6 kilometers.

B-66
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

ENGAGE 70 RDS HOVERING/ WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN

1 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MOVING 500-800 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
2 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL RUNNING 500-800 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS HOVERING/ WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
3 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MOVING 800-1,200 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
4 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL RUNNING 800-1,200 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS APPROPRIATE WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
5 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MODE 500-1,500 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS APPROPRIATE WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN
6 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MODE 500-1,500 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
7 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 800-1,500 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
8 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 800-1,500 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
9 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 1,500-3,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
10 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 1,500-3,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) APPROPRIATE LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
11 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MODE 500-3,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA

B-67
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) APPROPRIATE LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
12 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MODE 800-3,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN

13 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 3,000- ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
6,000

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN

14 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 3,000- ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
6,000

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN

15 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING/ 3,000- ARMOR 300- X 400-m TEA
RUNNING 6,000

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

16 STATIONARY TARGET REMOTE MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE (LOAL) RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

17 STATIONARY TARGET REMOTE MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE (LOBL) RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

18 STATIONARY TARGET AUTO (LOAL) MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HF HOVERING/ HVY

19 STATIONARY TARGET AUTO (LOBL) MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE TARGET 1 STINGER

20 W/ATAS CFT HOVERING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

ENGAGE TARGET 1 STINGER

21 W/ATAS CFT MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

B-68
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY HOVERING/ HIT OR 10% IN
1 TARGET W/.50-CAL MG 70 RDS MOVING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS 36- x 36-m TEA
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 (M267) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 RKT IN A 300-
2 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING/ 800-6,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA
RUNNING
ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY
3 HELLFIRE (REMOTE) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET HEAVY

4 W/HF (AUTONOMOUS) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET STATIONARY/

5 W/ATAS 1 STINGER MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

6 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

7 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

8 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

9 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

10 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

11 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

12 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

STANDARDS: Crew must achieve a GO rating on 8 of 12 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew
must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION:
280 rounds .50-cal
10 rkts M274
4 rkts M267

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL; APPROPRIATE MODE—maneuvering aircraft as necessary to

execute appropriate TTP.

Notes:
1. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
2. Table execution will be accomplished with 4 gun engagements, 4 rocket engagements, and 4 missile
engagements.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide Hellfire and ATAS missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
4. At least one of the rocket swing tasks must be accomplished at a range of 3 to 6 kilometers.

B-69
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

ENGAGE 70 RDS HOVERING/ WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN 36-

1 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MOVING 500-800 VEHICLES/ x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN 36-
2 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL RUNNING 500-800 VEHICLES/ x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS HOVERING/ WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN 36-
3 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MOVING 800-1,200 VEHICLES/ x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN 36-
4 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL RUNNING 800-1,200 VEHICLES/ x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS

ENGAGE 70 RDS APPROPRIATE WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN 36-

5 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MODE 500-1,500 VEHICLES/ x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE 70 RDS APPROPRIATE WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN 36-
6 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MODE 500-1,500 VEHICLES/ x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-
7 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 800-1,500 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

8 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 800-1,500 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ 1,500- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

9 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 3,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

10 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 3,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE MOVING 3 (M274) APPROPRIATE LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

11 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MODE 500-3,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

B-70
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 (M274) APPROPRIATE LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-
12 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MODE 800-3,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 (M274) HOVERING/ 3,000- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

13 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 6,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 (M274) 3,000- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

14 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 6,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 4 (M274) HOVERING/ 3,000- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

15 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING/ 6,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA
RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HF HOVERING/ HVY

16 STATIONARY TARGET REMOTE MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE (LOAL) RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HF HOVERING/ HVY

17 STATIONARY TARGET REMOTE MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE (LOBL) RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HF AUTO HOVERING/ HVY

18 STATIONARY TARGET (LOAL) MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HF AUTO HOVERING/ HVY

19 STATIONARY TARGET (LOBL) MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE TARGET 1 STINGER

20 W/ATAS CFT HOVERING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

ENGAGE TARGET 1 STINGER

21 W/ATAS CFT MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

B-71
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY HOVERING/ HIT OR 10% IN
1 TARGET W/.50-CAL 70 RDS MOVING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS 36- x 36-m TEA
RUNNING
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M267) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 RKT IN A 300-
2 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING/ 800-6,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA
RUNNING
ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY
3 HELLFIRE (REMOTE) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET W/ HEAVY

4 HF (AUTONOMOUS) 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING 800-8,000 ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET STATIONARY/

5 W/ATAS 1 STINGER MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

6 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

7 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
8 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
9 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
10 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
11 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
12 MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.
STANDARD: Crew must achieve a GO rating on 8 of 12 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew
must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

AMMUNITION:
280 rounds .50-cal
9 rkts M274
3 rkts M267

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL; APPROPRIATE MODE—maneuvering aircraft as necessary to

execute appropriate TTP.

Notes:
1. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected to support the unit mission, METL, and resources.
2. Table execution will be accomplished with 4 gun engagements, 4 rocket engagements, and 4 missile
engagements.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide Hellfire and ATAS missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used.
4. At least one of the rocket swing tasks must be accomplished at a range of 3 to 6 kilometers.

B-72
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)

ENGAGE 70 RDS HOVERING/ WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN

1 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MOVING 500-800 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS

ENGAGE 70 RDS WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN

2 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL RUNNING 500-800 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS

ENGAGE 70 RDS HOVERING/ WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN

3 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MOVING 800-1,200 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS

ENGAGE 70 RDS WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN

4 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL RUNNING 800-1,200 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS

ENGAGE 70 RDS APPROPRIATE WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN

5 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MODE 500-1,500 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS

ENGAGE 70 RDS APPROPRIATE WHEELED HIT OR 10% IN

6 MOVING/STAT TARGET .50-CAL MODE 500-1,500 VEHICLES/ 36- x 36-m TEA
W/.50-CAL TROOPS

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN

7 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 800-1,500 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
8 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 800-1,500 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ 1,500- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
9 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 3,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) 1,500- LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
10 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 3,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA
ENGAGE MOVING 3 (M274) APPROPRIATE LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN
11 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MODE 500-3,000 ARMOR 300- X 400-m
TEA

B-73
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) APPROPRIATE LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-
12 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MODE 800-3,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

13 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING 3,000-6,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

14 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS RUNNING 3,000-6,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA

ENGAGE STATIONARY 3 (M274) HOVERING/ LIGHT 1 ROCKET IN 300-

15 TARGET W/ROCKETS ROCKETS MOVING/ 3,000-6,000 ARMOR X 400-m TEA
RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

16 STATIONARY TARGET REMOTE MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE (LOAL) RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

17 STATIONARY TARGET REMOTE MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE (LOBL) RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ HVY

18 STATIONARY TARGET AUTO (LOAL) MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE MOVING/ 1 HF HOVERING/ HVY

19 STATIONARY TARGET AUTO (LOBL) MOVING/ 500-8,000 ARMOR HIT
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ENGAGE TARGET 1 STINGER

20 W/ATAS CFT HOVERING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

ENGAGE TARGET 1 STINGER

21 W/ATAS CFT MOVING <4,000 AIRCRAFT HIT

B-74
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IX. DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TM/PLT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ACFT #1 100 RDS HOVERING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS HIT OR 10% IN
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ .50-CAL MOVING/ 36- x 36-m TEA
MOVING TARGET RUNNING
W/.50-CAL

ACFT #2 7 RKTS HOVERING/ 800-6,000 LIGHT ARMOR/ 3 RKTS IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 MOVING/ WHEELED 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS RUNNING VEHICLES

ACFT #1 7 RKTS HOVERING/ 800-6,000 LIGHT ARMOR/ 3 RKTS IN 300- X

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 MOVING/ WHEELED 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS RUNNING VEHICLES

ACFT #2 100 RDS HOVERING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS HIT OR 10% IN

ENGAGE STATIONARY .50-CAL MOVING/ 36- x 36-m TEA
TARGET W/.50-CAL RUNNING

ACFT #1 100 RDS HOVERING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS HIT OR 10% IN

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ .50-CAL MOVING/ 36- x 36-m TEA
MOVING TARGET RUNNING
W/.50-CAL

ACFT 2 100 RDS HOVERING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS HIT OR 10% IN

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ .50-CAL MOVING/ 36- x 36-m TEA
MOVING TARGET RUNNING
W/.50-CAL

ACFT 1 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ 800-8,000 HEAVY ARMOR HIT

4 ENGAGE TARGET MOVING/
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ACFT 2 7 RKTS HOVERING/ 800-6,000 LIGHT ARMOR 3 RKTS IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 MOVING/ 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS RUNNING

ACFT 1 7 RKTS HOVERING/ 800-6,000 LIGHT ARMOR 3 RKTS IN 300- X

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 MOVING/ 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS RUNNING

ACFT 2 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ 800-8,000 HEAVY ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET MOVING/
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

STANDARD: Acft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 7 of 10 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table.
AMMUNITION PER A/C: (See Note 3.)

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

Notes:
1. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the unit’s METL/MTP.
2. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-75
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE X. DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TM/PLT)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION AMMO MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT
(meters)
ACFT #1 100 RDS HOVERING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS HIT OR 10% IN 36- x
1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ .50-CAL MOVING/ 36-m TEA
MOVING TARGET RUNNING
W/.50-CAL

ACFT #2 7 RKTS HOVERING/ 800-6,000 LIGHT ARMOR/ 3 RKTS IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 MOVING/ WHEELED VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS RUNNING

ACFT #1 7 RKTS HOVERING/ 800-6,000 LIGHT ARMOR/ 3 RKTS IN 300- X

2 ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 MOVING/ WHEELED VEHICLES 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS RUNNING

ACFT #2 100 RDS HOVERING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS/ HIT OR 10% IN 36- x

ENGAGE STATIONARY .50-CAL MOVING/ LIGHT ARMOR/ 36-m TEA
TARGET W/.50-CAL RUNNING WHEELED VEHICLES

ACFT #1 100 RDS HOVERING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS HIT OR 10% IN 36- x

3 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ .50-CAL MOVING/ 36-m TEA
MOVING TARGET RUNNING
W/.50-CAL

ACFT 2 100 RDS HOVERING/ 500-1,500 TROOPS HIT OR 10% IN 36- x

ENGAGE STATIONARY/ .50-CAL MOVING/ 36-m TEA
MOVING TARGET RUNNING
W/.50-CAL

ACFT 1 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ 800-8,000 HEAVY ARMOR HIT

4 ENGAGE TARGET MOVING/
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING

ACFT 2 7 RKTS HOVERING/ 800-6,000 LIGHT ARMOR 3 RKTS IN 300- X

ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 MOVING/ 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS RUNNING

ACFT 1 7 RKTS HOVERING/ 800-6,000 LIGHT ARMOR 3 RKTS IN 300- X

5 ENGAGE STATIONARY M274 MOVING/ 400-m TEA
TARGET W/ROCKETS RUNNING

ACFT 2 1 HELLFIRE HOVERING/ 800-8,000 HEAVY ARMOR HIT

ENGAGE TARGET MOVING/
W/HELLFIRE RUNNING
STANDARD: Acft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 7 of 10 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table.
AMMUNITION PER A/C:
14 rkts M274
480 rds .50-cal
1 Hellfire

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

Notes:
1. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the unit’s
METL/MTP.
2. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet.
3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition for this table.

B-76
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
Receive Commander receives on-order deliberate Commander will ensure that
mission, attack mission. Enemy is two to three hours precombat checks are complete.
conduct from decision point. Operations overlay Commander briefs mission to aircrews.
mission includes lateral boundaries, phase lines, air Unit conducts mission planning and
planning routes, and engagement area. rehearsal.

Conduct air Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
movement mission. Unit departs TAA en route to ABF coordinates with ground elements in
according to the briefed time schedule. vicinity of HA and ABF, and meets
times for crossing start point, ACPs,
CCPs, and release point.

Conduct Unit occupies ABF according to the SOP. Unit occupies ABF along briefed
battle-position SITREP from S2 indicates that the enemy is routes, establishes security in ABF,
operations near the planned engagement area. and prepares to engage IAW briefed
schedule.

Engage Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit engages Direct fire distribution according to the
multiple targets with long-range missile fires. SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver
targets according to the commander’s
guidance.

Detect and During missile engagements, unit makes Execute distribution of fires according
react to contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. to the SOP. Unit will fire and
OPFOR OPFOR is recon element with lightly maneuver, engage troops and vehicles
armored vehicles and troops supported by with machine gun, and neutralize
artillery. Unit engages with machine gun at artillery with rockets. The commander
short to medium ranges and rockets at reports to higher HQ.
medium to long ranges.

Conduct Upon completing briefed mission, unit Commander consolidates BDA and
FARP rallies at HA and returns along briefed air FARM, reports to higher command,
operations route to FARP. and determines proper weapons load
for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into
FARP and refuel according to the
SOP.

Return to Commander orders the unit to depart the Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts
TAA, and FARP and return to the TAA along briefed AAR, prepares for future operations,
prepare for air routes. and completes precombat checks.
future
operations

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP.
3. Accomplish tasks according to standards in the applicable MTP.
4. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-77
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

Receive mission, Commander receives on-order Commander will ensure that precombat
conduct mission zone recon mission. Enemy checks are complete. Commander
planning situation is unknown. Operations briefs mission to aircrews. Unit
overlay includes lateral boundaries, conducts mission planning and
LD, and objective. rehearsal.

Conduct Commander receives order to Unit complies with A2C2 plan and
movement to LD execute mission. Unit departs TAA coordinates with ground elements for
en route to the LD. LD passage.

Conduct zone Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses Unit recons assigned zone IAW time
reconnaissance bounding overwatch to conduct constraints in OPORD.
reconnaissance.

Detect and react Unit makes contact with lead Unit engages OPFOR and breaks
to OPFOR elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR contact. The engagement is not
is recon element with lightly decisive. Commander reports to higher
armored vehicles and dismounted HQ.
troops.

Conduct FARP Unit rallies, conducts battle Commander determines proper

operations handover, and returns along weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft
briefed air routes to FARP. sequence into FARP and refuel
according to the SOP.

Return to TAA, Commander orders the unit to Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts
and prepare for depart the FARP and return to the AAR, prepares for future operations,
future operations TAA along briefed air routes. and completes precombat checks.

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. Accomplish tasks according to standards in the applicable MTP.
4. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-78
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD
Receive mission, Commander receives on-order Commander will ensure that precombat
and conduct deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two checks are complete. Commander
mission planning to three hours from decision point. briefs mission to aircrews. Unit
Operations overlay includes lateral conducts mission planning and
boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and rehearsal.
engagement area.

Conduct air Commander receives order to execute Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
movement mission. Unit departs TAA en route to coordinates with ground elements in
ABF according to briefed time schedule. vicinity of HA and ABF, and meets
times for crossing start point, ACPs,
CCPs, and release point.

Conduct Unit occupies ABF according to SOP. Unit occupies ABF along briefed
battle-position SITREP from S2 indicates that the routes, establishes security in ABF, and
operations enemy is near the planned engagement prepares to engage IAW briefed
area. schedule.

Engage multiple Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit Direct fire distribution according to the
targets engages targets with long-range missile SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver
fires. according to the commander's
guidance.

Detect and react During missile engagements, unit makes Execute distribution of fires according
to OPFOR contact with lead elements of the to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver,
OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with engage troops and vehicles with
lightly armored vehicles and troops machine gun, and neutralize artillery
supported by artillery. Unit engages with with rockets. The commander reports
machine gun at short to medium ranges to higher HQ.
and rockets at medium to long ranges.

Conduct FARP Upon completing briefed mission, unit Commander consolidates BDA and
operations rallies at HA and returns along briefed FARM, reports to higher command, and
air route to FARP. determines proper weapons load for
aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP
and refuel according to the SOP.

Return to TAA, Commander orders the unit to depart the Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts
and prepare for FARP and return to the TAA along AAR, prepares for future operations,
future operations briefed air routes. and completes precombat checks.

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP.
3. Accomplish tasks according to standards in the applicable MTP.
4. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table.

B-79
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

Receive mission, Commander receives on-order Commander will ensure that
and conduct zone recon mission. Enemy precombat checks are complete.
mission planning situation is unknown. Operations Commander briefs mission to
overlay includes lateral boundaries, aircrews. Unit conducts mission
LD, and objective. planning and rehearsal.

Conduct movement Commander receives order to Unit complies with A2C2 plan and
to LD execute mission. Unit departs TAA coordinates with ground elements
en route to the LD. for LD passage.

Conduct zone Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses Unit recons assigned zone IAW
reconnaissance bounding overwatch to conduct time constraints in OPORD.
reconnaissance.

Detect and react to Unit makes contact with lead Unit engages OPFOR and breaks
OPFOR elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is contact. The engagement is not
recon element with lightly armored decisive. Commander reports to
vehicles and dismounted troops. higher HQ.

Conduct FARP Unit rallies, conducts battle Commander determines proper

operations handover, and returns along briefed weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft
air routes to FARP. sequence into FARP and refuel
according to the SOP.

Return to TAA, and Commander orders the unit to Unit complies with A2C2 plan,
prepare for future depart the FARP and return to the conducts AAR, prepares for future
operations TAA along briefed air routes. operations, and completes
precombat checks.

Notes:
1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire.
2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit
METL/MTP.
3. Accomplish tasks according to standards in the applicable MTP.
4. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for
this table.

B-80
 Appendix C

Engagement Time Point Calculation Sheets

The point calculation sheets in this appendix (Figures C-1 through C-14)
allow the assessing of points for each engagement. The times are based on
weapon-system characteristics, times of flight, and crew coordination. All
engagement times are measured in seconds.

USING THE POINT CALCULATION SHEETS

C-1. To determine engagement-time scores, select the applicable table for the
engagement; for example, “MPSM rockets, four pair.” Determine range to the
target on the top row, and read down to the engagement time, which is
expressed in seconds. After finding the correct engagement time, read the
left-most column to determine the score.
C-2. Cannon and Hellfire remote engagements have entries for
even-numbered seconds. For odd-numbered times, subtract one second. The
rule is to round down. To determine a score, move across to the time that the
target was hit. The point value is under that time.
C-3. For ranges with masking terrain, commanders may elect to add 10
seconds to engagement times to allow crews to unmask and acquire targets.
C-4. Chapter 2 contains specific instructions on how to time engagements.
C-5. The score for rockets will be determined based on the actual number of
pairs fired.

SECONDS 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 70 80

POINTS 100 98 96 94 92 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76 74 72 70 50 30

Figure C-1. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, 30-Millimeter Cannon Tasks

C-1
FM 3-04.201 (FM 1-201) _____________________________________________________________________

RANGE IN 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-

METERS 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000

POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 15 or less 19 or less 23 or less 28 or less 34 or less 39 or less 46 or less

95 15.1 - 17 19.1 - 20 23.1 - 25 28.1 - 30 34.1 - 36 39.1 - 42 46.1 - 50

90 17.1 - 18 20.1 - 22 25.1 - 26 30.1 - 32 36.1 - 38 42.1 - 45 50.1 - 53

85 18.1 - 19 22.1 - 23 26.1 - 28 32.1 - 34 38.1 - 41 45.1 - 48 53.1 - 56

80 19.1 - 20 23.1 - 24 28.1 - 30 34.1 - 36 41.1 - 43 48.1 - 50 56.1 - 59

75 20.1 - 21 24.1 - 26 30.1 - 31 36.1 - 38 43.1 - 46 50.1 - 53 59.1 - 63

70 21.1 - 22 26.1 - 27 31.1 - 33 38.1 - 40 46.1 - 48 53.1 - 56 63.1 - 66

50 22.1 - 24 27.1 - 30 33.1 - 36 40.1 - 44 48.1 - 53 56.1 - 62 66.1 - 73

30 24.1 - 25 30.1 - 31 36.1 - 38 44.1 - 46 53.1 - 55 62.1 - 64 73.1 - 76

0 > 25 > 31 > 38 > 46 > 55 > 64 > 76

Figure C-2. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, Autonomous SAL Hellfire Engagement
Tasks

RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-

(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000
POINTS
Engagement Time in Seconds

100 <15 <17 <19 <21 <23 <27 <34

95 15.1-17 17.1-19 19.1-21 21.1-23 23.1-25 27.1-30 34.1-37
90 17.1-18 19.1-20 21.1-23 23.1-25 25.1-27 30.1-34 37.1-40
85 18.1-19 20.1-22 23.1-25 25.1-27 27.1-29 34.1-38 40.1-43
80 19.1-20 22.1-24 25.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-32 38.1-42 43.1-46
75 20.1-21 24.1-26 27.1-29 29.1-31 32.1-35 42.1-46 46.1-50
70 21.1-22 26.1-27 29.1-31 31.1-33 35.1-38 46.1-50 50.1-54

50 22.1-23 27.1-29 31.1-33 33.1-35 38.1-41 50.1-54 54.1-58

30 23.1-24 29.1-31 33.1-35 35.1-37 41.1-45 54.1-58 58.1-62

0 >24 >31 >35 >37 >45 >58 >62

Figure C-3. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, TADS RFHO Engagement Tasks

C-2
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix C

SECONDS 40 42 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 80
4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 6

POINTS 100 98 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 7 5 30
6 4 2 0 8 6 4 2 0 8 6 4 2 0 0

Figure C-4. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, SAL Hellfire Remote Engagement
Tasks

4 PAIRS

RANGE IN 1,000-2,000 2,001-3,000 3,001-4,000 4,001-5,000 5,001-6,000 6,001-7,000 7,001-8,000

METERS
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 92 or less 102 or less 111 or less 127 or less 139 or less 155 or less 173 or less
95 92.1 - 98 102.1 - 109 111.1 - 119 127.1 - 136 139.1 - 149 155.1 - 166 173.1 - 185
90 98.1 - 105 109.1 - 116 119.1 - 127 136.1 - 145 149.1 - 159 166.1 - 177 185.1 - 198
85 105.1 - 111 116.1 - 123 127.1 - 135 145.1 - 154 159.1 - 169 177.1 - 188 198.1 - 210
80 111.1 - 118 123.1 - 131 135.1 - 143 154.1 - 163 169.1 - 179 188.1 - 199 210.1 - 222
75 118.1 - 124 131.1 - 138 143.1 - 151 163.1 - 172 179.1 - 189 199.1 - 210 222.1 - 235
70 124.1 - 131 138.1 - 145 151.1 - 159 172.1 - 181 189.1 - 199 210.1 - 221 235.1 - 247
50 131.1 - 144 145.1 - 160 159.1 - 175 181.1 - 199 199.1 - 219 221.1 - 243 247.1 - 272
30 144.1 - 151 160.1 - 167 175.1 - 183 199.1 - 208 219.1 - 229 243.1 - 254 272.1 - 284
0 > 151 > 167 > 183 > 208 > 229 > 254 > 284

3 PAIRS

RANGE IN 1,000-2,000 2,001-3,000 3,001-4,000 4,001-5,000 5,001-6,000 6,001-7,000 7,001-8,000

METERS
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds
100 54 or less 62 or less 69 or less 81 or less 91 or less 103 or less 117 or less
95 54.1 - 58 62.1 - 66 69.1 - 74 81.1 - 87 91.1 - 98 103.1 - 110 117.1 - 125
90 58.1 - 62 66.1 - 70 74.1 - 79 87.1 - 93 98.1 - 104 110.1 - 118 125.1 - 134
85 62.1 - 65 70.1 - 75 79.1 - 84 93.1 - 99 104.1 - 111 118.1 - 125 134.1 - 142
80 65.1 - 69 75.1 - 79 84.1 - 89 99.1 - 104 111.1 - 117 125.1 - 132 142.1 - 150
75 69.1 - 73 79.1 - 84 89.1 - 94 104.1 - 110 117.1 - 124 132.1 - 140 150.1 - 159
70 73.1 - 77 84.1 - 88 94.1 - 99 110.1 - 116 124.1 - 130 140.1 - 147 159.1 - 167
50 77.1 - 85 88.1 - 97 99.1 - 109 116.1 - 128 130.1 - 143 147.1 - 162 167.1 - 184
30 85.1 - 89 97.1 - 101 109.1 - 114 128.1 - 133 143.1 - 150 162.1 - 169 184.1 - 192
0 > 89 > 101 > 114 > 133 > 150 > 169 > 192

C-3
FM 3-04.201 (FM 1-201) _____________________________________________________________________

Figure C-5. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, MPSM Rocket-Engagement Tasks

2 PAIRS

RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-

(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 37 or less 43 or less 48 or less 57 or less 64 or less 72 or less 82 or less

95 37.1 - 40 43.1 - 46 48.1 - 52 57.1 - 61 64.1 - 68 72.1 - 77 82.1 - 88
90 40.1 - 42 46.1 - 49 52.1 - 55 61.1 - 65 68.1 - 73 77.1 - 82 88.1 - 94
85 42.1 - 45 49.1 - 52 55.1 - 59 65.1 - 69 73.1 - 77 82.1 - 88 94.1 - 99
80 45.1 - 48 52.1 - 55 59.1 - 62 69.1 - 73 77.1 - 82 88.1 - 93 99.1 - 105
75 48.1 - 50 55.1 - 58 62.1 - 66 73.1 - 77 82.1 - 86 93.1 - 98 105.1 - 111
70 50.1 - 53 58.1 - 61 66.1 - 69 77.1 - 81 86.1 - 91 98.1 - 103 111.1 - 117
50 53.1 - 58 61.1 - 67 69.1 - 76 81.1 - 89 91.1 - 100 103.1 - 113 117.1 - 129
30 58.1 - 61 67.1 - 70 76.1 - 79 89.1 - 93 100.1 - 105 113.1 - 118 129.1 - 135
0 > 61 > 70 > 79 > 93 > 105 > 118 > 135
1 PAIR

RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-

(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 20 or less 24 or less 27 or less 32 or less 36 or less 41 or less 47 or less

95 20.1 - 22 24.1 - 26 27.1 - 29 32.1 - 35 36.1 - 39 41.1 - 44 47.1 - 50
90 22.1 - 23 26.1 - 27 29.1 - 31 35.1 - 37 39.1 - 42 44.1 - 47 50.1 - 54
85 23.1 - 25 27.1 - 29 31.1 - 33 37.1 - 39 42.1 - 44 47.1 - 50 54.1 - 57
80 25.1 - 26 29.1 - 31 33.1 - 35 39.1 - 41 44.1 - 47 50.1 - 53 57.1 - 60
75 26.1 - 28 31.1 - 32 35.1 - 37 41.1 - 44 47.1 - 49 53.1 - 56 60.1 - 64
70 28.1 - 29 32.1 - 34 37.1 - 39 44.1 - 46 49.1 - 52 56.1 - 59 64.1 - 67
50 29.1 - 32 34.1 - 37 39.1 - 43 46.1 - 51 52.1 - 57 59.1 - 65 67.1 - 74
30 32.1 - 33 37.1 - 39 43.1 - 45 51.1 - 53 57.1 - 60 65.1 - 68 74.1 - 77
0 > 33 > 39 > 45 > 53 > 60 > 68 > 77

Figure C-6. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, MPSM Rocket-Engagement Tasks

C-4
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix C

4 PAIRS

RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-

(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds
100 43 or less 53 or less 65 or less 78 or less 96 or less 120 or less 138 or less
95 43.1 - 46 53.1 - 56 65.1 - 70 78.1 - 83 96.1 - 103 120.1 - 128 138.1 - 148
90 46.1 - 49 56.1 - 60 70.1 - 74 83.1 - 89 103.1 - 110 128.1 - 137 148.1 - 158
85 49.1 - 52 60.1 - 64 74.1 - 79 89.1 - 94 110.1 - 116 137.1 - 145 158.1 - 167
80 52.1 - 55 64.1 - 68 79.1 - 84 94.1 - 100 116.1 - 123 145.1 - 154 167.1 - 177
75 55.1 - 58 68.1 - 71 84.1 - 88 100.1 - 105 123.1 - 130 154.1 - 162 177.1 - 187
70 58.1 - 61 71.1 - 75 88.1 - 93 105.1 - 111 130.1 - 137 162.1 - 171 187.1 - 197
50 61.1 - 67 75.1 - 83 93.1 - 102 111.1 - 122 137.1 - 151 171.1 - 188 197.1 - 217
30 67.1 - 70 83.1 - 86 102.1 - 107 122.1 - 128 151.1 - 158 188.1 - 197 217.1 - 227
0 > 70 > 86 > 107 > 128 > 158 > 197 > 227

3 PAIRS

RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-

(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 33 or less 41 or less 50 or less 60 or less 74 or less 92 or less 106 or less

95 33.1 - 35 41.1 - 44 50.1 - 54 60.1 - 65 74.1 - 80 92.1 - 99 106.1 - 114
90 35.1 - 38 44.1 - 46 54.1 - 58 65.1 - 69 80.1 - 85 99.1 - 106 114.1 - 122
85 38.1 - 40 46.1 - 49 58.1 - 61 69.1 - 73 85.1 - 90 106.1 - 112 122.1 - 129
80 40.1 - 42 49.1 - 52 61.1 - 65 73.1 - 77 90.1 - 95 112.1 - 119 129.1 - 137
75 42.1 - 45 52.1 - 55 65.1 - 68 77.1 - 82 95.1 - 101 119.1 - 125 137.1 - 144
70 45.1 - 47 55.1 - 58 68.1 - 72 82.1 - 86 101.1 - 106 125.1 - 132 144.1 - 152
50 47.1 - 52 58.1 - 64 72.1 - 79 86.1 - 95 106.1 - 117 132.1 - 145 152.1 - 167
30 52.1 - 54 64.1 - 67 79.1 - 83 95.1 - 99 117.1 - 122 145.1 - 152 167.1 - 175
0 > 54 > 67 > 83 > 99 > 122 > 152 > 175

Figure C-7. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, PD Rocket-Engagement Tasks

C-5
FM 3-04.201 (FM 1-201) _____________________________________________________________________

2 PAIRS

RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-

(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 23 or less 29 or less 36 or less 43 or less 53 or less 65 or less 75 or less

95 23.1 - 25 29.1 - 31 36.1 - 38 43.1 - 46 53.1 - 56 65.1 - 70 75.1 - 80
90 25.1 - 26 31.1 - 33 38.1 - 41 46.1 - 49 56.1 - 60 70.1 - 74 80.1 - 86
85 26.1 - 28 33.1 - 35 41.1 - 43 49.1 - 52 60.1 - 64 74.1 - 79 86.1 - 91
80 28.1 - 30 35.1 - 37 43.1 - 46 52.1 - 55 64.1 - 68 79.1 - 84 91.1 - 96
75 30.1 - 31 37.1 - 39 46.1 - 48 55.1 - 58 68.1 - 71 84.1 - 88 96.1 - 102
70 31.1 - 33 39.1 - 41 48.1 - 51 58.1 - 61 71.1 - 75 88.1 - 93 102.1 - 107
50 33.1 - 36 41.1 - 45 51.1 - 56 61.1 - 67 75.1 - 83 93.1 - 102 107.1 - 118
30 36.1 - 38 45.1 - 47 56.1 - 59 67.1 - 70 83.1 - 86 102.1 - 107 118.1 - 123
0 > 38 > 47 > 59 > 70 > 86 > 107 > 123

1 PAIR

RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-

(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000

POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 13 or less 17 or less 21 or less 25 or less 31 or less 38 or less 43 or less

95 13.1 - 14 17.1 - 18 21.1 - 23 25.1 - 27 31.1 - 33 38.1 - 41 43.1 - 47
90 14.1 - 15 18.1 - 19 23.1 - 24 27.1 - 29 33.1 - 35 41.1 - 43 47.1 - 50
85 15.1 - 16 19.1 - 20 24.1 - 26 29.1 - 31 35.1 - 37 43.1 - 46 50.1 - 53
80 16.1 - 17 20.1 - 22 26.1 - 27 31.1 - 32 37.1 - 40 46.1 - 49 53.1 - 56
75 17.1 - 18 22.1 - 23 27.1 - 29 32.1 - 34 40.1 - 42 49.1 - 51 56.1 - 59
70 18.1 - 19 23.1 - 24 29.1 - 30 34.1 - 36 42.1 - 44 51.1 - 54 59.1 - 62
50 19.1 - 21 24.1 - 26 30.1 - 33 36.1 - 40 44.1 - 48 54.1 - 59 62.1 - 68
30 21.1 - 22 26.1 - 28 33.1 - 35 40.1 - 41 48.1 - 51 59.1 - 62 68.1 - 71
0 > 22 > 28 > 35 > 41 > 51 > 62 > 71

Figure C-8. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, PD Rocket-Engagement Tasks

C-6
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix C

PD Seven-Rocket Engagement

RANGE 1,000-2,000 2,001-3,000 3,001-4,000 4,001-5,000 5,001-6,000 6,001-7,000 7,001-8,000

(METERS)

POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 72 or less 88 or less 109 or less 130 or less 161 or less 202 or less 232 or less
95 72.1 - 77 88.1 - 95 109.1 - 117 130.1 - 140 161.1 - 173 202.1 - 216 232.1 - 249
90 77.1 - 82 95.1 - 101 117.1 - 125 140.1 - 149 173.1 - 184 216.1 - 230 249.1 - 266
85 82.1 - 88 101.1 - 107 125.1 - 133 149.1 - 158 184.1 - 196 230.1 - 245 266.1 - 282
80 88.1 - 93 107.1 - 113 133.1 - 140 158.1 - 167 196.1 - 207 245.1 - 259 282.1 - 299
75 93.1 - 98 113.1 - 120 140.1 - 148 167.1 - 177 207.1 - 219 259.1 - 274 299.1 - 315
70 98.1 - 103 120.1 - 126 148.1 - 156 177.1 - 186 219.1 - 230 274.1 - 288 315.1 - 332
50 103.1-113 126.1 - 139 156.1 - 172 186.1 - 205 230.1 - 253 288.1 - 317 332.1 - 365
30 113.1-118 139.1 - 145 172.1 - 179 205.1 - 214 253.1 - 265 317.1 - 331 365.1 - 382
0 > 118 > 145 > 179 > 214 > 265 > 331 > 382

Figure C-9. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, Seven-Rocket Engagement Tasks,
OH-58D (Kiowa)

PD Three-Rocket Engagement
RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-
(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds
100 31 or less 38 or less 47 or less 56 or less 69 or less 86 or less 99 or less
95 31.1-36 38.1-45 47.1-55 56.1-65 69.1-81 86.1-100 99.1-116
90 36.1-41 45.1-51 55.1-63 65.1-74 81.1-92 100.1-114 116.1-133
85 41.1-46 51.1-57 63.1-71 74.1-83 91.1-104 114.1-129 133.1-149
80 46.1-51 57.1-63 71.1-78 83.1-92 104.1-115 129.1-143 149.1-166
75 51.1-56 63.1-70 78.1-86 92.1-102 115.1-127 143.1-158 166.1-182
70 56.1-61 70.1-76 86.1-94 102.1-111 127.1-138 158.1-172 182.1-199
50 61.1-66 76.1-89 94.1-110 111.1-130 138.1-161 172.1-201 199.1-232
30 66.1-71 89.1-95 110.1-117 130.1-139 161.1-173 201.1-215 232.1-249
0 >71 >95 >117 >139 >173 >215 >249

Figure C-10. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII through VIII, Three-Rocket Engagement Tasks,
OH-58D (Kiowa)

C-7
FM 3-04.201 (FM 1-201) _____________________________________________________________________

MPSM Four-Rocket Engagement

RANGE 1,000- 2,001- 3,001- 4,001- 5,001- 6,001- 7,001-
(METERS) 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000

POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 69 or 76 or less 87 or less 102 or 114 or 129 or 147 or
less less less less less
95 69.1-78 76.1-86 87.1-98 102.1-115 114.1-129 129.1-145 147.1-165
90 78.1-86 86.1-96 98.1-109 115.1-128 129.1-143 145.1-161 165.1-184
85 86.1-95 96.1-106 109.1-120 128.1-141 143.1-157 161.1-178 184.1-202
80 95.1- 106.1-115 120.1-131 141.1-153 157.1-171 178.1-194 202.1-220
104
75 104.1- 115.1-125 131.1-142 153.1-166 171.1-186 194.1-210 220.1-239
112
70 112.1- 125.1-135 142.1-153 166.1-179 186.1-200 210.1-226 239.1-257
121
50 121.1- 135.1-155 153.1-175 179.1-205 200.1-229 226.1-258 257.1-284
138
30 138.1- 155.1-164 175.1-186 305.1-217 229.1-243 258.1-274 284.1-302
147
0 >147 >164 >186 >217 >243 >274 >302

Figure C-11. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII through VIII, Four-Rocket Engagement Tasks,
OH-58D (Kiowa)

RANGE IN METERS <1,000 1,000-1,500 1,501-2,000

POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds
100 81 or less 102 or less 123 or less
95 81.1 - 86 102.1 - 109 123.1 - 131
90 86.1 - 92 109.1 - 116 131.1 - 140
85 92.1 - 98 116.1 - 123 140.1 - 149
80 98.1 - 104 123.1 - 131 149.1 - 158
75 104.1 - 109 131.1 - 138 158.1 - 166
70 109.1 - 115 138.1 - 145 166.1 - 175
50 115.1 - 127 145.1 - 160 175.1 - 193
30 127.1 - 132 160.1 - 167 193.1 - 201
0 > 132 > 167 > 201

Figure C-12. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, .50-Caliber MG Engagement Tasks,
120 Rounds

C-8
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix C

RANGE IN METERS <1,000 1,000-1,500 1,501-2,000

POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds

100 52 or less 63 or less 74 or less

95 52.1 - 56 63.1 - 68 74.1 - 80
90 56.1 - 59 68.1 - 72 80.1 - 85
85 59.1 - 63 72.1 - 77 85.1 - 90
80 63.1 - 67 77.1 - 81 90.1 - 95
75 67.1 - 70 81.1 - 86 95.1 - 101
70 70.1 - 74 86.1 - 90 101.1 - 106
50 74.1 - 81 90.1 - 99 106.1 - 117
30 81.1 - 85 99.1 - 104 117.1 - 122
0 > 85 > 104 > 122

Figure C-13. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, .50-Caliber MG Engagement Tasks, 80
Rounds

SECONDS 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 27 30

POINTS 100 98 96 94 92 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76 74 72 70 50 30

Figure C-14. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, Door Gunnery Tasks

C-9
 Appendix D

Example of a Digital Gunnery Program

D-1. Figure D-1 shows an example of a digital gunnery program.

Table of Contents

Paragraph/Title Page No.

1. Gunnery Program Overview 2
2. Gunnery Tables 2
3. Mode Descriptions 3
4. Scoring Methodology 4
5. Crew Qualification Ratings 9
6. Target-Engagement Groups 9
7. Ammunition 9
8. Alibi Fires 9
9. Individual Engagement Descriptions 10
Appendix A. Longbow Apache Gunnery Tables VII and VIII 11
Appendix B-1. Radar-Guided Engagement Point Calculation Sheet 17
Appendix B-2. Gunnery Products 19
Example of a Tactical Scenario (Range) 20

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program

D-0
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

1. Gunnery Program Overview:

Appendix A contains the 21st Cavalry Brigade UFTP Longbow Gunnery Tables. These
tables will apply to all units undergoing UFTP at Ft. Hood and are not subject to modification
by the unit undergoing transition.

All 32 crews assigned to the unit will be required to complete Tables V through VIII as a
crew. Only the 24 line crews will complete the advanced tables because of ammunition
authorization restrictions.

The gunnery qualification table will consist of six missile shots, three rocket shots, three
gun shots, and two air-to-air missile shots (future growth position) for all AH-64D Longbow
units, for a total of 12 engagements (14 future), built from the tables listed below.

2. Gunnery Tables: Once a unit completes UFTP, it will use the following tables to construct
its individual program. In addition to the core tasks listed, the unit commander and master
gunner will choose an additional seven tasks from the list below for unit gunnery qualification,
based on such items as METL, range constraints, and expected geographic mission deployment
area.

Note: STRAC ammunition and training strategy is currently a guide; only the standards are
mandatory (for example, 85 percent of all assigned line crews will complete gunnery
qualification. The 21st Cavalry Brigade has received approval from DA to qualify all crews
assigned during UFTP. Until it can show a reduction in both proficiency and ability with the
amount of ammunition that the brigade is currently allocated to shoot, the brigade will have to
remain within the current STRAC manual for table totals. This will require some planning to
make sure that units stay within their designated allocation.

There are five basic core gunnery tasks for all AH-64D Longbow Apache crews worldwide.
These are shown in the following table. The additional engagement list to choose from is on the
following page.

WPN/AIRCRAFT TGT RANGE AMMUNITION

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION (meters)
1. 30-mm, IHADSS, Stationary <1,000 40 rds
Hovering
2. 2.75" COOP Stationary 2,000-4,000 8 rkts (M274)
Rockets, Hovering
3. SAL HF—Remote, Stationary 4,000 1 HTM
Hovering
4. SAL HF—Hovering Stationary <2,000 1 HTM
5. SAL HF—Hovering Stationary >2,000 1 HTM

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

30-MM CANNON
WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION TGT CONFIGURATION RANGE (meters) AMMUNITION
6. 30-mm, Hovering Stationary <1,000 30 rds
7. 30-mm, Moving/Running/Diving Stationary >1,000 30 rds
8. 30-mm, Hovering Moving <1,000 30 rds
9. 30-mm, Moving/Running/Diving Moving >1,000 30 rds
10. 30-mm, FCR, Hovering Stationary 500-3,500 30 rds
11. 30-mm, FCR, Moving/Running/Diving Moving 500-3,500 30 rds
2.75" ROCKETS
WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION TGT CONFIGURATION RANGE (meters) AMMUNITION
12. 2.75" Rockets, IHADSS, Hovering Stationary 1,500-7,000 6/8 rkts
13. 2.75" Rockets, IHADSS, Moving 1,500-7,000 6/8 rkts
Moving/Running/Diving
14. 2.75" Rockets, COOP, Hovering Stationary 1,500-7,000 6/8 rkts
15. 2.75" Rockets, COOP, Moving 1,500-7,000 6/8 rkts
Moving/Running/Diving
16. 2.75" Rockets, FCR, Hovering Stationary 1,500-6,500 6/8 rkts
17. 2.75" Rockets, FCR, Moving 1,500-6,500 6/8 rkts
Moving/Running/Diving
SAL 1/2* HF
WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION TGT CONFIGURATION RANGE (meters) AMMUNITION
18. SAL HF, Rapid Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving >3,000 2 HTM
19. SAL HF, LOBL, Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving <2,000 1 HTM
20. SAL HF, LOAL, Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving >2,000 1 HTM
21. SAL HF, RIPL, Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving >800 2 HTM
22. SAL HF, (From RFHO) Stationary >800 1 HTM
*There is no training missile available for the SAL 2 (AGM-114K).
RFHF
WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION TGT CONFIGURATION RANGE (meters) AMMUNITION
23. RFHF, RFHO, Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving <3,000 1 RFHF TME
24. RFHF, Autonomous Stationary/Moving <3,000 1 RFHF TME
25. RFHF, Rapid Stationary/Moving >2,000 2 RFHF TME
26. RFHF, TADS HO Stationary/Moving >2,000 1 RFHF TME
WINGTIP AIR-TO-AIR MISSILES**
**There is no designated air-to-air missile in the inventory for Longbow Apache; however, once officially designated, these
shots are anticipated to be the ones to choose from for use during crew gunnery Tables VII and VIII.
WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION TGT CONFIGURATION RANGE (meters) AMMUNITION
27. ATA Missile, Hovering Stationary/Moving Any distance 1 CFT
28. ATA Missile, Running Stationary/Moving Any distance 1 CFT
29. ATA Missile, Air to Air Moving Any distance 1 CFT
30. ATA Missile, Air to Air Moving Any distance 2 CFT

3. Mode Descriptions: The following mode descriptions apply to all gunnery tables:
• Stat—stationary hover.
• Moving—below ETL.
• Running—above ETL. Running fire for the purpose of these tables is considered defined as above 30
KTAS; off axis is preferred but not mandatory.
• Diving (fire)—steep or normal.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-2
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

4. Scoring Methodology: The focus for crew gunnery is to shift the most weight of the total
qualification score to the primary weapon system (Hellfire), with the 30-millimeter and 2.75-inch
rockets being important but not the driving factor as to whether a crew qualifies. Additional
scored items are listed below.

a. Qualified/Nonqualified Engagement Criteria: To pass an engagement as qualified,

two criteria are required:
(1) The target engagement criteria for the weapon system fired must be achieved; for
example, hit for HF or 3 of 8 for rockets (see the scoring standards below).
(2) Once the criteria in #1 above is met (target effect), then points are assessed for time.
The crew must achieve a minimum of 70 points on 8 out of 12 qualified engagements
to pass the table. If target effect is achieved, but the maximum time is exceeded (for
70 points), points will be given according to the point calculation sheets listed in
Appendix C. However, this engagement will not be considered a qualified
engagement toward the required total; for example, SAL HF less than 2,000 meters.
The crew hits the target but takes 40 seconds; 30 points are assessed, but it is an
unqualified engagement.
(3) An unqualified engagement occurs when target effect is not achieved, regardless of
time. Points are not awarded for unqualified engagements, except as explained above.

b. Scoring Standards: The listed evaluation criteria will be used for all UFTP Longbow
units undergoing crew gunnery qualification. The 21st Cavalry Brigade evaluators will use Table
VII Day/Night to train the unit master gunner and SP/IP, as required, to evaluate gunnery based
on the following criteria. Table VIII will be evaluated by the unit evaluation cell with oversight
provided by 21st Cavalry Brigade evaluators.
(1) The following standards will be strictly adhered to by evaluators during crew
gunnery. Once an evaluator has assigned a score, that score will not be adjusted.
(2) The on-board video recorder will be used to record all engagements—no video
tape/recorder—no score. For LOT 4 and previous version, the video recorder will be
set to TADS video for all engagements. For LOT 5 and subsequent aircraft, the video
will be set to the appropriate sight or MPD used for the shot being completed.

(a) Area Weapons System—Target must be hit as detected by the RETS, RDSS, or
BSS systems from the AWSS; shown as hit by the ballistic sensor on the computer
in the range tower; or visually verified on the VRS tape, plus engagement times
listed in Appendix C (engagement time point calculation sheets).
(b) Area Rocket Subsystem—TEA is a 300 meters wide by 400 meters deep box. For a
GO for each engagement, the unit must achieve the following:

• 1 of 4 rockets in the TEA.

• 2 of 6 rockets in the TEA.
• 3 of 8 rockets in the TEA.
• 4 of 10 rockets in the TEA (growth position).
• 5 of 12 rockets in the TEA (growth position).

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

• Note: Rockets will be fired in pairs. The crew must wait for each pair to
impact before launching the next pair for the AWSS to correctly score the
shot. All rockets required by the individual engagement must be attempted to
be fired. Points will be assessed for engagement times listed in Appendix C
(engagement time point calculation sheets) or Appendix B (radar-guided
engagement point calculation sheets), this document, for radar-guided
engagements.

• Rocket engagements will be taped in either TADS DTV WFOV or TADS FLIR
MFOV-POLARITY—WHITE HOT to facilitate rocket sensing in case of a lack
of an approved DA scoring system or the failure thereof for adjudication
purposes.

(3) Longbow Hellfire Modular Missile System—The LHMMS consists of both SAL 1/2
(PIM) and RF Hellfire missiles.
(a) SAL 1/2 missiles—A successful missile engagement consists of the following
requirements, plus engagement times listed in Appendix C (engagement time point
calculation sheets).
• If the out-front boresight is not precisely aligned, all FLIR missile shots will
be scored as NO-GO.
• Target is in the range of the missile mode being used.
• Correct mode, code (PRF or PIM), quantity, and type (SAL 1 or SAL 2) are
used.
• Intervisibility is maintained throughout the engagement with no obstructions
during terminal guidance (not required on remote).
• Proper backscatter countermeasures are used before missile launch.
• LOS on the target must meet the following criteria for the range and terminal
guidance—reference Rockwell HF Operational Brief 6-17-95 handout and FM
3-04.140(FM 1-140).
• If IAT is used during missile launch, the aircraft must be offset at least three
to five degrees to the side from which the missile is coming off the rail.

RANGE TERMINAL GUIDANCE TIME

(kilometers) LAUNCH TO IMPACT
(seconds)
<2 4
2 to 3 6
3 to 4 6
4 to 5 6
5 to 6 6
6 to 7 7
7 to 8 8

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-4
_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

• If IAT is used during a rapid autonomous shot, it must be disengaged

during launch of the second missile or the nose must be offset at least
three to five degrees during launch of the second missile.
• If the engagement requires a rapid shot, the second missile must be fired
before the expiration of the time of flight of the first missile.
• During a remote engagement, the correct TIME OF FLIGHT for the range
being fired must be called before missile launch or the LASER ON time
must be called before exceeding the maximum delay time—reference
Rockwell HF Operational Brief 6-17-95 Handout and FM 3-04.140(FM
1-140).
• During a remote engagement, the following criteria will be used to assess
the correct technique for firing the missile:
ƒ The proper target grid must be entered into the system and then
selected as the ACQ SOURCE (for example, T10) or by using CAQ
off the FCR target report (for example, T50*). (*If T00 shows up in
the acquisition source window, the aircraft has not accepted the
data. The crew must reselect the appropriate target and align the
aircraft, or the shot will be scored as a NO-GO)
ƒ A missile mode of LOAL-LO or LOAL-HI should be used for steering
guidance. If LOAL-DIR is used, the TADS must be slaved to the
correct ACQ source for steering guidance or the shot will be scored
as a NO-GO.
ƒ The crew member in the back seat may elect to make the remote
shot. If this occurs, the video recorder source must be the pilot
symbology to correctly score the procedures.
• Engagement must be completed before initiation of target drop.

(4) RF Missiles—A successful missile engagement will consist of the following criteria,
plus the engagement time criteria listed in Appendix C (radar-guided engagement
point calculation sheets) for radar-guided engagements.

(a) If the engagement is completed from an AH-64D with radar, the crew
member firing must select the proper sight and radar mode (that is, ground
or air), select the proper target via cursor acquisition or by spacing through
the next to shoot until proper target is acquired, and ensure that the proper
type of missile is selected. (This method is in addition to the two methods
listed below).
(b) If the engagement is completed from an AH-64D without radar, there
are two methods of shooting an RF missile:

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

• Radar frequency handover—The crew will select REC on the TSD page
and ensure that the proper target is selected as the next to shoot on the
TSD, the missile type is correct, and the proper symbology is presented
depending on the type of target selected (moving or stationary).
Note: For positive habit transfer, it is highly recommended that the TADS
link function be used to verify target validity before missile launch.
• RF Hellfire via TADS handover—the crew will ensure that the proper
sight is selected (TADS), the proper missile type is selected (RF), a
minimum of three seconds of laser energy is designated on the target for
transfer alignment (or until the display “Target data?” disappears), and
the proper missile symbology appears—for example, solid LOAL
constraints box (track rate) or LOBL constraints box (range rate) appears
before trigger pull. This is a completely random function in the training
mode; either is acceptable.

c. Timing: Engagement timing will begin when the target is fully presented to the crew.
The tower will make a call in the blind when the computer shows full presentation (this is for
backup scoring purposes only and should not be used as a crutch by the firing crew; once better
range instrumentation or telemetry is acquired, this administrative call will be omitted). If the
target area is being observed by the firing crew and it is obvious that the target did not come up
until a later time than the tower call, time will start when the target is observed on the tape by
the scorer. However, if it is obvious to the scorer that the crew has observed the target and has
begun the engagement sequence—for example, deslaved the TADS and moved towards the
target or stepped down on a field of view—time will start before the tower call. The time for a
remote shot will begin when the crew acknowledges the hand-over. The time will stop when one
of the following occurs:

• Target effect is achieved, for gun engagements.

• Target drop initiates at the end of the sequence.
• Final round impacts the TEA, if observed, or TOF expires for rocket
engagements.
• Crew calls engagement complete.
• “SIM LAUNCH” message appears in the high action display for RF
missiles or remote SAL 1/2 HF engagement and crew included TOF in its
reply to the designator.
• Crew calls “Laser On” during remote SAL Hellfire shot (no TOF included
in reply to designator).
• TOF expires for autonomous SAL 1/2 Hellfire shots as shown in the HAD
area.
• The TOF of the first missile fired decrements to zero following the launch
of the second missile during a RAPID Hellfire shot.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-6
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

d. Table Scoring: The total score for a table is 1,200 (1,400 including HGST and crew
points) points, broken down as follows:

• 1,200 points for each Table VIII Day/Night qualification (individual table,
not totaled).
• 100 points for the written examination (50 percent of each crew-member’s
score would apply for a maximum total of 100).*
• 100 crew points given for things such as crew coordination and safety and
tactical considerations.* (Every crew starts with 100 crew points; points
will be deducted during conduct of the range if the crew fails the criteria
listed in the crew points section.)
• Crew must complete 70 percent of total required engagements (8 of 12
currently; 10 of 14 future) with a qualified rating and a minimum of 70
points on each of those 8 engagements (10 future) to pass the table.

*These points may be used for the top-gun competition as discriminators.

e. Crew Points: Each crew starts with 100 points. Crew points do not affect the Table VIII
qualification score. These points are intended to be a tie-breaker for the top-crew gunnery
award (if there should be a tie). Crew points will be deducted for items such as lack of safety in
the FARP and on the range, lack of crew coordination, and not using tactical employment
techniques; for example, terrain-flight altitudes on the range, premission planning for conduct
of the range, correctly assessing the highest to lowest threat, and shooting the appropriate
weapons system based on factors such as distance and weapons system being engaged. The
brigade/battalion/squadron commander and master gunner/SP will decide on what these factors
are for their unit and are the adjudicating authorities for any disagreements regarding
crew-point deduction. This will be published in writing before the unit goes to gunnery. Points
should be deducted in the following increments for the listed reasons. These are cumulative and
can be assessed simultaneously. Recommended deductions are listed below:

• Deduct 100 points for any safety violation.

• Deduct 10 points each time that WEAPON? is observed.
• Deduct 10 points when SIGHT? is observed.
• Deduct 10 points for failure to transmit a required IDM message.
• Deduct 10 points for exceeding target-engagement group times.
• Deduct 5 points for going above or below an established ceiling or hard
deck.

Note: A crew does not necessarily lose crew points even if it has a NO-GO on a particular
engagement.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5. Crew Qualification Ratings: The crew qualification rating system is as follows.

RATING SCORE PERCENTAGE

Distinguished: 1,080-1,200 points 90-100
Superior: 960-1,079 points 80-89.9
Qualified: See below* <79.9
Unqualified: less than 8 of 12 qualified engagements
*Qualified (achieved at least 70 points) on 8 out of 12 engagements; Q2/3/4 maximum points
available=560 points

6. Target-Engagement Groups: Units should train as they plan to fight. Even during
crew-qualification tables, the crew will fire target-engagement groups instead of individual
engagements, one at a time. This forces the crews to begin to think about crew coordination for
consecutive shots, assess and shoot the highest threat first, and begin to use basic tactical
employment techniques. These groups will be set up to replicate real-world battlefield scenarios
that will have a logical flow to them. Battle positions/attack-by-fire positions will be set up on
the range. Crews will select firing positions within the BP/ABF to engage targets, as necessary;
however, points will be deducted for improper selection as outlined in the ATM. Administrative
range constraints have been reduced as much as reasonably possible, but this flexibility
requires the crew to maintain a high situational awareness.

7. Ammunition: Crews are allowed to exceed the ammunition allocation for a single
engagement but are not given additional ammunition to make up for that ammunition. If a
crew uses more than the allocated ammunition on a single engagement and does not have
enough ammunition to execute the remaining tasks, no credit will be given for the incomplete
tasks. Uncompleted or nonfired tasks, will be executed during the rerun or refire portion of that
crew’s training, if necessary to qualify Q2 or higher.

8. Alibi Fires: The battalion commander or his designated representative is the deciding
authority for alibis. Any aircraft system or subsystem malfunction not detectable by the crew
before the engagement that adversely affects the performance of the selected weapon system
will constitute an alibi. Malfunctions induced by crew error do not constitute an alibi. Crews are
highly encouraged to reengage targets with a missile (after completion of the target-
engagement group) if they suspect they did not achieve a qualified engagement. The above
criteria will be used during grading only if the missile shot was an unqualified engagement, for
Q2 purposes. Conducting these engagements immediately will save range time by eliminating
subsequent range runs.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-8
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

9. Individual Engagement Descriptions: Each of the descriptions below outlines in further

detail the individual weapon listed and the accompanying scoring criteria. (Crews must meet the
total of eight qualified engagements in addition to the minimums listed.)

a. Hellfire.

Each Hellfire shot is worth 100 points (600 possible). Crew must complete at least four of
the six engagements as qualified. (Weight must be given to the primary weapon system on the
aircraft.) A minimum score of 70 points (70 percent) is required on each qualified engagement to
count toward the four. Rapid or ripple shots should be included in the table and will be
considered and scored as one engagement. Scoring criteria will be as follows:

(1) Rapid—Time starts when the aircraft is either unmasked or the target engagement
begins if no masking terrain is available. The second missile must be launched (SIM
LAUNCH message observed) before the first missile impact (TOF expires). Time
stops after the first missile impacts the target (TOF expires). If IAT is engaged during
the second missile launch, the aircraft must be offset at least three to five degrees to
the side from which the missile is departing or the engagement will be considered a
NO-GO. In addition, the LOS reticle must remain on target during terminal guidance
of the second missile and laser energy must be on target for the proper amount of
time for the missile to be considered a GO.
(2) RIPL—Time starts when either the aircraft is unmasked or target engagement
begins if no masking terrain is available. When the autonomous missile is launched
first, time stops when the remote missile is launched and a SIM LAUNCH message is
observed in the high-action display. If the remote missile is launched first, time stops
when the autonomous missile impacts the target or time of flight countdown expires,
as shown in the HAD.

b. 30-mm.
Each 30-millimeter shot is worth 100 points (300 possible). Crew must complete one of
the three engagements as qualified and a minimum of 70 points (70 percent).

c. 2-75-Inch Rockets.

Each 2.75-inch rocket engagement is worth 100 points (300 possible). The crew must
complete one of the three engagements as qualified and a minimum of 70 points (70 percent). A
DA-approved scoring system will be used according to this FM unless it is unavailable. Objective
scoring from videotapes will be used only as a last resort.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-9
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Appendix A
Longbow Apache Gunnery
Tables VII and VIII

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-10
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

A-1. TABLE VII DAY

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING COURSE (CREW)
TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT AMMO DODIC

(meters)
1 SAL HF HOVERING >2,000 STATIONARY HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL

C 2 SAL HF HOVERING ≤2,000 STATIONARY HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL

O 3 SAL HF REMOTE HOVERING >4,000 STATIONARY HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL

R 4 30-MM IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 STATIONARY HIT 40 RDS B118

E 5 2.75" HOVERING 2,000-4,000 STATIONARY 3 OF 8 8 RKTS H974

6 SAL HF RAPID HOVERING >3,000 STATIONARY HIT X 2 2 MSLS TNG MSL

7 SAL HF STATIONARY/ >800 MOVING HIT X 1 1 MSL TNG MSL

MOVING/
S
RUNNING
W 8 TADS HO-RFHF HOVERING >800 MOVING HIT 1 MSL TME

I 9 30-MM MOVING/ >1,000 MOVING HIT 30 RDS B118

RUNNING/
N DIVING
10 30-MM IDM/TADS HOVERING 500-3,500 STATIONARY HIT 30 RDS B118
G
11 2.75" IDM/TADS HOVERING 1,500-6,000 STATIONARY 2 OF 6 6 RKTS H975
12 2.75" MOVING/ 1,500-6,000 STATIONARY 2 OF 6 6 RKTS H975
RUNNING/
DIVING
13 RFHF STATIONARY/ 500-6,000 STATIONARY HIT 1 MSL TME
F MOVING/
RUNNING
C
R
14 RFHF STATIONARY/ 500-8,000 MOVING HIT X 2 2 MSLS TME
MOVING/
RUNNING
15 FCR 30-MM STATIONARY/ 500-3,500 MOVING HIT 30 RDS TNG SIM
MOVING/
RUNNING
16 FCR 2.75" STATIONARY/ 1,500-6,000 STATIONARY 3 OF 8 8 RKTS TNG SIM
MOVING/
RUNNING
AMMUNITION:
(DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings for the given table;
that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm (B118).

NOTES:
1. Table is designed for a non-FCR aircraft for the live-fire portion.
2. FCR tasks will be accomplished by demonstrating proficiency to an IP within +30 days of Table VII Day/Night.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for live fire of this table.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-11
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

A-2. TABLE VII NIGHT

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING COURSE (CREW)
TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TGT AMMO DODIC

(meters) EFFECT
1 SAL HF HOVERING >2,000 STATIONARY HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL
C
2 SAL HF HOVERING <2,000 STATIONARY HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL
O
3 SAL HF REMOTE HOVERING >4,000 STATIONARY HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL
R
4 30-MM IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 STATIONARY HIT 40 RDS B118
E
5 2.75" HOVERING 2,000-4,000 STATIONARY 3 OF 8 8 RKTS H974

6 SAL HF RAPID HOVERING >3,000 STATIONARY HIT X 2 2 MSLS TNG MSL

S 7 SAL HF STATIONARY/ >800 MOVING HIT X 1 1 MSL TNG MSL
MOVING/
W RUNNING
I 8 TADS HO-RFHF HOVERING >800 MOVING HIT 1 MSL TME
N 9 30-MM MOVING/ >1,000 MOVING HIT 30 RDS B118
RUNNING/
G
DIVING
10 30-MM IDM/TADS HOVERING 500-3,500 STATIONARY HIT 30 RDS B118
11 2.75" IDM/TADS HOVERING 1,500-6,000 STATIONARY 2 OF 6 6 RKTS H975

12 2.75" MOVING/ 1,500-6,000 STATIONARY 2 OF 6 6 RKTS H975

RUNNING/
DIVING

13 RF HF STATIONARY/ 500-6,000 STATIONARY HIT 1 MSL TME

F MOVING/
RUNNING
C
14 RF HF STATIONARY/ 500-8,000 MOVING HIT X 2 2 MSLS TME
R MOVING/
RUNNING
15 FCR 30-MM STATIONARY/ 500-3,500 MOVING HIT 30 RDS TNG SIM
MOVING/
RUNNING
16 FCR 2.75" STATIONARY/ 1,500-6,000 STATIONARY 3 OF 8 8 RKTS TNG SIM
MOVING/
RUNNING
AMMUNITION:
(DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings for the given table; that
is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm (B118).
NOTES:
1. Table is designed for a non-FCR aircraft for the live-fire portion.
2. FCR tasks will be accomplished by demonstrating proficiency to an IP within +30 days of Table VII Day/Night.
3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for live fire of this table.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-12
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

A-3. TABLE VIII DAY

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING COURSE (CREW)
TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TGT AMMO DODIC
(meters) EFFECT
1 SAL HF HOVERING >2,000 STAT HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL
2 SAL HF HOVERING <2,000 STAT HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL
3 SAL HF REMOTE HOVERING >4,000 STAT HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL

4 30-MM IHADSS HOVERING <1,000 STAT HIT 40 RDS B118

5 2.75" HOVERING 2,000-4,000 STAT 3 OF 8 8 RKTS H974
6 SAL HF RAPID HOVERING >3,000 STAT HIT X 2 2 MSLS TNG MSL
7 SAL HF STATIONARY/ >800 MOVING HIT X 1 1 MSL TNG MSL
MOVING/
RUNNING
8 TADS HO-RFHF HOVERING >800 MOVING HIT 1 MSL TME
9 30-MM MOVING/ >1,000 MOVING HIT 30 RDS B118
RUNNING/
DIVING
10 30-MM IDM/TADS HOVERING 500-3,500 STAT HIT 30 RDS B118
11 2.75" IDM/TADS HOVERING 1,500-6,000 STAT 2 OF 6 6 RKTS H975
12 2.75" MOVING/ 1,500-6,000 STAT 2 OF 6 6 RKTS H975
RUNNING/
DIVING

13 Growth Position-
ATA
14 Growth Position-
ATA

AMMUNITION:
(DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and
night firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm (B118).

NOTES:
1. Table is designed for a non-FCR aircraft for the live-fire portion.
2. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for live fire of this table.
3. Air-to-air missile engagements will be added once DA approves a missile for use.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-13
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

A-4. TABLE VIII NIGHT

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW QUALIFICATION COURSE (CREW)
TASK CONDITION STANDARD
NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE TARGET TGT AMMO DODIC
(meters) EFFECT
1 SAL HF HOVERING > 2,000 STAT HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL
2 SAL HF HOVERING < 2,000 STAT HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL
3 SAL HF REMOTE HOVERING > 4,000 STAT HIT 1 MSL TNG MSL
4 30-MM IHADSS HOVERING < 1,000 STAT HIT 40 RDS B118
5 2.75" HOVERING 2,000-4,000 STAT 3 OF 8 8 RKTS H974
6 SAL HF RAPID HOVERING > 3,000 STAT HIT X 2 2 MSLS TNG MSL
7 SAL HF STATIONARY/ > 800 MOVING HIT X 1 1 MSL TNG MSL
MOVING/
RUNNING
8 TADS HO-RFHF HOVERING > 800 MOVING HIT 1 MSL TME
9 30-MM MOVING/ > 1,000 MOVING HIT 30 RDS B118
RUNNING/
DIVING
10 30-MM IDM/TADS HOVERING 500-3,500 STAT HIT 30 RDS B118
11 2.75" IDM/TADS HOVERING 1,500-6,000 STAT 2 OF 6 6 RKTS H975
12 2.75" MOVING/ 1,500-6,000 STAT 2 OF 6 6 RKTS H975
RUNNING/
DIVING
13 Growth Position-
ATA
14 Growth Position-
ATA

AMMUNITION:
(DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night
firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm (B118).

NOTES:
1. Table is designed for a non-FCR aircraft for the live-fire portion.
2. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for live fire of this table.
3. Air-to-air missile engagements will be added once DA approves a missile for use.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-14
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

A-5. EXAMPLE OF A TARGET-ENGAGEMENT GROUPING SHEET

TEG # Weapon Sight Range Target Rds Mode Stds Type of Eng Eng
(meters) Req No.
1 (ABF1) 30-mm TADS <1,500 Stat. Lt. Armor 30 Running Hit Defensive 1

[00:03:30] SAL HF TADS 1,500-2,500 Moving Lt. 1 Hovering Hit Offensive 2

Armor
30-mm PILOT 500-1,000 Truck 40 Hovering Hit Offensive 3
IHADSS

2 (ABF2) SAL HF TADS >5,000 Stat. Armor 2 Hovering Hit X 2 Offensive 4

RAPID
[00:05:00] 2.75" TADS >5,000 Stat. Lt. Armor 8 Hovering 3 of 8 Offensive 5

3 (ABF3) SAL HF NAV SYS >4,500 Stat. Armor 1 Hovering Hit Offensive 6
REMOTE
[00:03:30] SAL HF TADS 1,500-3,500 Stat. Armor 1 Hovering Hit Defensive 7

4 (ABF4) 2.75" COOP 2,500-3,500 Stat. Lt. Armor 6 Hovering 2 of 6 Offensive 8

[00:04:00] 2.75" COOP 2,500-3,500 BRDM 6 Hovering 2 of 6 Offensive 9

5 (ABF5) RFHF- TADS 2,500-3,500 Moving Armor 1 Hovering Hit Defensive 10

TADS HO
[00:03:30] 30-mm TADS 500-1,500 BRDM 30 Hovering Hit Offensive 11

SAL HF TADS 2,500-8,000 Moving/Stat. 1 Hovering Hit X 1 Offensive 12

Armor

NOTES:
1. Target-engagement group times are total times for all engagements contained in the group. Points
are deducted for going over the maximum allotted time to complete all individual engagements listed.
2. Individual engagements still have minimum and maximum times and point scoring associated with
each shot.
3. Crews must ensure that they are moving tactically between positions. Individual firing points within
ABFs are up to the crew, and points will be deducted for improper selection, as outlined in the ATM.
4. Crews must ensure that the proper video source is selected to enable proper scoring as required.
5. Individual engagements within a TEG will not necessarily occur in the order listed.

MOVING—below ETL; RUNNING—above ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-15
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Appendix B-1
Radar-Guided Engagement
Point Calculation Sheet

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-16
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

APPENDIX B-1. RADAR-GUIDED ENGAGEMENT POINT CALCULATION SHEET

TADS RFHO TIME SCORE SHEET

RANGE 1,000-2,000 2,001-3,000 3,001-4,000 4,001-5,000 5,001-6,000 6,001-7,000 7,001-8,000

IN
METERS
POINTS Engagement Time in Seconds
100 <15 <17 <19 <21 <23 <27 <34
95 15.1-17 17.1-19 19.1-21 21.1-23 23.1-25 27.1-30 34.1-37
90 17.1-18 19.1-20 21.1-23 23.1-25 25.1-27 30.1-34 37.1-40
85 18.1-19 20.1-22 23.1-25 25.1-27 27.1-29 34.1-38 40.1-43
80 19.1-20 22.1-24 25.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-32 38.1-42 43.1-46
75 20.1-21 24.1-26 27.1-29 29.1-31 32.1-35 42.1-46 46.1-50
70 21.1-22 26.1-27 29.1-31 31.1-33 35.1-38 46.1-50 50.1-54
50 22.1-23 27.1-29 31.1-33 33.1-35 38.1-41 50.1-54 54.1-58
30 23.1-24 29.1-31 33.1-35 35.1-37 41.1-45 54.1-58 58.1-62
0 >24 >31 >35 >37 >45 >58 >62

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-17
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Appendix B-2
Gunnery Products

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-18
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

Example of a Tactical Scenario (Range)

Longbow Apache Tables VII and VIII Tactical Scenario

Overall Situation:

The individual qualification crew is part of a notional team conducting a movement to contact
to reestablish enemy contact, followed by a series of offensive and defensive hasty attacks as
the enemy continues to move along its axis of advance. (The virtual lead aircraft of the team is
initially on the northwest side of Jack Mountain.)

Specific Engagement Situations:

[Target Engagement Group 1]

This TEG is following Route Eagle. Upon reaching CP1, the group will receive an FCR target
report from lead (Longbow Ground Station [LGS]), which will depict a target array to the east
of Robinette Point. Upon crossing PL Tina (CP2), the crew is allowed to go weapons hot. They
will call crossing the phase line into BP Lemon, at which time the target scenario will begin.
The crew will stumble upon a reconnaissance element—consisting of a BRDM, dismounted
troops, and trucks. The first engagement will be a defensive 30-millimeter running-fire shot
against the truck with troops about 1,000 meters to the right front. The crew should halt the
aircraft at this time but, in any case, will not proceed further forward than PL Michelle. The
next engagement will be a defensive SAL HF against the BRDM about 1,900 meters away.
About 10 to 15 seconds after the mover starts, a truck accompanied by several dismounted
troops will pop up about 500 meters to the left front, which will require the back-seat crew
member to fire a defensive 30-millimeter IHADSS shot. There will also be a truck located about
1,000 meters on the same azimuth to aid in target acquisition. Once the engagements are
complete (area is clear tactically), the crew will call for clearance to move forward past PL
Michelle.

[Target Engagement Group 2]

The crew will pull up into BP Blue and begin offensively engaging targets out in the vicinity of
Wolf Point based on the FCR target report received earlier.

TEG #2 will initially engage with a SAL Hellfire rapid shot, followed by four pair of 2.75"
rockets in suppression before its move. Upon completion, the crew will receive instructions to
change the frequency to Clabber Tower. This will simulate a passage of lines into a new brigade
sector in the tactical scenario.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-19
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

[Target Engagement Group 3]

Upon completion of the communications check, the crew will move along Route Condor to
occupy a firing position within BP Reef. The crew will be given a remote SAL-1 Hellfire mission.
After proper authentication is confirmed by the crew from the tower, the crew will be cleared to
shoot. The next engagement will be to conduct a defensive SAL-1 HF engagement at a T-72
frontal target about 3,000 meters away. This will simulate another forward recon element that
has worked its way across the stream bed to the front. Upon completion of these engagements,
the crew will be sent three IDM messages: a target data file containing stored targets, an
updated FCR target report showing the enemy rounding Robinette Point, and a no-fire
zone/priority fire zone that will “protect a team to the North” and give the crew some direction
as to which area to shoot in next, via the LGS.

Note: The no-fire zone is to restrict fires to the North until the aircraft moves to the next BP to
meet safety fans and additional range-control measures.

[Target Engagement Group 4]

The crew is required to send a free text message confirming receipt back to the LGS. Upon
successful receipt, tower will call and give a verbal target handover to the crew for specific
targets contained within the target data file. They will conduct two 2.75-inch shots at these
targets, which consist of stationary light armor. This is supposed to replicate a call for
suppressive fire from another aircraft. In most combat engagements, the crew members would
engage indirectly, but for qualification purposes, they will visually aim the weapons after
selecting them as the acquisition source. Upon completion of these engagements, the crew will
be instructed to move to BP Grey along Route Falcon to attack the remaining elements of the
lead echelon.
Figure D-1. Example of a digital gunnery program (continued).
[Target Engagement Group 5]

While en route to BP Grey, the crew will be given a final FCR target report/PFZ/NFZ IDM
message showing the remaining elements of the lead echelon along the west side of Robinette
Point headed north. They will be required to shoot a defensive RF Hellfire at a stationary tank
via a TADS handover 2,700 meters to the front. The next shot will be a defensive 30-millimeter
shot at a moving BRDM 800 meters to the front. The final shot will be a SAL HF against a
stationary armor target.

This will complete the crew’s qualification run; the crew will return, weapons cold, to the FARP
via Route Hawk.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-20
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

EXAMPLE OF AN AH-64D LONGBOW DIGITAL RANGE CREW CARD

TEG# L/R WEAPON SIGHT RANGE TARGET RDS MODE STDS TYPE OF ENG
AZ (METERS) REQ ENG #
1 (ABF 51) 096- 30-mm TADS 500-1,500 Stationary 30 Running Hit Defensive 1
[00:03:30] 150 Light Armor
SAL HF TADS 1,500-2,500 Moving Light 1 Hovering Hit Offensive 2
Armor
30-mm BS 300-1,000 Truck 40 Hovering Hit Defensive 3
IHADSS
2 (ABF 52) 057- SAL HF TADS >4,000 Stationary 2 Hovering Hit x 2 Offensive 4
[00:05:00] 067 Rapid Heavy Armor
2.75" COOP >4,000 Stationary 8 Hovering 3 of 8 Offensive 5
Rockets Light Armor
3 (ABF 53) 072- SAL HF Nav Sys >4,000 Moving 1 Hovering Hit Offensive 6
[00:03:30] 104 Remote Heavy Armor
SAL RF TADS 1,500-3,500 Stationary 1 Hovering Hit Defensive 7
Heavy Armor
4 (ABF 53) 072- 2.75" COOP >2,500 Stationary 6 Hovering 2 of 6 Offensive 8
[00:04:00] 104 Rockets Heavy Armor
2.75" COOP >2,500 Stationary 6 Hovering 2 of 6 Offensive 9
Rockets Light Armor
5 (ABF 54) 080- RF-TADS TADS >800 Moving Light 1 Hovering Hit Defensive 10
[00:03:30] 104 HO Armor
30-mm TADS >800 Moving Light 30 Hovering Hit Offensive 11
Armor
SAL HF TADS 1,500-3,000 Moving Light 1 Hovering Hit Offensive 12
Armor

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Concluded)

D-21
 Appendix E

Risk Management
This appendix assists those who plan and execute helicopter gunnery
training in identifying and minimizing the associated risks. Soldiers
should compare this information, the accident/incident history of the unit,
and their own experience to consider how it applies to their situation and
areas of responsibility. Risk management must become a part of the
planning process and method of operation.

SECTION I – RISK MANAGEMENT DEFINED

INTRODUCTION
E-1. Risk management applies to all situations and environments. Risk
management is a critical consideration for all aspects of aerial gunnery
live-fire training.
E-2. The objective of risk management is to eliminate unnecessary risks.
Units conduct tough, realistic gunnery training. However, no training is
worth the cost of a life as the result of taking unnecessary risk. If an action
will result in an unacceptable risk, the unit must take steps to mitigate that
risk. If the unit cannot reduce the risk to an acceptable level, the unit should
not take that action. The unit’s bottom line should be to avoid
unwarranted/unnecessary risk.
E-3. Managing risk is subjective. It is based on judgment, training, and
experience. Units charge many, if not all, young soldiers with the execution
of hazard controls and risk-reduction measures. By nature, some of them are
impulsive risk takers. Their limited experience, coupled with an attitude of
invulnerability, can increase the level of risk that they are willing to accept.
Their sense of indestructibility, motivation (esprit de corps), and willingness
to achieve the mission at any cost also play a part. Some soldiers and
individuals ignore existing standards/procedures and improvise their own.
Because of inexperience or complacency, they—
• Overestimate their ability to respond to or recover from a hazardous
incident; they become overconfident.
• Underestimate the level of risk posed by a hazard.

E-0
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

E-4. Soldiers must understand and follow control measures developed and
implemented by leaders and staffs. Individuals must maintain situational
awareness and self-discipline when they perform their duties. They must—
• Understand and apply risk management.
• Execute control measures directed by their leaders; that is, perform to
standards.
• Carry risk management into training.
• Always be watchful for an unsafe condition or action; anyone/everyone
has the authority to halt/correct an unsafe condition/action.
Failure to effectively manage risk can quickly make an operation all too
costly, politically and economically, and in terms of combat power (soldiers’
lives and equipment).
E-5. Risk is characterized by both the probability and severity of a potential
loss that may result from hazards because of the presence of an adversary or
some other hazardous condition. Perception of risk varies from person to
person. What one person perceives as risky or dangerous, another may not. A
leader’s perception of the environment obviously influences his or her
decisions.
E-6. The principles that form the framework for implementation of the
risk-management process are—
• The integration of risk management into mission planning,
preparation, and execution.
• The making of risk-management decisions at the appropriate level in
the chain of command.
• The refusal to accept unnecessary risk.

TRAINING CONCERNS
E-7. Concerns include hazardous and critical training tasks and feasible
risk-reduction measures that provide leaders with the flexibility to safely
conduct tough, realistic training. This helps leaders determine—
• The balance between training realism and unnecessary training risks.
• The effect of training operations on the environment.
• The level of proficiency and experience of soldiers and leaders.
E-8. Units should base their risk-management decisions on awareness,
rather than mechanical habit. Leaders should act on a keen appreciation for
the essential factors that make each situation unique instead of from
conditioned response. Throughout the aerial gunnery operation, the
commander must also consider U.S. Government civilians and contract-
support personnel in his or her risk-management process.
E-9. Accident/incident risk includes all operational risk considerations, other
than tactical risk. It includes risks to the friendly force. It also includes risks
posed to civilians by an operation, as well as the effect of an operation on the
environment. It can include activities associated with hazards concerning
friendly personnel and civilians, equipment readiness, and environmental
conditions.

E-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

SECTION II – THE RISK-MANAGEMENT PROCESS

THE RISK-MANAGEMENT FIVE-STEP PROCESS

E-10. Risk management is the process of identifying, assessing, and
controlling hazards arising from operational factors and making decisions
that balance the risk cost with the mission benefits. It is a systematic
five-step process that can be applied to any situation, program, or
environment. It is a continuous process—as variables change, the process
starts over. The five-step risk-management process has two sections: Steps 1
and 2 (assess) and Steps 3, 4, and 5 (control and evaluate).

STEPS 1 AND 2
E-11. Steps 1 and 2 together make up risk assessment. In Step 1, individuals
identify hazards that they may encounter in executing a mission. In Step 2,
they determine the direct effect of each hazard on the operation.
E-12. The risk assessment enhances situational awareness. This awareness
builds confidence and allows soldiers and units to take timely, efficient, and
effective protective measures.

STEPS 3 THROUGH 5
E-13. Steps 3 through 5 are the essential follow-through actions to effectively
manage risk. In these steps, leaders balance risk against costs and take
appropriate actions to eliminate unnecessary risk.
E-14. During execution, as well as during planning and preparation, leaders
continuously assess the risk to the overall mission and to those involved in
the task. Finally, leaders and individuals evaluate the effectiveness of
controls and provide lessons learned so that others may benefit from the
experience.

STEP 1. IDENTIFY HAZARDS

E-15. A hazard is an actual or potential condition in which the following can
occur because of exposure to the hazard:
• Injury, illness, or death of personnel.
• Damage to or loss of equipment and property.
• Mission degradation.
E-16. All operational environments contain hazards. Combat operations,
stability operations, base-support operations, and even day-to-day training
present unique hazards for the units involved. Units identify hazards (Figure
E-1) during the first four steps of the military decision-making process
(Figure E-2): mission receipt, mission analysis, COA development, and COA
analysis. The ability of unit leaders and staffs to identify hazards is essential.
One reality of today’s missions is that the aspect of a hazard can change
rapidly. Things of little risk initially can quickly become major threats
because of unforeseen natural or man-made events. Leaders should remain

E-2
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

watchful for these risk factors because complacency can kill. Existing
controls may not continue to control hazards in rapidly changing situations.
E-17. The factors of METT-T provide a sound framework for identifying
hazards when planning, preparing, and executing aerial-gunnery operations.

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET PAGE 1 of 1

1. MSN/TASK : 2. DTG BEGIN : 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED:

Insertion/Extraction END : 042200SEP97 041300SEP97
4. PREPARED BY: MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

13. C E

VE L
O F

LE IAL

LE UA
L

L
VE
N F

D
SK NI
T

SK SI
E

RI . I

RI RE
R C
11. HOW TO 12. HOW TO

6
O T

8.
5. HAZARDS 7. CONTROLS IMPLEMENT SUPERVISE L I
S V
E
Adverse Environment
- 0% Illumination
- Complete Blackout
ID
- Visibility During
Flight Ha
- Brownout
zar
Continuous Operations
ds
- Fatigue
Unfamiliar Terrain
- Flight Plan
- Landing Zone
Inadequate Planning
Time
9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE): 10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

LOW MODERATE HIGH EXTREMELY HIGH RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-1. Sample Risk Management Worksheet—Identify Hazards

Develop
*Military Controls Supervise
Identify Assess Implement
Decision-Making and Make and
Hazards Hazards Controls
Process Risk Evaluate
Decision
1. Receipt of Mission X
2. Mission Analysis X X
3. COA Development X X X
4. COA Analysis
X X X
(War Game)
5. COA Comparison X
6. COA Approval X
7. Orders Production X
8. Rehearsal
9. Execution and
X X X X X
Assessment

* FM 5-0 (FM 101-5)

Figure E-2. Example of Risk Management Integrated Into the Military Decision-Making Process

E-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

STEP 2. ASSESS HAZARDS

E-18. Step 2 completes the risk-assessment portion of the risk-management
process. This step examines each hazard in terms of probability and severity
to determine the risk level of one or more hazardous incidents that can result
from exposure to the hazard.
E-19. Units assess hazards during the three steps of the military
decision-making process: mission analysis, COA development, and COA
analysis (Figure E-3). Units also conduct this step after controls are
developed.
E-20. An incident must be credible in that it must have a reasonable
expectation of happening. The result is an estimate of risk from each hazard
and an estimate of the overall risk to the mission caused by hazards that the
unit cannot eliminate. Leaders must also assess the risk to civilians posed by
the operation and assess the affect of operations on the environment.
E-21. Use the assessment matrix, Figure E-4, to assign a value to the hazard.
FM 3-100.14(FM 100-14) contains more detailed information on this matrix.

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET PAGE 1 of 1

1. MSN/TASK : 2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED:
Insertion/Extraction END: 042200SEP97 041300SEP97

4. PREPARED BY: MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3

RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

13. C E
VE L

O
VE L

F
LE UA
L
LE IA

N F
T

D
SK NI

S K SI

T E
RI . I

RI R E

R C
11. HOW TO 12. HOW TO
6

O T
8.

5. HAZARDS 7. CONTROLS IMPLEMENT SUPERVISE L I

As
S V
E
Adverse Environment EH
- 0% Illumination
se
- Complete Blackout
- Visibility During ss
Flight Ha
- Brownout za
rd
Continuous Operations H s
- Fatigue
Unfamiliar Terrain H
- Flight Plan
- Landing Zone
Inadequate Planning EH
Time
9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE): 10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

LOW MODERATE HIGH EXTREMELY HIGH RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-3. Example of a Risk Management Worksheet—Assess Hazards

E-4
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

Risk Level:
E - Extremely High
H - High
M - M oderate HAZARD PROBABILITY
L - Low
Frequent Likely Occasional Seldom Unlikely

s Catastrophic E E H H M
e
v Critical E H H M L
e
r
i
M arginal H M M L L
t
y Negligible M L L L L

Figure E-4. Risk-Assessment Matrix

STEP 3. DEVELOP CONTROLS AND DETERMINE RESIDUAL RISK

E-22. Step 3 is accomplished in two substeps: develop controls and make risk
decisions (Figures E-5 and E-6). Units develop controls and make risk
decisions during COA development, analysis, comparison, and approval as
part of the military decision-making process.

Substep A. Develop Controls (Figure E-5)

E-23. After assessing each hazard, leaders develop one or more controls that
either eliminate the hazard or reduce the risk (probability/severity) of a
hazardous incident. When developing controls, they consider the reason for
the hazard, not just the hazard itself.

Substep B. Determine Residual Risk (Figure E-6)

E-24. An essential element of the risk decision is determining if the risk is
justified. The commander must compare and balance the risk against mission
expectations. He or she alone decides if controls are sufficient and acceptable
and whether to accept the resulting residual risk. If he or she determines
that the risk level is too high, then he or she directs the development of
additional controls or alternate controls or modifies, changes, or rejects the
COA. A commander may place constraints on his or her subordinates that
restrict their freedom of action to accept risk in instances in which the risk
might imperil—
• His or her intent.
• His or her higher commander’s intent
• A critical capability of the unit.

E-5
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET PAGE 1 of 1

1. MSN/TASK : 2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED:
Insertion/Extraction END: 042200SEP97 041300SEP97

4. PREPARED BY: MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3

RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

13. C E
O F

VE L
VE L

LE U A
F

L
LE IA
N

L
E

T
T

D
S K NI

SK SI
R C

RI . I

RI RE
O T
11. HOW TO 12. HOW TO

6
L I

8.
V
5. HAZARDS 7. CONTROLS IMPLEMENT SUPERVISE S
E

EH En route altitude greater

Adverse Environment
- 0% Illumination
than 500 ft AGL De
- Complete Blackout
Ensure that crew has
ve
- Visibility During
current hazard map
NVDs will be used lo
Flight PC/AC will brief brown- p
- Brownout out procedures Co
Aircraft ramp tongue and
nt
Continuous Operations H
cargo door closed
ro
- Fatigue
Ensure that crew-rest
plan is adhered to ls
Unfamiliar Terrain H Ensure that crew has
- Flight Plan current photos/maps
- Landing Zone of LZ
Inadequate Planning EH Full rehearsal will be
Time conducted
9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE): 10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

LOW MODERATE HIGH EXTREMELY HIGH RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-5. Example of a Risk Management Worksheet—Develop Controls

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET PAGE 1 of 1

1. MSN/TASK : 2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED:
Insertion/Extraction END: 042200SEP97 041300SEP97
4. PREPARED BY: MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

13. C E
VE L

O F
LE IAL

LE UA
L

N
VE

F
T

K ID
SK NI

T E
IS S
RI . I

R RE

R C
11. HOW TO 12. HOW TO
6

O T
8.

5. HAZARDS 7. CONTROLS IMPLEMENT SUPERVISE L I

S V

EH En route altitude greater

E
Adverse Environment H
than 500 ft AGL
- 0% Illumination
Ensure that crew has
- Complete Blackout current hazard map Re Det
- Visibility During NVDs will be used si erm
Flight PC/AC will brief brown- du
- Brownout out procedures al ine
Aircraft ramp tongue and Ri
cargo door closed sk
Continuous Operations H Ensure that crew-rest M
- Fatigue plan is adhered to
Unfamiliar Terrain H Ensure that crew has M
- Flight Plan current photos/maps
- Landing Zone of LZ
Inadequate Planning EH Full rehearsal will be H
Time conducted
9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE): 10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

LOW MODERATE HIGH EXTREMELY HIGH COLONEL BATTISTE/BDE CDR

RANK/LASTNAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-6. Example of a Risk Management Worksheet—Determine Residual Risk

STEP 4. IMPLEMENT CONTROLS (FIGURE E-7)

E-25. Leaders and staffs integrate controls into SOPs, written and verbal
orders, mission briefings, and staff estimates. They must ensure that these
controls are conveyed through clear, simple execution orders and that all
levels understand them.

E-6
_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

E-26. Leaders must explain how supervisors will implement controls.

Examples of control implementation include—
• Conducting such implementations as rehearsals, ROC drills, and battle
drills.
• Maintaining communications between aircraft and armament
personnel.
• Conducting operations on the arm/dearm areas.
• Operating weapon systems.

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET PAGE 1 of 1

1. MSN/TASK : 2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED:

Insertion/Extraction END: 042200SEP97 041300SEP97
4. PREPARED BY: MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

13. C E

VE L
O
VE L

LE UA
L
LE IA

L
N F
T

D
SK NI

SK SI
T E
RI . I

RI R E
R C
11. HOW TO 12. HOW TO
6

O T

8.
5. HAZARDS 7. CONTROLS IMPLEMENT SUPERVISE L I
S V

EH En route altitude greater H Mission Brief

E
Adverse Environment
than 500 ft AGL
- 0% Illumination Rehearsals
Ensure that crew has
- Complete Blackout current hazard map

IMP
- Visibility During NVDs will be used Mission Brief
Flight PC/AC will brief brown-

LE M
- Brownout out procedures
Aircraft ramp tongue and Rehearsals

ENT
cargo door closed
Continuous Operations H Ensure that crew-rest M TACSOP
- Fatigue plan is adhered to
Unfamiliar Terrain H Ensure that crew has M Mission
- Flight Plan current photos/maps Brief
- Landing Zone of LZ Rehearsals
Inadequate Planning EH Full rehearsal will be H FRAGO
Time conducted
9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE): 10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

LOW MODERATE HIGH EXTREMELY HIGH COLONEL BATTISTE/BDE CDR

RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-7. Example of a Risk Management Worksheet—Implement

E-7
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

STEP 5. SUPERVISE AND EVALUATE (FIGURE E-8)

E-27. Leaders must supervise the execution of their orders.

1. Supervise
E-28. Leaders supervise mission rehearsal and execution to ensure that
standards and controls are enforced. Techniques may include spot checks,
inspections, situation reports and brief-backs, buddy checks, and close
supervision.
E-29. During the mission, leaders must continuously monitor controls to
ensure that these controls remain effective. Leaders must modify controls as
necessary. Leaders and individuals anticipate, identify, and assess new
hazards to implement controls. Leaders must continually assess variable
hazards such as fatigue, equipment serviceability, and the environment.
E-30. Leaders modify controls to keep risks at an acceptable level during all
operations. Leaders must continuously plan to ensure that controls emplaced
at the beginning of the mission apply to changes in the operation’s current
situation and to hazardous conditions. Leaders must ensure that performing
repetitive tasks does not cause soldiers to relax their vigilance. Leaders must
continuously check on controls put in place to reduce risks over a prolonged
period.

2. Evaluate
E-31. After a mission is completed, leaders and individuals evaluate how well
they executed the risk-management process. They must—
• Determine how to ensure that successes continue to the next mission.
• Capture and disseminate lessons learned so that others may benefit
from the experience.
• Consider the effectiveness of the risk assessment in identifying and
accurately determining the probability and severity of hazards that
resulted in mission degradation.
• Determine whether they accurately estimated the residual risk of each
hazard and the residual risk of the overall mission.
• Evaluate the effectiveness of each control in reducing or removing risk,
including whether controls were effectively communicated,
implemented, and enforced.
E-32. Leaders and individuals determine why some controls were ineffective
and what they must do if they encounter the hazard again. Units may have
to change a control or use a completely different control to mitigate a risk.
The application of risk management requires good judgment and intuitive
analysis born of confidence, experience, and situational awareness.

E-8
 _____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET PAGE 1 of 1

1. MSN/TASK : 2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED:
Insertion/Extraction END: 042200SEP97 041300SEP97
4. PREPARED BY: MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

E
13. C
O F

VE L
VE L

LE UA
L
F

LE IA
N

L
E

D
T

S K NI

SK SI
R C

RI . I

RI RE
O T
11. HOW TO 12. HOW TO

6
L I

8.
V
5. HAZARDS 7. CONTROLS IMPLEMENT SUPERVISE S
E

Adverse Environment EH En route altitude greater H Mission Brief

than 500 ft AGL Direct
- 0% Illumination

SU
Ensure that crew has Rehearsals Supv
- Complete Blackout

PE
current hazard map

RV
- Visibility During NVDs will be used Mission Brief

IS
Flight PC/AC will brief brown- Mission

E
- Brownout out procedures Updates
Aircraft ramp tongue and Rehearsals
cargo door closed
Continuous Operations H Ensure that crew-rest M TACSOP Direct Supv
- Fatigue plan is adhered to
Unfamiliar Terrain H Ensure that crew has M Mission Direct Supv
- Flight Plan current photos/maps Brief Mission
- Landing Zone of LZ Rehearsals Update
Inadequate Planning EH Full rehearsal will be H FRAGO Direct Supv
Time conducted
9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE): 10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

LOW MODERATE HIGH EXTREMELY HIGH COLONEL BATTISTE/BDE CDR

RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-8. Example of a Risk Management Worksheet—Supervise

TOOLS AND PITFALLS

E-33. Commanders use the risk-management process to assess the risks
associated with each unit mission. From this assessment, units develop
risk-reducing standard operating procedures. Pitfalls arise when units use
risk-management tools without adapting them to the factors of METT-T.
E-34. In an unchanging environment or static situation, units may find a
standardized risk-assessment card or checklist to be of some value in the
initial mission analysis and COA development. However, such a tool used
alone will probably not identify all hazards for every mission in a changing
operational environment. Units should continually strive to gain and
maintain situational awareness.
E-35. Completing the risk assessment alone and then failing to identify
effective controls usually results in a GO or NO-GO decision based on the
initial risk only.
E-36. If the risk assessment does not accurately identify the hazards and
determine the level of residual risk, the leader is likely to make his risk
decision based upon incomplete or inaccurate information.
E-37. The risk-management process provides reasonable controls to support
mission accomplishment without exposing the force to unnecessary residual
risk.

E-9
 Glossary
A
@ at
A attack
AA assembly area
A 2C 2 Army airspace command and control
AADS airspeed and direction sensor
AAR after-action review
ABCS airfield battlefield countermeasures and survivability
ABF attack by fire (position)
ABFC attack-by-fire (position) card
AC aircraft commander
A/C aircraft
acft aircraft
ACP air control point
acq acquisition
ACT air cavalry troop
ADA air defense artillery
ADI attitude direction indicator
ADL armament datum line
ADS Air Data Subsystem
ADSS Air Data Sensor Subsystem
adv advance
AF adjust fire
AGES Air-Ground Engagement System
AGL above ground level
AGM antitank guided missile
AH attack helicopter
AHGR attack helicopter gunnery range
AL Alabama
ALCA aircraft loader control assembly

Glossary-0
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

ALFGL automatic low-frequency gain limiting

ALSE aviation life support equipment
ALT airborne laser tracker
AM ante meridiem
AMC air mission commander
AMCCOM U.S. Army Armament, Munitions, and Chemical Command
AMC ORD at my command ordnance
AMC TGT at my command target
ammo ammunition
AMPS aviation mission planning station
AND alphanumeric display
AP armor piercing
APC armored personnel carrier
API armor-piercing incendiary
API-T armor-piercing incendiary—tracer
approx approximately
Apr April
APU auxiliary power unit
AQC aviator qualification course
AR Army regulation
ARCP aerial rocket control panel
ARCS aerial rocket control system
ARI Army restructuring initiative
ARM antiradiation missile
ARMD armed
ARNG Army National Guard
ARS Area Rocket Subsystem
ARTEP Army Training and Evaluation Program
ASE aircraft survivability equipment
ASET aircraft survivability equipment trainer
ASM alternate scoring method
ASO aviation safety officer
assy assembly
ATA air to air

Glossary-1
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

ATAC air-to-air combat

ATAS air-to-air Stinger
ATGM antitank guided missile
ATHS Automatic Target Handover System
atk attack
ATM aircrew training manual
ATS acquire-track-stow
attk attack
attn attention
ATWESS antitank weapons effects signature simulator
auto automatic
AVIM aviation intermediate maintenance
avn aviation
AVTR airborne videotape recorder
AVUM aviation unit maintenance
AWS Area Weapon System
AWSS Aerial Weapons Scoring System
AZ azimuth
B
BBC backup bus controller
BDA battle-damage assessment
bde brigade
BIT built-in test
BMD Russian combat vehicle, airborne
BMP Russian personnel carrier
bn battalion
BOT burst on target
BP battle position
BPC battle position card
BRDM Russian combat reconnaissance patrol vehicle
BRSIT boresight
BRT bright
BS boresight
BSS Ballistics Scoring Subsystem

Glossary-2
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

BTM battalion training model

BTR Russian personnel carrier
btry battery
B/W black on white
C
C Celsius
C&C command and control
C2 command and control
cal caliber
CALFEX combined arms live-fire exercise
CAQ cursor acquisition
CAS close air support
cav cavalry
CB circuit breaker
CBHK captive boresight harmonization kit
CCIP continuously computed impact point
CCM counter-countermeasures
C-COFT crew—conduct-of-fire training
CCP communication checkpoint
cdr commander
CDS Control Display Subsystem
CDU control display unit
CFT captive flight trainer
CG center of gravity
CGUN copilot gun
CH cargo helicopter
CHAN channel
CHANL channel
CL checklist
CM countermeasure
CMS combat mission simulator
CMSL copilot missile
co company
COA course of action

Glossary-3
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

COFT conduct-of-fire training

comp compensation
COMSEC communications security
cont control
CONUS continental United States
CONVERG convergence
coop cooperative
CP checkpoint
CPG copilot-gunner
CPO copilot-observer
CRT cathode ray tube
CS combat support
CSS computer scoring system; combat service support
CTC combined training center
CTT common task training
CVI combat vehicle identification
C/W caution/warning
CWEPT cockpit weapon and emergency procedures trainer
D
D diving
DA Department of the Army
DASE digital automatic stabilization equipment
DBS Doppler beam sharpening
DC direct current
deg degree
DEK data entry keyboard
DELVRY delivery
DGST door gunnery skills test
DIG digital image generator
dir direct
DOD Department of Defense
DODAC Department of Defense ammunition code
DODIC Department of Defense identification code
DOTDS Directorate of Training, Doctrine, and Simulation

Glossary-4
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

DP dual purpose
DS direct support
DSN defense switched network
DSS Detonation Scoring Subsystem
DTC data transfer cartridge
DTG date-time group
DTTP doctrine and tactics training plan
DTV day television
DVO direct-view optics
E
EA engagement area
EC electronic countermeasure
ECAS Enhanced Cobra Armament System
ECCM electronic counter-countermeasures
ECP engineering change proposal
EGI embedded GPS/INS
EL elevation
ELEC electrical
EMP electromagnetic pulse
EMR electromagnetic radiation
eng engagement
EOCM electro-optical countermeasures
EOD explosive ordnance disposal
EPS electronic power supply
EPU electronics processor unit
ETL effective translational lift
eval evaluation
F
F Fahrenheit
FA field artillery
FAA forward assembly area
FAB forward avionics bay
FAIL failure
FARM fuel, ammunition (cannon or machine gun), rockets, missiles

Glossary-5
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

FARP forward arming and refueling point

FASCAM family of scatterable mines
FCC fire control computer
FCP fire control panel
FCR fire control radar
FDC fire direction center
FD/LS fault detection/location system
FFAR folding-fin aerial rocket
FFE fire for effect
FHT field-handling trainer
FI (nonrated crew-member) flight instructor
FL flechette
flex flexible
FLIR forward-looking infrared
FLOT forward line of own troops
FLTR filter
FM field manual; frequency modulated
FOC focus
FOD foreign-object damage
FORSCOM United States Army Forces Command
FOV field of view
FP firing point
FPS feet per second
FRAGO fragmentary order
ft foot or feet
FTX field training exercise
FWS field weapon simulator
FXD fixed
FY fiscal year
G
G gravitational force
G3 assistant chief of staff (operations and plans)
G-COFT gunnery—conduct-of-fire trainer
GEN generator

Glossary-6
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

GHSS Gunner’s Helmet Sight Subsystem

GHz gigahertz
GND ground
GPC gun pitch cue, solid ring
GPCL/H-V gun pitch cue lines, horizontal and vertical
GPS Global Positioning System
GPU ground power unit
GTL gun-target line
G/VLLD ground or vehicular laser locator designator
GZN grid zone
H
HA holding area
HAD high action display
HARS Heading and Altitude Reference System
HDD heads-down display
HDM Hellfire dummy missile
HDU helmet display unit
HE high explosive
HEAT high-explosive antitank
HEDP high-explosive dual-purpose
HEI high-explosive incendiary
HEI-T high-explosive incendiary-tracer
HEI-T-SD high-explosive incendiary with tracer and self-destruct (feature)
HEPD high-explosive point detonating
HERO hazard of electronic radiation to ordnance
HF Hellfire
HFOV horizontal field of view
HGAP gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally
HGST helicopter gunnery skills test
HI high
HIGE hover-in-ground effect
HIMAG high magnification
HLFR Hellfire
HMD helmet-mounted display

Glossary-7
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

HMMWV high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle

HMX high-melting explosive
HO handover
HOD heads-out display
HOGE hover-out-of-ground effect
HQ headquarters
HRET horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
HRR high-range resolution
HSI horizontal situation indicator
HSS Helmet Sight Subsystem
ht height
HTA-3 an explosive consisting of HMX, TNT, and aluminum flake
powder
HTM Hellfire training missile
HTS hard target sensor
HUD heads-up display
H-V horizontal-vertical
hvy heavy
I
IAT image autotracking
IATF individual aircrew training folder
IAW in accordance with
ID identification
IDM improved data modem
IERW initial entry rotary wing
IFF identification friend and foe
IGE in-ground effect
IHADSS Integrated Helmet and Display Sight System
il illumination
ill illumination
ILS instrument landing system
IMUX interface multiplexer
in inch(es)
inbd inboard

Glossary-8
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

ind indicator
inf infantry
INS Inertial Navigation System
INU inertial navigation unit
IO instructor operator
IP instructor pilot
IR infrared
IRCCM infrared counter-countermeasures
IRIS infrared imaging seeker
ISP integrated systems processor
J
JAAT joint air attack team
JATO jet-assisted takeoff
K
KIAS knots indicated airspeed
km kilometer(s)
kt knot(s)
KTAS knots true airspeed
KVA kilovolt ampere
KW Kiowa Warrior
L
L left
LASS Laser Aim Scoring System
lat latitude
LAW light antitank weapon
lb pound(s)
LBHMM Longbow Hellfire modular missile
LBHMMS Longbow Hellfire Modular Missile System
LCT Longbow crew trainer
LD line of departure
LDNS Lightweight Doppler Navigation System
LEA launcher electronics assembly
LEU laser electronics unit
LFX live-fire exercise

Glossary-9
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

LGS Longbow ground station

LH left hand
LHG left hand grip
LHMMS Longbow Hellfire Modular Missile System
LMC linear motion compensator
LNCH launch
LO low
LOAL lock-on after launch
LOAL-DIR lock-on after launch-direct
LOAL-HI lock-on after launch-high
LOAL-LO lock-on after launch-low
LOBL lock-on before launch
LO MAG low magnification
LOS line of sight
LP listening post
L/R left/right
LRF laser range finder
LRF/D laser range finder/designator
LRSNCO laser range safety noncommissioned officer
LRSO laser range safety officer
LRU line replaceable unit
LRV laser range validator
LSR laser
LST laser spot tracker
lt light
LTL laser-target line
LTU laser transceiver unit
LWR lower
LZ landing zone
M
m meter(s)
M missile
MACOM major Army command
mag magnification

Glossary-10
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

MALF LT malfunction light

MAN manual
manl manual
MANPAD man-portable air defense
MANPADS Man-Portable Air Defense System
MAN TRK manual tracker
max maximum
med medium
MEDEVAC medical evacuation
METL mission-essential task list
METT-T mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops, and time available
MFD multifunction display
MFOV medium field of view
MG machine gun
mil milliradian(s)
MILES multiple integrated laser engagement system
min minute(s); minimum
MK mark
mm millimeter(s)
MMS mast-mounted sight
mod modification
MOI method of instruction
MOPP mission-oriented protective posture
MOS military occupational specialty
MP multipurpose
MPD multipurpose display
MPRC multipurpose range complex
MPS meters per second
MPSM multipurpose submunition
MPT-SD multipurpose tracer-self destruct
mR milliradian(s)
MRE meal, ready-to-eat
MRT minimum resolvable temperature
M/S meters per second

Glossary-11
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

M/SEC meters per second

MSL mean sea level
msl missile
msn mission
MSP mast sight processor
MTA moving target acquisition
MTI moving target indicator
MTOE modified table(s) of organization and equipment
MTP mission training plan
MUX multiplex
MV magnetic variation
mvng moving
MWO modification work order
N
N no
NA not applicable
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
nav navigation
NBC nuclear, biological, chemical
NCO noncommissioned officer
NCOIC noncommissioned officer in charge
NED north, east, and down
NFOW narrow field of view
NFZ no-fire zone
NG National Guard
NGB National Guard Bureau
no number
NOE nap of the earth
NORM normal
NSN national stock number
NTS next to shoot
NVD night vision device
NVG night vision goggles
NVS Night-Vision System

Glossary-12
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

O
OC observer-controller
OFS offset
OGE out-of-ground effect
OH observation helicopter
OIC officer in charge
OP observation post
OPFOR opposing forces
OPORD operations order
OPSEC operations security
OPTEMPO operational tempo
ORD operational requirement document
ORIDE override
ORT optical relay tube
OSET offset
OTL observer-target line
OUTBD outboard
OVRD override
P
P pilot
PBIT power-up built-in test
PC pilot in command
PD point detonating
PEN penetrate
PEN-M penetration in meters
PFZ priority fire zone
Ph probability of hit
PHS pilot helmet sight
PHSS Pilot Helmet Sighting System
PIM pulse interval modulation
PK probability of kill
PL precautionary landing; phase line; platoon leader
plt platoon
PLT/GNR pilot/gunner

Glossary-13
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

PM post meridiem
PMI premarksmanship instruction
PMSL pilot missile
P/N part number
PNVS Pilot’s Night Vision System
POI program of instruction
POL petroleum, oils, lubricants
POST passive optical seeker tracking
PPC performance planning card
pr pair
prac practice
PRF pulse repetition frequency
PRI primary
PRI-CHAN-TRACKING primary-channel-tracking
PRKT pilot rocket
PSI pilot’s steering indicator
psi pounds per square inch
PTA preterminal acquisition (mode)
PTT preterminal track (mode)
PTWS point target weapon system
PWR ON power on
Q
Q1 qualification on first attempt
Q2 qualification on second attempt
Q3 qualification on third attempt
QE quadrant elevation
qty quantity
quad quadruple
R
R range; ready
RAD ram air decelerator
R/A/G rockets/ATAS/guns
RAI remote attitude indicator
RAS rocket arming symbol

Glossary-14
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

RC remote control; resistance capacitance

RCD recorder
RCO range control officer
RCPU rocket control panel unit
RCS radar cross section
rd round
RDSS Rocket Detonation Scoring Subsystem
rdy ready
rec record
recon reconnaissance
REM remaining
req required
reqd required
RETS Remote Target System
RF radar frequency
RFD range finder designator
RFHO radar frequency handover
RH right hand
RHA rolled homogenous armor
RHE remote Hellfire electronics
RIPL ripple
rkt rocket
RL readiness level
RMI radio magnetic indicator
RMP reprogrammable microprocessor (Stinger)
RMS Rocket Management System
rnd round
RND REM rounds remaining
rng range
RNG-KM range-kilometers
ROC rehearsal of concept
ROC-V recognition of combat vehicles
ROE rules of engagement
RP red phosphorus

Glossary-15
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

RPG rocket-propelled grenade

rpl ripple
RPS revolutions per second
RRU rocket remote unit
RSO range safety officer
S
S stationary
S2 Intelligence Officer (U.S. Army)
S3 Operations and Training Officer (U.S. Army)
S4 Supply Officer (U.S. Army)
SAL semiactive laser
SAM surface-to-air missile
sec second(s); section
sel select
SERE survival, evasion, resistance, and escape
SEU sight electronics unit
SI nonrated crew-member standardization instructor
sig signal
SIGHT SEL sight selection switch
sim simulated
SITREP situation report
SK smokescreen
SKR seeker
SM submunition
sng single
SOF special operations forces
SOI signal operation instructions
SOP standing operating procedures
SP standardization instructor pilot
SPH spheroid
squad squadron
SSN social security number
SSU sight survey unit
ST store

Glossary-16
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

sta stationary
STAB stabilator
stad stadiametric
STANAG standardization agreement
stat stationary
STBY standby
std standard
STI stationary target indicator
STRAC Standards in Training Commission
STRICOM Simulation, Training and Instrumentation Command
STX situational training exercise
supv supervision
SYM symbology
sys system
T
T training
TA transfer alignment
TAA tactical assembly area
TACSOP tactical standing operating procedures
TADS Target Acquisition and Designation System
TAS true airspeed
TASC training aids support center
TBD to be determined
TBP to be published
TC training circular
TCB turret control box
TCP TOW control panel
TEA target-effect area
TEG target-engagement group
temp temperature
TEU TADS electronic unit
tgt target
TGT/NAV target/navigation
TIS thermal imaging system

Glossary-17
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TKR tracker
TM technical manual
tm team
TME training missile emulator
tng training
TNT trinitrotoluene (dynamite)
TOC tactical operations center
TOE table(s) of organization and equipment
TOF time of flight
TOW tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided (missile)
TP target practice
TPT target practice-tracer
TRADOC Training and Doctrine Command (U.S. Army)
TRAINDAT SET training data set
TRP target reference point
TRRAT GENTEXT training readiness rating general text
TRTG tactical radar threat generator
TSD tactical situation display
TSTT TADS selected task trainer
TT terminal track (mode)
TTA terminal track acquisition (mode)
TTP tactics, techniques, and procedures
TV television
TVS television sensor
U
UFTP unified field test program
UH utility helicopter
UHF ultra high frequency
U.S. United States (of America)
USAAVNC United States Army Aviation Center
USAF United States Air Force
USAR United States Army Reserve
USAREUR United States Army, Europe
USARPAC United States Army, Pacific

Glossary-18
__________________________________________________________________________________ Glossary

USR unit status report

UTM universal transverse Mercator
V
V airspeed or velocity in feet per second
V2 takeoff safety speed
VASI visual approach slope indicator
VFE maximum flap-extended speed
VFOV vertical field of view
VFR visual flight rules
VGAP gap in center of reticle, measured vertically
VHF very high frequency
VIP very important person
VMC visual meteorological conditions
VMC minimum control speed
VRET vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip
VRS video recording system
W
W width
w/ with
WAS weapons action switch
W/B white on black
W/E with equipment
WESTCOM United States Army Western Command
WFOV wide field of view
w/o without
WP weapons processor
wpn weapon
WR when ready
WRM width, range, mil
WR ORD when ready ordnance
WR TGT when ready target
WSS weapons select switch
wt width
WX weather

Glossary-19
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

X
X times (multiplication)
XMSN transmission
Y
Y yes
Z
Z zoom
ZFOV zoom field of view
ZSU Russian self-propelled antiaircraft gun

Glossary-20
 Bibliography
FM numbering is in transition to a new system. The first number shown below is the new or future number. The
second number, shown in parentheses, is the old or current number. If no new number appears, that publication
is slated to be superseded by a new publication or to be rescinded.

AR 5-13. Training Ammunition Management System. 20 December 1994.

AR 75-1. Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives. 23 April 2001.
AR 95-1. Flight Regulations. 1 September 1997.
AR 190-11. Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition and Explosives. 30 September 1993.
AR 220-1. Unit Status Reporting. 30 November 2001.
AR 310-25. Dictionary of United States Army Terms (Short Title: AD). 15 October 1983.
AR 310-50. Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes. 15 November 1985.
AR 350-1. Army Training. 1 August 1981.
AR 385-62. Regulations for Firing Guided Missiles and Heavy Rockets for Training, Target
Practice and Combat. 5 January 1977.
AR 385-63. Policies and Procedures for Firing Ammunition for Training, Target Practice
and Combat. 15 October 1983.
AR 385-64. U.S. Army Explosives Safety Program. 28 November 1997.
AR 600-106. Flying Status for Nonrated Army Aviation Personnel. 8 December 1998.
AR 700-19. U.S. Army Munitions Reporting Systems. 1 January 2001.
AR 702-6. Ammunition Stockpile Reliability Program (ASRP) and Army Nuclear Weapons
Stockpile Reliability Program (ANWSRP). 30 July 1993.
AR 725-50. Requisition, Receipt, and Issue System. 15 November 1995.
ARTEP 1-112-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Attack Helicopter Battalion. 18 April
2002.
ARTEP 1-113-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Utility Helicopter Battalion. 31 August
2001.
ARTEP 1-114-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Air Cavalry/Reconnaissance Squadron
and Troop. 30 March 2000.
DA Form 759. Individual Flight Record and Flight Certificate—Army. April 1998.
DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. 1 February 1974.
DA Form 2715. Unit Status Report. September 2001.

Bibliography-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

DA Pam 25-30. Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms. 1 January 2003.
DA Pam 40-501. Hearing Conservation Program. 10 December 1998.
DA Pam 75-5. List of Storage and Outloading Drawings for Ammunition. 15 November
1984.
DA Pam 350-38. Standards in Weapons Training. 1 October 2002.
DA Pam 710-2-1. Using Unit Supply System (Manual Procedures). 31 December 1997.
DA Pam 710-2-2. Supply Support Activity Supply System: Manual Procedures. 30 September
1998.
FM 1(FM 100-1). The Army. 14 June 2001.
FM 3-0(FM 100-5). Operations. 14 June 2001.
FM 3-01.80(FM 44-80). Visual Aircraft Recognition. 30 September 1996.
FM 3-04.100(FM 1-100). Army Aviation Operations. 21 February 1997.
FM 3-04.111(FM 1-111). Aviation Brigades. 27 October 1997.
FM 3-04.112(FM 1-112). Attack Helicopter Operations. 2 April 1997.
FM 3-04.113(FM1-113). Utility and Cargo Helicopter Operations. 12 September 1997.
FM 3-04.114(FM 1-114). Air Cavalry Squadron and Troop Operations. 1 February 2000.
FM 3-04.201(FM 1-203). Fundamentals of Flight. TBP.
FM 3-04.230(FM 1-230). Meteorology for Army Aviators. 30 September 1982.
FM 3-04.240(FM 1-240). Instrument Flying and Navigation for Army Aviators. 15 December
1984.
FM 3-04.301(FM 1-301). Aeromedical Training for Flight Personnel. 29 September 2000.
FM 3-04.564(FM 1-564). Shipboard Operations. 29 June 1997.
FM 3-05.70(FM 21-76). Survival. May 2002.
FM 3-07(FM 100-20). Stability Operations and Support Operations. 20 February 2003.
FM 3-20.95(FM 17-95). Cavalry Operations. 24 December 1996.
FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67). Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm. 31 January
2003.
FM 3-97.4(FM 90-4). Air Assault Operations. 16 March 1987.
FM 3-100.14(FM 100-14). Risk Management. 23 April 1998.
FM 4-25.11(FM 21-11). First Aid. 23 December 2002.
FM 4-30.1(FM 9-6). Munitions Support in the Theater of Operations. 20 March 1998.

Bibliography-2
______________________________________________________________________________ Bibliography

FM 4-30.13. Ammunition Handbook: Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Munitions

Handlers. 1 March 2001.
FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1). Operational Terms and Graphics. 30 September 1997.
FM 7-0(FM 25-100). Training the Force. 22 October 2002.
FM 7-1(FM 25-101). Battle Focused Training. 30 September 1990.
Fratricide: Reducing Self-Inflicted Losses. No. 92-4, April 1992. Center for Army Lessons
Learned (CALL), U.S. Army Combined Arms Command, Fort Leavenworth, KS
66027-7000, DSN 552-2255; website http://call.army.mil.
SB 708-4. (O) DOD Consolidated Ammunition Catalog Vols 1, 2, and 3. October 1992.
SB 742-1. Inspection of Supplies and Equipment Ammunition Surveillance Procedures. 1
June 1998.
STANAG 3117 (Edition Seven), Aircraft Marshaling Signals. 11 June 1999.
TB 9-1300-256. Ammunition: National Stock Numbers and Department of Defense Codes. 30
June 1999.
TB 9-1300-385. Munitions Restricted or Suspended. 1 September 2002.
TC 1-209. Aircrew Training Manual Observation Helicopter, OH-58D Aviator/Aeroscout
Observer. 9 December 1992.
TC 1-210. Aircrew Training Program Commander’s Guide to Individual and Crew
Standardization. 3 October 1995.
TC 1-211 Aircrew Training Manual for Utility Helicopter, UH-1. 9 December 1992.
TC 1-212 Aircrew Training Manual for Utility Helicopter, UH-60/EH-60. 8 March 1996.
TC 1-213 Aircrew Training Manual for Attack Helicopter, AH-1. 9 December 1992.
TC 1-214. Aircrew Training Manual for Attack Helicopter, AH-64. 20 May 1992.
TC 25-8. Training Ranges. 25 February 1992.
TM 1-1520-236-10. Operator’s Manual for Army Model AH-1F Attack Helicopter. 26
January 2001.
TM 1-1520-238-10. Operator’s Manual for Helicopter, Attack, AH 64-A Apache. 31 August
1994.
TM 1-1520-248-10. Operator’s Manual for Army OH-58D Helicopter. 15 November 2001.
TM 1-1520-251-10. Operator’s Manual for Helicopter, Attack, AH-64D Longbow Apache.
29 March 2002.
TM 3-4240-280-10. Operator's Manual for Mask, Chemical-Biological: Aircraft, ABC-M24
and Accessories and Mask, Chemical-Biological, Tank, M25A1 and Accessories. 15
March 1988.

Bibliography-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TM 9-1005-224-10. Operator’s Manual for Machine Gun, 7.62-mm, M60 W/E and Machine
Gun, 7.62-mm, M60D W/E. 2 April 1998.
TM 9-1005-262-13. Operator’s, Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance
Manual for Armament Subsystem, Helicopter, 7.62-mm Machine Gun Mounts: Door
Mounted, Lightweight, Model M23; Door Mounted, Lightweight, Model M24; Ramp
Mounted, Lightweight, Model M41; and Window Mounted, Lightweight, Model M144. 29
December 1986.
TM 9-1005-262-23P. Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Repair Parts and
Special Tools List for Armament Subsystem Helicopter, 7.62-mm Machine Gun Mounts:
Door Mounted, Lightweight, Model M23; Door Mounted, Lightweight, Model M24;
Ramp Mounted, Lightweight, Model M41; and Window Mounted, Lightweight, Model
M144. 29 December 1986.
TM 9-1300-200. Ammunition, General. 3 October 1969.
TM 43-0001-27. Army Ammunition Data Sheets for Small Caliber Ammunition. 29 April
1994.
TM 43-0001-28. Army Ammunition Data Sheets for Artillery Ammunition: Guns, Howitzers,
Mortars, Recoilless Rifles, Grenade Launchers and Artillery Fuzes. 28 April 1994.
TM 43-0001-30. Army Ammunition Data Sheets for Rockets Systems Rocket Fuzes Rocket
Motors. 1 December 1981.
TM 55-1520-234-10. Operator's Manual for Army Model AH-1S (Mod) Helicopter. 17
November 1976.
TM 743-200-1. Storage and Materials Handling. 15 January 1958.

Bibliography-4
 Index
References are to paragraph number except for illustrations, which are listed by figure or table
numbers.

A 3-66, 3-66, 3-67, Figure preparing for mission,

3-2 6-153
acquisition, target, A-19, A-94
– A-96 ATWESS, 3-15 run-up, 6-160
adjustment, fire, A-64 – A-69 AWSS, 1-24, 3-15, 3-17, 3-55 upon mission receipt,
– 3-65, Table 3-1 6-152
advanced tables, B-20 – B-29
commander’s assessment, 2-1
aerial
B – 2-7, 2-26
rocket control system firing
backscatter, 5-73 – 5-80, 5- 92, communications
procedures. See ARCS.
Figure 5-20, Table 5-10 crew, 6-92 – 6-103
search techniques, 6-40 –
6-44 ballistic scoring subsystem, lines of, 6-114 – 6-121
3-58, 3-59 conditions
weapons scoring system,
3-55 – 3-65 ballistics, out-of-trim, horizontal,
AGES, 1-3, 3-54 aerial, 4-16 – 4-34 4-32, 4-33
AHGR, 3-66, 3-67 exterior, 4-9 – 4-15 out-of-trim, vertical, 4-32,
interior, 4-1 – 4-8 4-34
aiming points, 4-34, 4-45, 4-53,
4-59, 4-65, A-61, Figure A-9 terminal, 4-35 – 4-44, 4-64 surface, 4-42
air combat weaponeering, 7-42 bipod firing, A-12, A-13 confirmation, 6-37, 6-38, 6-65,
– 7-57 6-117
boresighting, 3-43, 3-48, 4-5,
aircraft, 4-48, 7-15 – 7-18 considerations
emergency plan, 3-37, burnout, tracer, 5-3, A-58, A-66 ballistic, Apache-specific,
3-40, 3-47 4-49 – 4-72
burst on target, 7-19, 7-25 –
mil values, 6-78 – 6-90, 7-28, A-53 safety, 4-50
Tables 6-4 – 6-12 CPG, 6-41, 6-42, 6-71, 6-85,
air resistance 6-86, 6-115, 6-128
C
drag, 4-10, 4-12, 4-55 crew communication, 6-92 –
call for fire, 6-19, 6-134 –
6-103
air-to-air Stinger, 5-119 – 6-146, Figures 6-1 – 6-3
5-127, Figure 5-35, Figure crew search, 6-38, 6-39, 6-50,
CAS, 3-15
5-36, Table 5-15 6-57
C-COFT, 2-38, 2-40, 2-41,
alibi fires, B-19 techniques, 6-45 – 6-49
Table 2-1
angle of impact, 4-44, Figure crew techniques
center of gravity, rocket, 4-31
4-7 firing, 7-19 – 7-28
checks
angles, lead, 4-62, 4-69, Table burst on target, 7-19, 7-25
4-2 before mission receipt,
6-149 – 6-151 mil relation method, 7-27
angular rate error, 4-23, 4-61 recognition method, 7-28
communication, 6-156,
ARCS, 5-29, 5-44, 5-45 6-161 – 6-167 crew warfighting
attack helicopter crew, 6-159 contributing factors, 6-10 –
gunnery range, 3-28, 3-29, final, 6-154 – 6-158 6-15
3-31, 3-44 – 3-47, 3-50, fratricide prevention, 6-1 –
precombat, 6-147, 6-148
6-36

Index-1
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

situational awareness, 6-1 A-42, A-75, A-109, H

– 6-9 Figure A-1
hand signals, 3-44, Figure 3-1
control fundamentals, A-51
helicopter door gunnery
D – A-53
training strategy, A-1 –
DODAC, 5-8, 5-19, 5-24 modes, 7-2 – 7-7, 7-12,
A-50
7-29 – 7-41
dispersion, 4-7, 4-8, 4-20, 4-21, tactics, techniques, and
4-45, 4-47, 4-48, 4-51, 4-60, types of, 7-1
procedures, A-51 –
4-65 FLIR, 6-20, 6-26, 6-45, 6-48, A-74
boresight, 4-48 6-85, 6-86, 6-88, 6-89,
advanced table tactics,
Tables 6-4 – 6-11
sights, 4-47 techniques, and
fratricide prevention, 6-1 – 6-36 procedures, A-75 –
vibrations, 4-45, 4-46
doctrine/tactics, A-105
DODIC, 5-47, 5-51 – 5-55,
techniques, and advanced tables and
5-61, 5-62, Table 5-5, Table
procedures, 6-18 – 6-24 range training, A-106 –
5-6
training, 6-17, 6-25 – 6-31, A-117
drift
6-34 Hydra-70 (2.75-inch) rocket,
projectile, 4-13, 4-14, 4-26, 5-25, Table 5-5, Table 5-6
organization, 6-32
4-56, 4-58, Figure 4-1
materiel solutions, 6-33,
6-34 I
E
leader and soldier IGE, 4-18, 4-21, 4-60
effect development, 6-35,
IHADSS, 4-62, 4-69, 4-70
horizontal plane 6-36
gyroscopic, 4-13 fundamentals, fire control, A-51
– A-53 K
port-starboard, 4-26
relative wind, 4-7, 4-20, fuzes, 5-21, 5-22, 5-25 – 5-31, Kentucky Windage, 7-28, 7-43
4-24, 4-27, 4-32 – 4-34 5-35 – 5-41, 5-43 – 5-46,
target, 2-18, 2-53, 2-72, 5-120, Figure 5-7 L
2-76, 2-77, 2-92, 2-93 laser-off operations, 6-91
vertical plane gyroscopic, G live fire, 2-3, 2-7, 2-14, 2-26,
4-27, 4-28 G-COFT, 2-38, 2-40, Table 2-1 2-38 – 2-41, 2-43 – 2-47,
emergency ground hand signals, 3-44, 2-50, 2-51, 2-55, 2-56, 2-60,
plan, aircraft, 3-37, 3-40, Figure 3-1 2-62 – 2-64, 2-97, Table 2-1
3-47 gunnery LOAL, 5-65, 5-68, 5-71, 5-75.
estimation, range, A-54 – A-56, 5-78, 5-109, 5-111, 5-114,
skills test (HGST), 2-1,
A-60, Figure A-1 5-116, Figures 5-11 – 5-16,
2-39, Table 2-1
Figure 5-21, Figure 5-25,
ETL, 4-7 aerial weapons scoring Table 5-10, Table 5-12,
system, 1-24, 3-15, Table 5-14
F 3-17, 3-55 – 3-65, Table
LOBL, 5-57, 5-71, 5-73, 5-75,
3-1
facilities requirements 5-77, 5-80, 5-85, 5-103,
program, 1-1, 1-2, 1-4, 5-105, 5-109, 5-111, 5-112,
construction, 3-21 1-10, 1-25 5-116, Figure 5-9, Figure
preplanning, 3-20 standards, 1-1, 1-4 – 1-9, 5-10, Figure 5-21, Figure
fin-stabilized projectiles, 4-29 – 1-14, 1-18 5-25, Figure 5-28, Table
4-34 training strategy, 1-1 – 1-3, 5-13, Table 5-14
fire 1-7 logistic requirements, 3-27
adjustment, A-64 – A-69 gravity LRF/D, 2-93
commands, 6-19, 6-65, center of, 4-31 LRSNCO, 3-39
6-94, 6-104 – 6-113, LRSO, 3-39
6-122 – 6-133, A-36 –

Index-2
 Index

M pilot, instructor, 1-12, 1-26 score sheet, 2-98 – 2-100,

PIM, 5-55 – 5-60, Table 5-7, Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3
map method, 6-71
Table 5-8 readiness reporting, 1-16 –
master gunner, 1-6, 1-25 –
plan, aircraft emergency, 3-37, 1-24
1-27
3-38, 3-40, 3-47 realistic training, 3-7 – 3-14
mil setting
PNVS, 6-85, 6-88, Table 6-4, relative wind effect, 4-32 – 4-34
range table, Table 6-2
Tables 6-6 – 6-8 remote call for fire 6-135, 6-136
mil values
port-starboard effect, 4-26 remote Hellfire missile firing,
aircraft, 6-78 – 6-90,
projectile 6-134
Tables 6-4 – 6-12
drift, 4-13, 4-14, 4-26, requirements, range
mil determination
4-56, 4-58, Figure 4-1 equipment, 3-22, 3-23
AH-64, 6-80 – 6-89
fin-stabilized, 4-16, 4-29 – logistic, 3-27
OH-58D, 6-90 4-34
OIC, 3-29, 3-33 – 3-36
missiles, 5-48 – 5-127 jump, 4-27, 4-28, 4-63,
personnel, 3-24 – 3-26
modes of fire, 7-2 – 7-7, 7-29 – Figure 4-4
7-41 responsibilities, personnel,
spin-stabilized, 4-16, 4-24
duties, 3-33 – 3-43
MPRC, 3-51, 3-52, 3-54 – 4-28
rocket, 2.75-inch, 5-25, 5-26,
propellant force, 4-30
Table 5-5, Table 5-6, 7-11 –
N 7-14, 7-44 – 7-46, Table 7-3
NOE, 3-12, 4-44, 6-43 R rotor down-wash error, 4-17 –
nuclear, biological, chemical. radio 4-22
See applicable aircraft ATM. operator, 3-40 RSO, 3-24, 3-37
range
O determination, 6-66 – 6-90 S
officer in charge, 3-24, 3-29, equipment requirements, safety
3-33 – 3-38, 3-41 – 3-43 3-22, 3-23 range, 2-24
OGE, 4-20, 4-21, 4-60 facilities requirements, firing, 3-45, 3-46
operations order, 3-8 3-20
ground, 3-44
operational requirement, range, layout, 3-48 – 3-67
officer, range, 3-24,
3-15 logistic requirement, 3-27 3-37
master gunner, 3-4, 3-5, scoring criteria, 2-71 – 2-76
P 3-10, 3-24, 3-38, 3-42,
sighting
personnel requirements, 3-24 – 3-62, 3-63, 3-68
range layout
3-26 OIC requirements, 3-29,
considerations, 3-48 –
phraseology 3-33 – 3-36
3-50
adjust fire commands, operation, 3-28 – 3-32
situational awareness, 6-1 –
6-104, 6-113, 6-130 – personnel requirements, 6-9, A-4
6-132 3-24 – 3-26
standards
alert terminology, 6-123 realistic, 3-7 – 3-14
weapons training, 1-28 –
movement commands, requirements, 3-1 – 3-32 1-30
6-125 safety, 3-3, 3-9, 3-11, STRAC
target identification, 6-126 3-15, 3-24, 3-29, 3-33,
introduction, 1-28, 1-30
target location, 6-124 3-35, 3-37 – 3-39, 3-43
– 3-47 resources, 2-55
weapon effect, 6-129
safety officer, 3-24, 3-37 strategy training, 1-1 – 1-3
weapon engagement,
6-128 scheduling, 3-16 – 3-32
weapon selection, 6-127

Index-3
FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

T wind effect, relative, 4-32 –

4-34
tables, introduction of
advanced, 2-5, 2-7, 2-30,
2-51, 2-53, 2-57, 2-60, Y
2-61, Table 2-1 yaw, 4-12, 4-27, 4-28, 4-55,
gunnery, 1-10 – 1-15 4-62
TADS, 2-31
target
acquisition, 6-26, 6-37 –
6-65
classification, 6-61 – 6-64
detection challenges, 6-56
effect standards, B-30 –
B-46
engagement factors, 7-49
– 7-57
location, 6-57 – 6-60,
6-104, 6-107, 6-116,
6-124, 6-135, 6-140
signatures, 6-40, 6-44,
6-50 – 6-55
trainer, unit, 1-12
training
pregunnery, 2-7, 2-14 –
2-26
realistic, 3-7 – 3-14
strategy, 1-1 – 1-3, 1-7
trajectory shift, 4-25, 4-26,
4-62, Figure 4-3
TSTT, 2-31, 2-32

V
vertical plane gyroscopic effect,
4-27, 4-28

W
warheads, 5-25, 5-27 – 5-42,
5-44, 5-45, 5-47, 5-48, 5-54,
5-55, 5-62, 5-63, 5-103,
5-120, Figure 5-5, Figure
5-6, Table 5-4
weapon
terminology and
information, 7-8 – 7-18
weapons system engagement
ranges, 4-50, 4-51, 7-43 –
7-48

Index-4
 FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140)
14 JULY 2003

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

JOHN M. KEANE
General, United States Army
Acting Chief of Staff

Official:

JOEL B. HUDSON
JOEL B. HUDSON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0318402

DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army, Army National Guard, and U. S. Army Reserve: To be distributed

in accordance with the initial distribution number 110716, requirements for
FM 3-04.140.
PIN: 080897-000